Home

seisan - Centro de Geociencias ::.. UNAM

Contents

1. KEYWORD E EE SC EE EES hares Eat ans d BAD STATION Station not used for mag relation BER BAD STATION Station not used for mag relation XXX BAD STATION Station not used for mag relation BER AGAGA Magnitude type and agency new mag XNEW AGRE Mag type agency a b for new mag CBER 1 0 2 0 AGRE Mag type agency a b for new mag BBER T0 22 0 AGRE Mag type agency a b for new mag SBER 1 0 2 0 AGREL Mag type agency a b for new mag WBER 10 2 10 SCREENOUT Header line printed each event AG_TYP_COF Mag type for corr dist coff LNAO 0 002 6 26 Explosion filtering EXFILTER The program EXFILTER is used to identify probable explosions in a catalog of seismic events Man made seismic events like quarry blasts mining explosions and other explosions show a certain distribution in time and space Therefore the method of explosion identification here is based on normalizing the time of day distribution of seismic event occurrence as a function of area The program works on the following principle Areas where explosions occur are defined If an event is located in one of these areas with a magnitude below a given maximum magnitude with a depth less than a given maximum depth within a given time of day interval and within a given year interval it is identified and marked as probable explosion The areas are defined by polygons of any shape For definition of the filter areas a list of mine locatio
2. AP oP d oP FH FH Fh Ol ol dp oP dp oP d SUI BE HYA KMY ODD ODD1 BLS BLS1 ESG EGD KTKI NSS D D A Di component component component component component component component component ANHORMSAE ANNNNNNANNNNNNNNNNNNNNNnNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNWN WWWW WWW Ww 157 AUTOSIG AUTOSIG is a program to perform some automatic processing The program includes routines for P phase picking determination of signal duration amplitude determination determination of spectral parameters Ottemdller 2003 and determination of distance type local teleseismic noise The program can still do with improvement The input to the program can be either a parametric Nordic file with one or several events or waveform files In both these cases the output is written to the autosig out file Additional output files are autosig trace and autosig err which will help to find potential problems Alternatively the program can also be started from EEV the output is then directly written to the S file The input parameters are defined in the file autosig par which is located either in the DAT or the working directory Following are descriptions of the automatic processing routines P phase picking The phase picking is based on changes in the STA LTA ratio A band pass filter can be specified The routine gives options to enhance the changes in the signal before computing the STA LTA rati
3. 19880602011001 including from or to the second 198806020110 including from or to the minute 1988060201 including from or to the hour 19880602 including from or to the day 198806 including from or to the month 1988 including from or to the year BLANK only used as end date means to end of month Note that the end time is inclusive this means that e g 198806 includes all of June 1988 Thus most programs will work from any given date time to any other given date time Programs that work directly on the S files in the database e g COLLECT can work with any time interval in which the database structure has been created THERE IS NO REQUIREMENT THAT THERE IS DATA IN THE INDIVIDUAL MONTHLY DIRECTORIES ONLY THAT THEY EXIST There are usually 4 options for database either the standard base often by default the user s own subset of the standard base an INDEX file or S files in local directory or another database If the user has his own database specified by an INDEX file the event ID s must be in that INDEX file Since the index file gives complete file name of event files the index file can work on a subset of the main database Note that most of the programs are used as stand alone programs disregarding the database structure If one for example prefers to have all events gathered in one file rather than split into many files and directories most programs will therefore work 4 10 Graphics in SEISAN Most
4. SEISAN THE EARTHQUAKE ANALYSIS SOFTWARE FOR WINDOWS SOLARIS LINUX and MACOSX Version 8 1 1993 09 29 2228 26S TEST__014 Plot start time 1993 929 22 29 28 837 1993 929 2225 800 18 066 76 451 6 8 PDEG25 6 3BPDE 6 2SPDE6 2WGS x LISA BZ 2 LSA BN 3 LSA BE Jens Havskov and Lars Ottemdller Editors 1 Department of Earth Science University of Bergen All gaten 41 5007 Bergen Norway Phone 47 5558 3414 Fax 47 5558 3660 E mail jens geo uib no seismo geo uib no 2 British Geological Survey Murchison House West Mains Road Edinburgh UK E mail mailto ot bgs ac uk mailto August 2005 List of contents 1 INTRODUCTION RE 1 Tel Latest Chah GiS eege Eege ee EE 1 1 2 Information about SEISAN online eccecsssscesseeseeesteeeenssseneeneseeenesaeseensseeneeneesenaasaenneaesnesaeeeeaeeesneseeeensseeeaeas 3 2 STRUCTURE OF SEISA E 4 2 1 Dlteehot leese ees 4 2 2 The EE 4 2 2 1 Phase data and hypocenters the REA directory AA 5 2 2 2 Waveform data the WAV CireCtory cceccceceeeeseceeeceesceeseeeaeecaeecaeeeaeecaeecaeecaeecaeeseaeseaesaecieteneeereeeneeereas 6 2 2 2 Continuous waveform data EE 8 2 3 File types used With SEISAN scsccessssseeeseessenseeeeneeaeseeseeseeneeaesesaeeeeseuaeseenaeeesassaeseenaeaesneneneenessenaeaeenenaeseeaas 8 2 4 Upper and lower CaSe scescseeceseeeeeeseeeneseensneeeeseesenseneeneneesenseenseeenesenseeesneeeeseesseusneeeeseesenseeeeedenssedenee
5. 2 Foo gz 3 KMY sHZ v 4 SUE SHZ v 5 BER SHZ V 6 EGD sHZ V ASK SHZ V opp1 SHZ HELP Prev Page Next Page Replot Apply Replot Reset M dei Amplitude Scale Mi de p counts Laaf Hight2 a I e p s Lage Set Phase Pick Del Ame Band Pass Filter None None Time 11 26 26 02 1 KMY SHZ HELP Prev Channel Next Channel Replot Apply Replot Reset Figure 9 Plotting window Single trace mode The steps to plot a particular earthquake selected from the list are 1 Select a desired earthquake from the list by clicking the left button of the mouse on it Figure 5 2 Press the lt Plot gt button 3 A new dialog box for the selection of the channels to be plotted is shown Figure 10 then click the 47 lt Plot gt button fe Selection of channels to be plotted Si ZS SE Select None V 1 kono BYN V 2KONO Beve V 3KONO eyz V 4Foo SZ V 5FOO SN V 6FOO SE V 7BER SZ V BEGD SZ M 9ASK SZ MV 10086 sz M 11086 SN MV 12086 SE V 13HYA SZ M 144HYA SN M 15HYA SE MV 16MOL SZ V 17MOL SN JY 18MOL SE M 9mo AZ M 20SUE SZ M 21SUE SN V 22SUE SE V 23SUE AZ JW 24SUE AN JY 25SUE AE Vv 22pLss Sz M 27BLSSSN JW 28BLSSSE M au sz Mok sn zl DOWNLOAD CANCEL PLOT Figure 10 Selection of channels Filtering one several channels 1 Select the low corner frequency of the Band Pass filter select none if a High Pass filter is desired from the combo
6. velocity model stalist elev station list The inversion tool is available from ftp beagle ceri memphis edu pub pujol JHD http Awww orfeus eu org links softwarelib htm 6 28 Analysis of volcanic earthquakes 212 By Brian Baptie BGS Background An important part of volcanic seismology and the seismic monitoring of active volcanoes is the correct recognition of the different types of seismic event generated by the volcanic activity The principal event types include volcano tectonic events caused by shear or tensile failure of rocks long period events generated by a volumetric source in a liquid hybrid events and volcanic tremor To be of value for volcanic monitoring any database of seismic events should include the type or sub class of individual events This should allow users to then extract phase and location information over a selected time period for individual event types and calculate hourly and daily rates of event Simple histogram plots showing the distribution of subclasses over time can be generated with the program VOLCSTAT Unix only Initialization The user should create a text file in the DAT directory called VOLCANO DEF an example is already in the directory The format of this file will be one line of text 80A followed by successive lines with the format i2 1x 6A 1X 40a for number sub class code and description An example of the file is shown below Comments are preceded with 1 Current volcan
7. waveform out with the seismic traces as input data is available in the current directory If the program is invoked directly this file has to be created before using mulplt selecting a window and creating the waveform out file In general it is more useful to start the FK program from MULPLT since the input file needs to be created by mulplt The result of the fk analysis can be saved to the S file The steps are start MULPLT select channels and a time window 215 use option fk to start FK program this option creates file waveform out and starts FK program accept maximum or pick value with mouse The options in FK are R Redo Repeat fk analysis with different parameters M Mouse m or mouse click to pick values different from maximum S Save and quit save picked value to file and quit Q Quit quit use option save and quit to save your result so that it can be used by MULPLT back in MULPLT pick phase on the first trace used to store back azimuth and apparent velocity in the S file in case of teleseismic events the apparent velocity can be used for location the fk analysis has to be done on the P phase Note The FK program only works by default with station file STATIONO HYP If coordinates are in e g STATIONt HYP the user will be asked to specify another station file letter in this case f Example Input Enter lower frequency lt ENTER gt for default
8. 20 30 40 50 KI 10 SUE 95 26 170 23 H 19 M 25 TP 24 2 TC 86 2 WIN 15 0 START 2 0 2468 a D 0 D 0 D 30 D D D 10 2 a 40 D D w 20 30 D F 1 0 Q 0 CO 0 96 BNG 0 F 20 Q 211 CO 32 S N 2 Fe40 Q 232 CO 67 S N 4 120 4 106 0 10 2 a D 0 0 10 2 a D 0 0 10 2 D D 0 F 8 0 Q 1066 CO 31 S N 9 102 171 6 18 Merge events near in time ASSOCI The program will check if two events are close together in time and merge the events if requested This is partly an alternative to use append in EEV The program asks for maximum time difference between events to associate The user will then be asked if events should be physically associated or not The program is useful when merging a large number of events The program has two alternatives for merging 1 Merge events in same data base One event is compared to the next event in the same data base If they are close enough in time the two events are merged and the program moves on to the next event If 3 events are close in time only the 2 first are merged In order to also merge the third the program has to be run again 2 Merge events from a file into the data base This option makes it possible to merge from another data base use SELECT or COLLECT to create a file without first completely mixing the two The event from the file will be merged with as many files from the data base as fit the time difference criteria So e g 2 events from the data base can both get the same even
9. CAL System calibration files INF Documentation and information SUP Supplementary files and programs In the following the above subdirectories will mostly be called directories to avoid always referring to SEISMO All directories use capital letters however this only makes a difference in the Unix versions The directory structure is used as a tree like structure for quick access to individual files in the REA directory which therefore will appear as a simple database to the user The next section is a description of the database directories the other directories are described in section 7 Figure 1 shows the tree structure of SEISAN Figure 1 Structure of SEISAN Note that BERGE under WAV is optional and DELET not shown under REA has a similar directory structure as e g NAO SEISMO REA DAT CAL WAV BERGE NAO KONO BERGE NAO 1996 CAT 1995 1996 01 02 12 01 02 12 OI 12 2 2 The database The database of SEISAN consists of the two directories REA and WAV The REA directory and its subdirectories contain readings and source information while all waveform data is normally in the directory WAV see 2 2 2 with no subdirectories Optionally WAV can also be divided into a similar
10. High_accuracy Setting it to 1 0 enables high accuracy operation This parameter affects programs MULPLT HYP and UPDATE HYPO71_OFFSET Apply offset in degree to station and epicenter locations required for example when not all stations are either east or west of O longitude Map_lat_border map Jon border These parameters are used with command MAP and GMTMAP in EEV which plot a map centered on current epicenter The two parameters give the distance in degrees from the epicenter that the map should be plotted If both set to 0 EEV will ask for the parameters Merge_waveform The network code given to waveform files merged with MULPLT when running from EEV See MULPLT and EEV Also used in WAVETOOL and SEISEI Max 5 characters Spectral_geo_depths and herkij_distance See MULPLT spectral section for explanation Parameters used to calculate geometrical spreading Reg_keep_auto If flag set to 1 0 keep automatic pics when registering event from EEV Text_print Printer command used to print an S file from EEV Waveform base Name of waveform data base to be searched Normally this is a 1 5 letter data base name The name must be written as shown above under Par1 Not needed for the default data base Waveform_dirs The complete path to directories where the system should look for waveform files Output_dir Output Directory for SEISAN commands results Default Init_Limgmap file File name of the initial map represented as
11. P f reconcile an additional attenuation term which may be related to near surface loss of energy where kappa is a high frequency decay factor Singh et al 1982 Input file for CRIATT 198 The standard input file for the CRIATT program can be created by modifying the example input file A total of 23 parameters provide the necessary input for calculating the attenuation tables which is based on equation 18 described earlier The user should define the magnitude and the distance limits It is important to note here that some combinations of parameters may result in O values for large distances in the table which creates problems for the CRISIS99 program In order to avoid this the distance ranges are set to Rmin lt 10 km CRISIS99 requires one digit only and Rmax lt 500 km Usually the regional attenuation term and the site factor are the most critical factors in the definition of a f The effect of the high frequency decay factor can only be seen when the combination of the kappa parameters kappaO and kappa are chosen correctly e g increasing kappa1 with kappa0O kept constant would result in low ground motion values An example input file is included in the DAT directory with the file name criatt inp Output file from CRIATT The output of the CRIATT program is a file containing the attenuation tables for the selected spectral ordinates i e as a default only PGA corresponding to a period of 0 005 sec is computed For each
12. The ARCFETCH and RT_SEIS programs both part of the RefTek software package have to be installed see RefTek documentation and the PATH variable set to include the directory where the programs are stored It is assumed that the RefTek data archive exists and that the user is familiar with the content of the archive The archive content can be shown with the command ARCINFO To test that the program is installed correctly open the Windows command tool from the menu or by selecting Start Run cmd and type ARCSEI lt RETURN gt The definition file arcsei def The purpose of the definition file is to set some parameters needed to run ARCSEI however the program also works without The arcsei def file can either be stored in the seismo DAT directory or the current working directory The program first checks in the current directory The arcsei def file should be adjusted to the user s set up before ARCSEI is started The parameters are ARCHIVE The path of the RefTek data archive can also be entered manually at run time OUTPATH The directory in which the SEISAN files are to be stored The default is the current directory MERGE Select if SEISAN files from several stations for the same time interval should be merged Y or not N NETWORK_CODE Network code used in case SEISAN files are merged CHANNEL Data channel in RefTek archive consisting of the unit stream and channel unit stream channel The can be use
13. The ratios that can be used are SV P either direct or refracted waves SH P and SV SH both direct waves only where P is the P wave read on a vertical component SV is the S wave amplitude read on a vertical or radial component SH is the S wave read on the transverse component FOCMEC applies the free surface correction but assumes a constant vp vs and the same Q for P and S waves and thus the ratios are not corrected for possible difference in attenuation or geometrical spreading SV amplitude and 161 phase change rapidly around the critical angle and should not be used at those angles see INF focmec pdf for details The program makes a grid search and finds how many polarities fit each possible solution All solutions with less than a given number of wrong polarities and or amplitude ratios within given error limits are then written out and can be plotted With a cursor the user can then select the preferred solution which can be stored in the input file or the database The program is intended to work from within EEV option F however it can also work independently see below The program uses an input file called focmec inp This is a Nordic format file The angle of incidence is put in column 58 60 format I3 although from version 8 onwards this information is part of the S file Direct waves have angle gt 90 and refracted arrivals angle lt 90 degrees If the angle is gt 90 the polarity is plotted at an azimuth 180 If the pr
14. 0 005 31 51 52 53 56 57 58 59 60 61 66 Max degs of freedom Set to 3 for determining origin time and hypocenter set to 2 for fixed depth solution depth on phase headers 2 fix all events to starting depth in STATIONO HYP 1 to fix all hypocenters to value on phase headers 0 to fix hypocenters and origin times to values on phase headers D 3 0 Magnitude of parameter change for convergence D 0 05 Minimum spread to normalize residuals D 0 1 Bisquare weighting width D 4 685 RMS residual low limit for bisquare weighting D 0 0 Maximum number of increases in damping before fixing depth D 10 0 Least squares errors 0 0 damped least squares errors 1 0 D 0 0 Factor by which damping is increased when RMS increases D 4 0 Depth origin of coordinate system 0 sea level 1 maximum elevation station in station list D 0 0 Maximum distance km from nearest station at which hypocentral solutions will be generated D 20000 Minimum rms for residuals to be used in average station residual calculation doesn t affect the final hypocenter solution D 1 5 Rg phase velocity in km sec D 3 0 Minimum rms difference between two location to use for average D 50 0 Minimum number of phases for average D 3 0 Prevent depth to go below Moho and Conrad for n and b phases respectively 1 enabled 0 disabled D 0 0 T phase velocity D 1 48 km sec Flag for using azimuth phases 0 disables Disabl
15. 1 72 RMS 1 06 CORR NEE 1996 610 1 4 47 0 No data for Wadati 1996 610 1 4 47 0 No data for Wadati 1996 623 0117 57 8 No data for Wadati 1996 623 0117 58 1 No data for Wadati 1996 625 0337 Sia TOs 337 38 ui Me 21 VPS 1 75 RMS 1 36 CORR 0 999 1996 7 5 0220 46 5 TO 220 45 8 N 6 VPS 1 76 RMS 0 28 CORR 0 999 1996 713 0556 46 0 No data for Wadati 1996 718 0946 51 4 No data for Wadati 1996 718 2255 6 0 No data for Wadati 1996 726 0742 12 0 TO 742 11 8N 6 VPS 1 74 RMS 0 47 CORR 0 993 Number of events for which vp vs were calculated 9 Number of events selected for average 3 Average VP VS 1 75 SD 0 01 N 3 Example of a run to calculate apparent velocity Input file name collect out Wadati 1 apparent velocity 2 or both 3 2 Apparent velocity parameters Distance range 50 200 Azimuth range D 180 Minimum number of stations 2 Maximum rms 1 AVSP 30 212 7 AVDI 152 0 30 7 NP 4 VP 6 95 RMS 0 20 CORR 1 000 AVDI 143 3 31 1 NS 3 VS 3 82 RMS 0 25 CORR 1 000 AVSP 23 0 9 5 AVDI 158 7 26 6 NP 3 VP 6 76 RMS 0 00 CORR 1 000 AVDI 90 5 35 8 NS 6 VS 3 72 RMS 1 79 CORR 0 998 AVDI 89 0 35 6 NS 6 VS 3 69 RMS 2 78 CORR 0 996 AVSP 50 536 0 AVDI 145 8 40 8 NP 6 VP 7 60 RMS 0 42 CORR 1 000 AVDI 116 3 38 2 NS 3 VS 3 97 RMS 0 04 CORR 1 000 AVDI 118 8 45 6 NS 4 VS 3 61 RMS 0 66 CORR 1 000 AVSP 14 4 7 5 AVDI 106 0 39 2 NP 5 VP 6 75 RMS 0 94 CORR 0 999 AVDI 111 7 37 7 NS 6 VS 3 82 RMS 0 97 CORR 0 999 AVSP 144 TIR A
16. 1 Free 2 79 Error estimates in same format as previous line normally type 4 80 A1 Type of this line 5 Type 6 Line Optional Columns Format Description Comments 1 Free 2 79 A Name s of tracedata files 80 Al Type of this line 6 Type 7 Line Optional Columns Format Description Comments 1 Free 2 79 A Help lines to place the numbers in right positions 80 Al Type of this line 7 Type F Line Optional Fault plane solution Columns Format Description 1 30 3F10 0 Strike dip and rake Aki convention 31236 I6 Number of bad polarities 71 76 A6 Method or source of solution seisan mames INVRAD or FOCMEC 78 78 A1 Quality of solution A best B C or D worst added manually 79 79 Al Blank Prime solution overwritten when focmec or invrad makes a new solution non blank remain in file cannot be plotted O Remain in file and can be plotted Type E Line Optional Hyp error estimates Columns Format Description 1 Free 2 5 M The text GAP 6 8 T3 Gap 15 20 F6 2 Origin time error 25 30 F6 1 Latitude y error 31 32 Free 33 38 F6 1 Longitude x error km 39 43 F5 1 Depth z error km 44 55 E12 4 Covariance x y km km 56 67 E12 4 Covarience x z km km 68 79 E14 4 Covariance y z km km Type I Line ID line Columns Format description 1 Free 2 8 Help text for the action indicator 9 11 Last action done so far defined SPL Split REG Register ARG AUTO Register AUTOREG UPD Update UP Update
17. 13 ES 38 40 DOY 41 42 43 MONTH 44 45 46 DAY 47 48 49 HR 50 51 52 MIN 53 54 59 SEC FORMAT F6 3 60 61 69 TOTAL TIME WINDOW SECS FORMAT F9 3 70 80 FREE 71 72 73 80 FREE line 2 1 80 FREE line 3 T 2 5 STATION CODE A4 first 4 characters 655 9 COMPONENT A4 10 STATION CODE A1 LAST CHARACTER IF 5 CHARACTER STATION CODE 11 17 START TIME RELATIVE TO EVENT FILE TIME SECS F7 2 18 BLANK 19 26 STATION DATA INTERVAL LENGTH SECS F8 2 27 52 SECOND CHANNEL 53 78 THIRD CHANNEL 79 80 BLANK line 4 XX where XX depends on number of channels however XX is at least 12 so there might be some blank lines HREE MORE CHANNELS SAME FORMAT AS line 3 CO CH HH HEADER IS 1040 BYTES LONG WRITTEN AS ONE VARIABLE DEFINED AS CHARACTER 1040 THE PARAMETERS ARE WRITTEN FORMATTED WITH INTERNAL WRITE INTO 1040 BYTE TEXT STRING FORMAT IS ALWAY I FORMAT UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED res 5 STATION CODE A5 6 9 COMPONENT A4 E G SZ L SZ LOW GAIN AN ACCELERATION NS 10 12 YEAR 1900 e g 101 for 2001 13 13 14 16 DOY 17 18 19 MONTH 20 21 22 DAY 23 24 25 HR 240 26 2h 28 9 MIN 29 TIMING INDICATOR BLANK TIME IS OK E UNCERATIAN TIME 30 35 SECOND F6 3 36 37 43 SAMPLE RATE F7 2 or any f format 44 50 NUMBER OF SAMPLES I7 51 52 59 LATITUDE F8 4 optional 60 61 69 LONGITUDE F9 4 optional 70 71 75 ELEVATION
18. 175 number of layers ST D RK Strike dip and rake is taken from an existing fault plane solution for the given event F line if it exists otherwise arbitrary values are supplied The convention is Aki and Richards DEPTH Focal depth is taken from the current solution The second field can optionally have the letter F right justified If this flag is set the user can give the synt command to update all distances and azimuths used for modeling which will correspond to the latest location determined as e g a result of a changed fixed depth or a changed model The intention with this flag is that the user should be able to set a fixed depth in the S file header line give the synt command to update the parameters for modeling corresponding to this depth and then model NPOINTS Number of points to model 256 is set as default must be 2 N Used by BOUCH and HERRMAN only TIMES Three different times TOTAL The total time window for generating data and synthetic seismograms for all channels see also REDVELO INITIAL The initial time of the earliest trace in the output file with reference to the source origin time The synthetics at the station with smallest epicentral distance automatically start also at this initial time SY TRACE The duration of the synthetic seismogram for each channel might have different start times see REDVELO DT Tsou Sampling interval used for WKBJ seismograms only and half duration of the source u
19. 38 R Rename event type Giving an event a new type requires changing the header in the S file and the S file name All this is done with R command You are prompted for a new type can be the same in which case nothing is done A new S file is made and the old deleted The CAT file is NOT changed so if no UPDATE is done the event there will remain with wrong type Event types are L Local event R Regional event and D Distant event RMSDEP Calculates and plots RMS as a function of depth for current event RMSDEP also operates as a freestanding program with additional capabilities see description in program SAC Convert all data to SAC format and starts the SAC processing system not distributed with SEISAN must be obtained separately not on PC SXxXxxxx Search for next pairs of events separated in time by xxxxxx secs max 999999 If no value is given 180 secs is used The command is intended for finding events to be merged after putting together two different data sets with SPLIT If a new time instead of the default 180 is entered it will remain in effect for the whole EEV session NOTE that the search starts with the current event so after using S one return to go to the next event must be given to start a new search SS Find next unprocessed event in database Events which have status in ID line as follows SPL split with SPLIT program HYP auto located with HYP NEW new event from EEV or ARG registered by AUTOREG T
20. INIT_MAP_LEFT_LONGITUDE 180 0 INIT_MAP_RIGHT_LONGITUDE 180 0 INTERNET_BROWSER prog netscape HELP_DIR net seismo INF The parameters are Confirmation Level of confirmation required for example when deleting files 0 no confirmation and 1 always confirm at the moment only used in eev Cont_base Waveform database to be searched there can be several Cont_before Minutes to read into the memory before the required start time must be at least the length of a waveform file Cont_after Minutes to read into the memory after the data that is plotted Copy_wav_dir Normally waveform files are copied to WAV when registering an event If this parameter is set waveform files can be copied to the WAV data base specified Max 5 characters CURSOR Select cursor 0 for pointer 1 for cross and 2 for crosshair Unix only on PC only pointer is available Epimap_map_file The map coordinates file to use with MAP option in EEV Epimap projection The projection number used by EPIMAP see EPIMAP program for choices Epimap_stations One letter indicator for plotting stations in first column See EPIMAP program for codes A is all FOCMEC MAXSOL Maximum number of solutions in FOCMEC grid search default is 100 however 20 it may be required to allow for more solutions FONT Select font available on X system To check available fonts use command xlsfonts or xfontsel and xfd fn fon to display a font Unix only
21. SE 3 SYN NEWS TAT ERRAR PR EE SS a SS See eS ee 3 SYNT STATION EGD S Z ODISTANC 49 0 3 SYNT STATION EGD AZIMUTH 9 0 BAZIMUTH 189 2 3 OYNT NEW Geet 3 SYNT STATION KMY S Z _ ODISTANC 71 0 3 SYNT STATION KMY AZIMUTH 172 0 BAZIMUTH 392 a1 3 SYN NEW STAT eener SSS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SE SS ESS SSS 3 SYNT STATION ASK S Z DISTANC 72 0 3 SYNT STATION ASK AZIMUTH 5 0 BAZIMUTH L t 3 STAT SP IPHASW D HRMM SECON CODA AMPLIT PERI AZIMU VELO SNR AR TRES W DIS CAS EGD SZ IP C1325 38 25 93 1 LO 48 6 EGD SZ ES 1325 42 03 1 010 48 6 BER SZ IP G 1325 38 12 55 ek 010 62 11 BER SZ ES 1325 45 44 saako 62 11 BER SZE 1325 46 71 alt Ha 62 11 ASK SZ EP D 1325 39 59 68 th LO 70 3 ASK SZ ES 1325 48 07 0 810 70 3 ASK SZE 1325 50490 HL 8 Ba 70 3 KMY SZ IP C 1325 40 26 62 0 410 T4 175 KMY SZ ES 1325 48 74 0 410 71 175 KMY SZE 1325 48 92 83 6 0 2 i ele E MODEL The model to be used THICK is layer thickness VP is Vp velocity VS is Vs velocity DENS is density and QP and QS are P and S q values respectively The model velocities and Q values are taken from the STATIONO HYP file with first choice from current directory and second choice from DAT directory like the HYP program The S velocities are calculated using the Vp Vs ratio given there Moho is indicated with N at the end of the line with the first mantle layer A Q of zero means infinite Q The densities are approximate values and should be modified See below for maximum
22. The S files are used as input for the location program and when making a permanent update also for output see 6 1 The letter in front of the indicates the event type and can be L R or D for local regional or distant event respectively It is the same indicator as given in the header line of the S file see the Nordic format The remaining numbers give in order day hr min sec year and month As mentioned above the system can contain many other databases which may function exactly like the BER directory A data base can be used to store a subset of data or data from different networks Data can be moved between databases or in and out of the databases for details see description on EEV 4 3 and 4 4 Monthly location files the CAT directory Events located in monthly files are in a directory called SEISMO REA BER__ CAT in addition to the 6 individual S files Additional databases like e g NAO will have epicenters stored under ISEISMO REA NAO _ CAT The monthly epicenter files are called 199901 CAT for e g January 1999 Although the files generated by SEISAN normally are monthly files the CAT directory can also contain yearly files or any other time interval The only rule is that the name of the file must give the year and month of the first event in the file This is because the search program SELECT uses the file names to search requested time intervals If a user has a historical catalog this can be added as an indi
23. The trace start time in hours and minutes is given on top of each trace On the header line P1 means the first page and DC is the DC level subtracted Note that the numbers on the time scale at the bottom only are valid for the first trace unless all traces are 60 sec or 60 min long JMI L Z 96 416 08 29 060 DC 832 Scale 3000 F 0 0100 100 P 1 0 8 0 38 1 38 2 8 2 38 3 8 3 38 4 8 4 38 5 8 5 38 MIN Figure 19 Example of the menu which can be displayed on top of the plot Filt Lo 10 10 1 0 1 0 5 0 5 0 and is is E ESECRG WA Ga Ms Groun Rotate Ea Regis boer Dist Scale Print l FE Besch oc w Tock Help Quit Tossa Next Plot Del wW Del amp Merge Out Tasp Fink Back Below is some more detailed description of some of the options The one letter command is given with the menu command in parenthesis To apply filters first make a selection of options filter window channel selection and then execute by pressing R Plot or selecting a zoom window Figure 15 shows an example Single trace mode In this mode one trace is initially displayed on top of the screen see example on Figure 20 The traces used are the ones earlier selected and will be displayed one by one Several options are now possible as can be seen on the menu Normally no hardcopies are made in single trace mode since it is in
24. and displays the ground displacement Experience so far indicates that the filter is adequate Other filters can be set in MULPLT DEF Amplitude for determining Ms The attenuation function for determining Ms assumes that the amplitudes are measured near 20 sec period To pick ground amplitudes for determining Ms some filtering must first be done The k Ms option by default filters the seismogram in the band 0 042 to 0 063 Hz 16 24 sec 8 pole filter and displays the ground displacement Other filters can be set in MULPLT DEF Problem If a long trace large number of samples is used the instrument correction might fail funny result seen due to numerical overflow in the spectral conversion Choose a shorter window 6 2 9 Determine azimuth of arrival 3 comp or array and component rotation Azimuth of arrival from 3 component stations h Azim If a 3 component station is available the azimuth of arrival can be determined using the method developed by Roberts et al 1989 Display any of the 3 components and press h Azim Then select a zoom window around the P arrival of a few secs duration for the analysis The 3 components will now be displayed below in order Z N and E and the calculated azimuth apparent velocity and correlation will be displayed at the bottom line In order to check the stability of the estimate try different windows and filters Often a filter must be used to get reliable results The displayed azimuth and appar
25. and program is then partly doing what SEISEI is doing for only SEISAN format files wav_out_file lt file name gt Name of waveform output file not used if output format is SAC start lt time gt Start time can be used to set start time the same for all channels instead of using chansel file time can be absolute or relative to beginning of the first trace duration lt time gt Select duration of time window if start is used cwav Input is from the SEISAN continuous data base useful for extracting intervals cseed Input from large SEED file similar to cwav wav_in_file lt file name gt Input of one waveform file sfile lt file name gt Input of S file name format lt output format gt The output formats supported are SEISAN SAC GSE GSECM6 and GSEINT In case of SEISAN or GSE multi trace files including all selected traces are created while for SAC single trace files are generated 131 chansel lt file name gt Input file to select channels and time windows The first line contains number of channels The following lines give station code start time both absolute and relative to earliest trace allowed and duration If start time and duration are set to 0 complete traces are selected Example Select the first three complete traces 3 100 0 200 0 300 0 Use absolute start time and duration of 180 seconds 3 1 19991001124500 000 180 2 19991001124500 000 180 3 19991001124500 000 180 Use r
26. area etc Examples are relocating events extracting data and determining coda Q Source parameters The routine processing normally produces magnitudes and hypocenters The fault plane solution can be determined using polarities and one event Snoke et al 1984 Composite fault plane solutions can also be made A second way of determining fault plane solution is to synthetically model the waveforms using the modeling programs In addition seismic moment stress drop and seismic source radius can be determined by doing spectral analysis or spectral modeling This can also be done automatically with AUTOSIG The moment tensor of local earthquakes can be determined by inverting the amplitudes of the Pg and Sg waves Ebel and Bonjer 1990 The full wave modeling programs integrated with SEISAN are written by Bouchon 1981 and Herrmann Herrmann 1996 The ray tracing program is based on WKBJ and written by Chapman et al 1988 and integrated with SEISAN by Valerie Maupin All the above programs are executed from EEV in order to use known source parameters Crustal structure and Q A large database can be a good source of information for determining structural parameters and SEISAN provides several programs to determine the crustal structure and Q Using seismic arrival times it is possible to invert for the crustal structure using the VELEST program Kissling et al 1994 It is also possible to do forward modeling using the location program
27. be an advantage to merge waveform files and delete unwanted files could be false triggers see section 6 2 4 Files can only be merged and deleted in working directory with commands Delw and Merge Menu In this process of putting new events into the database it is also an advantage to delete unwanted events This is done with option S Del SY The S file is deleted but the waveform files remain in the working directory Preprocessing of data while registering new events option 1 Normally a series of events are registered first and MULPLT terminated Then EEV is started up for interactive picking and location However if preliminary processing is desired while registering the event this is also possible Phase picks If phases are picked before the event is registered these readings are saved in the database at the time of registration After the event has been registered MULPLT automatically goes to the next event in FILENR LIS and no more phase picking can be done Processing with a given program Optionally MULPLT can after registration start any program processing the newly registered event E g the AUTOPIC program can be started or a program reading amplitudes etc The program name is defined in MULPLT DEF Locating the event As the final step after registration the event can optionally be located and the location optionally placed in the database The above options have been put in on the suggestion of Brian Ba
28. ratio between stations with the maximum distance and minimum distance must be more than 3 for the event to be selected for analysis It is assumed that a and b will be the same for all events while c is different magnitude dependent At the end the average constants a and b are calculated of all values a and b which are not deviating too much a must be in the range 0 to 5 hardwired Distance attenuation coefficients a and b are supposed to be negative since amplitude decrease with distance To get the local magnitude scale MI log amp a log dist b dist C the constant C must be determined by fixing the magnitude at some reference distance like the original Wood Anderson definition with MI 3 at dist 100 km and amp 1 2200 mm 454 nm 203 assuming gain of the Wood Anderson seismograph to be 2200 Hutton and Boore 1987 The determination of a and b does not work well unless the observations are very good The relation for California is Hutton and Boore 1987 MI log amp 1 1 log dist 0 00189 dist 2 09 Output On the screen the constants will be printed out and a file mag_amp out will contain the values of a b and c 2 Magnitude relations and or spectral parameter relations Linear regression maximum likelihood can be made between any two magnitudes and or spectral parameters on any of the header lines of an event in a CAT file or a compact file The user is interactively prompted for the magnitude typ
29. return for all 10 20 Depth range return for all Magnitude range return for all Write selected events on screen y n return No agency isc file present If ISC CDROM give drive letter else return d Give first year and month e g 199501 198601 Give last year and month e g 199602 198602 Now opening d 1986 198601 FFB Number of agencies in input file 244 etc for each month 493 events converted Output file name is iscnor out File with stations is isc sta The file input can be from a CDROM as in the example above In that case the whole CDROM can be read or a smaller time interval can be given The input can also be from a single file and the program will then ask for the next file when the first has been converted If many files are to be converted a list of file names can be made with DIRF and filenr lis entered as an input file name The Nordic format output file is iscnor out and the station list is in isc sta which has the format used by SEISAN Optionally output can also be in the original isc format however that requires setting a flag in the program and recompiling see program source code ISCSTA selecting stations in the complete ISC station file The complete station list in the ISC list is very large and it is often an advantage to use a smaller subset although HYP can use the whole list The program can select out subsets of stations in both SEISAN and an older ISC format 139 The program will read an S fi
30. the Q f plot might then display a long straight line The Q Q0 f qalpha is calculated from the good values Distance correction alpha The spectral amplitudes are multiplied by R distance correction if different from zero This option MUST be set if moment or moment magnitude options see below are selected as well as calculation of Q However it can be used without instrumental correction For body waves use 1 Note that the geometrical spreading use here is simpler than used in MULPLT Minimum correlation coefficient and minimum signal to noise ratio for kappa The minimum correlation coefficient and signal to noise ratio for an event to be included in average kappa The coefficients are from the linear fit to the flat part of the spectrum 186 Velocity and density Velocity km sec and density g cm cm used for calculating moment spectra If set to 0 0 no moment spectra are calculated See section on MULPLT for details of calculation Magnitude spectrum If 1 the spectral level is converted to moment magnitude see MULPLT for details of calculation Stations and components Station component pairs used one pair per line format a5 1x a4 1x a5 1x a4 If no relative spectrum is used the first station component on the line is used Averaging in spec Q For each frequency the average linear 1 Q and corresponding sd is calculated The upper and lower bounds are calculated by subtracting and adding the sd These values ar
31. the program will also calculate just A and C using a fixed user supplied value for the distance correction to the coda The constant dist_coff is given in the mag par file as the second parameter under MAG_PAR_COF see below IN ORDER FOR THE CODA SCALE OPTION TO WORK THE DISTANCE COEFFICIENT MUST BE DIFFERENT FROM ZERO Output On the screen the constants will be printed out and a file mag_coda out will contain pairs of values m and log coda dist_coff dist which can be used to plot the distance corrected coda relation If results from the 3D is to be plotted dist_coff must be calculated as dist_coff B A put into mag par and mag run again A typical coda magnitude relation is Mc 2 0 log coda 0 0035 dist 0 87 Lee et al 1972 202 Local magnitude MI The local magnitude scale is calculated by determining an amplitude attenuation scale using amplitudes and distances in CAT file The parameters in the MI magnitude scale are computed in two ways 1 for every event individually parameters are determined as averages of all events 2 simultaneous inversion for all events also inverting for site factors 1 For each event only type L and R are used a b c are calculated if at least 3 stations are available using least squares regression as follows log amp a log dist b dist c 2 The simultaneous inversion for all events is done using a singular value decomposition algorithm The inversion is done as in the equat
32. yes resp yes LENPCQ converting Lennartz to PCEQ format PC Only executable code for this program and only PC made by the Royal Belgian Observatory The format is used by an older version Lennartz tape recorder The output files have the same names as the input files and are placed in a directory c qcoda WHICH MUST BE THERE M88SEl Lennartz MARS88 to SEISAN all chan def yes resp yes NANSEI Nanometrics to SEISAN PC Sun chan def yes resp yes The program converts from the Y file format to SEISAN This is done by first making an ASCII file with Nanometrics y5dump program done internally in NANSEI NOTE The y5dump program requires some special Nanometrics libraries Solaris or DLL files PC which are included and installed with SEISAN see installation section The program converts single channel files only NEISEI NEIC digital data to SEISAN PC chan def no resp no NEIC earthquake digital data comes on CDROM The data is extracted with a program coming with the data and then converted to SEISAN binary waveform data The response information is given as poles and zeros in the SEISAN waveform file header OS9SEI converting SEISLOG files to SEISAN PC SUN chan def no resp yes The program takes a SEISLOG ASCII downloaded in CMP6 format or binary file and converts to a SEISAN file The input can be several files from a filenr lis or an ASCII downloaded file either compressed or uncompressed The program will look for t
33. 0 97 Minute error correction 1 enabled 0 disabled D 0 0 98 Enable spherical harmonic station corrections 1 enabled 0 disabled D 0 0 99 101 Lg Rg and T weights put in permanently D 1 0 1 0 0 0 103 Minimum number of depth phases for starting depth D 1 0 104 Minimum distance of epicenter from array for distant events D 30 0 deg 105 Enable gradient model not yet implemented 106 Only calculate magnitudes and update spectral values 1 enabled 0 disabled D 0 0 107 Use xnear and xfar from sfile 0 disabled xnear and xfar from STATIONO HYP file 1 enabled D 0 0 The test parameter defaults are set in file hyposub1 for in LIB HYP output Output from the program is a CAT file hyp out and the original HYPOCENTER print file print out with more detailed information The hyp out file can be plotted directly using EPIMAP In addition there is also the HYPO71 style summary file hypsum out NOTE In print out and hypsum out year is only given with 2 digits Magnitude in hypsum out and print out are only coda magnitude and will be different from same magnitude in hyp out if a magnitude correction has been used When HYP is executed from EEV the print out file has no station listing In all other cases there is a station listing Some explanation is given below for details see HYP manual The output in print out first shows the content of the TEST parameters in the STATIONO HYP file After that comes some rou
34. 0 69361408E 02 123 0 00830 0 82667302E 02 117 0 00980 0 97841555E 02 113 0 01200 0 11995634E 01 108 0 01400 0 14000172E 01 106 60 00000 0 59999992E 02 90 71 00000 0 70999992E 02 90 85 00000 0 84999992E 02 90 100 00000 0 99999985E 02 90 In the poles and zero representation the file looks like CAL2 KBS B Z STS 1 0 15E 00 d 20 00000 2003 1 1 Ose 0 PAZ2 1 Vv 0 26000000E 05 2 3 Laplace transform 0 12217305E 01 0 12464144E 01 0 12217305E 01 0 12464144E 01 0 00000000E 00 0 00000000E 00 0 00000000E 00 0 00000000E 00 0 00000000E 00 0 00000000E 00 DIG2 2 0 41900000E 06 20 00000 quanterra The first line is the same as before The PAZ2 lines has the following meaning Normalization constant of seismometer and filter 0 26e 5 number of poles and zeroes 2 and 3 and the type of response Laplace transform The DIG2 line has the gain of amplifier and AD converter combined 0 419e6 c V and sample rate 245 In the simplest case the response is given by the PAZ and a scaling factor It is common like in SEED to have two scaling constants one that normalizes the PAZ to amplitude 1 at a calibration period and another constant that gives the amplitudes in the physical units This is NOT the case with the GSE2 format The GSE2 response for PAZ normally contains at least two parts the CAL2 line and a PAZ2 line The scaling factor should scale the PAZ to output input units NOT normalize In the CAL2 line the system sensitivity at a c
35. 108 6 3 1 W_EMAP Windows based map progralt sssccesseceeesseesesseeeeneseesenseeeeneenesenssensneneesenseeneneenesensentennentens 115 6 4 Searching in the database SELECT csssscsssssscessseseessseeeensseeeeeseeneensseeeesavenenssaeseesavseeneseeaesseenenesoeneeas 116 6 5 Extracting events from the database COLLECT cssssssssssessseeseeesseseenesseneesaeenesssenaeaeeneeneseennenenneas 121 6 6 Inserting events into the database SPLIT scessssecssseeeensesseesseneeenenesseneenesenensseeeeenaveeeeeseeeeensenennsseeneas 121 6 7 Updating final locations in database UPDATE and UPD sssseesesseeeeseesenseeneneneesenseneeneneenennens 122 6 8 Using filenr lis DIRF and DELF c sscsscssssseeessseeeesssseeesesneeeseseenssneneeneseenaesaennensseesaeeeeneeeenesneenensssenneas 124 6 9 Making a bulletin BUL ceccesesssesceeseesneeeeseeeenseneneeseesensnnesneneesensenesueneeseeseeesneneeseesenseeseeseesnuesneneeseseneees 124 6 10 Reports and Statistics EE 125 6 11 Waveform file management tools sseecesseeeesteseeeeseeneeeeseeneeeeeenensseenneeseenaeseeneuaeseesaeeesnnseenesanenenessennens 129 6 12 File conversion and modification programS ceeceeseeseeseeeeeesenseneeeeseeseeesneseessnesneenesenseneeeeneeseneeetensens 136 6 13 Signal processing programs sssecseeeceeseeseeneneeeeseseeneeeseeseeeeesenaeseeneeseseesaeseeneenesnesaeseeseneenesieneensseenneas 149 BAS
36. 12 00 7 100 23 00 ER Model del ul kee ell iz SAVE amp EXIT 8 050 31 00 N h gt gt Add Remove CANCEL i Start Dep near xfar VDS NDep Init Dep Inc Dep Duration magnitude coefficients used for calculating coda magnitude as MAG TEST 7 TEST 8 LOG T TEST 9 DELTA Figure 4 Edit Window of the configuration file STATIONO HYP Changing MULPLT DEF The changing is the similar to SEISAN DEF The data for validation and on line help is taken from MULPLTDEF INP Input definition file format The input files SEISANDEF INP MULPLTDEF INP and STATIONDEF INP are used for data validation purpose and users help support Normally the user will not edit these files The first two lines of the files are comments followed by three or more lines for each parameter 1 The data numerical description 2 The name and a short description of the parameter shown on the list and 3 A longer description help about the meaning of the parameter s This can be several lines The data numerical description has the following format lt Keyword gt lt default gt lt range gt lt value1 gt lt value2 gt lt type gt lt column gt lt width gt lt dec gt lt keyword gt Identify the name of the parameter used in the configuration file lt default gt Default value used when the parameter is not found in the configuration file lt range gt A character for specifying when the parameter is enc
37. 163 and hyp out to make the focmec inp file and proceeds as usual This is actually the way FOCMEC works from within EEV However if more than one event is located FOCMEC assumes that all events shall be used in a composite solution and focmec inp will therefore contain the header from the first event and phase lines from all subsequent events This is the easiest way to make a composite solution 2 Manually make the focmec inp event or use option FC in EEV Then run focmec with the argument c to indicate that the focmec inp file already exists and a composite solution is to be made Using EEV and option FC see EEV an input file focmec inp is generated containing polarities etc for several events NOTE when running FOCMEC outside EEV the fault plane solution is not put into the database it does not belong to any particular event however it is written out in file focmec inp Computer limitations Total number of polarities must be less than the dimension of array DATA parameter max_data for Nordic data see file seidim inc in INC directory Figure 31 shows an example of a fault plane solution calculated with FOCMEC 164 Figure 31 Top An example of a fault plane solution plot Symbols are explained in the text Bottom A fault plane solution also showing the stations with corresponding polarities 2002 922 2353 14 5 L 52 529 2 178 14 0F BGS 91 0 6 4 7LBGS 2002 922 2353 14 5 L 52 529 2 178 14 0F BGS 91 0 6 4 7LBGS UO0
38. 19S NSN_17 6 STAT SP IPHASW D HRMM SECON CODA AMPLIT PERI AZIMU VELO SNR AR TRES W DIS CAZ7 BLS5 SZ EP D 8 0 56 80 129 110 216 349 BLS5 SZ ESG 8 1 23 59 910 216 349 BLS5 SZ EP 8 0 56 80 129 110 216 349 BLS5 SZ ESG 8 1 23 59 910 216 349 Location parameters AR Azimuth residual when using azimuth information in locations TRES Travel time residual W Actual weight used for location inc e g distance weight i2 DIS Epicentral distance in kms CAZ Azimuth from event to station Note Type 1 line must be the first all type 4 lines should be together and the last line must be blank 235 FORMAT DESCRIPTION Type 1 Line Columns Format Description Comments Free 2 5 I4 Year 6 Free 7 8 12 Month 9 10 I2 Day of Month dE Fix o time Normally blank an F fixes origin time 12 13 T2 Hour 14 15 I2 Minutes 16 Free 17 20 F4 1 Seconds 2 Location model indicator Any character 22 A1 Distance Indicator L Local R Regional etc 23 A1 Event ID E Explosion etc P Probable explosion V Volcanic Q Probable volcanic 24 30 F7 3 Latitude Degrees N 31 38 F8 3 Longitude Degrees E 39 43 F5 1 Depth Km 44 A1 Depth Indicator F Fixed S Starting value 45 Al Locating indicator 222 2 22 MRSA do not locate 46 48 A3 Hypocenter Reporting Agency 49 51 Number of Stations Used 52 55 RMS of Time Residuals 56 59 F4 1 Magnitude No 1 60 A Type of Magnitude L ML B mb S Ms W MW G MbLg C Mc 61 6
39. 1E 00 1E 01 h 1E 00 S r Lu ul Wd ai PERRY cursores 1 1582 T 15 9100 A 1 86 01 1E 01 1 00 1E 01 F 3 02E 01 A 4 54E 01 Ki Si lt l 1E 01 E C Ace ACAD8904 251 Valores extremos Np 2177 Ni 518 Nd 2694 Ci 518 Cd 2694 D ai EAA cussores 1u 1806 T 16 0500 A 2 18 01 1E 01 1E 00 1E 01 F 1 00E 00 A 149E 01 fd Miricio SHO A 9 3 M SBMs ban Age Serier Ip BARALLA 0 16pm Figure 29 Example of DEGTRA A4 Degtra A4 accepts input ground motion recordings written in several formats simple ASCII or binary files SEISAN format and the standard format of the Mexican Strong Motion Database The program has a nice and user friendly interface in which several time histories can be manipulated at a time It includes zoom in zoom out capabilities that can be used if only a portion of a recording is of interest There are two types of operations that Degtra A4 can perform using strong motion recordings operations involving a single recording and operations involving two recordings Among the first group the main functions are the following Scaling Multiplies the recording by a constant Decimation Decimates the recording by a user given factor Base line correction Includes several methods Differentiation Numerical differentiation with respect to time Integration Numerical integration with respect to time Computation of Arias intensity Filterin
40. 28 sets are available some of the detections from different networks or the broad band station might correspond to the same event There are now two options The first is to merge the waveform files for corresponding events and then put the events into the database The second option is to put all real events into the database and then do the merging from EEV Case C A mix of stations and networks and additional phase readings The steps are as in case B except that before step 2 the additional phase data is put into the database In this case the merging of events must be done with EEV It should be noted that data collection and step 1 to 3 is fully automated using SEISNET Ottemdller and Havskov 1999 Example of using EEV for interactive processing Find event in default database nearest the given date and time EEV 1999020303 Once EEV is started an EEV prompt is given and different EEV options are available Examples are E Edit event P Plot event L Locate event F Make fault plane solution d2201 Find event nearest day 22 at 01 hour MAP Start EPIMAP to show earthquake location and SAC Start SAC processing of event using all parameter and waveform data from SEISAN database The above examples have mostly described the interactive processing of single events However once the data is in the database operations can be done on the whole database for any time interval or for events fulfilling certain criteria like magnitude
41. 5 2 3 8LNAO 4 0BPDE 3 2SISC1 NORTHERN FINLAND 3 NRSA SZ IPN 1 D 2244 13 44 0345 1234 6 1 33 245 2 08 6 841022 120 2 3 5 12345 NRSA SZ ILG 1 D 2244 13 44 0345 1234 6 1 33 265 0 03 6 841022 120 2 3 5 12345 1985 510 21 5 16 1 LE 60 240 6 170 30 0F BER 6 2 3 3 8LNAO 4 0BPDE 3 2SISC Aa 0 5 0 9 5 0 0 4 5 8505210425 WNN 6 NORTHERN HORDALAND F 3 5 61 22 0 5 5 33 0 8 23456 2 456 2 99 11BER1 STAT SP IPHASW D HRMM SECON CODA AMPLIT PERI AZIMU VELO SNR 7 BER SZ IPG 2 U 2105 25 41 200 HYA SZ ISG 1 221 05 3301 ODD SZ IP 3 2105 20 1 250 ODD SZ EPG 2105 22 9 ODD SZ LG 2105 55 8 234 Below are examples of how the last free columns of type 4 lines are used in the Nordic Databank in Helsinki and in Bergen 1985 510 21 5 16 1 LE 60 240 6 170 30 0F BER 6 2 3 3 8LNAO 4 0BPDE 3 2SISC1 SE 0 5 0 9 Sall 0 4 5 8505210425 WNN 6 ACTION UPD 93 07 09 09 40 OP jens STATUS ID 19920101080359 I STAT SP IPHASW D HRMM SECON CODA AMPLIT PERI AZIMU VELO SNR AR TRES W DIS CAZ7 NRSA SZ IPN 1 D 2105 13 44 0345 1234 6 1 33 245 2 08 6 5 5 2 0 7 9 555 235 BER SZ IPG 2 U 2105 25 41 200 HYA SZ ISG 1 2105 33 1 ODD SZ IP 3 2105 20 1 250 ODD SZ EPG 2105 22 9 ODD SZ LG 2105 55 8 Note in this example the fault plane solution line F and the HYP error line E 1993 1028 0800 26 4 L 57 518 7 119 18 8 BER 6 6 2 6CBER 1 GAP 201 1 20 6 4 7 0 6 8 3359E 01 2719E 00 3054E 02E M 74 8 48 2 2 F ACTION SPL 95 01 08 09 40 OP jh STATUS ID 19931028080019 I 9310 28 0800
42. 5 letters The real names in the directory structure are always 5 letters so if the user specifies e g a base name of BA the real name willbe BA___ The full 5 letter name can also be used The commands in EEV mainly use only one letter unless a date or a number has to be given To get a short explanation type and you will get 34 Help on EEV Print this help file xx Go to event xx also works without the Axx Append event xx to current event original event remains AA Append current event to next event original event remains AUTOSIG Automatic processing B Back one event BOUCH Run Bouchon s modeling program BOUSEI ake SEISAN file from Bouchon synthetic file Cs Copy event to another data base or to current directory COMMENT Write comment lines in S fil D Delete current event you will be prompted to confirm DUP Duplicate current event in data base different id DXXXXXX Go to first event on date xx hour xx min xx E Edit EXP Enter explosion information Eyyyymm et EEV session end with year yyyy and month mm F ake a fault plane solution FC Accumulate data for composite fault plane solution GRID Locate by grid search GMTMAP akes a GMT map like the MAP commnad HERRMANN Run Herrmann s modelling program not PC HERSEIL ake SEISAN file from Herrmann synthetic file not PC Hs Locate with Hypoinver
43. 50 00 34 00 4 50 21 00 4 50 21 00 4 00 29 50 input and marks 207 Figure 37 Explosion filtering The top figure shows the filter areas used for Scandinavia The bottom right figure shows the time of day distribution for a 10 year Scandinavian catalog before filtering made with CATSTAT and the figure bottom left shows the distribution after filtering 3 0 37 0 Time of day distribution Time of day distribution 1000 F _ 2 N m N120 H u u Ge e m m m TI b b m e 800 H e 2 m Ch r m m IT 100 H m ba 600 H m 80 L TI 60 L 400 H 40 H 200 7 l l l l o L 208 6 27 Inversion of travel time data and joint hypocenter determination 6 27 1 VELEST Introduction The program VELEST is used to solve the coupled hypocenter velocity model problem for local earthquakes It performs a simultaneous inversion for hypocenters and velocity model The inversion is limited to first arriving phases A detailed program description is given in the VELEST USER S GUIDE Kissling et al 1995 A recipe for preparing data and use of the inversion routine is presented in Initial reference models in local earthquake tomography Kissling et al 1994 The two documents are available in one Postscript
44. 6 2 4 2 2 System without digital data In this case the user would get phase data from other sources e g analog seismograms or files with readings from other stations and agencies These files are assumed to be written in Nordic Format Conversion can be done from other formats like ISC NEIC and HYPO71 If a user already has a file with one or several events in Nordic Format this file can be split up into single files which are copied from any directory into the database by using the command SPLIT Creating a new file in Nordic Format can also be done with the program NEWEVE use command NEWEVE The SPLIT program then reads the NEWEVE output file and writes out single S files with correct names either in the current directory default or in the database specified BER or another The reason that the database specifically must be given is that the user should not accidentally put data into the database see section 6 6 4 2 3 Database security Duplicate ID Since the database consists of single files with names corresponding to time down to the second as well as the event type L R or D it will sometimes happen that two events will get the same name Thus copying in a new event with the same name could overwrite the existing event and the user would never know In SEISAN from version 5 0 some security has been put in New data can enter the database with 4 programs SPLIT EEV MULPLT and AUTOREG With all programs the user will b
45. 7 22 BHH 25 6 89 43 0 03 1 03 0 29 0 51 BCC 26 8 108 43 0 26 0 71 0 01 0 36 GCD 32 7 219 43 0 40 1 75 ECK 32 8 72 43 0 28 1 02 ESK 36 4 46 43 0 39 1 00 0 91 0 26 BBH 44 2 84 43 0 29 0 77 BBO 46 1 149 43 0 20 0 54 0 01 0 36 BDL 54 1126 38 0 34 0 70 BTA 63 2 109 38 0 42 0 69 1 04 0 09 CKE 65 0 150 38 0 27 0 54 XAL 93 4 106 38 0 16 0 54 EDI 96 6 16 38 0 33 1 00 GIM 104 4 212 38 0 02 1 35 0 36 0 87 WCB 200 0 198 30 0 91 0 45 CWF 302 7 150 30 0 08 0 24 Phase names Only single character phase names are supported denoted by P or S Weighting Two weighting options may be used 1 User specified weights assigned by a single integer value in the range 0 to 4 for a given phase These will assign a weighting factor of 1 0 75 0 5 0 25 or 0 0 to that phase Also a weighting of 9 will assign the absolute time a weighting of 0 0 but will allow the use of relative times if a valid S arrival is found for that station The relative arrival time will be assigned the weight of the S 70 phase 2 Distance weighting as given by the relationship w xfar A xfar xnear By default the parameters xnear and xfar are read from the STATIONO HYP file If TEST 107 is set to 1 xnear and xfar are read from s file if there Using a starting location The user can specify the use of a starting depth and epicenter by entering the character S in columns 44 and or 45 respectively in the header line of the input readings file The starti
46. AMPLIFIER GAIN DB 40 UMBER OF FILTERS 0 10 RETURN FOR NONE 1 FREQUENCY AND NUMBER OF POLES FOR EACH FILT POLES NEGATIVE FOR HIGH PASS 10 2 FILE NAME FOR FILE WITH POLES AND ZEROS RE TURN FOR NO FILE FILE NAME FOR MEASURED VALUES RETU RN FOR O FILE 222 AMPLITUDE RESP ONSE We E I SMOMET ER DISPLACEMEN AMPL 9 88 3 66 1 36 504 187 694 257 9551 354 A1 4881 1811 BECH 249 924 343 whe 4721 E75 tt go SE ii ii HI HHH HHH Hi Hi Hi iii HIH COOC OC OCH COOC CH CH ELE Gi Ea BA za DI EM SLL EL ELSE SS E OO e e e e e e Ee OGOOGO OO UU DE BWWNHNNE EF e wb o bb I I 441 H Lo ii HI HHH HH HHH HIH FREQ 0 01 0 03 GAIN FACTOR AT 1 HZ 0 276 0 14 RE HO URN FOR PHASE 3 68 E SPONSE 19 19 E 09 D PHASE RESPONSE We E I SMOMETER DISPLACEMENT 100 O D PHAS DEG 163 144 125 3 106 87 1 68 0 49 0 29 09 10 8 CHEN 27 3 46 3 65 4 84 4 SS 123 ER 161 180 HAHAHAHAHAHA Ba za tt HHRHH RAHKRHHK
47. Array processing 214 Array stations 59 ASCII files 134 149 ASCII waveform format 142 ASCII convert to 149 ASCII convert to SEISAN 146 ASCII SEISAN to 134 ASCSEI 146 ASSOCI 171 Associ_rest out 171 Associate events in time 38 Attenuation equation 199 Attenuation relations 189 AUTO 155 AUTO_LOCATE 106 AUTO_PROCESS 106 Automate EPIMAP 113 Automatic amplitude 88 Automatic coda length 88 106 Automatic phase picking 39 155 AUTOPIC 17 AUTOPIC INP 155 Autopic out 155 AUTOREG 130 Autoscale depth profile 111 Autoscaling 92 Autosig 157 246 Autosig par 159 A value 191 Average station residual 67 Azimuth 88 155 Azimuth error 67 B Backazimuth 91 Background noise 99 185 Background seismicity 199 Bandpass filter default in mulplt 106 BASE 31 Bash 11 BGISEI 146 Binary SEISAN waveform file structure 241 Bisquare weighting 67 BOUCH 171 Bouch out 176 BOUSEI 28 171 Brune spectrum 230 BUL 125 BUL INP 17 126 Bul ps 126 Bullen table 73 Bulletin 125 Bulletin program 17 B value 152 191 199 BVALUE 152 Bvalue eps 153 Bvalue out 153 C CAL directory 55 148 Calibration file 221 CAT directory 5 CAT_AGA 137 138 Cat_aga par 138 Catalog work 6 29 56 57 123 129 191 205 Catday out 129 CAT file 5 8 26 68 Cathour out 129 Catmonth out 129 CATSTAT 129 Catyear out 129 Change filters 80 104 Change of day 69 Channel order 85 Channel selection 74 79 Check 230 Check data base 31 CHECK_BASE 31 CHECKRE 31 China 14
48. COMP station and component codes SELCRIT 1 P 2 S 4 full trace DURATION signal duration in seconds if selcrit lt 4 starting from either P or S FLOW FHIGH filter limits for bandpass filter can be can be disabled by FILTER see above Example of STATION line 228 KEYWORD STAT COMP Ye Feed SELCRIT DURATION FLOW FHIGH aaria Soe eek STATION PCA E 2 T 6 Ba 8 eege STATION EDI S E 2a 5y oe 8 Ouput files corr out This is the main output file The file is in Nordic format and contains the phase readings if run in phase detection mode and can be used with the SEISAN location programs directly In continuous mode the file can contain more than one phase reading per channel In group identification mode the file contains the event list cross correlation matrix and suggested groups of similar events corr trace This files gives details of program run and can provide information on cause of errors 229 7 Programming in SEISAN and list of files in SEISAN distribution This chapter gives a bit more technical details of SEISAN starting with a short programmers guide with description of sample and test programs 7 1 Programmers guide and some test programs SEISAN is conglomerate of programs and subroutines and it can be difficult to find out which routines to use and how to start a new SEISAN program The most common method is to use an existing program and modify it The intentio
49. CORR ssscssssesssssesesseesenssseneseeneenesseneesieeeeneseeneesieseeneenensssenneas 226 7 Programming in SEISAN and list of files in SEISAN CUS del Vu a arrr r arre r aaa aaa aaa Ta A aaa a aa Arao Da aain aa Daraa AAOH AREN aonni 229 7 1 Programmers guide and some test ProgralS essecsseseeeeeseeseeseeeeenenseensneeeesenseensneeeesenseeneneneesensennentens 229 7 2 CONTENTS OF PRO LIB INC INF COM DAT and PIC DIRECTORIES EE 230 8 Acknowledgments EE 231 CR EE 232 Appendix 1 The Nordic forimat scccccseeceseseeeeesneeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeensneneeeeeeaees 234 Appendix 2 The Seisan waveform file format cssscccseseeeeeseereeeeseeees 239 Appendix 3 Response file formats used in SEISAN cccssssseeeesssesees 243 1 INTRODUCTION The SEISAN seismic analysis system is a complete set of programs and a simple database for analyzing earthquakes from analog and digital data With SEISAN it is possible using local and global earthquakes to enter phase readings manually or pick them with a cursor locate events edit events determine spectral parameters seismic moment azimuth of arrival from 3 component stations and plot epicenters The system consists of a set of programs tied to the same database Using the search programs it is possible to use different criteria to search the database for particular events and work with this subset without extracting the events Most of the programs can operate b
50. DZ is reset to DZ K 1 where K DZ TEST 05 TEST 05 should be set to a value approximately half the range of focal depth expected TEST 06 4 If no significant variation is found in the stepwise multiple regression the critical F value TEST 03 is reduced to TEST 03 TEST 06 and the regression is repeated TEST 07 0 87 Coda magnitude constant a where Mc a blogio T cAtAM TEST 08 2 0 Coda magnitude constant b TEST 09 0 0035 Coda magnitude constant c TEST 10 100 km If the latitude or longitude adjustment DX or DY is greater than TEST 10 then DX is reset to DX J 1 and DY is reset to DY J 1 where J D TEST 10 D being the larger of DX or DY TEST 11 8 0 Maximum number of iterations in the hypocentral adjustment TEST 12 0 5 If the focal depth adjustment DZ would place the hypocenter in the air the DZ is reset to DZ Z TEST 12 where Zis the focal depth TEST 13 1 0 km Parameter for auxiliary RMS values 6 1 3 The Hypoinverse program HYPINV SUN and PC The Hypoinverse program has been implemented in a simple way and is mostly intended to be operated interactively from EEV in order to compare locations The main program has seen very few 72 changes and can be run according to the original manual Klein 1984 and will not be described here The program does not work well at large distances gt 1000km so use it only for local earthquakes If original dat
51. ENTER terminating the list with an additional ENTER The program will then enter a loop where phase times are calculated for new distances entered on request The program is terminated for a particular distance by entering 1 and a new depth can be used or the program can be terminated by entering 1 again A special version of this program used in connection with MULPLT is IASP In order to generate the earth model files IASP91 HED and IASP91 TBL first run program REMODL then program SETBRN The program REMODL has the earth model hardwired Note These binary files CANNOT be moved between platforms They are included with SEISAN for each respective distribution If lost they must be regenerated on the same platform For more information about IASP91 programs see HYPOCENTER manual by B Lienert 6 20 2 Calculation of travel times for layer and gradient model TTLAYER The TTLAYER program is written by Barry Lienert to calculate travel times for both layer and gradient model In this version the program only works for zero depth and therefore might not be very useful The program reads a set of velocities and depths from an input file in STATIONO HYP format and calculates travel times for P and S velocities for a set of uniform velocity layers using the HYPOCENTER dtdx2 routine and also for a set of uniform gradient layers using dtdxg a new routine written to have the same input arguments as dtdx2 The routine to calculate travel times
52. FREQUENCY frequency and 1 q 2s 3 5312E 03 FREQUENCY frequency and 1 q 225 2 9081E 03 FREQUENCY frequency and 1 q 3 15 2 2568E 03 FREQUENCY frequency and 1 q 4 1 7029E 03 FREQUENCY frequency and 1 q 5y 1 1228E 03 STATION MIN min of stations 4 VELOCITY LG 3300 DAMPING ALPHA damping parameters 500 DAMPING SIGMA 100 DAMPING BETA ae Es 500 DAMPING LAMBDA 5H 0 001 NSMOOTH smooth spec times 0 CHECKERBOARD 1 for cbh test D VERBOSE 0 for quite mode Ch Grid X STAR x start of grid 92 09 Y STAR y start of grid 6 50 X DELTA x delta grid T Y DELTA y delta grid 1 X NPOINTS x points Mh Y NPOINTS y points 13 6 22 Wadati This is a program to make Wadati diagrams and apparent velocity from a Nordic file with one or many events The apparent velocity is calculated from the arrival times and the calculated epicentral distances as given in the S file The apparent velocity is thus approximate and affected by the location The purpose of the program is to calculate Vp Vs values for individual events and calculate the average for a group of events In addition the program can calculate the apparent velocity for each event based on P or S times Wadati diagrams with plot can also be calculated directly from EEV The information can be used to obtain a first impression of crustal parameters For each calculation events can be selected based on Minimum number of stations maximum rms of the fit S P vs P or arrival times a
53. HIGH PASS Each line requires two numbers the corner frequency of the filter and the number of poles A high pass filter is given by letting number of poles be negative It is not always easy to know whether a filter is e g one 2 pole or two 1 pole filters the user needs to experiment with this FILE NAME FOR FILE WITH POLES AND ZEROS RETURN FOR NO FILE Here a file with poles and zeros can be entered If seismometer constants have been chosen above the values calculated with poles and zeros are multiplied with the values previously calculated The free format file contains 1 line NP Number of poles NZ Number of zeros Norm Normalization constant Following NP lines contain one pair each of real and imaginary poles Following NZ lines contain one pair each of real and imaginary zeros The next 2 options are only shown if the output file is selected to be FAP FILE NAME FOR TABULATED VALUES RETURN FOR NO FILE Here a file with tabulated values are entered If seismometer constants or poles and zeros have been chosen above the tabulated values will be interpolated and multiplied with the values previously calculated for from above The free format file contains 1 line N Number of tabulated values Norm Normalization constant Following N lines contain one each frequancy amplitude and phase deg GIVE FILE NAME FOR MEASURED VALUES RETURN FOR NONE Give file name for measured values In most cases you have none so just make a r
54. I Structural period of i th spectral ordinate It is used only for identification purposes so in the cases in which structural period has no meaning it can be just a sequential number AQ l Lower limit of intensity level for i th spectral ordinate AU I Upper limit of intensity level for i th spectral ordinate 194 Exceedance rates for the i th intensity will be computed at NA values logarithmically spaced between AO I and AU I 4 More Global parameters RMAX TR1 TR2 TR3 TR4 TRS RMAX Parameter controlling the spatial integration process Sources at distances greater than RMAX kilometers from a site will be ignored TR1 TR5 CRISIS 99 will generate a file containing intensity levels for fixed return periods TR1 1 R5 See below for the description of this output file Five values must be always given 5 Parameters defining the basic grid of points in which hazard is to be computed 1 line LOI LAI DLO DLA NLO NLA LOI LAI Longitude and latitude respectively of the origin of the grid DLO DLA Longitude and latitude increments NLO NLA Number of lines of the grid in the longitude and latitude directions respectively Results will be given for points LO I LA I where LO I LOI J l DLO J 1 NLO LA I LAI I 1 DLA I 1 NLA 6 Number of polygons to be used to reduce the initial rectangular grid 1 line NPOLGRID Introducing one or more boundary polygons can reduce the initial rectangular gr
55. IN DISPLACEMENT When doing an UPDATE of the database or just a location with HYP all distance dependent spectral values are recalculated and average values written into the output file Mw will be calculated from the average value and written in the header line However the original distance dependent Q and kappa correction is not changed since this correction was used to modify the spectrum used for reading parameters Normally a small distance change has insignificant influence on the spectral level or the corner frequency so the Q correction should be no problem Spectra of the same type P S or and from the same channel are overwritten Only in case of UPDATE are the values written back into the database Display of spectral parameters Program MAG can read and plot relations between spectral and source parameters Program REPORT can read spectral parameters and combine in a table Potential problem with Q correction If the origin time in header is wrong the Q correction can be very wrong There must be a phase line in the S file with component and distance corresponding to the spectra made in order for the spectral values to be calculated Spectral fitting Once the spectrum has been shown displacement velocity or acceleration a theoretical spectrum can be calculated and superimposed on the observed spectrum in order to forward model either source parameters or attenuation Entering constants and modeling The modeling can o
56. If it cannot be determined which kind of phase is analyzed the user will get a question to select type of phase can also be changed later when spectral choices come up The determination of which phase influences the further calculation of geometrical spreading and moment uses P or S velocity If f is selected the spectral values together with calculated moment etc are stored in the S file at the next key press see parameters below Spectral values in S files accumulate since no old values are deleted This is because the spectrum might be made under different conditions start time time window etc The input parameters for the spectral analysis is given in file MULPLT DEF which can be in either DAT or the working directory see below Additional parameters for geometrical spreading are given in SEISAN DEF in DAT The spectral parameters are calculated using the relations Moment 4 pi DE V 3 10 OM G r h KK where V is the seismic wave velocity at the source P or S if P or S spectrum respectively and OM the spectral flat level on the attenuation corrected displacement spectrum Moment magnitude 2 3 log10 moment 6 06 which is equivalent to the relation Moment magnitude 2 3 log10 moment 10 73 if moment is in dynes cm Kanamori 1977 The moment is calculated in Nm the source radius in km and the stress drop in bars All results are written to the S file Below is an example SPECAI SPEC I ZMO
57. Input files 125 1 A monthly data file This file can be made by COLLECT or SELECT 2 BUL INP This file must be in DAT or in the local directory In this file the layout of the front pages are decided as well as the font selection for the main bulletin There are ample comments in the file on how the commands are written Some special format features Type 3 line If the first 5 columns in a type 3 line are Bul then the rest of the line is interpreted as text line that is written in the bulletin In this way comments to certain earthquakes can be written into the bulletin Type 2 line Maximum intensity and casualty damage reports are included in the bulletin if found in the S file How to run the program bul h gt This gives you a list of the different options like this Options frontpage Only frontages are printed nofrontpage No frontages are printed onlyhypo Only hypocenter solutions are printed minmag x x Only hypocenter solutions with magnitude than the requested are printed The last option may be used in cases where the number of earthquakes is very high so that it is preferable to report phases only for events above a given magnitude You can also run the program without any options in which case the default values used are i All phases are reported ii Front pages are printed You will always be asked for the name of the S file Output file The output file is called bul ps and is
58. More output for use with GMT script gmtxy Older conversion programs removed new have been made A new Java interface JSEISAN doing much of the functions in EEV SELECT and MULPLT Change of NORDIC S file format signal to noise ratio has been replaced by angle of incidence Program COMPACT change to NORHEAD to avoid conflics on Windows Program EXTRACT changed name to WAVETOOL to avoid conflict on Windows the program has also got new features Original FOCMEC by Snoke is now used FOCMEC is interface to FOCMEC_EXE amplitude ratios can be used Improved handling of continuous data with MULPLT Grid search added to spectral fitting in AUTOSIG Java program SEISCONF to edit main parameter files New program DEGTRAA4 application for earthquake engineering SELECT now works on S file database Seisan compiled on Mac OSX Dieter Stoll 1 2 Information about SEISAN online SEISAN homepage The URL address where SEISAN and related software can be found is http www geo uib no Seismologi SOFTWARE or 129 177 55 13 instead of www geo uib no Here you can find information on the latest changes in SEISAN access the online manual download the software and much more SEISAN anonymous ftp server Seisan is available from the following ftp server ftp geo uib no or 129 177 55 4 Login ftp Password lt your email address gt The files are stored in the directory pub seismo SOFTWARE SEISAN_ 8 0 SEISAN mailing lists There are 2 maili
59. Ordaz contributed the DEGTRA A4 software Angel Rodriguez contributed the Perl reading routine and Terje Utheim the sfile Java program Mathilde B ttger S rensen has revised the manual and tested the distribution Dieter Stoll has provided information on how to compile on MacOSX and tested the software on Mac RefTek has provided the rt_seis program Version 8 1 Rodrigo Luciano Pereira Canabrava made a major contribution to SEISAN by writing and implementing routines to read and write SEED data Richard Luckett implemented the ISC location program Mathilde B ttger S rensen wrote scripts for the new macroseismic part Brian Baptie contributed tools to convert event data for use with travel time conversion programs Finally we will thank all the patient users who have suffered from the bugs and have given useful feedback 232 9 References Anderson D 1982 Robust earthquake location using M estimates PEPI 30 119 130 Banfill R 1996 PC SUDS Utilities A collection of tools for routine processing of seismic data stored in the seismic unified data system for DOS PC SUDS Version 2 5 Small Systems Support Boore D M 1983 Stochastic simulation of high frequency ground motions based on seismological models of the radiated spectra Bulletin of the Seismological Society of America 73 1865 1884 Boore D M 1989 Quantitative ground motion estimates In Earthquake Hazards and the Design of Constructed Facilities in the Eas
60. S199206 7 top seismo seismo REA BER__ 1992 06 30 1504 30L S199206 HYA EGD S ES 2 Note that the numbers to the left originate from the index file and do not have any importance The long name with the directory structure is the name of the pick file S file in the database if the S file is in the local directory it can have just the event id in this example starting with 30 The waveform file name is in the S file Following the S file name is like in the parameter file first a line with station codes followed by a line of component codes Like in the parameter file if a component is not given it will be assumed that the component is S Z THE COMPONENT LINE MUST BE THERE EVEN IF BLANK Below is an example of a codaq inp file where it is assumed that the S files are the current directory This file can also be generated with DIRF 16 0343 38L S199206 HYA KMY BER ASK TRO 16 1311 58L S199206 HYA S E 30 1504 30L S199206 HYA EGD S S E Program operation The program first reads the parameter file default codaq par which must be in your current directory It then reads the codaq inp file with the events to analyze also in current directory The S file names given here can as shown in the examples above be in the database or elsewhere e g in your local directory In the S file the name of the waveform file is given If more than one waveform file is g
61. SEISAN GSE SEED SAC ASCII is used This manual resides in the directory INF see below when the system has been implemented on your computer The file is called seisan_8 0 pdf Adobe PDF The SEISAN system is built of programs made by many different individuals without who it would never have been possible to make SEISAN Acknowledgement is made throughout this manual where appropriate or in the acknowledgement section at the end SEISAN now contains so many programs that when a new version is released it is not possible to check all the options in all programs and we rely on the user to help finding the bugs please report SEISAN is freely available for all non commercial use 1 1 Latest changes Version 8 1 SEED read seed and miniseed data write miniseed read seed response files Macromap make a map with macroseismic data Correlation program tool to use cross correlation to identify groups of similar events and to determine relative phase arrivals Seicut tool to cut waveform files Hyp_isc ISC location program Seedresp2gse convert seed response file to GSE format Rdseed_many cut a large SEED volume into file of equal size Nor2dd and nor2jhd_pujol prepare input files for travel time inversion programs Postscript output file name suffix is changed from plt to eps Version 8 0 Improved graphics scaling redraw after window was covered cursor and font can be selected colors on Linux Unix only
62. SILSEI SIL network ASCII files to SEISAN SUDSEI PCSUDS to SEISAN TERSEI Terra ASCII to SEISAN WGSSEI WGSN format to SEISAN For each program a summary of capabilities is mentioned The platforms available all for all or specific name channel definition file available chan def yes or no and if the program will look for response files in the CAL directory to insert in the headers resp yes or no If you do not find the conversion program here look on the ORFEUS website for other programs that might convert to one of the formats used above http orfeus knmi nl other services conversion shtml ARCSEI Reftek archive to SEISAN ARCSEI is a program to automate the extraction of data from a RefTek data archive and the conversion to SEISAN format The program works interactively and with a simple text interface that asks the user to enter the details for the data extract Based on the user selected criteria the program 1 extracts the data from the archive in Passcal format using ARCFETCH 2 converts the Passcal data files to SEISAN format using RT_SEIS and 3 merges the SEISAN files if merging is activated by the user using SEISEI The program is written in Fortran and works on Windows only The ARCSEI program can be used in various ways e to extract a single time window from one or several stations e to extract several time windows from one or several stations e to extract sequential time windows from one or several stations
63. T channel will use the response of the E channel so for instrument response removal to be correct the 2 channels must have the same response curve 6 2 10 Data manipulation commands Select other channels o Oth The channel selection menu comes up again Go back one channel in single trace mode go back one event in multitrace mode if MULPLT is started from EEV B Back Select other waveform files from S file W OthW If more than one waveform file available for the event one or several others can be selected Delete waveform files This can only be done in multitrace mode The command is d DelW and the cursor must be above the top frame of the plot There are two possibilities 1 Input is from filenr lis The current file is deleted and if in default mode the plot moves on to the next event 2 MULPLT is started from EEV If only one waveform file is available the program proceeds as under 1 The waveform file is deleted and the waveform file entry in the S file remains However if more than one waveform file is available the user can use a menu to select which files to delete Only the waveform file entries in the S file are deleted the waveform files remain This option is mostly used with SEISNET Delete S files D Del S This command deletes the current S file It can only be used if MULPLT is called from EEV No waveform files are deleted Merge waveform files given in S file M Merge 91 The files will be me
64. There should now be a file called seisan_X Y_UN X tar in your directory 3 Install SEISAN tar xvf seisan tar Check that the SEISAN directories have been created If SEISAN has been installed without executable files they can all be generated with the command make all from the PRO directory On Sun this requires that the Sun compilers be installed on Linux it requires the GNU Fortran compilers See also section on compilation 3 6 Install Workshop libraries In the SUP directory of the Solaris distribution the file sun_ws _lib tar Z includes the libraries that are needed to run SEISAN on Solaris in case the compilers are not installed The file is a compressed tar file The files can be extracted with uncompress sun_ws _lib tar Z and then tar xvf sun_ws lib tar The library files can be stored in any directory in the system but the environmental variable LD_LIBRARY_PATH has to be set accordingly If you are using the C shell this can be done by adding to the cshrc file the line setenv LD_LIBRARY_PATH path LD_LIBRARY_PATH This would add path which is the path to where the libraries are to LD_LIBRARY_PATH which normally is already defined 4 Set system parameters If you are doing an update some of the following settings can be skipped Activate SEISAN In your cshrc file the aliases and paths used by SEISAN are defined by adding the line source seismo COM SEISAN where seismo is
65. a PostScript file that you can print Optionally a limited number of pages can be selected from the bul ps file for printing The header page is still included and the page numbers correspond to the original page numbers 6 10 Reports and statistics SEISAN has several programs for extracting and writing out data for plotting or printing statistics most of which will be listed in this section Report The program extracts parameter data from all header lines in a CAT file and rearranges the data in a table In additions there is an option to rearrange order and location of magnitudes on the header line Below is an example of a run where the input CAT file is called collect out report collect out Below is shown parameters which can be chosen for output A return will chose all placing any character under a field will chose that parameter in the output Each field starts with a capital letter and ends within the following blank The order of the output can be changed by placing a number under the field and fields will be written out in the order of the numbers E after time la L E is distance and event id s agency for magnitude The following example shows that Mc error are selected and written out in given order Date TimeE L 45 30 sate Lonk Dep E 20 Date TimeE x umber umber umber Number umber umber umber umber Number umber Output Outpu
66. above changed to zero by the consistency check or set to 1 because the phase is not recognized an asterisk will appear after the final weight in the residual printout Determining which travel time software is used The parameter test 57 is used to determine whether a layered model or IASPEI91 software is used to calculate the travel times and their derivatives For the initial starting location the distances from each station are calculated and IASPEI91 is used if any of them exceed test 57 However this can be overridden by the distance indicator in column 22 of the Nordic header record If this is L a crustal model is used regardless of distance whereas if it is D IASPEI91 is used while R has no effect i e test 57 is still used So if either a crustal model or IASPEI91 tables are wanted use either L or D respectively Starting epicenter location The program uses a starting location algorithm reset test 56 which tests the rms of all starting locations and select the minimum rms solution see HYP manual User defined start location If an S is written in the input S file at column 45 of the epicenter line the location starts at the location epicenter given on the header line If an S is written in column 44 on header line the depth iteration will start at depth given on the header line If N is written in column 45 the nearest station will be used irrespective of global settings Starting depth If no event specific st
67. as follows x2 where P is the Peterson Power spectrum FPF is the discrete Fourier transform At is the sample interval and T is the length of the time window The factor 2 comes from the fact that only the positive frequencies are used so only half the energy is accounted for The total power is proportional to the length of the time window since the noise is considered stationary so by normalizing by T the length of the time window should not influence the results This noise option is a handy method of checking the noise characteristics of a given seismic station and compare it to global standards This kind of analysis can also be done with the SPEC program section 6 23 For more information see instrument pdf in INF Figure 21 Example of a noise spectrum Acceleration power db m s 2 2 He 100 120 140 mDGCOntGRmn moe 160 180 0 0100 0 0316 0 100 0 316 1 0 2 d 10 0 Frequency Hz Problems There is currently no check if a displacement seismogram has been calculated when calculating the spectral parameters If spectral analysis is done outside EEV output in MULPLT OUT 99 or with EEV when there is no origin time and or epicentral distance the output results are wrong for moment etc Before calculating moment etc the S file MUST HAVE BEEN UPDATED SINCE BOTH THE DISTANCE AND ORIGIN TIMES ARE USED If the spectra get very high amplitude levels when correcting for instrument this might be caused by
68. been made and the list of files in filenr lis is available a response file can then be selected with a number The program produces a PostScript output file with name presp eps 4 7 Working with catalogs It is often convenient to have multiple solutions of hypocenters in the database S files or the CAT files Typically data has been entered from different sources and merged to form a single catalog The first hypocenter line in the file is then considered the prime hypocenter estimate and this is the one used by e g EPIMAP to plot the hypocenters The order of the hypocenters can be rearranged by CAT_AGA Several programs use all the hypocenter lines The magnitude correlation program will search any hypocenter line and the database selection program SELECT will optionally also use all the hypocenter lines When the data base is updated with a new location and magnitude UPDATE section 6 7 it is only the first hypocenter line which is overwritten If there is a magnitude in the 3 position it is left unchanged unless it has the same agency as used for updating This is useful in normal observatory practice where it is common to put in some external agency magnitude which then must be left unchanged If more magnitudes than 3 are calculated they will be placed on a subsequent hypocenter line identified by having the same year month day and hypocenter agency as given on the first line In order to merge different catalogs it might be an advantage
69. by default to 0 and can only take the values 0 1 2 3 4 and 5 It is an integer data found in column 40 and occupies a 1 character position WAVEFORM_BASE BER S 40 5 The keyword WAVEFORM_BASE is set by default to BER It is a string with a maximum of 5 characters and it is found in the column 40 of the configuration file Below is shown part of the content of MULPLTDEF INP KEYWORD D R V1 V2 T C W X D R V1 V2 T C W X D default R Range R U Vl value T type F 1I S C column W width X decimals X_SCREEN_SIZE 90 0 R 10 100 F 40 4 0 Size of initial X window in of total screen Size of initial X window in of total screen SPECTRAL Q0 440 0 R 0 1000 F 40 6 1 Q0 for spectral analysis Q is defined as q0 f qalpha default 0 meaning no Q correction SPECTRAL KAPPA 0 0 R 0 10 F 40 5 2 Spectral kappa near surface attenuation Spectral kappa near surface attenuation default 0 meaning no attenuation 26 4 USING SEISAN Once the system has been installed it is ready to use Usually all work should be done in the WOR directory or on a multi user system from your own directory To move to WOR type WO Unless you have to do system work it will not be necessary to move to any other directories However to do so just type the first two letters of the directory name like DA to move to the DAT directory On a PC the Edit editor is default invoked with command edit and on SUN the vi
70. bytes The additional bytes are thrown away the relevant bytes fished out and swapped if the file is written on a different computer than where it is read Since there is no information stored in the header of the file giving the byte address of each channel the routine must read the first file header calculate how many bytes there are down to where the next channel starts jump down and repeat the process until the desired channel is reached this is also how SUDS files are read However compared to reading the file as unformatted only a fraction of the file is read to fish out a particular channel Once the channel header has been read the start address is stored in the subroutine so any subsequent access to that channel is very fast Overall random access to SEISAN waveform files is much faster with the binary read than the previous version 5 0 and earlier unformatted read Only in the case where the whole file is read is the unformatted read faster Sun and Linux file structure PC structure from version 7 0 PC file structure Up to and inluding version 6 0 one byte K indicates start of file one byte of bytes following 4 bytes of bytes following 4 bytes bytes in prev write one byte of bytes in previous record 4 bytes of bytes following one byte of bytes in following record From version 7 0 the Linux and PC file structures are exactly the same On Sun the structure is the same except that the bytes
71. can tailor the appearance to local needs and the program can produce bulletins of hypocenters only or both hypocenters and phase readings In addition to the above programs several programs are available for database creation input and output of large data sets and conversion and manipulation of waveform data In order to get an idea of how routine processing works some examples of routine processing will be given below Case A Telemetry network with 32 channel central recording The network generates waveform event files which are transferred to SEISAN The tasks are 1 Convert waveform files to SEISAN format many events can be converted in one operation Inspect events with MULPLT From MULPLT false triggers are deleted and real events are put into the database Events are at this stage identified as local regional or distant Phase picks can be done at this stage but is usually done later 2 Interactive phase picking earthquake location magnitude etc done with EEV Automatic phase picking is also possible at this stage 3 Database is updated UPDATE once a suitable interval has been processed interactively usually a month Updating means permanently storing the hypocenters etc in the database 4 Make hypocenter maps with EPIMAP 5 Produce a bulletin with BUL Case B 3 telemetry networks and one broad band station The routine is the same as above except for one additional step between 1 and 2 Since several data
72. command and if also available as a mouse click the letters in the menu box Channel selected is shown COMMANDS ARE CASE SENSITIVE selection In multitrac mode on or several channels can be by clicking on the station code If only one channel is selected and toggl t to single trace mode is done a new toggl in single trace mode will display all previous channels again Zooming a A b B Back ee Gs d d Del W D Del S e f Next F FE g Groun h Azim is I Iasp Select a window with the mouse and a zoomed window will appear below in single mode and replace the plot in multi mode In Single mode it is also possible replot the zoomed window in place of the original by placing the cursor above the trace when selecting the zoom window This makes it possible to zoom in the zoomed window In order to go back to the original window in multi mode do an opposite zoom meaning picking the last point first Read amplitude Position cursor at the top of a wave and press a Position cursor at the bottom of the wave and press a Amplitude 0 p and period are now stored These values will be stored with the NEXT phase pick Amplitude and period are displayed Automatic amplitude reading phase become AMP or read phase AMP but only after using a twice for reading amplitude Filter 5 10 hz see below Go back one trace in single trace mod
73. correcting for Q With a Q of 100 and a distance of 10 000 km this gives a very large correction The Q correction can be disabled in the MULPLT DEF file If picks are made but no readings appear in the S file or readings appear with wrong component the waveform file component might not have been defined in subroutine componen for If poles and zeros are used to remove the response rotation cannot be used at the same time Figure 22 Spectral analysis 100 On top the original trace is seen and on the bottom the displacement spectrum log log unit nm sec and Hz The level and slope has been indicated interactively Note the noise spectrum at the bottom of the figure F Fin Q Qui R Rep Z M Flt G Grd W WA S Spe UO A Amp H 3C C Cod D Del LIP 2EP 3 IPG 4 EPG5 IPN 6 EPN7 IS 8 ES 9 ISG 0 ESG ISN ESN 9601 21 0215 39S NSN_040 KTKIS Z 96121 2 15 39 703 P C ES 35 40 45 50 55 Max amp 205425 3 Displacement L o 84 835 m P l H 2 25 u 2 e 15 L 05 0 0 03 10 32 10 0 Frequency Hz Sel window for spectrum SEC 101 Figure 23 Three component analysis On top the Z channel is shown together with the window used for the 3 channels Z N and E shown below The signals below has been filtered between 1 and 5 Hz and the resulting azimuth of arrival is 160 degrees and a correlation coefficient of 0 2 The apparent velocity is 9 8 km sec MENU LIP 2 EP 3 IPG 4 EPG 5 IPN 6 EPN
74. error ellipses are plotted if smaller than 100 km Name of intensity files SEISAN standard format see Appendix 1 are also entered here The file name must have the 3 letters mac after the See also section 6 32 Input files for EPIMAP can be made e g with the COLLECT command which collects S files into one file or with the SELECT command selecting data from the database using several criteria HYP also generates a CAT file hyp out which may be used as input to EPIMAP Magnitudes The program will read all 3 magnitudes magnitude1 magnitude2 and magnitude3 in the header line It will use the first non zero magnitude in the order magnitude1 magnitude3 and magnitude2 Epimap will search the first header line only If it is desired to use a particular magnitude from any header line for plotting use MAG program first to select particular magnitude type which is then placed in first header line magnitude position one Program NORHEAD can move magnitudes from following header lines to the first line Program REPORT can move magnitudes around on the header line A typical run is as follows comment after Projection menu 1 POLAR STEREOGRAPHIC conformal azimuthal 2 ORTHOGRAPHIC view from infinity azimuthal 3 MERCATOR cylindrical conformal 4 LAMBERT EQUAL AREA azimuthal 5 GNOMONIC Great Circles are straight lines 6 AZIMUTHAL EQUIDISTANT distance from origin i
75. for a gradient model uses an adapted version of Fred Klein s TTCAL routine which he uses in his program TTGEN to generate a table of values from which to interpolate travel times and their derivatives in HYPOINVERSE The program is easy to run and the output can be plotted with some standard xy plotting tool 6 20 3 IASP travel times for MULPLT This program is a special version of IASP91 to be used in connection with EEV and MULPLT Giving 180 command iasp from the EEV prompt or from within MULPLT the program will read the current active S file and for each station calculate possible IASP91 phases and arrival times relative to the hypocenter and origin time given in S file The origin information can be obtained from two places in the S file 1 The header lines are searched for hypocenter lines and the first found after the main header will be used 2 If no secondary header lines the main header line is used The intention of this order is that it is possible to put in a PDE solution in a secondary header line option INPUTONE in EEV so that theoretical travel times are calculated relative to a fixed solution and not the temporary solution made by the local agency The IASP91 tables can be found in the local directory or DAT and have the same names as used in HYP and TTIM The program generates an output file iasp out in Nordic format This file is read by MULPLT and the theoretical phases displayed on the screen The number of phas
76. for different magnitude intervals It may be necessary to divide your catalogue into two i pre instrumental and ii instrumental Programs SELECT and CATSTAT can be used for this purpose 3 Convert magnitudes into one uniform magnitude preferably to moment magnitude Mw To do this regression curves must be prepared for different magnitude scales Program MAG can be used for this purpose 4 Clean up the catalogue for dependant events i e induced seismicity non earthquakes foreshocks aftershocks earthquake swarms Here a search has to be made for clusters of events both in time and space Plots of histograms for specific sequences of time and space will reveal this Program CLUSTER can be used for this purpose The probable explosions may be removed by using the program EXFILTER 5 The evaluation of the catalogue completeness is dependent upon the clean up process and the magnitude unification It is therefore necessary that steps 2 4 be repeated until a reliable catalogue is prepared 6 Select the set of earthquakes from your catalogue from the part which is complete for the chosen threshold magnitude and uniform in magnitude scale Program SELECT can be used with different criteria for this purpose Note the catalogue time span 7 Prepare a seismicity map for the area of interest with the selected data using EPIMAP Delineate the earthquake source zones Here zooming and the area selection procedures of EPIMAP may be used 8 Us
77. for the computed return periods to individual contour files Alternatively if you have used EQRISK to compute hazard the output file eqrisk out can be converted using EQRSEI program into individual contour files for previously defined return periods 21 Plot the hazard maps for the desired return periods Contouring option from EPIMAP can be used for this purpose only for the EQRISK Plot also the graphs for probability of exceedance rates vs PGA for selected critical sites 22 Try to assess the local site effects for the critical sites SPEC program can be used to obtain the amplification factors due to unconsolidated sediments These factors can be used later to adjust the response spectra Many of the programs mentioned above are described individually throughout this manual at different sections In the following the programs that are directly relevant to hazard computations and not described in other sections of the manual are explained in detail CRISIS99 CRISIS99 is a computer program to compute seismic hazard in extended regions It was developed at the Institute of Engineering UNAM Mexico by Mario Ordaz mors pumas iingen unam mx Armando Aguilar and Jorge Arboleda Basic input data are geometry of the sources seismicity of the sources and attenuation relations Source geometry can be modeled as 1 area sources using a polygon with at least three vertex longitude latitude and depth must be given for each vertex so t
78. from output of Herrmann modeling only tested on Sun HYPO71 Locate with HYPO71 The database is not updated not well tested on PC IASP Generate a file with theoretical arrival times for the current event The command will only work if the event has an epicenter and origin time in header line or a subsequent type 1 line see also INPUTEPI and INPUTONE These theoretical times will then be displayed with mulplt the next time command P is used in EEV The theoretical times are listed in file iasp out See section 6 20 3 for more information The command can also be used directly from MULPLT IL Makes a location with the ISC location program For more info see section 6 1 4 INPUTONE Makes an additional type one line hypocenter line in the file Enter the data exactly under the columns indicated The line will be entered exactly as written so it is possible to enter any part of the information INPUTEPI Works like INPUTONE except that it overwrites information on the first header line if non blank information is given Use INPUTEPI to add information to the first header line like e g the depth If existing nonblank characters on the line are to be replaced by blanks e g remove a magnitude use underscore _ INPUTX Makes a comment line with xnear and xfar values INVRAD Runs the moment tensor inversion program see description below on moment tensor 37 inversion Jyyyymm BAS This command makes it possible to change mon
79. g a new epicenter file The file can have any name so several predefined plot definitions can be stored and thereby automate map production profile out The file stores the parameters used with the profiles The file is overwritten for each new profile parameter selection An example is 60 93583 7 21519 63 29655 1 36709 63 39875 5 01266 27 8 3 The first line gives latitude and longitude of the 3 points used for selecting profile see explanation for interactive section next line the azimuth calculated for the profile and the last line gives the number of profiles The file can be used to repeat the same profile as in an earlier run or to predefine a more exact profile than can be selected with the cursor profile num Output of distance and depth of the profile in km Distance is only correct in unzoomed plots Problems Known bug When selecting events with polygon sometimes some events remain outside Figure 26 and Figure 27 shows examples of plots made with EPIMAP 113 Figure 26 An example of using EPIMAP The top shows epicenters plotted and the bottom the first of a series of profiles The frames on the top plot show the location of the profiles 0 SSESEES Vu OD IN E ou H ra Magnitudes Total events 2811 Selected events 599 60 0 55 0 0 0 65 0 70 0 5 0 10 0 15 0 30 0 25 0 20 0 10 20 30 50 SEISMICITY IN NORWAY 50 100 200 250 300 350
80. given when 500 phases are generated or set up SEISAN with larger dimensions see section 3 Theoretical local crustal phases for the current model can be calculated with program WKBJ and displayed see section 6 19 Theoretical phases can also be calculated when using the location option see next section 2 Pick phases When a trace is displayed on the screen all theoretical phases inside the time window will also be shown To distinguish the theoretical phases they are prefixed with a y and displayed below the trace normal phases have E or blank and are displayed above the trace Position cursor where you see a phase which you think corresponds to a theoretical phase and press y The nearest theoretical phase will now be placed at that position with a prefix E Only theoretical phases selected in this way will be written in the S file Note that the phase names can be up to 8 characters long see Appendix 1 for the definition of long phase names If the phases fit badly start looking at the P phase If that does not fit the theoretical P phase change the origin time in the S file so that the P arrival fits and recalculate the theoretical phases PROBLEM In multitrace mode only one theoretical phase can be picked Replot must be made before picking the next Locate earthquake If several phases have been read and saved in the S file the event can in multitrace mode be located with command Locat just as in EEV The screen is cl
81. if you are correcting file names since the entries in the S files are otherwise not fixed Example of running WAVFIX No wavfix def file will use internal information for channel codes This program will change header times in all headers with the same amount The waveform file name will be changed at the same time and adjusted to the standard name If no time correction is given only the waveform names are adjusted In addition channels names can be changed if a wavfix def file is available Time correction in seconds return for no correction Input options 1 filenr lis or waveform file name 2 Nordic file Filename or number filenr lis for all Input file name 1994 06 16 1841 57S TEST__019 Output file name 1994 06 16 1843 57S 019 Input file name 1994 10 04 1324 00S TEST__016 Output file name 1994 10 04 1326 00S 016 Input file name 1994 10 04 1324 24S TEST__016 Output file name 1994 10 04 1326 24S 016 Note WAVFIX ONLY works with SEISAN format WAVFULLNAME Prints full filename including path for a waveform file by searching directories and databases specified in SEISAN DEF Filename is to be given on prompt line e g wavfullname 1996 06 13 1248 15S NSN__003 6 12 File conversion and modification programs There are mainly two types of files to convert parameter files with readings and related parameters and binary waveform files PARAMETER FILES CAT_AGA Records
82. implies a loose lower bound and LORS 1 implies a strict lower bound COEF I is a coefficient modifying the expected number of exceedances from gross source I Its most common value is 1 0 AMO I is the loose or strict bound lower magnitude or intensity for gross source I AM1 I is the upper bound magnitude or intensity for gross source I BETA I is the value of R for gross source I It is equal to the natural logarithm of 10 times the Richter b value for the source RATE I is the rate of occurrence of events having magnitudes of intensities greater than AMO I If a discrete distribution on intensities has been used to calculate the rate the user may wish to specify AMO I as one half intensity unit lower than the lowest intensity used to establish the rate Note that for gross sources RATE I is in units of number per year for background seismicity it is in units of number per year per 10 000 km FDEPTH I is the focal depth of events in gross source in km If epicentral distances are required for all sources and for background seismicity for the attenuation function insert zero for 200 FDEPTH I If no background seismicity is desired leave the last card in this set completely blank Card 8 Format 4F 10 2 X1 Y1 X2 Y2 There must be NRS 1 NRS 2 NRS NGS NGS of these cards The first NRS 1 1 cards specify co ordinates of subsources in gross source 1 the next NRS 2 1 cards specify co ordinates of subsources for gross
83. may be different arguments for or against one or the other format depending on the user s preferences and requirements SAC and GSE are widely used formats and therefore may be attractive SEISAN is a multi trace binary format with direct read access to individual traces The SEISAN format is probably your best choice if your main processing system is SEISAN and because it is easily used on all computer platforms SAC is a single trace binary or ASCII format with a large number of header parameters The SAC format is widely used in research oriented programs GSE is a multi trace ASCII waveform format that includes various sub formats It is widely used for data exchange Although the GSE format can keep any number of traces it is recommended to include no more than 3 traces in a single file depending on the number of samples since when reading a particular trace the whole file may have to be read For the future the SEED MINISEED format might be the best option since most data centers use it However the SEISAN implementation should probably be tested a bit more SEISAN cannot read SEED files using all options possible in SEED but data from the largest data centers as well as many observatories have been used for testing With respect to MINISEED there are probably less problems since MINISEED is simpler than SEED SEISAN can also write MININSEED program WAVETOOL but cannot write SEED unless GSE2SEED is used The SEISAN implementation is desc
84. means not all system and compiler libraries are included in the executables If you are running Solaris the system libraries are normally installed but the Sun system compilers might not be installed If the compilers are not installed you have the following options 1 you install the Sun workshop compilers license is not needed since only the libraries are required 2 you install the required libraries which are part of the Solaris SEISAN distribution instructions below Linux The programs have been compiled under Redhat Linux7 2 using the GNU compilers gcc and g77 It is recommended to recompile the programs since otherwise the programs might not run on your Linux distribution In the Redhat distribution of Linux the Fortran compiler is not part of the standard distribution it has to be installed see your Linux manual for instructions THE USER ACCOUNT MUST BE SET UP TO USE csh or tcsh in order for the SEISAN scripts e g SEISAN to work like Otherwise the scripts 11 need to be adopted to the shell used Instructions The first step is to install the distribution the procedure is the same for all Unix platforms 1 Get tar file Copy the distribution file for your platform from CD or transfer it through FTP or from the web site to the SEISAN top directory this could be a directory seismo under the home directory 2 Decompress uncompress seisan_X Y_UNIX tar Z or if suffix gz gunzip seisan_X Y_UNIX tar gz
85. of the database and can be extracted by SELECT or the editor 4 2 4 Data base tools content and checks Content of data bases program BASE In the REA directory a binary file called REA LOG contains information about number of events in all data base Initially the file has no information but each time programs EEV HYP UPD CHECK_BASE or COLLECT are executed the information is updated for the months accessed The information can be displayed with program BASE which first shows available data bases and the user can then select one to get info for particular months Make sure to use right case for data base names always in upper case on Unix systems The program is still a bit experimental Check content of S files for magnitudes and residuals etc program CHECKRE The program can read data bases or CAT files and check events for large residuals abnormal depths etch The program is intended for quality control the parameters hardwired in the program might not suit all Check program source listing Check for data base related errors program CHECK_BASE The data base depends on error free S files and that there is a correspondence between the S file name and the event ID This should normally be ok however errors can occur during editing or there can be program crashed producing errors The program reads the data base and checks for Missing ID lines If ID line is missing it can be put in manually or doing an UPDATE No correspon
86. of windows with best SNR on the vertical comp NC number of windows with acceptable polarization S Q quality class 1 best 4 worst PS P S wave discriminator 0 S 10 P AZI backazimuth in degrees measured from North through East DA variability in azimuth deg VE apparent velocity km s DV variability in apparent velocity km s Note azimuth and apparent velocity calculations are based on the Example of input file AUTOPIC INP for AUTO This is the parameter file needed by program AUTO The following rules apply 1 All lines with in the first column are comment lines 2 Lines with a blank in column 1 are read for fixed parameters 3 All lines starting with filter_x where x is a number are read for filter variable parameters 4 All lines with in the first column are read for stations to process 5 A brief explanation of all parameters is given in preprocess inf FIXED PARAMETERS THAT ARE USED THROUGHOUT THE PROGRAM Lwind Ishift Isigma Cohmin dmin Svelo Nfilt Crat Lwin Thres l l l l l AP d o d oO d oO d d o d dp o o dp 4 0 152 0 6 0 A 0 23 75 3 0 1 6 30 0 32 0 PARAMETERS THAT ARE FILTER DEPENDANT Filter_nr Window F1 F2 Thrshl Thrsh2 ilter_l 0 1 0 4 0 E 25595 ilter_2 0 6 4 0 8 0 1 80 2 60 ilter_3 0 4 8 0 16 0 1 90 24715 STATIONS TO USE IN THE PROCESSING
87. only or GSE format SEISAN format is slightly different depending on which compute platform it is written and byte swapping has to be done in some cases In order to automatically handle the reading of waveform files irrespective of format and computer platform a set of standard routines are used waveform for and an include block where all parameters and data end up waveform inc The sample program is called sample_read_wav for The program illustrates how to read many waveform files belonging to one event as if it was one file irrespective of format It also demonstrates how to read just one waveform file There is no detail on how to write a SEISAN binary file in this program but some info is given under the format description in Appendix 2 and the program tsig for described below illustrates a simple write The sample program sample_read_cont illustrates how to extract out a time segment of the continuous data base The program also shows how to write a Seisan file with all headers The program is started from the command prompt sample_read_cont start_time interval where start time is yyyymmddhhmmss and interval is interval in minutes There is also a routine in Java available to read all SEISAN binary formats The program is called SFORMAT written by T Utheim Similarly there is a sample program to read all SEISAN binary formats in Perl written by Angel Rodriguez The program is called seibinasc pl and you need a Perl interpreter
88. only from EEV REE Register from EEV DUB Duplicated event NEW New event T2 Free 13 26 Date and time of last action 27 Free 28 30 Help text for operator 31 34 Operater code 39 Free 36 42 Help text for status 43 56 Status flags not yet defined ki Free 58 60 Help text for ID 61 74 ID year to second 75 If d this indicate that a new file id had to be created which was one or more seconds different from an existing ID to avoid overwrite 76 Indicate if ID is locked Blank means not locked L means locked 238 Type H line High accuracy hypoenter line Columns 255 As type 1 line 16 Free s Seconds Cp 3 ER Free 24 32 Latitude 9 5 33 Free 34 44 Longitude f10 5 44 Free 45 52 Depth f8 3 53 Free 54 59 RMS 6 3 60 79 Free 80 H Type E13 and EC3 line explosion information Example 1980 0124 0927 LE HAA E13 CHARGE T 0 5 Haakonsvern underwater explosion EC3 E13 Information on explsion site time and agency same format as a type 1 line no magnitudes used last 3 columns must be E13 EC3 Information on charge and site Columns SE Info text TS Blank 13 22 Charge in tons f10 3 23507 Any information a 78 80 EC3 Type MACRO3 line File name of macroseismic observations in ISO directory Example 1980 03 14 0456 05 MACRO MACRO3 An example of the file is Sunnfjord 1980 314 456 5 GMT 1980 314 556 5 Local time Comment 60 500 5 270 1 0 EMS 5088 MJOELKERAAEN 60 560 5 260 1 0 EMS 5100 ISDALSTO
89. original CAT file in the database is NOT updated In order to do so an update outside JSEISAN must be done see SEISAN manual Help Function The help system implementation is based on PDF files When the user clicks the lt HELP gt button a list of PDF files is shown Figure 13 The list is stored in the file helpmenu inp which is found in the DAT directory You can edit this file for adding new PDF files to the help system ES Selection of Help Files x Java Graphical Interface for SEISAN jseisan pdf SEISAN Configuration Editor seiscont pdf sEISAaN Manual seisan_ 2 pdt Seismic Hazard crisis99 pdf Theory of Epicenter Location epi pdt Hypocenter Manual hypocent_new pdtf Book on Seismic Instrumentation instrument pdt Pitsa Manual pitsaman pdf Theory of Up and Spectral Analysis qspec pdt Training Course in SEISAN seitrain pdft Velest Manual velest pdf Promac Manual promac pdt Surface Wave Analysis surface pdt Show Help Figure 13 Example list of PDF files used for the help system normally in DAT Configuration parameters in JSEISAN The following parameters used by JSEISAN are stored in the configuration file SEISAN DEF They can be edited through the program SEISCONF Most of them are defined to be used only with JSEISAN but some are already defined in the SEISAN configuration file SEISAN DEF EPIMAP_PROJECTION and EPIMAP_MAP_FILE OUTPUT_DIR Output Directory for S
90. out but when looking for it with EEV it is not there This can happen if an event has been deleted with EEV and no UPDATE has been made so that the event is still present in the CAT part of the database 6 5 Extracting events from the database COLLECT The command COLLECT is used for collecting many event files from the database S files into a single file This may be split into individual event files later using SPLIT The file can be used for exchanging data with other agencies or be used with the epicenter plotting program The questions are Base name for local directory name of index file or return for default base Start time End time return for end of month Compact output file Y N default At the end the program will give statistics of collected data and file name For getting data out of the database represented by the monthly CAT files use SELECT If an update has been made SELECT will always be the fastest program to use COLLECT and SELECT are the only programs that can make a CAT file from the individual S files Program input can also be on the prompt line below is an example collect start_time 19910912 end_time 19911015 base_name BER compact This means that a CAT file default is collected from BER and is written in compact format compact has no arguments The time interval is between 19910912 and 19911015 Only start_time is required the other arguments are optional The syntax is key
91. phase pics in the CAT file spec inp will be plotted Frequency band used Lower and upper frequency bands for the spectral plots Response removal If 0 no response is removed else 1 displacement 2 velocity 3 acceleration units is nm nm s and nm s s 4 Power spectral density in dB relative to 1m s 2 2 Hz This option is used for seismic background noise studies 5 Determine kappa The flat part of the spectrum frequency below corner frequency is approximated by a straight line and kappa calculated for each event and the average at the end in spec out file and on final plot The spectrum will normally be corrected for Q BUT NOT kappa For more details see application note qspec pdf in INF Make sure to set appropriate frequency limits and correct distance corrections Can be used for both P and S spectra A cal file for each channel must be available in the CAL directory see section 4 6 For relative spectra the response removal has no importance if the response is the same for the channels compared A simple correction can be made with Gain factor of channel 1 parameter above NOTE If moment or magnitude spectrum is made response removal MUST be 1 Rotate components If 1 the horizontal components are rotated This means that if the user has specified N or E radial or transverse respectively will be used instead The original data remain unchanged If start time of spectra are chosen by using P or S there must be a read
92. programs in SEISAN producing graphics on the screen use the SEISAN graphics system see also section 7 This produces fast and low quality graphics both on the screen and similar PostScript output files Most of these plots are not suitable for publication and many programs therefore also create output ASCII files of the main results which then can be put into more professional plotting routines The GMT Generic mapping Tools system is one of the more widely used plotting systems used in seismology Several programs in SEISAN therefore produce output that can be used with GMT or makes plots directly in GMT From version 8 0 of SEISAN a script is included GMTXY manual in INF which will produce nice xy graphics from specially made output files So far only programs SPEC CATSTAT and LSQ produce these output files the intention is to include this feature in more SEISAN programs If there is a need to produce better quality graphics there are several possibilities Maps GMTMAP Unix must be installed separately on CD W_EMAP Windows based mapping system Seismograms TRACEPLOT GMT based XY plots GMTXY GMT based Maps create GMT input files with SEIGMT Volcanic event distribution VOLCSTAT 57 5 INTRODUCTORY TRAINING COURSE The document SEISAN Version 8 0 introductory training which is a tutorial for new users is included in the distribution The testdata used in the exercises need to be installed see section 3 Going t
93. q fit must be larger than or equal to this value NOTE Correlation values are in reality negative but are always referred to as positive in the following An acceptable value depends on the data try to use a value higher than 0 5 in reality 0 5 Number of frequencies Number of frequencies to use maximum 10 5 is a good number Frequencies and bands The corresponding center frequencies and frequency bands The frequency band should increase with increasing frequency to avoid ringing E g 8 3 means that the signal is filtered between 6 5 and 9 5 Hz It is advisable to use constant relative bandwidth filtering to get an equal amount of energy into each band The relative bandwidth is defined as RBW fu fi fo where fu and f are upper and lower frequency limit respectively Such a filter would be e g 4 1 8 2 1644 The frequency representing the energy in a particular filter band is the geometric center frequency calculated as f x fa f Since the user probably wants to calculate coda Q at the given frequency the normal option new in SEISAN7 2 is that fu and fi are calculated such that the given bandwidth e g 4 Hz is used but the actual fu and fi will give the specified central frequency It is still possible to calculate as before where fu and fi will be exactly as specified but the geometrical center frequency will not correspond to specified center frequency by giving the bandwidth as a negative number Default stati
94. real spectrum given as frequencies and amplitudes The files are only generated if parameter SPECTRAL_OUTPUT is set in MULPLT DEF Setting this parameter will also generate an ASCII waveform file with the input signal used Power spectra The above spectra can also be displayed as power spectra if capital letters are used Using e g V instead of v will show the power velocity spectrum When the spectrum comes up see example in Figure 22 the axis units are log amplitude in nanometers sec displacement versus log frequency Hz The cursor can be used to select the level corner frequency and slope by defining the spectrum with a 3 point selection This 3 point selection is finished with f q or r with the same meaning as in picking mode The spectral values are displayed on the screen once q f or r is pressed The abbreviations are General parameters 96 Vel Velocity used km sec Vp or Vs Dens Density g cm 3 Dist Hypocentral distance km qo q0 for spectral amplitude correction qalpha qalpha for spectral amplitude correction k kappa On top of the general parameter is indicated which kind of spectrum is assumed P or S In order for the program to automatically determine which kind of spectrum to assume there must be a P or S reading displayed on the screen near the time window analyzed The reading must be within 10 sec of the start of the window If both a P and S reading is within 10 secs the nearest phase is chosen
95. results 166 Spreading parameter The geometrical spreading parameter used in q fit normally 1 0 is used Constant v in q qO f v For all q f values q0 is calculated using a fixed v use e g 1 0 This parameter has no influence on the individual q calculations Minimum signal to noise ratio In order to accept a q value for the average the signal to noise ratio must be above this value The signal to noise ratio is calculated using the last tRMS see next parameters secs of the filtered coda window and the first tRMS secs of the data file window If the data file starts with noise or in the P signal the s n ratio will be in error A reasonable value is 5 0 Maximum counts to use If the count value in a coda window is above this value the window is not used The intention is to avoid using clipped values From SEISAN version 7 2 there is also an automatic checking for clipped values in addition to maximum counts Noise window in front of signal and length of noise window tnoise and tRMS The first number is the number of seconds of noise to plot in front of the signal In previous versions 15 secs was hardwired but sometimes there was not 15 secs of noise before the P The second number is the length of the noise window used for calculation of the signal to noise ratio This was earlier hardwired to 5 secs Minimum correlation coefficient In order to use the q value in the average the correlation coefficient of the coda
96. results of the interactive processing are stored in the database S files MULPLT This is the general plotting and signal analysis program and can be used to pick phases and amplitudes correct for instrument response produce Wood Anderson seismograms for determining MI simulate WWSSN SP and LP records determine azimuth of arrival for 3 component stations rotate seismograms display theoretical arrival times for IASP91 phases to help identifying global phases and do spectral analysis MULPLT can be used from EEV or as a stand alone program HYP This is the general program for hypocenter location and is based on HYPOCENTER Lienert et al 1986 Lienert and Havskov 1995 The program can use nearly all common crustal and global phases 8 character ISC codes locate teleseismic events using the IASP91 model and use observed azimuth and apparent velocity The program can therefore be used with all types of input data whether from single stations or arrays HYP can be used from EEV or as a stand alone program Apparent velocity is currently only used for starting location EPIMAP This is the general hypocenter plotting program for making epicenter maps and hypocenter profiles The hypocenters can be plotted with elliptical error ellipses and EPIMAP can also be used for interactive selection of events in polygon areas For plotting hypocenters there is also an interface to GMT BUL The function of this program is to produce a bulletin The user
97. return or click on execute button and event 22 will be highlighted Commands All commands from EEV can be used and they are used like in EEV Typing e g and return or click on execute button will locate the event While typing the command it will appear in the EEN Command Line window The command can be edited and a command can be repeated by just pressing the Execute button or hitting return again However the 4 most used EEV commands can also be executed by clicking a command button Type Will display the content of the S file same as EEV T Edit Edit the S file same as EEV command E Plot Plot the traces same as EEV command P Locate Hypocenter location same as EEV command L In addition it is possible to display the S file header line by double clicking on the active event This corresponds to EEV command TT Program output and interaction Since all programs started by SEISAN are console based programs the screen output and input will appear on the console window The console window will come in the foreground if data is output or input is required As soon as the action stops the SEISAN window comes back to the foreground With a large screen resolution it is possible to see both windows at the same time It is also possible to switch between the two windows by clicking on the View Console button Access to the DOS prompt Since all programs under SEISAN run in the prompt mode it is often
98. seconds If time blank a default of 180 secs is used Find next unprocessed event in base ake parameters for synthetic modelling Type event Type only header line of event Updates S file with hypocenter etc Start user defined command as usercom sfile lt sfile name gt ake a wadati diagram Update list of S files Show location of waveform files Auto pic current event if readings available new pics will be added with a flag 35 Note Command letters can be upper or lower case Comments to commands XXX Go to event by number When giving a number only give the number of digits needed no formatting Thus e g to find event 7 or 777 write 7 or 777 respectively If there is not an event corresponding to the parameter specified EEV will go back to event 1 In the number command can be omitted Axxx Append another event to current event The event specified is appended to current event All header and lines in both files are saved and put in order in the current event The main first header is from the current event The ID line for the appended event is saved as a comment line The user will be questioned if the appended event is to be deleted AA Same as above using next event AUTOSIG Automatic processing with autosig program B Back one event BOUCH Run Bouchon s modeling program BOUSEI Make SEISAN file from Bouchon synthetic file C Copy events There are two option
99. sections of waveform data optionally applies some signal processing and then creates the output file s The input formats supported are SEISAN SEED MINISEED GSE and SAC Unix only and output formats are SEISAN MINISEED GSE and SAC Unix only The program can be used as a conversion program between these formats instead of using e g SACSEI It would also be possible to convert for example SAC and GSE files to SEISAN in one go When creating GSE MINISEED or SAC files the respective format code is added to the filenames The program can also extract data from a SEISAN continuous data base Note that for MINISEED writing only Steim1 compression is used Integer format is also possible but requires a parameter change in WAVETOOL and recompilation There are two input options 1 a single S file or a list of S files created with DIRF is also an index file which points to the waveform data or a filenr lis type of file that gives the waveform file names 2 a waveform file or a list of waveform files The program can be started either interactively without arguments or non interactive by specifying the commands as arguments The arguments are sfile lt sfile name gt The S file name of the event you want to extract waveform data from wav_files lt file name gt Extract from a list of waveform files in filenr lis format Input from S file will be ignored This option merges all files from list if within a reasonable time window
100. station coordinates will use high accuracy input if available EPIMAP will always read in high accuracy mode if any high accuracy data is present whether station locations or hypocenters FK will always read high accuracy station coordinates if available and FK can therefore now be used with very small arrays Programs with output affected by high accuracy mode MULPLT will write the phase readings as f6 3 instead of f5 2 like e g 11 234 instead of 11 23 For normal use this is not needed and the files look better if high accuracy mode is not used HYP and UPDATE writes an extra high accuracy hypocenter line which has been given type H An example is 1996 6 3 2006 35 5 D 46 787 153 722 33 0 TES 15 1 9 3 4STES 5 8BTES 5 6BPDE1 1996 6 3 2006 35 511 46 78711 153 72245 33 011 1 923 H The format is Column 1 15 As type 1 line 16 Free AN Seconds f6 3 23 Free 24 32 Latitude 9 5 33 Free 34 44 Longitude f10 5 44 Free 45 52 Depth 8 3 53 Free 54 59 RMS f6 3 60 79 Free 80 H 4 3 Interactive work with earthquake locations EEV command The idea of SEISAN for interactive work is that the user should be able to easily jump from event to event and run several different programs with one event without restarting every time This is done with the command EEV see below In this interactive mode events are picked edited located moved deleted etc until a satisfactory solution is found In the interactive mode NO
101. terms of probabilities of exceedances vs earthquake intensity measures such as peak ground acceleration PGA for a given site or a grid of sites for up to eight different return periods Currently 1975 version is used EQRSEI Converts the output file from the EQRISK program eqrisk out to individual contour files corresponding to each return period specified These files can later be used directly as an input to EPIMAP to plot the PGA contour maps SPEC Computes amplitude spectra for a given set of earthquake records and plots spectral ratios It can be used to assess local site effects Probabilistic earthquake hazard computations can be done using the two alternative programs CRISIS99 or EQRISK In addition the programs listed above and a number of other programs that manipulates earthquake data within the SEISAN package are useful tools to assess the parameters that are needed to perform a seismic hazard analysis for an area of interest The two main programs CRIATT for computing the attenuation tables and CRISIS99 modified version 1999 to compute seismic hazard are explained in more detail in the following Both programs are written by Mario Ordaz of the Institute of Engineering UNAM Ordaz 1991 1999 The well known hazard program EQRISK on the other hand is written by Robin K McGuire and the original manual is distributed through United States Department of the Interior Geological Survey McGuire 1976 The two alternative haz
102. than 0 5 For comparing coda values in different regions ALL processing parameters must be identical and average lapse times should be very similar Figure 32 gives an example of a codaq plot There are no options for the codaq plots and the length of the window is always the first 200 secs from the original trace If origin time or coda window is outside this 200 sec window and data is available the program continues but the coda window is not plotted on the figure 170 Figure 32 An example of a coda Q plot On top is shown the original trace and below the filtered coda windows Note that 15 secs of noise are shown in front of the selected filtered coda window The first 5 secs of the noise shown is used for calculating the S N ratio On each filtered plot is given F Center frequency Q Q value zero means no Q value could be calculated S N Signal to noise ratio DA 95 26170 1 N M25 TP 229 TC 815 WIN 150 START 20 5983 D 20 D D 0 D w D 30 D a D w 20 0 D 0 D 10 20 F 1 0 Q 0 CO 0 26 SN 0 F 20 Q 19 CO 41 S N 3 FE40 Q 1223 CO 22 S N 8 80 N 130 166 a D 10 20 0 D 0 D D 20 0 D 0 D D H 0 D F 8 0 GI CO 29 S N 16 280 EI oi 10 20 30 4 KMY 95 26 17013 H 19 M 25 TP 150 TC 534 WIN 15 0 START 2 0 13233 2 a D 0 D 0 D 30 D 50 D 10 20 a D 0 D 10 2 30 F 10 Q 128 CO 60 S N 0 F220 Q 0 CO0 059 S N 3 F 40 QE558 CO 33 S N 6 102 334 Di E B o 3 D a 0 10 a D a 0 D a D a 0 10 F 8 0 Q 1326 CO 32 S N 12 44
103. the directory below which SEISAN has been installed The SEISAN script file assumes that you are running either csh or tcsh as your shell If you are using another shell e g bash on Linux you need to modify the script accordingly or change the shell It is assumed that X windows is installed SEISAN path for programs In order for programs and subroutines to know the path to the SEISAN program directory this must be defined in the file SSEISAN in COM Edit that file and set the environmental variable SEISAN_RES to the name of the top directory meaning the directory structure below and including seismo e g top users seismo This variable is then used to set the path to SEISAN directories 12 Search path for libraries To run the NANSEI conversion program under Solaris the SEISAN LIB directory needs to be included in the environmental variable LD_LIBRARY_PATH The LIB directory as default is already added to the library search path in the SEISAN file SEISAN path for databases parameter files etc The SEISAN database can be under the same top directory as programs however it can also be different This is practical if several users have their own databases but use the same software Set environmental variable SEISAN_TOP to top directory e g top users seismo Java settings Aliases are defined to run the Java tools jseisan seisconf and sformat The setup in the SEISAN file as default is alias jseisan java DSEISAN_TOP S
104. the event must be locatable in order to calculate angles of incidence Several solutions can be plotted on the same figure in order to compare solutions The SEISAN program FOCMEC provides the interface between the database and the program that determines focal mechanisms which in SEISAN is the program FOCMEC_EXE This program is written by Arthur Snoke Snoke et al 1984 and distributed as part of the FOCMEC package http Awww geol vt edu outreach vtso focmec FOCMEC_EXE is identical to FOCMEC in Snoke s package and can be easily upgraded unless formats are changed Generally the user will use FOCMEC when working with SEISAN data however it is also possible to run the original version see documentation by Snoke INF focmec pdf The program works with polarities and amplitude ratios See the MULPLT section on how to read polarities and amplitudes Amplitude ratios are computed from amplitude readings given in the S file While amplitude ratios can provide additional constraint on the solution they should be used with caution Generally the solution should be well constrained by polarities only and then amplitude ratios can provide confirmation of a solution or help to select one of several equally good solutions Amplitude ratios must be determined from the same wave type for example Pg and Sg While in principle it should be possible to use ratios determined from refracted waves generally ratios determined only from direct waves are used
105. their own setup It also makes it possible to work with different setups by just changing directory The AUTOPIC PROGRAM requires AUTOPIC INP in the DAT directory Most SEISAN program use the SEISAN DEF file in DAT see section 3 8 where many general parameters are set The bulletin program requires a front page with whatever you like and some set for fonts can be made The text of this page is located in the BUL INP file in the DAT directory 3 6 Color settings All programs using color can use a color definition file called COLOR DEF The file can be located in the current working directory or in DAT Programs will first look in the working directory then in DAT If no COLOR DEF file is given default is used Be careful with color setting unexpected results might occur like getting a blank screen when plotting white traces on a white background Several color settings are universal like setting colors for titles however several color settings are specific for particular programs see example file below Since colors can also be used for the Postscript file there is an option for using color on the screen but not for Postscript since it is more likely that the user will have a color screen than a color Postscript plotter Sending a color plot file to a black and white laser printer results in a plot with gray tones The COLOR DEF file This file is for defining SEISAN color objects If no file available default colors as given at en
106. there will normally be no magnitude calculation and all magnitude and distance information is deleted from the output S file hyp out except the magnitude in the 3 position on the header line if it has an agency different from the default agency The only exception is that if a coda is given the epicentral distance is retained and coda magnitude will therefore be calculated This means that for events which cannot be located it is still possible to calculate coda magnitudes by manually entering the epicentral distance on the line containing the coda length On the first header line there is room for 3 magnitudes If there is a magnitude in the 3 position it is not overwritten so there will only be room for 2 magnitudes on the first header line If more magnitudes are calculated they will be written on a subsequent hypocenter line which is identified by having the same year month day and hypocenter agency as the first header line This means that there is room for a total of 6 magnitudes which can each be updated when relocating Hypocenter info and all 6 magnitudes can be printed out on one line with program REPORT All magnitudes can have a station dependent correction given in the station file This correction does not affect the Mc in the print out file Only calculate magnitude If TEST 106 is set to 1 0 only magnitudes are calculated provided a distance 60 is given Use of S P and L S differences Uncertainty in absolute times
107. uni potsdam de service htm From this version PITSA is interfaced with the SEISAN system through the program WAVETOOL which converts waveform files from SEISAN to the GSE2 format PITSA since version 5 0 supports reading multi channel GSE2 files PITSA can be started from EEV by typing pitsa on the prompt line All waveform files listed in the S file will be converted to multi channel GSE2 files The multi converted files are put into your local directory and are named gse1 gse2 etc The response is converted to GSE format When PITSA is started the waveform files have to be loaded using the GSE2 input format The response file names will be given as described in the GSERESP section 6 13 2 SAC2000 SAC2000 seismic analysis code is currently developed by Lee Minner and Peter Goldstein Goldstein 1999 SAC is not distributed with SEISAN information on SAC can be obtained from the SAC homepage http www ep es IInI gov www ep esd seismic sac html The main features of SAC include general arithmetic operations Fourier transforms three spectral estimation techniques IIR and FIR filtering signal stacking decimation interpolation correlation and seismic phase picking SAC also contains an extensive graphics capability With SAC it is possible to write macros which helps to process large amounts of data The SAC format is used in several research oriented programs SAC can be started from EEV using the command sac E
108. up use option cont and the user is prompted for a start time and interval MULPLT will now check all continuous data bases for available data in required interval and display the available data The forward next or back option will display previous or next window respectively There is an 25 overlap between windows If no data is available for the whole window no trace is shown If the beginning and the end is available a line will join the two segments If only end or beginning is available only the available data is shown All normal operation can be done on the window plotted so it is possible to e g extract data If the register option is used the whole window is extracted from the continuous data base as one file copied to WAV and the S file created 6 2 5 Registering new events into SEISAN Mulplt is the main tool for checking and putting new events into SEISAN New events with waveform data can appear in two ways in SEISAN 1 Unprocessed waveform files are available in a work directory and have to be inspected and possibly put into the database No S files have been made 2 Raw data has already been put into a SEISAN database with S files and corresponding waveform files in some work directory the data has not been checked This process has most likely been done with the automatic data collection software SEISNET Ottemdller 1999 however events can also have been auto registered with program AUTOREG In both cases above t
109. used in the following way 1 Determine average Qg 2 Perform checker board test to chose damping parameters 3 Tomographic inversion Note In this version of SEISAN a first version of the program is included It is expected that the user interface will be changed It is suggested that the user contacts the editors in case he she wants to use the program The main purpose of including the program is to give an example source code so that the user can make use of it when implementing similar programs Limitations The program assumes that the grid is defined over a flat area The tomographic inversion using QLG therefore should only be done for regions near the equator The problem otherwise would be that the grid cells would not have the same size which may lead to artefacts 181 Example of the parameter file qlg par KEYWORD o dee dee a Comment seire gee enee elas Par Ae sce Se NEE FILTER for distance plot 0 01 15s DISTANCES min and max 200 3000 GROUP VEL LG lg group vel window 3 0 Sod GROUP VEL P p group vel window 550 8 0 INVERSION TYPE 1 for tomography 0 for average ORIENTATION Q vert 1 horiz 0 PHASE ONLY 1 phase pick requ in s file FREQUENCY frequency and 1 q ke 5 2392E 03 FREQUENCY frequency and 1 q 1 25 4 5246E 03 FREQUENCY frequency and 1 q 1 60 4 1239E 03
110. using other programs and models The implementation in SEISAN was done using the standard hyp program where only the location routines have been changed The program then behaves almost identical to HYP and uses the same format input and output files Parameter files STASTIONO HYP is used for station coordinates magnitude scales and agency code The crustal model information is not used and only the RESET TEST parameters related to magnitude are used In addition there is a new parameter file in DAT iscloc def with parameters specific for the ISC location routines see file for explanation of parameters Input data files Just like for HYP Output files Hyp out is like before print out is different Not all crustal phases used with HYP may be available The weights used in SEISAN do not apply since the program uses residual weighing only see parameter file Magnitudes are calculated exactly like in SEISAN In eev the command to locate with HYP_ISC is i For more information about the ISC location program see http www isc ac uk Documents Location 6 2 Trace plotting phase picking and spectral analysis MULPLT This program is the general plotting and signal analysis program The program is capable of doing general phase picking correct for instrument response and produce Wood Anderson seismograms for determining MI synthetic traces for Mb and Ms determine azimuth of arrival for 3 component 73 stations and do spect
111. using the refined search window which is reach by clicking the lt More Param gt button Epicenters inside the polygon can now be selected with the search function The zoomed map is taken either from Internet or locally In the case of being retrieved locally the images are taken from the directory specified by the configuration variable IMGMAP_PATH The images are saved in sub directories according with the level of zoom For example in case of 6 levels of zoom you will find the directories ZOOMO ZOOM1 ZOOM2 ZOOM3 ZOOM4 ZOOM5 and ZOOM6 ZOOMO only has one image the whole world ZOOM1 contain 9 images the world is divided into 9 equal areas ZOOM2 contain 81 images the world is divided into 81 areas and the last level of zoom ZOOM6 contains 9 images The image files are numbered as IMG gif from left up to right down like a matrix but using only one index When the map is being retrieved from Internet there is no zooming limitation You can go as deep as you want The configuration variable MAP_SERVER controls where to retrieve the image from Making an epicenter map from the earthquake list An epicenter map can be made through the SEISAN command EPIMAP The steps are 1 Press the lt Epimap gt button 2 A new dialog box for the configuration of the map is shown Figure 7 then click the lt Ok gt button 45 E Setting Epimap Options pa MERCATOR WORLD MAP si Figure 7 Dialog box for setting the EP
112. value defined by FOCMEC MAXSOL in SEISAN DEF At the end the number of acceptable solutions is written out as well as the minimum number of bad fits This can then be used for the next search Now option 0 to 4 can be used again When plotting the solution with option 2 the cursor comes up Also the solutions will be printed in text form to the screen e g Strike Dip Rake Pol P SV SH Rat Err RMS RErr RErr All 358 0200 15 7900 71 3200 1 0 0 0 0 0 Ore 25 0 25 358 1700 28 9000 57 6200 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 09 0 09 The polarities and amplitude ratios can be plotted on the focal sphere using the same convention as the original FOCMEC program which is o compression emergent compression A dilatation emergent dilatation V amplitude ratio SV P S amplitude ratio SV SH H amplitude ratio SH P The last three fields Rat Err RMS Rerr and Rerr refer to the number of ratio errors the RMS error for the ratios used and the RMS error for all ratios respectively When saving a solution the same text field is included into the S file The user can select a preferred solution by moving the cursor near one of the letters T or P T and P axis By pressing T the program will find the nearest T axis same for P and nearest P axis and corresponding fault plane solution which can be stored in the database and or plotted with option 3 If no solution is to be selected press q for quit If a solution has been selecte
113. with Apple section and follow the instructions to join Apple Developer Connection 3 Once your Apple Developer Membership is confirmed log in and click the Download Software link The Mac OS X 10 0 Developer Tools are available for download there In order to actually use Seisan you need to have the X Windows system installed as opposed to OS X s native Aqua GUI X11 runs under Aqua it is not a mutually exclusive alternative X11 ready to use no compilation linking required for OS X is a free download from http www apple com macosx x11 3 3 Windows 95 98 2000 XP and NT It is assumed that you transferred the Windows distribution copied from CD or decompressing directly from CD In the following it is assumed that you install on disk drive C The windows graphics work with any resolution small fonts should be used however SEISAN is designed to work with 1024x768 This version of SEISAN has not been tested on 95 98 or NT Using install script Click on seisan81 exe and follow the instructions use all defaults If you later want to change some environmental variables see instructions below If SEISAN already is installed a window comes up for a possible upgrade or removal of SEISAN Using the seisan_8 1 zip file 1 Use WinZip to unpack the compressed archive file seisan_X Y zip to the directory seismo either from the CD or a file copied to the hard disk The old pkunzip can no longer be used since it does not sup
114. 0 0 2 0 AUTO_PROCESS Oy digs name 0 0 ls SPECTRAL OUTPUT 10 WOOD ANDERSON HIGH CUT 20 0 Set Filter type 0 for bndpas 1 for recfil routine FILTER TYPE 0 0 Setup user defined filters FILTER 1 z key 0 01 0 1 FILTER 2 x key D I 1 0 FILTER 3 v key 1 0 5 0 FILTER 4 b key cl 10 0 FILTER 5 n key 10 0 15 0 FILTER 6 m key 15 0 25 0 FILTER 7 key 200 4 0 ML LOW CUT AND POLES ML HIGH CUT AND POLES MS LOW CUT AND POLES 0 05 2 0 MS HIGH CUT AND POLES 0 1 20 MB LOW CUT AND POLES 0 65 2 0 MB HIGH CUT AND POLES 4 0 2 0 BANDPASS FILTER 5 0 10 0 CODA AUTO 1 0 AUTOCODA FILTER Kl 10 0 AUTOCODA STA 3 0 AUTOCODA RATIO eZ DEFAULT CHANNEL KONO LU Z DEFAULT CHANNEL Station and channel ITK S 2 In SEISAN DEF the following parameters can be set format as in SEISAN DEF SPECTRAL GEO_DEPTHS 10 0 14 0 HERKIJ_DISTANCE 100 0 104 All parameters are within column 41 and 60 and each occupying up to 10 characters NOTE If any of the phase or weight keys are redefined all previous defaults disappear DEFAULT CHANNEL All channels are default if not given For routine display it is useful to only select some channels PHASE NAME KEY The keys associated with given phases Remember that E or a blank MUST be part of the name so it is not possible to chose a name like P it must then be P note the blank in front of P About 10 phase combinations are currently default as se
115. 00 AMPDB 130 8 PHAS 90 5 F 0 0070 142 86 AMP 0 000000 AMPDB 126 4 PHAS 90 6 F 0 0083 120 48 AMP 0 000001 AMPDB 121 9 PHAS 9 07 F 0 0098 102 04 AMP 0 000001 AMPDB 117 6 PHAS 90 9 F 0 0120 83033 AMP 0 000002 AMPDB 112 3 PHAS 91 x1 F 0 0140 71 43 AMP 0 000004 AMPDB 108 3 PHAS 91 2 F 0 3900 2 56 AMP 0 082352 AMPDB 21 7 PHAS 125 9 F 0 4600 Sie AMP 0 133868 AMPDB 17 5 PHAS 133 0 F 0 5500 1 82 AMP 0 224204 AMPDB 13 0 PHAS 142 3 F 0 6500 1 54 AMP 0 356744 AMPDB 9 0 PHAS 152 9 F 0 7700 r30 AMP 0 554684 AMPDB 5 1 PHAS 165 6 F 0 9100 1 10 AMP 0 820676 AMPDB 1 7 PHAS 179 7 F 1 1000 09L AMP 1 198877 AMPDB 1 6 PHAS 163 3 F 1 3000 0 77 AMP 1 580098 AMPDB 4 0 PHAS 148 6 F 1 5000 0 67 AMP 1 933016 AMPDB Dat PHAS 137 0 F 1 8000 0 56 AMP 2 420457 AMPDB Ped PHAS 123 6 F 2 1000 SS 0 48 AMP 2 877005 AMPDB KEES PHAS 113 5 F 2 5000 0 40 AMP 3 460298 AMPDB 10 8 PHAS 103 0 F 2 9000 0 34 AMP 4 027073 AMPDB 12 1 PHAS 94 6 F 3 5000 8 Ve AMP 4 855642 AMPDB 13 7 PHAS 84 1 FOR MORE DETAILS ON HOW TO UNDERSTAND GSE AND SEED RESPONSE PARAMETERS SEE Havskov and Gerardo 2001 chapter 6 The book is either with the SEISAN CD or on our home page File instrument pdf 6 31 2 SEED response SEISAN can directly read SEED responses which is poles and zeros given as velocity response and transfer function types A La
116. 05 216 Figure 39 The FK program can be started from MULPLT The traces shown were selected and used as input to the FK program The result of the FK analysis is shown in Figure 40 The event shown here is part of the testdata set NORSA 1999 09 13 1159 00S TEST_019 Plot start time 1999 913 12 0 33 843 1999 913 1159 0 0D 5 E w 1 NRAO SZ s mm 4 NRAL SZ D Ki 5 NRA2 SZ ES 6 NRA3 SZ z ms 7 NRBI SZ D 8 NRB2 SZ D mn 9 NRB4 SZ E 10 NRBS SZ D mm Il NRCS SZ s EN 12 NRO SZ 3 Bi B NRDI SZ w E 14 NRD SZ D 15 NRD4 SZ 1 m 16 NRD5 SZ m zm 17 NRD6 SZ DH Hi 18 NRD7 SZ ei zen 19 NRD8 Si s0 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 4l Figure 40 Output from the FK program Contours and values are the normalized maximum power ATE 1999 913 TIME 12 0 33 8 WINDOW LENGTH SEC 7 6 HAN USED 04 o2 aa RAOS Z RAIS Z RASS Z RA3S Z RBIS Z RB2S Z RB4S Z 0 3 RB5S Z RC5S Z RC6S Z RDIS Z RD2S Z 0 0 RD4S Z oi RDSS Z RD6S Z RD7S Z RD8 S Z OI o 999998 GRUB 0 4 0 4 0 0 0 4 AZIMUTH 140 LOW FREQUENCY 0 94 APPARENT VELOCITY 10 3 HIGH FREQUENCY 5 00 NORM POWER MAX 0 99 NO OF GRID POINTS E 217 6 30 Surface wave analysis SUN The programs by Robert Herrmann Herrmann 1996 to estimate the shear wave velocity of the earth by inversion of surface wave group velocities are distributed with Seisan The programs are part of Herrmann s package Computer Programs in Seismolo
117. 13 0 ST 4 2 OM 1 5 0 9 45 R 22 AL 2 50 WI 4 0 MW 2 6 ZK 0 002 T 7 GD 52 VP 6 00 DE 3 00 Q0 0 QA 1 00 VS 3 5 K S 3 K S 3 Note that no special line has been created in the Nordic format Comment lines are used with SPEC at the start of the line followed by station and component Only the first 4 characters of the 5 character station name is used An A after SPEC means automatic determination The information is MO log of moment unit Newton m ST Stress drop in bars OM log spectral level nm sec FO Corner frequency Hz R Source radius km AL Decay of log spectrum WI Spectral window used secs MW Moment magnitude T Start time of window for spectrum in hr min sec K Kappa GD GEO_DISTANCE in km VP or VS Velocity in km sec at source for P and S spectra respectively The P or S in this line indicated if the spectrum is a P spectrum or an S spectrum It MUST be P or S to be used for magnitude determination A is put in if MULPLT does not know which kind of spectrum is no P or S reading near start of spectral window This can be changed 97 by editing the S file afterwards DE Density in g cm 3 Qo q0 in relation Q q0 f qalpha QA qalpha Note In earlier versions before version 7 0 the field for kappa was used for the travel time to start of window This can be calculated from origin time and the start time of the window NOTE MOMENT IS NOT CALCULATED IF THE SPECTRUM IS NOT
118. 147 Response show curves Rg phase velocity RMS as a function of depth RMSDEP Rotated seismograms RSAM RSASEI RT_SEIS RTU INI S S phase SAC SAC libraries SACAUX SACLIB SACSEI SAMBA Sample rate SAMPLE_GRAPHICS SAMPLE_READ_CONT SAMPLE_READ_WAV Search Search by day and hour Searching headers in waveform files Searching in the data base SEED SEED data time gap SEED response SEED extract data SEIASC SEIASC format SEIBINASC SEICUT SEIDEL Seidim inc SEIGMT SEIM88A SEIPITSA SEISAF SEISAN ASCII format Seisan extension SEISAN shortcut SEISAN waveform file SEISAN waveform files to or from ascii 134 SEISAN DEF Seisan ini SEISAN_EDITOR SEISAN_TOP SEISANPR SEISARCH seisconf SEISEI SeisGram SEISLOG Seismic design spectra Seismic hazard analysis Seismic moment average Seismic noise 18 44 51 104 252 Seismic risk related programs 189 Seismic source zones 189 Seismogram 75 76 Seismometer constants 219 SEISNET 28 86 SELECT 6 41 45 117 Select epicenters in an area 113 Select events from database 35 Select for phase 120 Select inp 121 Select out 117 Selection in polygon 111 Selection on errors 120 SELMAP 141 SELSEI 136 Selstat lis 208 Serial number instrument 142 SESAME 150 S file 5 8 26 29 122 S file error 36 S file parameters 229 S file print 38 S file update 38 S files collecting 122 sformat 12 SFORMAT 229 Sg phase 59 SGRSEI 149 Short u
119. 16 1841 57D S199406 3 SEISMO REA TEST_ 1996 06 03 1955 40D S199606 2 4 Upper and lower case Upper and lower case file names only makes a difference on SUN Linux and MacOSX The intention is that all permanent data file names used by SEISAN should be in upper case e g S files crustal model file directories e g REA while temporary files should be in lower case e g print out Programs are also in lower case It should then be a bit more difficult to delete the permanent files NOTE THAT THROUGHOUT THIS MANUAL PROGRAM NAMES ARE GIVEN IN UPPER CASE TO INDICATE THAT THEY ARE NAMES HOWEVER WHEN USING THE PROGRAMS LOWER CASE MUST BE USED ON SUN In program MULPLT commands are case dependent 2 5 Moving data between Sun Linux MacOSX and Windows All S files and file names are identical on the three platforms To move many events S files from one system to another make a COLLECT section 6 5 on the original system and a SPLIT section 6 6 on the receiving system As mentioned in section 2 3 the SEISAN binary waveform files have different internal structure if written on Sun Linux MacOSX or Windows but this is corrected for in the reading routine so files can be copied directly GSE files can be copied directly since they are ASCII files SAC binary files are different between Linux and Solaris SEISAN can only read files that were written on the same platform SEED MINISEED files can be used directly on all platforms The only othe
120. 3 A3 Magnitude Reporting Agency 64 67 F4 1 Magnitude No 2 68 A Type of Magnitude 69 71 A3 Magnitude Reporting Agency EE F4 1 Magnitude No 3 76 A Type of Magnitude 77 719 A3 Magnitude Reporting Agency 80 A Type of this line 1 can be blank if first line of event If more than 3 magnitudes need to be associated with the hypocenter in the first line a subsequent additional type one line can be written with the same year month day until event ID and hypocenter agency The magnitudes on this line will then be associated with the main header line and there is then room for 6 magnitudes Type 2 line Macroseismic information Teg Blank 6 20 a Any descriptive text 21 Free 22 a Diastrophism code PDE type F Surface faulting U Uplift or subsidence D Faulting and Uplift Subsidence 23 a Tsunami code PDE type T Tsunami generated Q Possible tsunami 24 a Seiche code PDE type S Seiche Q Possible seiche 25 a Cultural effects PDE type C Casualties reported D Damage reported F Earthquake was felt H Earthquake was heard 26 al Unusual events PDE type L Liquefaction G Geysir fumerol S Landslides Avalanches B Sand blows C Cracking in the ground not normal faulting V Visual phenomena O Olfactory phenomena M More than one of the above observed 27 Free 28 29 i2 Max Intensity 30 al Max Intensity qualifier or indicating more precicely the intensity Se a2 Intensity scale ISC type def
121. 400 450 114 Figure 27 An example of using EPIMAP with area selection The top plot shows where the area is selected while the bottom plot shows the selected area Total events 2811 Selected events 599 Magnitudes M 0 M 1 ZZZ Il Auk wu Total events 2811 Selected events 38 Magnitudes 0 GE Vu CO IN E ou H ra Area plot See epimap cor for locations lof corners SEISMICITY IN NORWAY 70 0 a 65 0 S SCH 60 0 Ka st 0 0 5 0 10 0 15 0 58 7 58 5 58 0 SAAT 54 6 0 30 0 25 0 20 0 7 0 115 6 3 1 W_EMAP Version 4 3 Windows based map program Program and documentation by Fernando Carrilho fernando carrilho meteo pt Program must be installed in addition to SEISAN This program was developed to be used on seismic routine processing Its main features are the capability of allowing visualization of epicentre locations seismic stations error ellipses coastlines macroseismic data focal mechanisms and simplified tectonics From the previous public version 4 1 some bugs were corrected and new features added In particular cartographic deformation is taken into account in error ellipses and station epicentral path draws some bugs on printing were corrected compacted seisan files can be used within additional events representation travel time curves can now be displayed simplified relief can be displayed if available as a MAP file more than one file can
122. 46 Goldstein P 1999 SAC user s manual Lawrence Livermore Laboratory University of California GSETT 3 1997 Provisional GSE 2 1 Message Formats amp Protocols Operations Annex 3 Havskov J and G Alguacil 2004 Instrumentation in earthquake seismology Springer 358 pp Havskov J S Malone D McCloug and R Crosson 1989 Coda Q for the state of Washington Bull Seism Soc Am 79 1024 1038 Herrmann R B 1985 An extension of random vibration theory estimates of strong ground motion to large distances Bull Seism Soc Am 75 1447 1453 Herrmann R B and A Kijko 1983 Modelling some empirical vertical component Lg relations Bull Seism Soc Am 73 157 171 Herrmann R B 1996 Computer programs in seismology Manual Saint Louis University Hutton L K and D Boore 1987 The MI scale in Southern California Bull Seism Soc Am 77 2074 2094 IRIS Consortium 1993 Standard for the Exchange of Earthquake Data Reference Manual 2 Edition Kanamori H 1977 The energy release in great earthquakes Journal of Geophysical Research 82 1981 1987 Kissling E W L Ellsworth D Eberhart Phillips and U Kradolfer 1994 Initial reference model in local earthquake tomography Journal of Geophysical Research Vol 99 No B10 19 635 19 646 Kissling E U Kradolfer and H Maurer 1995 Program VELEST USERS GUIDE Short Intrduction Klein F W 1984 Users guide to HYPOINVERSE a progra
123. 6 Chronological order 124 CITSEI 146 CityShark 146 CLUSTER 200 CNVSSR and CNVSSA 147 Coda length 66 87 88 106 201 Coda magnitude 60 66 119 CODAQ 29 165 Codaq inp 165 Codaq par 165 COLLECT 122 COLOR DEF 17 Command to the operating system 37 Commands in EEV 33 Common tasks in SEISAN 26 Compact file 8 123 Compile programs 18 Componen for 88 Component codes 7 Component names in S file 88 Composite fault plane solution 36 163 Compression 7 Conrad interface 66 67 Consistency check 67 Console window 54 Cont 86 Continuous data 8 76 86 134 Continuous plotting 75 Contour file 112 Contour maps 200 Conversion of component codes 142 Conversion of station codes 142 Conversion programs 137 Convert angles 161 Convert to ASCII 149 Converted magnitude 203 Copy events 35 Copy_wav out 133 Corner frequency 97 197 Correct polarity 136 Correlation 226 Crash check base 31 CRIATT 197 CRIPAR 192 198 CRISEI 112 CRISIS99 190 192 Crustal model 16 Crustal parameters 181 Crustal structure determination 63 CSS format 146 D Daily number of events 129 Damped signal 230 DAT directory 16 Data base content 31 Data base error 36 Data base check 31 Database generation 16 Database name 16 247 Database security 30 Database structure 41 57 Dataseis 147 DC level 81 Default channel 105 Default filter 106 Defaults 105 DEL directory 4 DELET database 35 41 Delete automatic picks 86 Delete event 31 35 Delete ID line 124 De
124. 7 90 32 00 8 20 40 00 2 607 4 95 0 00 6 70 4 00 7 20 24 50 7 90 32 00 8 30 40 00 0 934 4 95 0 00 6 70 4 00 7 20 24 50 8 00 32 00 8 10 40 00 0 994 4 95 0 00 6 70 4 00 7 20 24 50 8 00 32 00 8 20 40 00 2 677 4 95 0 00 6 70 4 00 7 20 24 50 8 00 32 00 8 30 40 00 Minimum rms 0 764057 The best models 0 771 4 95 0 00 6 50 4 00 7 10 24 50 7 80 32 00 8 10 40 00 0 766 4 85 0 00 6 50 4 00 7 00 23 50 7 80 32 00 8 10 40 00 0 767 4 85 0 00 6 50 4 00 7 00 24 50 7 80 32 00 8 10 40 00 0 769 4 85 0 00 6 50 4 00 7 10 23 50 7 80 32 00 8 10 40 00 0 766 4 85 0 00 6 50 4 00 7 10 24 50 7 80 32 00 8 10 40 00 0 772 4 85 0 00 6 50 4 00 7 20 24 50 7 80 32 00 8 10 40 00 0 771 4 95 0 00 6 50 4 00 6 90 22 50 7 80 32 00 8 10 40 00 0 771 4 95 0 00 6 50 4 00 7 00 22 50 7 80 32 00 8 10 40 00 0 770 4 95 0 00 6 50 4 00 7 00 23 50 7 80 32 00 8 10 40 00 0 771 4 95 0 00 6 50 4 00 7 00 24 50 7 80 32 00 8 10 40 00 Running HYP The program is started with command HYP from the prompt line interactive mode or with L in EEV HYP can also be started with an argument like hyp input dat where input dat is an S file The first event in the S file will then be located without further user interaction Below follows an example of running outside EEV explanations are in lower case Note that the STATIONO HYP file MUST be present in the DAT directory for HYP to know that it is working with a SEISAN database If not present HYP will only ask for an input file name see HYP manual
125. 7 IS 8 ES 9 ISG 0 ESG ISN ESN 9502 06 1700 01S NSN_032 BLSSS Z 952 617 0 5 578 Cp ESG SEC 38 40 4 4 46 48 50 2 54 56 58 Ki 2 4 Max amp 96372 7 Next filter 1 000 5 000 Select window for 3COMP Z 9118 N 7959 E 4107 SEC 47 48 Az 160Vel 98Co 02 Filter 1 000 5 000 Figure 24 Plotting response curves 102 The figure shows the amplitude and phase response for station SUE component S Z The response is the one which will be used in analysis irrespective of whether it is taken from the file header or the CAL directory MENU LIP 2EP 3 IPG 4 EPG 5 IPN 6 EPN7IS 8ES 9 ISGOESG ISN ESN 9601 03 1416 58S NSN_013 SUES Z 961 3 14 16 58 500 EP CODA SEC 0 20 40 20 40 60 Maxamp 209 9 Filter 5 000 10 000 Amplitude Response count nm Phase response L P 03 h D a 5 150 a Du 100 P l i 50 a u d 0 e 4 50 100 6 150 2 1 0 2 2 1 2 Log frequency Hz Log frequency Hz 103 6 2 12 The MULPLT DEF and SEISAN DEF files In the MULPLT DEF and the SEISAN DEF files it is possible to set the various parameters for MULPLT Nearly all parameters are set in the MULPLT DEF except geometrical distance parameters which are set in SEISAN DEF since these parameters also are used by HYP MULPLT will operate without DEF files using hardwired defaults The MULPLT DEF can be located in the working directory and or in DAT The if a DEF file is present in the working directory it overrides the file in DAT In MULPLT DEF sever
126. 75 The file report_n out contains the input data with the only difference that the magnitudes have been moved around on the header line This can be practical for later plotting with EPIMAP If no magnitude selection has been made the magnitudes will come in the order Mc MI and Mb If no magnitude of that type is available the output field is blank The magnitude selected is the first to occur of the corresponding type If other magnitudes are to be selected numbers can be used to select any 3 magnitudes in any order If it is important to select magnitudes by agency also use program MAG NORHEAD making a compact Nordic file from a Nordic file You must give arguments First is input file optional second is output file if an optional second or third argument is mag magnitudes from following header lines are moved up to empty magnitude spaces on first line The program was earlier called COMPACT version 7 2 and earlier STATIS statistics of databases 127 This is a simple program for making statistics of stations used in the database or in a file The program will ask the following questions 1 Information about which stations should be searched for in the database There are several options for entry a Give a filename with the stations listed one per line The format is a5 The file name MUST have a not to be confused with option b below b Give stations directly at the keyboard one pr line terminate with blank li
127. 787153 7 22 33 0 PDE 5 6BPDE 1 ACTION SPL 99 06 12 15 54 OP lo STATUS ID 19960603195540 I 1996 06 03 2002 185 TEST_ 012 6 1996 06 03 1917 525 TEST_ 002 6 STAT SP IPHASW D HRMM SECON CODA AMPLIT PERI AZIMU VELO SNR AR TRES W DIS Caz TRO SZ EP 20 5 32 5 1 810 6477 343 JNW SZ EP 20 5 49 5 1 210 6760 353 JMI LZ I 20 8 27 35 6774 353 JMI LZ I 2014 41 56 14 2 2 6774 353 JMI LZ I 2021 25 77 6774 353 KBS BZ EP 20 4 40 63 1 410 5730 351 LOF Z IP C 20 5 46 68 0 110 6734 344 MOL Z IP C 20 6 25 49 1 710 7413 343 F00 Z EP 20 6 35 99 0 310 7565 344 HYA 52 EP 20 6 36 91 0 010 7586 344 Save amp Exit Close Figure 11 Editing window Note that this editing function do not yet as in SEISAN EEV check the file for correct editing Determining hypocenter and magnitude 1 Select a desired earthquake from the list clicking the left button of the mouse on it 2 Press the lt Locate gt button 3 A new window with the results is shown Figure 12 fas Earthquake Parameters E Time 2001 232119 44 3 Latitude 59 457 Longitude 5 832 Depth ds Magnitude 1 9 RMS 0 6 OK Figure 12 Results of the hypocenter determination The usual SEISAN files print out and hyp out are generated see section 6 1 1 Updating the earthquake in the database 50 1 Select a desire earthquake from the list by clicking the left button of the mouse 2 Press the lt Update gt button Figure 5 Note This updates the S file but the
128. 79 Also the use of type 3 lines means that existing software such as the update program are unaffected by these lines 6 29 FK Analysis The FK routines were provided by Tormod Kvzerna from NORSAR and implemented into SEISAN by Andrius Pacesa Some basics The FK analysis more strictly slowness analysis is a standard tool in seismic array processing It is used to find the apparent velocity and back azimuth of an incoming wavefront Apparent velocity can be used to identify the type of wave P S Lg and etc and the approximate distance to the source can be determined for teleseimic events Utilizing azimuth and distance to the source one can define the approximate location of the signal source A description of frequency wavenumber analysis f k analysis may be found in Capon 1969 This method has been further developed to include wide band analysis and maximum likelihood estimation techniques see Kveerna and Doornbos 1986 The principle of slowness analysis is beamforming in the frequency domain for a number of different slowness values and calculating the power for each beam The beam power will be a maximum in case the slowness of the beam coincides with the slowness of the wavefront crossing an array So the beam having the maximum power will indicate the slowness of the incoming signal Running the program The FK program can be started directly with command fk or from MULPLT The program expects that the file
129. AE KEE 149 6 1392 SAC2000 8 nitin ees EE 150 6 13 3 REES 150 6 14 Calculating b value BVALUE cssscceesssesessessseneeenenssaeseenaeeeeensasseennesesnesaeseeneenssaesaeseeseneenesennenssoeeneas 152 6 15 Automatic phase picking AUTO AUTOPIC AUTOSIG cssssssescessseesesseeeeeseseeseeeeenseseenaeseeenenenenes 155 6 16 Fault plane Solution FOCMEC cesssssccsssscseesseseeessseeeenessenaeeeeneenssoenneneseesaeseeneeaeseesaeseeaeaeeaeseeeeenssseenens 160 6 17 Calculation Of Coda q CODAQ sssecesssseeeesseeseenteeneessseneeneseenaeseeenenssnennensseenaeseeneeaeseenaeeeeneaeenesteneensseeeeeas 165 6 18 Merge events near in time ASSOC I csssssessseessnsesseeeeneseeseeeeesenaeseenaeaeseesaeeeenssaeseenauseeeeseeneneeeeneseeneeas 171 6 19 Making synthetic SCISMOGTAINS ccecceceeeeeeeseeseeeeneeeeseesenseeeeneneesenseeesneenesenseenseeeneseesenseneeneneseneeneneesentens 171 6 20 Calculation Of travel times cssssscessessseeseeeeeeeseeeneneeasseenaeenenesaeseenesneneeneseenaeseneeneseesaenenaeeeennseennensseenneas 179 6 20 1 IASPEI travel time software program TTIM s sssessessssnesresnsresrrnrneresrtnrnsensttnrnetnstintnnnnstenrtnnnstnnnetnnn ennn 179 6 20 2 Calculation of travel times for layer model and gradient model TTLAYER A 179 6 20 3 IASP travel times for MULPL T rmana a aa aa a a aa a ai 179 6 21 Inversion Tor Qig QLG uu a a A a aae aaae eaaa Taaa aeaa aap aA a Aae a aa aa ara aea
130. BB C1 C2 C3 and RZERO are parameters in the attenuation equation for mean intensity discussed in the original manual McGuire 1976 mi S R C1 C2 S C3 ALOG R RZERO SIG is the standard deviation of residuals about the mean If no dispersion of residuals are desired insert a very small value for SIG rather than exactly 0 0 RONE is the limiting radius inside of which no attenuation of motion is desired for values of focal distance closer than RONE the mean intensity is calculated using RONE in place of R in the attenuation equation above If this feature is not desired insert zero for RONE AAA and BBB are parameters in the equation limiting the mean intensity max m s AAA BBB S The value specified for BBB must be between zero and C2 for this limiting equation to make sense If it is not an error message will result and program operation will terminate Card 6 Format 110 6F 10 2 NGS NRS 1 NRS 2 NRS NGS NGS is the number of gross sources to be specified NRS 1 NRS 2 and so on are the number of subsources in gross source 1 2 etc See the original manual McGuire 1976 for a general description of the source specification Card set 7 Format 110 6F 10 2 LORS I COEF I AMO I AM1 1 BETA I RATE I FDEPTH I There must be NGS 1 of these cards one for each gross source and one for background seismicity LORS I is a flag indicating whether the source area has a loose or strict lower bound LORS 0
131. COOOOOO0O0OO0OO 8021 Station SB01 Network CTBTO CH1Band SACSEI SAC to and from SEISAN Linux Sun chan def yes resp no Note From version 7 2 WAVETOOL should be used instead of SACSEI The SACSEI program converts between SEISAN and SAC ASCII BINARY SEISAN multi trace files are split up into single trace files when converting to SAC SGRSEI PC chan def yes resp yes SeisGram binary to SEISAN Only 3 component data has been tested Channel order is assumed to be Z N E The input real values have been multiplied by 100 000 before being converted to integers Program little tested SEED The Standard for Exchange of Earthquake Data SEED format is defined by the Federation of Digital Seismographic Networks FDSN The rdseed program is distributed with SEISAN to extract data from 149 SEED volumes RDSEED is an IRIS program to read SEED volumes The program provides conversions to SAC ASCII and binary AH CSS and miniseed It is described in the file rdseed txt in the INF directory Updated versions of rdseed will be available at http www iris washington edu pub programs A PC version rdseed exe is distributed with SEISAN CD also on home page SEED volumes contain the complete response information details on how to convert the SEED response to GSE response format can be found in Havskov and Alguacil 2004 SEIM88A conversion from SEISAN to MARS88 ASCII format all chan def no resp no The progra
132. CSEI 147 Kappa determine 183 Kinemetrics 139 147 KINSEI 147 KW2ASC 147 L LD_LIBRARY_PATH 11 12 Least squares 130 Lennartz 148 149 LENPCQ 148 LENSEI 148 Lg phase 59 Lg phase velocity 67 Lg waves 180 Linking programs 18 Linux file structure 242 Linux compiler options 18 Local database update 124 Local index file 41 57 Local magnitude 59 119 202 Local magnitude parameters 67 LOCAL_CAL 12 55 Locate event 37 50 Locate event in MULPLT 89 Locate two events together 37 Locate with Bullen table 73 Locate with ISC program 36 73 Location code 8 Location programs 59 Location with one station 59 Location max distance 67 Location min of stations 68 Lock ID 124 LOG directory 5 Log file 123 124 Long phase names 61 89 237 Low pass filter 80 Lower bound magnitude 191 LSQ 130 230 Lsq eps 130 Lsq_gmt out 130 M M88SEI 148 MacOSX 13 Macroseismic information 37 225 MAG 98 127 Mag_amp out 203 Mag_coda out 203 Mag_mag out 203 Mag_new out 203 Mag_newa out 203 Mag_spec out 203 Magnitude 59 66 67 201 Magnitude conversion 203 Magnitude correction 68 Magnitude in epimap 109 Magnitude order 127 Magnitude relation 200 Magnitude residuals 65 Magnitude weight 66 Magnitude fixed 60 Magnitude move from 2 header to first 127 Magnitude select for 120 Magnitudes without type 119 Magnitudes more than 3 56 60 Mailing lists 3 Majordomo 3 Makefile 18 MAKEREA 16 130 MAP 45 Map files 16 141 MARS88 148 Maximum expec
133. D MAP Write S file X X Windows Xnear and xfar Y YSDUMP Yearly number of events Z Zoom in JSEISAN Zoom in map Zoom in MULPLT 229 120 131 130 136 137 121 62 67 88 150 11 66 148 129 48 79 254
134. DRDD OAc OO Ost Ota st A SSW WM YLL WME WLF WCB LMI CSF CKE XDE GM BBO BDL BTA GMM HSA SWK HGH HIR CWF KWE HAE SSP KBI KSY KUF AWH LRN LWH ABA LCP TEB TSA SKP KTG C SWN SBD PASS Op DE DpDDDI 165 6 17 Calculation of coda q CODAQ The program will calculate coda Q hereafter called Q for a series of events and stations at given frequencies On completion the average values are calculated and a Q vs f curve is fitted to the calculated values The program will also plot the individual events and filtered coda windows The principle for calculation is the standard coda Q method whereby a coda window is bandpass filtered an envelope fitted and the coda Q at the corresponding frequency calculated The envelope is calculated RMS value of the filtered signal using a 5 cycle window The program used here is the one described in Havskov et al 1989 The program can only operate in connection with the SEISAN format S files and waveform files and will also take advantage of the SEISAN database structure Input The calculations are controlled by a parameter file called codaq par and the actual event station combinations to use are given in codaq inp Example files are in DAT and with the test data set and the example files in DAT a test run can be done An example of a parameter file is shown below start in s times 2 0 absolute start time sec 0
135. E 60 570 5 050 1 0 EMS 5112 ROSSLAND 1 Line Location GMT time Local time Format a30 i14 1x 2i2 1x 2i2 1x i2 GMT 1x i4 1x 2i2 1x 2i2 1x i2 1x Local time 2 Line Comments 3 Line Observations Latitude Longitude intensity code for scale postal code or similar Location Format 2f10 4 f5 1 1x a3 1x al0 2x a Type 3 line giving xnear xfar Definition of xnear and xfar to be used with HYPOCENTER Example XNEAR 1000 0 XFAR 2000 0 3 Columns 8 13 xnear value 20 25 xfar value 239 Appendix 2 The Seisan waveform file format The file is written from Fortran as an unformatted file This means that the file contains additional characters not described below see end of this Appendix between each block which must be taken into account if the file is read as a binary file If read as Fortran unformatted the content will appear as described below However the internal structure is different on Sun Linux and PC SEISAN automatically corrects for these differences The SEISAN ASCII format has identical headers to the binary files however the binary samples are written as formatted integers one channel at the time just like the in the binary format EVENT FILE HEADER CONTAINS MINIMUM 12 ASCII STRINGS OF 80 BYTES ALL FORMATS I OR A UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED line 1 L 1 FREE 2 30 NETWORK NAME COULD E G BE WESTERN NORWAY NETWORK 31 33 NUMBER OF STATIONS MAX 999 34 36 YEAR 1900 e g 101 for 2001
136. E The distance range y axis for the plot TIME The time range in seconds x axis AMPLITUDE_SCALE The amplitudes are scaled for every trace individually by amplitude max amplitude AMPLITUDE_SCALE STATION_SFILE_ONLY This variable can be set to 1 0 to only plot traces that are listed in the S file the default is 0 which plots all traces without checking if they are present in the S file TIME_ORIGIN In the current version the origin of the time axis corresponds to the origin time of the event COMPONENT This can be used to select components for plotting in case no component is defined TRACE_PLOT will show all vertical component traces Example of trace_plot par KEYWORD Comments IS tien Par 2 FILTER filter range 0 1 Sr D DISTANCE dist range D 440 TIME time window 0 290 54 AMPLITUDE_SCALE amplitude max scale 15 STATION_SFILE_ONLY 0 if any station 0 1 if station has to be in s file TIME_ORIGIN 1 origin time Ds Q file start time COMPONEN BH Z COMPONEN HH Z 107 Figure 25 Example of TRACE_PLOT output 750 0 30 60 90 120 150 180 210 240 270 300 700 f A manninn n A DA Al ie ify Y All ony 650 600 ahh Coa oe AAN di i M Je ae i d ily Wl j 550 ad i x an Aa du NAA ANNAN A An A 500 DEE E l Wy RA OTA li M MAR Ge wy A Im In U 450 RSM it ci RN MR Io y Distance A QO C
137. E 01 370E 01 520E 01 730E 01 100 480E 02 694E 02 978E 02 140E 01 190E 01 270E 01 370E 01 520E 01 730E 01 100 138 366 123 400 113 340 106 128 101 813 98 283 96 034 94 289 93 054 92 229 140 200 280 390 550 770 1 10 1 50 2 10 2 90 140 200 280 290 900 oT EO 1 10 1 50 2 10 2290 91 592 91 114 90 796 90 571 90 405 90 289 90 203 90 149 90 106 90 077 10 5 80 8 10 11 0 16 0 22 0 31 0 43 0 60 0 85 0 10 5 80 8 10 11 0 16 0 22 0 31 0 43 0 60 0 85 0 90 054 90 038 90 028 90 020 90 014 90 010 90 007 90 005 90 004 90 003 Bod Example of SEISAN PAZ response file using the same constants as above KBS B Z100 1 1 1 0 0 0 000 P 2 3 0 1089E 10 0 1222E 01 0 1246E 01 0 1222E 01 0 1246E 01 D QO W I 0 0s 0 Os 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 GSE response file format Below is an example of a GSE response file generated by RESP for the same parameters as used for the SEISAN file above The GSE response format is rather complex and can contain parts that will not be understood by SEISAN Below follows an example of the GSE response using FAP The first line gives station and sensor type The numbers following are gain in nm c 0 15 at reference period 1 seconds sample rate 20 and date The following line FAP2 gives a gain factor 1 and the output units V for Volts Finally follows the frequency gain and phase triplets CAL2 KBS BZ STS 1 0 15E 00 Ix 20 00000 2003 1 1 0 0 FAP2 1 V 60 0 00500 0 48047733E 02 138 0 00590 0 57846815E 02 130 0 00700
138. EISAN commands results Default EPIMAP_MAP_FILE Name of the map file for EPIMAP command EPIMAP_PROJECTION Number of the projection for EPIMAP command see SEISAN Manual INIT_IMGMAP_FILE File name of the initial map represented as image Default seismo DAT IMGWORLD gif MAP_SERVER Type of map retrieved from Internet or locally 0 Static local image country boundaries 1 Static remote image country boundaries 2 3 4 5 Dynamic Remote image 2 country boundaries 3 Relief from GTOPO30 only land 4 Two minute shaded relief 5 Combine 3 and 4 Default 0 IMGMAP_PATH PATH for the static local maps images stored in the local hard disk used for zooming Default seismo DAT IMGMAP INIT_MAP_LOWER LATITUDE Lower latitude of the initial map Default 90 0 INIT_MAP_UPPER_LATITUDE Upper latitude of the initial map Default 90 0 51 INIT_MAP_LEFT_LONGITUDE Lower longitude of the initial map Default 180 0 INIT_MAP_RIGHT_LONGITUDE Upper longitude of the initial map Default 180 0 ACROBAT_READER Path for the Adobe Acrobat Reader needed for the help files Default prog acroread for Unix INTERNET_BROWSER Location and place of browser HELP_DIR Directory of help files usually INF 4 5 2 EEV Windows driver program SEISAN The program is an alternative to the standard EEV and it has all the functions of EEV The main difference compared to EEV is that is has a Windows type selection of events in the dat
139. ER2 HZ 10 OF POLES FOR FILTER2 NEGATIVE FOR HIGHPASS 241 320 1068 3 FREQUENCIES AND S OF POLES FOR FIVE MORE FILTERS 321 1040 RESPONSE CURVES 9 10G8 3 FREQ AMPL REL 1 0 HZ AND PHASE WRITTEN IN GROUPS OF 10 FREQUENCIES 10 AMPLITUDES AND 10 PHASES NUS f character 78 is P option 2 61 182 1X 215 G11 4 1 NUMBER OF POLES 2 NUMBER OF ZEROS 3 NORMALIZATION CONSTANT COUNTS M 83 240 5G11 4 2 Poles in pairs of real and imaginary parts 241 1040 G11 4 Remaining poles and zeros 7 values are written and then 3 spaces are left blank see example below For each pole or zero there are two real numbers representing the real and imaginary part of the pole or zero thus the number of poles is half the number of values written First all the poles are written in pairs of real and imaginary parts then follow the zeros There is room for a total of 37 poles and zeros 74 pairs The poles and zeros are written in a simulated line mode to make it easier to read thus the 3 blanks after writing 7 values It is assumed that the response is in displacment with units of counts m SLR L E 86 199 718 15 6 35 960 1 000 1320 4P 11 5 2760E 11 3770 1830 FAAA 1830 6540 0000 2320 0000 e2320 0000 2320 0000 3280 0000 3280 0000 3280 0000 2140E 01 0000 2140E 01 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 NOTE The component information in character 6 IS VERY IMPORTA
140. EV will start the WAVETOOL program to convert the data to SAC and then execute the command sac In case your sac executable is called sac2000 it is necessary to rename it to sac or alternatively to create a link in either the SEISAN PRO directory or the SAC bin directory This is done for example by the command In s sac bin sac2000 sac bin sac Since the SAC format is a single trace format the SEISAN multichannel files are split into single trace files The station and component names are included in the file name and the suffix SAC is added to all SAC files For both systems waveform data can be converted to the respective format outside EEV using WAVETOOL GSESEI or SACSEI and the programs can be started without using EEV 6 13 3 Degtra A4 Degtra A4 is a Windows based computer system designed to process ground motion time histories for seismology engineering seismology and earthquake engineering applications It has been developed at the Institute of Engineering UNAM Mexico where it has been used as a professional and teaching tool for more than 10 years Figure 29 shows a typical view of Degtra A4 151 BB Degtra A4 Ver 3 2 DIE Archivo Ventanas Ayuda Acerca de Degtra Il HM 1 5 Q Q D SSHQQS8B82 d ABS DDL m El Wain 1 Denominadr 2 lt D C Ace ACAD8904 251 ll x Funci n de transferencia Plet gt Valores extremos Np 2245 Ni 460 Nd 2704 Ci 460 Cd 2704 Ht QE 1E 01
141. H oe a CH H RNN IN N i lr d le I i Vu Ja nen ant VAN rrr rv i Ok A 300 250 hi 200 Jan mf W IW Al rl Lu ell ann ll VV PII Nr 150 A In f V In dun DADRA eT VONT NN 100 50 108 6 3 Plotting epicenters EPIMAP The command for plotting epicenters is EPIMAP lt file gt where the optional file is a file with EPIMAP commands If file is not given the user will be prompted for the input The program can plot land contours epicenters macroseismic intensities stations and level contours as well as depth profiles It is possible to zoom in on selected areas option by Mario Villagran The program has been much revised by Jim Bolton Input files Land contours and other contours The program will look for all files ending with MAP located in the DAT directory The user can then choose any one or a combination of files The users own contour files e g faults can be added to the DAT directory A very detailed world map is available on the SEISAN CD and on the SEISAN web site Areas can be selected out of these files with program SELMAP Stations Epimap will look in STATIONO HYP for station coordinates It will search first in the working directory then in DAT Epicenters The user will be prompted for epicenter input files The format can be Nordic or Nordic compact Magnitudes are plotted proportional with symbol size unless the ellipticity option is selected in which case the
142. HRAHRHHAH HAH krH ARH H FREQ 0 01 0 03 GSE RESPONSE FILE Y N def Enter station code e g B TEST Enter component 4 chars First character is type S Short period L Long 0 14 D ault y ERGE max 5 chars i 3 68 ECH e g SL 3 must be one of the following period A Accelerometer B Broad band Last character must be Z N or E Character 2 and 3 can be anything S Z Enter date as YYYYMMDDHHMMSS Latitude Up to 4 decimal places and for south return for none Longitude Up to 4 decimal places and for west return for none Enter elevation in meters integer return for none Enter comments one line e g amp type sensor type at least up to the day e g return for none fil Respons name is DEST Z 2000 01 01 0000_GSE RESPONSE CURVE IS IN FILE resp out Examples of response files is given in Appendix 3 19880123 100 00 20000101 223 224 Table 1 Example of resp out SENSOR TYPE SEISMOMETER RESPONSE DISPLACEMENT SEISMOMETER PERIOD 1 00000 GENERATOR CONSTANT 300 000 DAMPING RATIO 0 700000 AMPLIFIER GAIN DB 40 0000 R ECORDING GAIN 2048 00 FILTER CONSTANTS F 10 00 POLES GAIN AT 1 HZ 2 75728E 08 F 0 0050 200 00 AMP 0 000000 AMPDB 135 1 PHAS 90 4 F 0 0059 169 49 AMP 0 0000
143. HYP Arrival time data input select one SEISAN database or RETURN Alternative database give 1 5 letter cod Local index file name must start with index or Local database write or File name for one file in NORDIC format Your answer her determines the input source A ret rm m code gives name of file is used when database Local database is S fi YYYYMMDDHHMMSS ETURN is to end of month Start Time End Time R Interactive operation N Y return If N whole time inte pr event Summary file in hypsum out ans that you work directly on the BER databas e g NAO An index fil you want to work on specific subsets A 1 5 letter of a readings or th nam les in local directory 199012 19901205 Standard formatted time input rval or file is located one line output 1 1992 12 3 0137 40 3 NPHS 12 T Q L XXX 2 1992 12 3 0237 43 3 NPHS 14 T Q L XXX 1 now locate bere comes location see HYP manual KKK KKK KK KK KK KKK KK KK KK KK 2 1992 12 3 0237 43 3 NPHS 14 T Q L XXX q stop PRINT OUTPUT IN FILE print out CAT FILE IN FILE hyp out In interactive mode as shown above event date is printed out for each event and action is taken as in EEV for the options available If HYP run on a single file the options above are available meaning that HYP can select and locate different events in a single file using the event number If HYP r
144. HYP will look for an input file with station coordinates location parameters and crustal model This file is located in the DAT directory and called STATIONO HYP To edit the file move to the DAT directory by using command DA and edit the file For more information about this file see section 6 1 If you want to keep the original file for test purposes first copy it to a file with another name When plotting epicenters command EPIMAP input files with map contours for the EPIMAP program are used type MAP These files are also located in the DAT directory If you want to use more detailed map contours you must get hold of your own data and put them into file called e g MYMAP MAP In the DAT directory there are two sets of contours WORLD MAP and EUROPE MAP a more detailed European map than found in WORLD MAP Detailed map files in SEISAN format for the whole world is found at the SEISAN ftp site and the SEISAN CD The plotting program MULPLT can use a default file for those stations which are to be routinely plotted as well as other default information This is defined in MULPLT DEF in DAT see example file MULPLT DEF also defines which keys are assigned to which phases and what character is used for the 17 mouse An example is given in DAT see also example in 6 2 Both the MULPLT DEF and STATIONO HYP can also be in the working directory Programs always look there first and on a multi user system this enables different users to have
145. IINT NMAG 1 NRAD I T I J Structural period of j th spectral ordinate It is used only for identification purposes so in the cases in which structural period has no meaning it can be just a sequential number SLA I J Standard deviation of the natural logarithm of the j th measure of intensity in the i th model AMAX I J Maximum possible value of the j th intensity in model The integration process will be truncated regarding as impossible zero probability values larger than AMAX I J If AMAX I J is set to zero then integration with respect to possible values of intensity will be performed from 0 to Sab SA I J K M Median value of the intensity in model for the J th spectral ordinate the K th magnitude and the L th distance For each attenuation model given in a separate file CRISIS99 reads the above mentioned parameters in the following form DO J 1 NT READ 8 T I J SLA I J AMAX I J DO K 1 NMAG I READ 8 SA I J K L L 1 NRAD I ENDDO ENDDO Output files from CRISIS99 CRISIS99 generates several output files whose names begin with the base name requested at the beginning of the run The output files are 1 Main results file This file with res extension contains a printout of the name of the run the values assigned to the variables characteristics of the attenuation models geometrical and seismicity description of the sources the data defining the computation grid etc It also gives the final resu
146. IMAP input data Only the most common EPIMAP parameters are set Working with a particular earthquake There are four available options for working with a particular earthquake of the list 1 Plot waveforms 2 Edit phases 3 Locate and 4 Update The associated buttons are located on the right side of the earthquake list Figure 5 Plotting and processing traces Any number of channels up to 75 can be plotted In order to visualize a large number of channels a page system is implemented when more than 12 channels are selected For practical reason two operation modes are given in the plotting process multi traces mode Figure 8 and single trace mode Figure 9 The distinction is made mainly for choosing which channels will be plotted together multi trace mode with select unselect and to navigate through the selected channels in more detail single trace mode This is similar to MULPLT in SEISAN In both operational modes picking phases zooming and filtering can be done For multi trace mode a set of additional options are available e g save traces which is applied to the plotted channels on the screen within a selected time window 46 xi Amplitude Seale counts Low Hz High Hz E P coda Set Phase Pick Del amp Band Pass Filter None zl None zl Plot start time 1995 11 20 4 0 54 25 Time 4 5 30 86 f QuitPiot eer aan One Trace Mode Je 1 BLS5 sp
147. INV SUN and DC 71 6 1 3 eh EE 72 6 2 Trace plotting phase picking and spectral analysis MULPLL ccssssssseesesteseeeeeeeeenteneeeeeeneeneenees 72 6 2 1 MULPLT main FUNCTIONS eet dE cette ened oleae et dE EENS 73 62 2 Us of MULPLT from EE Veriscis de rodents testelien tess Ee TEE EE HRM ei 74 6 2 3 Continuous plotting lt tc cadet dete cane i aoe deeded denen ee eet 75 6 2 4 Commands in MULPLT OVErViCW ccccccccccssceccessseeeecssaeeecsaaeeecesaeeesesseeeesensesecsesaeeeessauecescaeseneraeeeese 75 6 2 5 Registering new events into GEIGAN AAA 85 6 2 6 Phase picking amplitude weight and Polarity AA 86 6 2 7 Theoretical arrival times for global and local phases and location ee eeceeceeeeeeeeeeeneeteeeeeeeeeneeeeeteeaees 87 6 2 8 Instrument correction and magnitudes MI mb and MS ss ssssssssnnsnssnsrtnrnensrtnrrnsrsrnnrnnnntnnrnnsnnnsrnnsnnn 88 6 2 9 Determining azimuth of arrival 3 comp or array and doing component rotation eenen 89 6 2 10 Data manipulation Commande tn nEn Enn Ennnnenn tenne 90 6 2 1 1 Spectral analysis S SPEC e tee ae ed eed ed ed teed dale dite 94 6 2 12 The MULPLT DEF and SEISAN DEF file ccccceccesecceseececeeeeeeceeceeeceeseeeeeeeseeeaeeeseetaeseeaneeseeeaeeeeats 103 6 2 13 Distance trace plot with GMT TRACE DUOT 106 6 3 Plotting epicenters EPIMAP ccssssesssseseesenseeeeneseesenseeeseeseesenseeesneeeesnesseeseeeeesnesenseeeensenseneeneeneneenentens
148. IS SunOS and on PC Windows95 or higher Sun versions are to be used as a stand alone program The Windows version on the other hand also contains a windows interface for 193 visual inspection of the input data as well as the results Data validation options are available only for the Windows version and parameters can be given in a user friendly graphic environment CRISIS99 contains also a post processing module that can be used to visualize the results given in terms of maps of intensity measures for an arbitrary return period or exceedance rate curves for a selected site not necessarily a point in the original grid of sites Also if several intensity measures are included in the computations uniform hazard spectra can be produced The main results of a run are also written to ASCII files so the user can use his her own post processing techniques software For the Windows version a separate compressed file crisis99 zip is included with sample input data in SUP Instructions on how to install the Windows version are included in the file crisis99 txt in the INF directory The Sun UNIX versions are part of the standard SEISAN distribution and need not be installed specifically Detailed description of the input and output files is given in the pages below Input files for the CRISIS99 There are basically two input files that are required First is an attenuation table or several tables and second is the major input parame
149. ISAN and called SEISAN DEF The name must be in upper case on Sun The following shows the parameters which can be set The file can contain any lines in any order only the lines with recognized keywords and a non blank field under Par 1 will be read The comments have no importance Numbers are real numbers KEYWORD ee NNN EE tea e ieh Pat a eg Par 2 CONFIRMATION level 0 or 1 D CONT_BEFORE start min before 20 CONT_AFTER start min after E CONT_BASE REA continuous bas CBER CONT_BASE REA continuous bas CBER COPY_WAV_DIR data base copy reg BER CURSOR 0 1 2 poi cr crhair 2 EPIMAP_STATIONS pl st a for all EPIMAP_MAP_FILE name of map EUROPE EPIMAP_PROJECTION real number ER FOCMEC MAXSOL 100 FONT graphics font HERKIJ_DISTANCE 100 0 HIGH_ACCURACY high accuracy 0 1 a HYPO71_OFFSET offset in degree 0 0 INIT_IMGMAP_FILE path to fi c seismo dat IMGWORLD GIF MAD LAT BORDER dist from center 3 0 MAP_LON_BORDER Ha 6 0 MAP_SERVER 2 MERGE_WAVEFORM Code for merging wa NSN SPECTRAL GEO_DEPTHS 10 0 14 0 REG_KEEP_AUTO keep phases when reg 1 0 TEXT_PRINT printer command EEV nenscript Psps WAVEFORM_BASE Waveform base name AGA WAVEFORM_BASE Waveform base name LOF WAVEFORM_BASE Waveform base name BER WAVEFORM_DIRS Waveform directory net seismo seismo WOR seisnet OUTPUT_DIR i INIT_IMGMAP_FILE net seismo DAT IMGWORLD gif MAP_SERVER 0 IMGMAP_PATH net seismo DAT MAP INIT_MAP_LOWER_LATITUDE 90 0 INIT_MAP_UPPER_LATITUDE 90 0
150. LEST runs are useless as they normally do not provide any information on the model space Kissling et al 1995 The conversions and the inversion programs are started as one process Before the inversion routine is started the station locations will be converted from the STATIONO HYP file and the earthquake data in Nordic format will be converted to CNV hypocenters and travel times format NOTE VELEST does not support 5 character station codes therefore in the conversion to VELEST only the first 4 characters are used if the station code has 5 characters In the conversion of the earthquake data only phase readings from stations included in the station selection file will be used Arrivals with a time residual given in the Nordic input file above five seconds are omitted Only the first arriving phase of P and S respectively are used The hypocenter location given by the inversion will be determined by first arrivals only The original data might include more phases like Pg Sg or Lg Therefore to get a comparison of hypocenter locations between the HYP location program and VELEST a Nordic file including the same data as the CNV file is created and the HYP program run on this file before VELEST is started The HYP program can be skipped by pressing CTRL C while it is running 210 The results of the inversion will be given in a text file that can be viewed within VELMENU VELMENU provides an option to convert the VELEST output file w
151. LL bandpass filter low cut FILH bandpass filter high cut Example of the parameter file autosig par KEY WORD ut dee setae aoa COMMENCES eege Stan E aeren Par 2 spectral parameters SPECTRAL S QO Q0 440 0 SPECTRAL P QO Q0 85 0 SPECTRAL S QALPHA Q Q0 Qalpha 0 70 SPECTRAL P QALPHA Q QO0 Qalpha 0 70 SPECTRAL KAPPA 0 02 SPECTRAL P VELOCITY P velocity 6 2 SPECTRAL S VELOCITY S velocity 3 6 SPECTRAL DENSITY Density 228 auto signal processing parameters REMOVE MEAN 1 for true Ep REMOVE TREND 1 for true CHAR FUNCT 1 for true 1 K I CHAR FUNCT K IN X Y 2 K Y 2 SN STALTA NREC REC rec 0 non rec 1 STALTA SQUARE ABS square 1 Dis AUTOCODA SQUARE ABS square 1 0 AUTO PHASE 1 for true 0 only if no phase AUTO SPECTRU 1 for true AUTO AMPLITUDE 1 for true lis AUTO LOCATE 1 for true D NORM JS SEARCH ALGORITHM 1 GA 2 GRID 2 window selection SPECTRUM P SPECTRUM S SPECTRUM PRE GROUP VEL WI in seconds in seconds No in seconds See oO N N IL GROUP VEL WINDOW P D C SPECDURATION e NUU SPEC P S LEN select phase U HE H He ECT PHASE BwWNHR O GROUP VEL W P S a
152. METERS optional 76 Indicate gain factor Blank No gain factor G Gain factor in column 148 to 159 77 2 OR 4 FOR 2 OR 4 BYTE INTEGER BLANK IS 2 BIT 78 P Poles and zeros used for response info blank Seismometer period etc used for response info See below for details T Use up to 30 tabulated values irrespective of what is given below If less than 30 blank characters must be given 79 C a combination of table poles and zeros or instrument constants have been used for information only Value in 78 must then be T F Force use of header response e g generated by MULPLT Only gain at 1 hz is correct and 78 must be set to T 80 80 FREE 148 159 Normally comment if 76 set to G this is a gain factor format G12 7 All samples read from channel are multipled by this factor when read by routine seisinc Used when data is stored in units of e g nm where values can be less than 1 Currently only generated by MULPLT when option OUT is used to extract part of a waveform file 81 160 COMMENT LINE DESCRIBING THE SYSTEM RESPONSE A80 If character 78 is blank option 1 161 240 10G8 3 1 SEISMOMETER PERIOD 2 FRACTION OF CRITICAL DAMPING 3 SEISMOMETER GENERATOR CONSTANT V m s or ACCELEROMETER SENSITIVITY V G AMPLIFIER GAIN RECORDING MEDIA GAIN I E 2048 COUNTS VOLT GAIN AT 1 0 HZ UNITS COUNTS METER 7 CUTOFF FREQUENCY FOR FILTERI1 HZ 8 OF POLES FOR FILTER1 NEGATIVE FOR HIGHPASS 9 CUTOFF FREQUENCY FOR FILT
153. NT It MUST be A if an accelerometer is used any other character assumes a velocity transducer This is only relevant however if option 1 is used where response values will be calculated from the free period etc If option 1 with discrete values or poles and zeros are used the first component character can be anything 241 EVENT FILE at least 12 80 BYTES HEADER EVENT FILE FIRST CHANNEL 1040 BYTES HEADER FIRST CHANNEL EVENT FILE NEXT CHANNEL 1040 BYTES HEADER DATA NEXT CHANNEL EVENT FILE LAST CHANNEL 1040 BYTES HEADER DATA LAST CHANNEL To write a SEISAN file If main headers are called mhead channel header chead data is data integer there is nchan channels and each has nsamp samples then the file is written as Do i 1 12 Write 1l mhead i Enddo Do k 1 nchan Write 1l chead Write 1 data i i 1 nsmap Enddo This example only works up to 30 channels when writing main header For more channels see e g program SEISEI how to do it Details of binary file structure When Fortran writes a files opened with form unformatted additional data is added to the file to serve as record separators which have to be taken into account if the file is read from a C program or if read binary from a Fortran program Unfortunately the number of and meaning of these additional characters are compiler dependent On Sun Linux MaxOSX and PC from version 7 0 using Digital Fortran every w
154. ORTANT The Q and qa used here are distinct from the Q0 and Qalpha used for making the amplitude spectrum and both should not be used when modeling since this would imply a Q correction two times The best way is to use Q0 0 and kappa 0 so that Q is only corrected for when modeling The distance used is everywhere is GEO_DISTANCE 98 The spectral parameters shown are Obs calculated level The difference in log absolute level of the observed and calculated spectra If a correct moment is used it should be small in the order of 1 Moment Moment used Geo dist Geo distance used Stress drop Stress drop in bars fO Corner frequency k Constant used in diminution function q q0 used in spectral fitting qa qalpha used in spectral fitting Power spectrum and noise spectrum The 3 types of spectra displacement velocity and acceleration can optionally be made as power spectra Instead of selecting the type of spectrum by pressing d v or a just press the same characters in upper case and the power spectrum will be shown In seismic noise studies the seismic background noise is often displayed as acceleration power spectral density in dB relative to 1m s 2 2 Hz Instead of selecting d v or a press n instead The plot shows the Peterson 1993 new global high and low noise models superimposed on the observed spectrum Figure 21 When doing noise spectra no attenuation correction is done The normalization of the spectrum is
155. Principle of conversion in order of precedence 1 Both station and component given on input Converted to what is given for output station and component 2 If both are not present the channel number is used Header line text 29 char NetCd 5 chars Comment for next line Header for REFTEK NEWNT chan stati 1 BOLL BO12 BO13 142 comi stato como In and output definitions comment for next line Z BOM Ba CA N BOM B N E BOM B E The first line is just a comment line must be there in any format Here it shows where the network code is positioned as indicated by NetCd The second line gives the header information for the SEISAN main header which are the first 29 characters The file name network code is also given and is here NEWNT Format a29 1x a5 The third line is just comment to indicate the position of the columns in the following lines max 200 A line must be there The abbreviations are chan Channel number optional unless no input station and component given stati Input station code 1 5 chars comi Input component code 4 characters stato Output station code 1 5 characters como Outut component code 4 characters First character MUST be S L B A or l last character MUST be Z N or E all upper case Format i5 1x a5 2x a4 1x a5 2x a4 The conversion programs are listed below ARC GEI ASCSEI BGISEI CITSEI CNVSSA CNVSSR DRSEI GIISEI GSRSEI GSESEI GSERESP GURSEI IRISEI ISM
156. RMANN WKBJ As opposed to the seismograms calculated with the Bouchon and Herrmann programs the WKBJ synthetic seismograms contain only the number of phases selected by the user The execution time for one run of the program is very short In addition to making the synthetic seismograms the program calculates the arrival times of these phases and write them both on the screen and in the iasp out file for later plotting see MULPLT This is intended to be a tool to help identify phases on the data or on the Herrmann or Bouchon synthetic seismograms it can by no means replace these two programs which are much better than WKBJ to model the frequency dependent character of crustal phases at regional distance WKBJ seismograms have been introduced in seismology by Chapman 1978 More details on the method can be found in Dey Sarkar and Chapman 1978 and in Chapman and Orcutt 1985 The core of the present program is a code written by Chapman et al 1988 and is part of the seismological software distributed freely by IASPEI The synthetic seismograms are given in displacement Although their spectra contain low frequencies one should bear in mind that they represent a high frequency approximation of the wave field They include a number of non physical phases due to truncation of the integrals in slowness p For the most interesting crustal phases the epicentral distance is usually much larger than the source depth and these phases interfere
157. S CAZ7 KBS SZ EP 151 54 8 13 4 0 3365 161 TRO SZ EP 153503570 010 4420 169 OL SZ EP Ta 5 051 010 5070 165 ASK SZ EP 154 04 0 010 5262 164 BER SZ EP 154 05 0 110 5274 165 EGD SZ EP 154 05 5 110 5285 165 KONO BZ EP 9 153 49 21 25 5 0 5413 167 17 19 Nov 1993 01 45 29 D 70 069 139 780 1 T R 18 21 Nov 1993 01 53 56 G 60 184 4 965 15 0 N 0 5 2 6CBER SN 1993 11 Reading events for base AGA 18 1 2 Nov 1993 17 06 48 L 60 443 AT 2 2 0 2 2 1 8CBER 6 o In the above example PC the month has 18 events For each event vital information is displayed Date type hypocenter RMS first magnitude and number of stations number in S file which might be larger than number used for location as given in S file header line after a location In this way the user can quickly search for events wanted and get important information without looking at all the details The first event in the list is newly entered into the database as indicated with the N near the end of the line In the above example a return was made to go to next event until event 7 after which a jump was made to event 17 For this event all parameter data was displayed with the t command A return was made to event 18 another return and the event list was read in again and event 1 again became the current event Note that not all events had a location Below are shown examples of the commands C opy D ate a S sociate and A ppend Comment are preceded by TT and written in bo
158. SEI KACSEI KINSEI K2SEI LEESEI LENPCQ LENSEI M88SEI NANSEI NEISEI OS9SEI PITSA PCQSEI PDASEI PSNSEI QNXSEI RDSEED RSASEI RT_SEIS SACSEI SEIM88A SEISAF Reftek archive to Seisan ASCII to SEISAN Beijing Geodevice Institue to SEISAN CityShark to SEISAN Kinemetrics SSA to Kinemetrics Dataseis Kinemetrics SSR to Kinemetrics Dataseis Sprengnether recorders to SEISAN Geophysical Institute of Israel to SEISAN GeoSig to SEISAN See WAVETOOL Conversion between GSE and SEISAN response files G ralp to SEISAN From IRIS ASCII to SEISAN ISMES to SEISAN Kinemetrics ASCII acceleration to SEISAN Kinemetrics Dataseis to SEISAN Kinemetrics K2 to SEISAN Willy Lee system to SEISAN Converts from Lennartz to PCEQ to PCEQ format Lennarts ASCII to SEISAN Lennartz MARS88 to SEISAN Converts from Nanometrics to SEISAN Converts from NEIC CDROM waveform data to SEISAN Converts SEISLOG files to SEISAN waveform files Conversion programs described with program PITSA Converts from PCEQ to SEISAN Geotech Instruments PDAS to SEISAN Public Seismic Networks to SEISAN SEISLOG QNX to SEISAN IRIS program to read SEED volumes Conversion from Andalucian Seismic network to SEISAN Reftek Passcal format to SEISAN conversion SAC to SEISAN Conversion from SEISAN to MARS88 ASCII format SEISAN to SESAME ASCII 143 SEIPITSA SEISAN lt gt PITSA ASCII SGRSEI SeisGram to SEISAN SISSEI Sismalp format to SEISAN format
159. SEI 150 Test graphics 230 Test mouse 230 Test programs 229 Test signals make 230 Theoretical phases 36 89 Threshold magnitude 191 Time correction 136 Time delay 136 Time gap 75 Time uncertain flag in waveform file 148 Timing error 76 80 Timing indicator 240 TMP 7 Top directory 11 T phase 67 Trace plotting 27 73 107 TRACE_PLOT Travel time error TSIG TTLAYER U Uncertain time Unformatted read and write Units Unknown type UPD UPDATE 32 38 41 57 98 123 Update header line Update spectral parameters Update without relocation Updated S files Upper and lower case Upper bound magnitude UPPER case USERCOM USGS USGSNOR Using azimuth phases V VELEST Velest for Windows Velest cmn VELMENU Velocity Velout dif Version Volcanic Volcanic event Volcanic tremor VOLCANO DEF VOLCSTAT Vp Vs ratio Vp Vs calculate W W_EMAP Wadati WADATI WAV data base WAV directory Waveform conversion programs Waveform file format Waveform file name Waveform file structure Waveform file cut Waveform file delete Waveform file extract from Waveform file fix headers Waveform file split Waveform files Waveform files join Waveform files merge Waveform for 253 107 230 179 Waveform inc Waveform_names out WAVETOOL WAVFIX Wavfix tim WAVFULLNAME WEB options Weight WGSSEI Wildcard Windows Windows configuration Windows NT Windows95 WKBJ Wood Anderson Working directory WORL
160. SEISAN SEISAN can be copied from ftp geo uib no 129 177 55 4 login is ftp and password is your email address or http www geo uib no seismo software seisan html or 129 177 55 5 instead of www geo uib no On the AFTP server go to pub seismo SOFTWARE SEISAN_ 8 0 Use binary mode for the compressed files tar and zip Before copying check the readme file for latest updates changes and current content of the directory The directory will at least contain the following files seisan_X Y_UNIX tar Z a compressed tar file whole distribution with executables and test data X Y stands for the latest distribution number and UNIX for the respective Unix system testdata_X Y tar Z SEISAN testdata seisan_short_X Y_UNIX tar Z a compressed tar file distribution without executables and test data must be compiled seisan _X Y zip Windows distribution as zip file WinZip seisan_X Y pdf the SEISAN manual Adobe PDF seitrain pdf SEISAN training course Alternatively SEISAN might be obtained on a CD with the same content as above write to jens geo uib no Section 3 6 gives additional information about modifications and recompilation 3 1 Unix SOLARIS and Linux Solaris The SEISAN programs have been compiled on Solaris 7 using Sun Workshop 5 which means you have to recompile if you use an earlier version of the operating system or compiler If you can recompile on Solaris please do so The programs on Solaris are compiled dynamically which
161. SEISAN_RES classpath SSEISAN_TOP PRO jseisan jar SEISAN alias seisconf java DSEISAN_TOP SSEISAN_RES classpath SEISAN_TOP PRO jseisan jar SEISCONF alias sformat java DSEISAN_TOP S SEISAN_RES classpath SSEISAN_TOP PRO sformat jar Sformat These settings may have to be changed in case you want to keep the jar files in some other directory The CLASSPATH which is used to search for classes is also modified to include PRO and PRO jseisan jar although this is not needed when using the aliases SEISAN agency In SEISAN also set the environmental variable AGENCY upper case to your 3 letter agency code upper case This variable is only used by program MACROIN from EEV in connection with entering macroseismic data so for most users ignore this setting SEISAN default database To locate the default database directory here BER set environmental variable DEF_BASE in SEISAN If not set the name AGA is used The data bases are found under SEISAN_TOP SEISAN editor used in EEV The default editor is vi any other editor can be set with the environmental variable GEIGAN EDITOR SEISAN calibration file directory By default calibration files are in CAL but they can be in a directory set with variable LOCAL_CAL The directory name must be complete like home users calibration SEISARCH Gives the architecture can be either sun linux or windows Used in Makefile when compiling SACAUX Path to SAC aux directory required by the SAC rou
162. T file like one made with SELECT or COLLECT or it can be a compact file if only magnitude comparison is made Optionally there can be a parameter file which MUST be called mag par and reside in the working directory An example of the parameter file is found in DAT and also shown below The parameter file is not needed for all operations see details below 1 Magnitude scales Coda magnitude Mc The coda magnitude scale used is Mc A log coda B dist C where Mc is the coda magnitude coda is the coda length in secs dist is the hypocentral distance in km calculated from epicentral distance and depth in CAT file and A B and C are constants to be determined This is done in two ways 3d regression m A log coda B dist C 2d regression m A log coda dist_coff dist C with B A dist_coff where dist_coff is given in the parameter file and m is the reference magnitude SO B AND dist_coff ARE DIFFERENT The CAT file must contain coda readings epicentral distances and a magnitude in the header line A linear regression is then made between the known magnitude from a given agency and the observed coda lengths following the relations above The user has the option to choose the type of magnitude to use in the regression Usually MI or Mb are used All station event combinations are used to determine simultaneously the 3 constants A B and C Since the data often is too bad to determine all 3 parameters at the same time
163. UPDATING of the location in the S file or the permanent output CAT directory is done since it is too easy in interactive mode to accidentally change something The permanent updating of S files and CAT directories can only be done for one or several months at a time see UPDATE command in order to ensure that nothing is forgotten within a month Once the events have been updated further work can be done like searching for specific events or making a bulletin using single programs which read directly from the database Most of the analysis programs will also work without using the database structure that is e g searching in single file with many events For more details of the analysis programs see section 6 33 4 4 How EEV works It is now assumed that data has been entered into the database The fundamental tool for the database is then the EEV program which mostly works within the limits of one month in the standard database or with whatever the user has of S files in his own directory Optionally EEV can also work with several months A special option is to use a list of files in an INDEX file see end of this section and SELECT program Some of the commands available within EEV are also available within programs See below for more details on EEV The EEV program reads the file names of all S files in the database monthly directory or local directory or index file positions the pointer at the first event and asks for a command to be
164. VDI 917627 1 5 NP 3 VP 5 13 RMS 0 07 CORR 1 000 AVDI 178 0 2 9 NS 4 VS 2 80 RMS 1 06 CORR 0 859 AVSP 22 0 5 7 AVDI 150 0 4 2 NP 2 VP 10 17 RMS 0 00 CORR 0 000 Output file is wadati out 183 6 23 Calculating spectra the SPEC program The SPEC program is used for making spectra of many seismic signals in a semiautomatic manner It can be used for several investigations A Making a large series of signal spectra which can be corrected for instrument and path Average spectra are calculated There are two options for further processing the calculated spectra Option 1 Calculate acceleration density spectra which are plotted compared to the Peterson noise model Option 2 Using the slope of the flat part of the displacement spectra to calculate the near surface attenuation kappa see 6 2 11 and application note qspec pdf in INF B Making relative spectra of seismic events or background noise in order to determine the soil response When using relative spectra of horizontal versus vertical components this is referred to as the Nakamura method Nakamura 1989 C Making relative spectra of signals from two stations in order to determine Q The program makes output files for generating GMT plots in addition to standard SEISAN plots Note Parameter file has changed between SEISAN 7 2 and 8 0 number of windows and overlap has been added The program can technically operate in two ways 1 Making relative spectra of a se
165. Villagran with programs many suggestions and bug reports has interacted with the development of SEISAN Ezra Twesigomwe Berit Storheim K Atakan and Alice Walker have debugged the manuscript Version 7 Bladimir Moreno has made the Windows graphics made SEISAN run under Linux written several other programs and has thus enormously contributed to this version The hazard part has been updated by Kuvvet Atakan and Anibal Ojeda Andrius Pacesa has implemented the FK routine The programs have been tested and the manual been checked by Margaret Grandison Waldo Taylor Vunganai Midzi Berit Storheim Anne Lise Kj rgaard Anibal Ojeda Illeana Boschini and Cecilie Langeland Version 7 1 This version was tested by Anne Lise Kj rgaard Margaret Grandison and Vunganai Midzi Version 7 2 Several contributions including changes to MULPLT and implementing HYPO71 were made by Brian Baptie from the BGS W_EMAP is a new program that was provided by Fernando Carrilho The CPLOT program was written by Susanne Lund Jensen from KMS Susanne has also checked this version of the manual Version 8 0 The graphics part on Unix has been improved thanks to Freya Cromarty and Frederik Tillmann The on site inspection group at the CTBTO has financially supported the development of SEISCONF and JSEISAN as well as the modification of other programs JSEISAN and SEISCONF were written by Bladimir Moreno A new version of W_EMAP was provided by Fernando Carrilho Mario
166. a station and control files are available it is just typing HYPINV and it will run according to the manual If none of these files are available they can be made with the conversion programs The steps to run HYPINV without EEV are as follows 1 Convert a CAT file to Hypoinverse file by typing norhin input file The input file in Nordic format will now be converted to a file norhin out in Hypoinverse format 2 Make the control files by typing makehin This creates the instruction file hypinst station file hypinv sta and model file hypinv mod These files are standard Hypoinverse files The information is taken from the STATIONO HYP file in either the working directory or DAT Makehin cannot work with an alternative STATIONx HYP file 3 Type hypinv and the program runs There is a one line output per event on the screen and the full output is in a file called print out Running HYPINV from EEV the above 3 steps are done automatically when using the command H and in addition the print out file is printed out on the screen 6 1 3 HYP_ISC Program implemented by Richard Luckett ISC has for many years used a standard procedure to locate earthquakes and the ISC locations have often been used as a reference The earth model used is the Bullen tables ISC has recently rewritten the old location program and it was therefore possible to also port it to SEISAN The purpose is that it should be possible to compare standard ISC locations with location
167. abase and that the most used commands in EEV and SEISAN can be executed by pressing a Button The intention is that the majority of routine tasks in SEISAN can be done within the W95 interface without learning all the SEISAN prompt line commands Starting SEISAN Windows When Windows is running SEISAN can be started by clicking on the SEISAN icon if installed see section 3 or writing SEISAN on the prompt line SEISAN will start up and show a figure as shown in Figure 14 In addition to the main SEISAN window there will also be a console window used for input and output since all underlying programs are started from the prompt line Working directory Most programs read and write to the current working directory The name of the working directory is displayed on the bottom of the screen To change the working directory press file selection at the top left hand corner 52 Seisan 7 00 ie E File Help Database Selection Database Year Month Selected Index File Update TEST D 13996 D 06 one e elect Event List Epimap No dd mm ear Time ID Latitude Longitude Depth 03 06 1996 Promac 06 06 1996 3 07 06 1996 13 2 jeer LS 10 06 1996 47 D 13 130 200 SBPDE 301 23 06 1996 57 D sl 626 33 45BER 16 25 06 1996 31 L 61 363 14 OCTES 35 Type Edit Plot Locate EEY Command Line l Help View Console DOS Prompt Work directory is C SEISMO WOR Figure 14 Windo
168. after the origin time Window length of windows overlap Window length Window length in secs for both signal and noise if selected of windows If more than 1 spectra will be made in several windows following the first window and average spectra will be made This option can only be used if selection criteria is 4 Used for noise studies or Nakamura studies Overlap Windows can overlap factor lt 1 0 exactly follow each other factor 1 0 or have gaps factor gt 1 0 E g 0 9 is equal to 10 overlap Number of times to smooth Number of times to smooth 0 means no smoothing Gain factor of channel 1 Factor that the spectral level for channel 1 is multiplied with This can be used if the response shape is the same for the two channels and only the levels are different If the shape is also different set factor to 1 and use response removal below Noise spectrum If 0 no noise spectrum if 1 make noise spectrum The noise window is taken from the beginning of the trace and the window length is the same as given above 185 Make relative spectra If zero no relative spectra if 1 make relative spectra The relative spectra will appear one on each page and the average relative spectrum on the last plot see Figure 34 If no relative spectra are chosen only one trace and one spectrum is shown per page and the average spectrum is shown on the final plot MUST BE SET to 1 to calculate Q see below Plot pics If 1 the
169. aint Louis Missouri WKBJ Input file hyp out read by WKBJ Output file iasp out written by WKBJ Contains the arrival times of the different phases at the stations in SEISAN format Output file wkbjsei out written by WKBJ in the SYNTSEL FOR subroutines A waveform file SEISAN type containing the data and the synthetics which can be plotted using mulplt Note that there is a code for each synthetic seismogram giving the modeling method SH Herrmann SB Bouchon SW WKBJ and the component Z R T N or E INTERMEDIATE FILES wkbj inp created by WKBJ for input to WKBJ_OR The same information as in hyp out in a WKBJ_OR format wkbj tab output from WKBJ_OR reprocessed by WKBJ Contains tables as a function of ray parameter wkbj out output from WKBJ_OR reprocessed by WKBJ Contains the Green functions 178 Figure 33 An example of synthetic seismograms using Bouchon 2 Herrmann 3 and WKBJ 4 The original seismogram is shown in channel 1 All synthetics are displacement Also shown are the theoretical travel times calculated by WKBJ XXX 9502 06 1700 50S xxx_004 Plot start time 95 2 6 17 0 53 257 1 KMY SZ off 2 KMY SBZ afp 3 KMY SHZ afin 4 KMY Owi off 54 56 58 60 2 ySg i ySg ng ySg y imS ySg ySibmS 6 13100 56413 20381 768411 SEC 179 6 20 Calculation of travel times In SEISAN travel times are generated from a flat crustal model
170. al digital event waveform files generated by some data acquisition system The waveform data can be stored in SEISAN GSE and SAC format as single or multi trace files The files that are used in conjunction with the database are normally stored in WAV but can also be in the user s directory e g WOR The normal scenario would be that multiplexed files would be transferred from a digital field station demultiplexed and converted to SEISAN waveform format Programs are provided to convert from most of the popular waveform formats like MINISEED GSE PCSUDS and from commercial recorders It is most practical to initially put the files in WOR check the events for false triggers save the true events in WAV make the corresponding S file and a hardcopy of the digital data All of this can be done with the program MULPLT The program plots channels from a single waveform file The user can then interactively decide if this is an event to keep in which case an S file is created in the database and the event is moved to WAV Alternatively all new waveform files can be auto registered into the database AUTOREG and all checking takes place from EEV When digital data is the input to the analysis system MULPLT is the program to use to get data into the database From there on further analysis can be done with EEV picking phases locating and editing MULPLT is also the program used with EEV For more details on MULPLT see detailed description in section
171. al groups of parameters can be set The keyboard default channels to use and analysis parameters e g for spectral analysis The parameters are identified by keywords see example file below for explanation Example file This file is for defaults for MULPLT and called MULPLT DEF The name must be in upper case on SUN The following shows the parameters which can be set The file can contain any number of lines in any order only the lines with recognized keywords and a non blank field under Par 1 will be read The comments have no importance e ele EE E nee ER PAE vette swede Par 2 X_SCREEN_SIZE Size in pixels 90 0 PHASE NAME KEY Phase key and phase PHASE WEIGHT KEY Weight key and weight PHASE MOUSE KEY Mouse key character SPECTRAL QO Qo 440 0 SPECTRAL QALPHA Q Q0 Qalpha 0 70 SPECTRAL KAPPA SPECTRAL P VELOCITY P velocity EE SPECTRAL S VELOCITY S velocity 3 6 SPECTRAL DENSITY Density 3COMP VELOCITY velocity for 3 comp RESOLUTIONX points pl screen 1500 0 RESOLUTIONHC points pl be 3000 0 NSORT_DISTANCE QO no sort min ph NCHAN PER SCREEN max chan screen CHANNEL SORTING 1 0 SPECTRAL F BAND 0 01 20 0 AUTO_LOCA 0 1 2 0 1 2
172. alibration period is given in units input output but is generally not needed The total response is given by the PAZ multiplied with the PAZ2 scaling factor or the product of several stages This is how SEISAN reads the response however if it finds that the PAZ2 gives normalized values at the calibration period the response is multiplied with the sensitivity given in the CAL2 line this is done because such GSE files have been seen FIR filters can be specified in GSE as an additional stage and can be written out by the RESP program An example is given below The FIR filter coefficients are required to completely describe the instrumentation However they are not used in SEISAN FIR2 3 0 10E 01 3 0 030A 180 0 18067658E 06 0 88848173E 06 0 24195760E 05 0 37699938E 05 0 32037496E 06 0 18581748E 04 0 69605186E 04 0 16990304E 03 0 32499805E 03 0 51408820E 03 0 68242848E 03 0 75194239E 03 0 65436028E 03 0 37627667E 03 0 94138085E 05 0 35409257E 03 0 49653835E 03 0 35531260E 03 0 29224902E 05 0 37382543E 03 INDEX SSEISAN 11 SEISAN_RES 11 3 3 component stations 59 90 155 A Acceleration 89 Add waveform format 6 AGA 5 Agency 12 65 138 203 Agency select for 120 AMP 87 Amplitude 88 Amplitude attenuation 201 Amplitude automatic 88 Andalucia 137 143 148 Andalusia 149 Angle of incidence 161 Apparent velocity 67 88 90 181 APPEND 130 Append another event to current event 35 ARCFETCH 144 ARCSEI 144 Arcsei def 144
173. am section 6 31 can be used to generate the response files The filenames for the response files are STATTCOMP YYYY MM DD hhmm_FOR where STATT is station code COMP is component YYYY is year MM is month DD is day hh is hour mm is minute and FOR is the format indicator which can be SEI or GSE If FOR is not given the format is SEISAN An example is DER SG 2 1999 05 05 1244 You should take a backup of the response files before you run the program see section 3 The response files can be located in CAL or if many files are available optionally also in a subdirectory structure This optional structure simply consist of a subdirectory for each station and the subdirectory name must have 5 letters so base BER would have the name BER __ The system automatically locates the response files whether all are in CAL or in the subdirectory structure The response file can store the response in different ways 1 SEISAN format a Parameters used for calculating the response Generator constant filters etc In addition the response amplitude and phase at 30 frequencies is listed In this case the response is calculated from the parameters b Incomplete set of parameters or no parameters and the response at 30 frequencies In this case the response is calculated by interpolation of the 30 values c Poles and zeros No discrete values are given and the response is calculated directly from the poles and zeros The number of poles and zeros in th
174. am is large it might use disk swap files which can take a lot of time Reduce array size seidim inc in INC and recompile Commands like P or L do not work in EEV If swapping takes place some damaged swap files or other files might remain which prevents the program from starting Clean disk with command SCANDISK Digital Fortran seems to be very sensitive to viruses If you get memory problems or programs will not run particularly under EEV check for virus Graphics problem Graphics programs write text to a console window If there is a program crash the error message goes to the console window which then disappears 3 4 Database directories for your own system MAKEREA When you want to use SEISAN with your own data the necessary directory structure must first be created and your own station coordinates and crustal model must be defined Both REA and WAV directory structures are created with the program MAKEREA The program asks for database name must be 1 5 letters and UPPER CASE start time year and month end time year and month and the structure to create REA or WAV An output will then show the names of directories created If a directory already exists a message will be given It is possible to create both structures at a time since the program after finishing asks if the respective other structure should be created 3 5 Default parameter files for the main programs Once you start locating events the location program
175. am provides conversion between SEISAN GSE1 and GSE2 response files The response can be given in frequency amplitude and phase FAP triplets or in poles and zeros PAZ Since the number of values in the GSE format is unlimited the conversion from SEISAN to GSE only changes the format whereas converting from GSE to SEISAN if the number of FAP triplets is more than 30 or the number of poles and zeros larger than 37 the response in SEISAN format will be approximated by 30 FAP triplets The output files in SEISAN format will have the default SEISAN response filenames see RESP program and SEISAN response format Output files in GSE format will include the station name the component number 1 or 2 for GSE1 and GSE2 respectively and end on CAL e g MOR_SHZ2 CAL GSE2 KONO_BZ_1 CAL GSE GSRSEI GeoSig to SEISAN all chan def yes resp yes Converts from GBV recorders to SEISAN GeoSig was earlier GeoSys Before version 8 1 there was a bug in program so start time was wrong by the amount of the prevent time IRISEI IRIS ASCII to SEISAN all chan def no resp yes The input format is the variable ASCII download format used on the GSN Quanterra stations The format is used in connection with SEISNET The program only works if input file has more than 1000 samples ISMSEI ISMES to SEISAN PC chan def no resp no ISMES is an Italian seismic recorder This is the first version of the program made by IIEES in Iran The program can conve
176. ames in an S file Works ONLY with SEISAN format Note The network extension of merged files will be set by default to the value of parameter MERGE_WAVEFORNM in SEISAN DEF SELSEI searching headers in waveform files A simple program to search headers in waveform files for files containing a particular station Works ONLY with SEISAN format WAVFIX fixing time correction and channel names in SEISAN waveform file headers and make standard file names It can easily happen that a waveform file has a wrong time in the headers or that individual channels have wrong timing for example introduced by different delays in the acquisition system that are not accounted for WAVFIX can change all header times with a given constant time delay or correct individual channels as specified in a parameter file wavfix tim In addition the file name will also be changed to reflect the header time change Waveform file names were shorter in SEISAN version 6 0 so when using older files the user might want to use standard file names In cases where only channel names or timing of individual channels are changed the filename can be kept the same In this case a temporary file is created which is later renamed to the original name WAVFIX can also change polarity This is done by setting the output channel and station codes to the same as the input values in wavfix def In case channel names are to be changed this can also be done with WAVFIX A definition f
177. an output waveform file waveform out of current data on screen Only multi mode Response info not saved PUT Register event in database you will be prompted for event type and waveform file will be copied to WAV Quit program Replot same event useful when screen is cluttered up with e g many picks Also used when a replot is wanted with new parameters e g filter Make a spectrum single mode ONLY Press s select window with cursor answer questions and the spectrum will appear below with noise spectrum Same as s without the noise spectrum Toggle between multi and single mode Rotate components Backazimuth is calculated from location in header or as a second option taken from observed azimuth residual for respective station R is plotted instead of N and T instead of E Combining 3 component option h with u the user is asked for the backazimuth angle Filter 1 5 Hz see below Pick a theoretical phase if displayed Place cursor where the phase might be Press y and the program will select nearest synthetic phase Remove system response and display synthetic Wood Anderson ground motion in nanometers nm on next plot using R or zoom Select other waveform file same event Filter 0 001 to 0 1 see below Filter 0 1 to 1 0 Hz see below Increase window length in plotting from a continous data base Decrease window lenght when plotting from a continous data base Will make a hard
178. and COLLECT There is a blank line between events Compact file This is a CAT file with only the source information One event is represented with one line the header line in the S file There is no blank line between events A compact file can be generated by either COLLECT or NORHEAD earlier called COMPACT In addition there are the following types of files SEISAN waveform file Waveform data can be stored in SEISAN GSE and SAC format see section 2 2 2 An example of a name is 1992 01 11 2233 22S BERGE_011 Response file File giving the response of a given channel at a given station They are generated with the RESP program see description of CAL directory section 6 31 This is the standard type of file in the CAL directory An example of a name is ODDA_S ___Z 1999 05 01 0000_SEI File listing This is just a file with a list of numbered files The file name is ALWAYS filenr lis and it is generated with the DIRF program see 6 8 Index file This file contains a listing of absolute paths to a series of S files The index file can be used as input instead of the CAT files to several programs Several programs generate index files as e g select and eev The index file has the same format as the filenr lis files described above and can be generated with the dirf command using S files The index file name must contain a An example is shown below 1 SEISMO REA TEST_ 1993 09 29 2228 26D S199309 2 SEISMO REA TEST_ 1994 06
179. and QD where QS is a statistical measure of the solution and QD is rated according to the station distribution QS RMS S ERH km ERZ km A lt 0 15 lt 1 0 lt 2 0 B lt 0 30 2 5 lt 5 0 C lt 0 50 lt 5 0 D Other QD N Gap DMIN A 26 lt 90 lt Depth or 5 km 71 B 26 lt 135 lt 2 Depth or 10 km C 26 lt 180 lt 50 km D Other Magnitude Both duration and amplitude can be used to calculate magnitudes as with HYPOCENTER see above for details Duration amplitude and period for each station are used to give a magnitude value for each station These values are averaged to give the event magnitudes The test variables Test Variable Default Value Definition TEST 01 0 1S TEST 01 is the cut off value below which Jeffreys weighting of residuals is not used It should be set to a value approximately equal to the overall timing accuracy of P arrivals in seconds TEST 02 10 km For each iteration if the epicentral adjustment is greater than TEST 02 this step is recalculated without focal depth adjustment TEST 02 should be set to a value approximately equal to the station spacing in km TEST 03 2 Critical F value for the stepwise multiple regression TEST 03 A value between 0 5 and 2 is recommended TEST 04 0 05 km If the hypocentral adjustment is less than TEST 04 then Geiger s iteration is terminated TEST 05 5 0 km If the focal depth adjustment DZ is greater than TEST 05
180. and the subclasses that are to be plotted An example of a plot is shown in Figure 38 The program supports 1 char subclass names only The following output files are created 213 volcstat batch c shell script to generate Postscript output using GMT volcstat_counts ps Postscript output file volcstat_counts_ lt type gt out for each event the Julian date is written out one file per subclass volcstat_daily_ lt type gt out number of events per day files written for each subclass volcstat_counts_total out total event counts for each subclass 132 L 88 ES E Q OO 44 0 36 24 ES E Q oO 12 0 33 Bei v 22 Cc Q oO 11 0 qm N m O w oO N CH CH E Ke eg N v e ke N oO K KS Ki LO wo wo wo wo wo oO LO Kal GO CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH CH Oo baal b
181. ard programs CRISIS99 and EQRISK have a number of features that are present in both However there are some advantages and disadvantages with both programs In terms of the computing time and parameter input both programs require the same time In the case of EQRISK earthquake source zones are defined as arbitrary polygons quadrilaterals CRISIS99 on the other hand operate with completely arbitrary polygons for the definition of the source zones and dipping planes may also be defined In the MS Windows 95 version the source zones and the input parameters can be checked interactively through a user friendly interface In terms of the attenuation relations CRISIS99 uses a table created by a separate program CRIATT and is therefore flexible it also allows different attenuation relations for different source zones whereas the attenuation relation in the case of EQRISK is given through a pre determined mathematical formulation Finally CRISIS99 is superior to EQRISK as it takes into account the uncertainties through the standard deviations introduced on several input parameters Step by step procedure for seismic hazard analysis Following is a summary of the steps that have to be completed in order to produce a seismic hazard map 1 Compile a catalogue for the area of interest from local regional and global sources 191 2 Evaluate the preliminary catalogue completeness by plotting histograms showing the distribution of events in time
182. are swapped This is used by SEISAN to find out where the file was written Since there is always 80 characters in the first write character one in the Linux and PC file will be the character P which is represented by 80 while on Sun character 4 is P 243 Appendix 3 Response file formats used in SEISAN SEISAN can use either SEISAN response file format or GSE response file format The detailed SEISAN format is given here as well as the parts of the GSE format used in SEISAN SEISAN response file format There are three SEISAN response formats The instrument response can either be presented as 1 instruments constants 2 pairs of frequency amplitude and phase or as 3 poles and zeros Line 1 R 5 STATION CODE A5 6 9 COMPONENT A4 E G SZ L SZ LOW GAIN AN ACCELERATION NS 10 CENTURY 0 1900 1 2000 11 12 YEAR 14 16 DOY 18 19 MONTH 21 22 DAY 24 25 HR 27 28 MIN 30 35 SECOND F6 3 52 59 LATITUDE F8 4 optional 61 69 LONGITUDE F9 4 optional 71 75 ELEVATION METERS optional 78 P Poles and zeros Blank Seismometer period etc used for response info See below for details T Use up to 30 tabulated values irrespective of what is given below If less than 30 blank characters must be given 79 C a combination of table poles and zeros or instrument constants have been used for information only Value in 78 must then be T F Force use of header response Only gain a
183. art depth is given in S file the starting depth is taken from the first number on the control line see later in the HYPO71 style However there is often problems obtaining a reliable depth due to local minima This can be manually checked with program RMSDEP from EEV HYP can also be set up to locate the same event starting with a range of different start depths and then choose the one with the lowest RMS This can significantly improve the reliability of depth determination Selecting 3 to 5 different start depth is often enough This option is set on the control line in the station file Fixing location Using F instead of S fixes the position depth and location Do not locate event 62 If a is written in column 45 the event is not located can be used if an external location is to be kept unchanged Fixing origin time Using an F in column 11 of header line will fix the origin time given on the header line If both depth and location are fixed but not the origin time new origin time and residuals will be calculated This can be useful when working with readings from a few stations which should be checked against known locations If e g distant events are read it is often the practice to put in the PDE location on the header line and calculate residuals relative to the observations When the UPDATE is made the agency of the location is NOT changed assuming that if both depth and epicenter are fixed the hypocenter must com
184. as for Unix which means it is not possible to compile the Unix distribution under Windows or vice versa Most of the programs are the same on Unix and PC but not all which means the Makefiles are different See section 7 for differences between the platforms After you have changed the Makefiles according to your system the compilation can be started from the PRO directory by starting make all on Unix and nmake on Windows From the Makefile in the PRO directory the Makefile in the LIB directory is started to create the object libraries This does not work under Windows so you first need to start nmake in the LIB directory and afterwards in the PRO directory Then a SEISAN archive is created seisan a on Unix and seisan lib on Windows The archive contains all library subroutines and you can easily link to the archive if you want to use SEISAN subroutines in your own programs Finally all programs are compiled Single programs can be recompiled by starting make program on Unix and nmake program on Windows If you do changes in the LIB directory you need to compile using make all nmake all which will also create the archive file Then you can recompile individual programs in PRO as explained above When compiling SEISAN on SUSE Linux it has been suggested to use the following compiler options malign double finit local zero in addition to the ones already used Testing this on Redhat Linux produced
185. at least 1000 phase delay delay time when the signal appears on trace relative to start of trace the data before is zero and damping The damping is used to simulate seismometer damping or simple a damped signal and has a similar physical meaning as the seismometer damping constant but period is not recalculated to simulate changing period with damping Zero damping is no damping An additional trace can be made with a Brune displacement pulse generated with parameters corner frequency f0 Q and kappa see MULPLT and travel time Travel time is used for Q correction and also places the pulse at travel time distance from the origin start of trace so length of trace must be longer than travel time If zero q and kappa no attenuation is used The program also write an S file with relevant parameters The program illustrates a simple writing of a SEISAN waveform file Java programs in SEISAN The Java programs are each given as a Jar file like jseisan jar the jar files are located in the PRO directory The jar file contains all the Java source code the Java classes and the project file so a user can decompress the jar file change the script and make a new version of the program The programs are started using a script file in the COM directory and no classpath has to be set when SEISAN has been correctly installed 7 2 CONTENTS OF PRO LIB INC INF COM DAT SUP and PIC DIRECTORIES The PRO LIB INC and COM directories contain software
186. ath used with web option If used with eev the place name file must have name place_names macro An example of the postal code file is 1300 59 880 10 520 SANDVIKA 1310 59 880 10 550 BLOMMENHOLM 1332 59 870 10 510 SLEPENDEN 1314 59 900 10 460 SKUI 226 The content is postal code latitude longitude and location The format is a10 ff10 3 2x a30 the postal code does not have to be a number but can be any string 6 33 Correlation of waveform signals CORR The cross correlation function provides a measure of similarity between signals In seismology cross correlation can be used to measure the similarity of waveforms between seismic events and in case of similarity to determine relative arrival times of a seismic wave between two events Waveform similarity is caused by proximity in hypocenter location and similarity in focal mechanism between two events The program CORR can be used to either identify groups of similar events within a data set or to determine relative arrival times It also can be used to determine correlation of a master event with continuous data and extract event based files The cross correlation function of signals x and y is computed in the time domain as n DIES ZE j l fy i 2 2 KE KS j i 1 jal jal Group identification mode The first step when running in this mode is to compute cross correlation between the same stations for all pairs of events The resulting cross correlation matrix fo
187. ation is not known the determination of spectral parameters is not done To run the determination of spectral parameters the hypocenter location has to be given in the S file The meaning of most parameters in the parameter file is clear from the keyword The spectral parameters are as described in the MULPLT section Other parameters that need explanation are AUTO PHASE AUTO SPECTRUM and AUTO AMPLITUDE Logical flag to activate phase picking spectral analysis and amplitude reading respectively 1 for true GA POPULATION SIZE Number of elements in the population used only if SEARCH ALGORITHM is 1 GA GENERATIONS Number of generations in one run used only if SEARCH ALGORITHM is 1 Note Increasing GA POPULATION SIZE and GA GENERATIONS will increase the computation time GRID NLOOP Number of loops in converging grid search for spectral parameters used only if SEARCH ALGORITHM is 2 Resolution increases with every loop NGRID FREQUENCY Number of grid points in search for corner frequency used only if SEARCH ALGORITHM is 2 NGRID SPECTRAL AMP Number of grid points in search for spectral amplitude used only if SEARCH ALGORITHM is 2 NORM Norm for computation of residuals in spectral fitting can be set however tests show that 1 or 2 produce the same result and generally default of 1 can be used SEARCH ALGORITHM Defines whether genetic algorithm 1 or converging grid search 2 should be used Converging grid search is re
188. av out In the above example a select out was used For each file it is checked if the waveform files are available in the system All waveform data bases and directories specified in SEISAN DEF are searched In order to extract the waveform files corresponding to the input CAT file the output file copy_wav out can be used to copy the files out of the data base to working directory On Unix just source the copy_wav out file on Windows change the file to a bat file e g copy_get_wav out wav bat and run it 133 RDSEED_MANY chop up seed file The program reads a large SEED volume and divides it up into several files of the same size It calls rdseed so rdseed must be installed Rdseed can do the same but RDSEED_MANY is simpler to use Example rdseed_many Seed file name test seed start time YYYY MM DD HH MM 2005 01 01 01 01 Interval in minutes 20 Number of intervals to extract 200 The output format is SAC other format require a change of the program RESAMP resampling waveform files RESAMP is a simple resampling program which can resample one or several waveform files It only works with SEISAN format All files are read filtered and resampled Then written out as one new file with the data from one or several input files The maximum number of channels is max_chan_out which is set as a parameter in the program currently it is set to 7 Only the first max_chan_out channels are used or less if fewer channels i
189. ayed and a new number can be given If many files are to be plotted with one command hard copy only give filenr lis for file name and all events in FILENR LIS will be plotted There will only be one question about filter and then all events are plotted with all channels and the chosen filter Hardcopies assume a PostScript printer For each event plotted a plot file called mulplt eps is generated The plot files are sent directly to the printer from within the program with the seisan print command as soon as the plot is finished for one event but before the program is finished In Unix this is lpr or lp while on PC the command is given in a bat file in COM see installation section This means that the same plot file is overwritten for each event plot For setting up the printer see installation section 3 In multitrace mode many traces number limited by the SEISAN system definitions see section 3 can be plotted If the plot is made via EEV all picks are also displayed Location of waveform file Mulplt will search in current directory first If not found there the WAV directory is searched If the SEISAN DEF file has been set up MULPLT will thereafter try to locate the waveform file in one of the databases or specific directory given in the SEISAN DEF file located in DAT or working directory Format of waveform files MULPLT can on all platforms use SEISAN GSE SAC ASCII and SEED and on Solaris and Linux in addition SAC bina
190. be used for each category layer coastlines tectonic relief and places names The program can be integrated within the SEISAN Havskov et al 2000 environment since it uses SEISAN parameter files macrosseismic files MAP files and station model files Els 2000 08 12 07 22 48 6 DQ 6 658 129 407 0 05 4MS C Azores STATUS PR DISTANT EARTHQUAKE fhipo IM mag NEI mod IMG x REGION East of Philippine Islands Reference 984km N NW Manokwari aprox Portugal Main ErOt32 0 s ErLon999 9 km ErLat999 9km ErDep 0 0km no11 Gap 358 Rms 1 0 World IV Stations IV Paths E Errors Iv Grid I Travel times IT Relief V Tectonic IT Places names E Intensity E lsaseismals E Focal Mechanism Tl Additional events F All main events M Map ajam ay mez lt gt Restart H Exit user fc on Mouse LB coordinates RB hypo station focal mechanism travel t Figure 28 Example for pplot using w_emap If the program is called from EEV or from the command line as W_EMAP then it displays information contained in hyp out file generated by the HYPOCENT Lienert 1994 location program included in SEISAN Havskov et al 2000 in the settable working directory During the first run user is driven to edit the configuration file w_emap def that is created in the users personal directory SEISAN_TOP DAT users lt username gt where most of the program parameters can be changed The program can automati
191. ber of events 234 Total number of records 2830 Output files are statis out statab out station statistics only The top part shows the event statistics by station Local Ev is number of local events readings if so 128 specified above type L and R at the station Local S means number of local events ONLY recorded at that station Distant E and distant S is the same for distant events type D The middle parts shows the number of waveform files NWAV from different networks NET as indicated by the first 3 letters of the waveform file name after the At the bottom is a summary statistics most of which should be self explanatory The information about more than given stations means that in addition to the stations searched for the event had additional stations not used in the statistics CATSTAT This program calculates the yearly monthly and daily number of events from a given earthquake catalogue and plots the results written by Mario Villagran The input is a standard Nordic file containing only the header lines compact file The output is given in three different files with following default file names catyear out Output catalogue of the yearly number of events This file contains two columns of data corresponding to year and the number of events catmonth out Output catalogue of the monthly number of events This file contains three columns of data corresponding to the year month and the number of events re
192. bottom the relative spectrum Lower right shows the input parameters used In some cases kappa and Q the values calculated for this case are also shown Plot start 95 2 617 0 1 234 Lat 59 767 Lon 6 360 H 19 6 2 5C 18 IKMY be cel pte IP ES CODA BI IKMY Varad aha SZ MIN 1 2 3 4 KMY S E Uncorrected KMY S Z Uncorrected L 3 50 L o 0 g 3 00 g 0 a 250 q 2 50 m m p 200 p 2 00 i La i 150 t t u u 100 d 1 00 J e e 06 10 16 25 40 63 100 06 10 16 25 40 63 100 Frequency Hz Frequency Hz Relative spectrum of KMY S E and KMY S Z L o 0 50 0 40 Q0 0 0 Qalpha 0 0 a m 00 DistCo 0 0 Hdist 88 i 0 20 Velo 0 00 Dens 0 00 i 0 10 SelCrit 2 Start 1 7 0 00 Wind 10 Gain 1 0 d 0 10 Smooth 10 e 0 20 Av 1 664 Sd 0 568 0 6 1 0 1 6 25 4 0 63 10 0 Frequency Hz 189 All cesults fo FOOSZ E As 2 E FOOSZ S E NHNM E Sch d ll NS af wm LI Ni Ak lui nee S V Kai CNS L dk E KL ON SG IN SUESZ a suzsz 02 os 1 2 5 10 20 Frequency Hz Figure 35 An example of a GMT plot The figure shows an example of making noise spectra of several traces 6 24 Seismic risk related programs This section is written by K Atakan Extensive testing of the programs was done over the years by many users A Ojeda performed testing and prepared input files for the CRISIS99 and CRIATT programs Introduction Currently the SEISAN package includes a series of stand alone programs that can be u
193. box labeled as Band Pass filter Figure 8 2 Select the high corner frequency of the Band Pass filter select none if a Low Pass filter is desired 3 Make a zoom over the traces see Zooming section or click the button lt Replot Apply gt Instrument corrections Converting the amplitude of one several traces into ground velocity displacement or acceleration and simulating Wood And Mb and Ms amplitude 1 Select the desire amplitude from the combo box labeled Amplitude Scale Figure 8 2 Make a zoom over the traces see Zooming section or click the button lt Replot Apply gt Picking and removing phases 1 Press the lt gt lt gt button Figure 8 in order to select unselect the polarity Compression Dilatation of the first impulse if needed 2 Press the lt gt lt E gt button in order to select unselect the shape Impulsive Emergent of the first impulse if needed 3 Press the button identifying the phase to be picked removed lt P gt lt S gt 4 Press the lt Pick gt lt Del gt button to active the picking deleting process 5 Move the mouse pointer to the position of the first impulse 6 Click the left button The previous buttons will be kept active Furthermore you can pick the selected phase for the rest of the channels without going through the first 4 steps Reading amplitude 1 Press the lt Amp gt button Figure 8 to active the reading process 2 Move the mouse poi
194. cally detect changes in the hyp out file so the user doesn t need to restart the program each time the epicentre changes The program can also display epicentres contained in any SEISAN parameter file where the user may choose between one single epicentre and all epicentres at the same time Double clicking the right mouse button will change the active epicentre to the one picked Multi user individual configurations color schemes additional event files tectonic files coastline files relief files cartographic projections etc are supported 116 Installation All the files are included in the distribution file w_emap zip To install it you need to use PKUNZIP version 4 00 or higher or the WINZIP program Using PKUNZIP e Position in your SEISAN_TOP directory e g c seismo e Execute pkunzip d w_emap Using WINZIP e Extract all files to your SEISAN_TOP directory with the flag use folder names on Manual will only be found in INF after installation 6 4 Searching in the database SELECT Whenever selective search and extraction is wanted SELECT is used The program can run on the CAT database single CAT files Nordic or Nordic compact or the S file data base The output file select out will also be in Nordic format Since the input CAT database can contain both normal and compact files the output will always be a normal file with blank lines between events If however the input is one compact file the outpu
195. ch other in time no time gaps since each file is plotted on the page where it belongs in time However the files must be time ordered The continuous option can therefore be used to check availability and timing of continuous data Discrete events can also be plotted in this mode if one want to get a display of when the events occurred However if filtering it is assumed that the files follow each other in time since a few points are carried over from one file to the next to make the filtering continuous Figure 18 shows an example 6 2 4 Commands in MULPLT overview When the trace s are on the screen and the cursor is displayed then several options are available Most options can be displayed by pressing the MENU button in the upper right hand corner Pressing MENU again removes the option boxes Commands can be given by either pressing a letter or clicking on a box in the menu Figure 19 By pressing or clicking on the Help button the following help menu will be displayed Help on MULPLT MULPLT has 2 modes multi trace mode Displaying many traces some picking options singl 76 trace mode One trace all picking options Most commands are given by pressing one key however several commands can also be given by clicking in the appropriate menu box on top of the screen If the full menu is not displayed select the menu on top right part of the screen The following commands are available first given by the single letter
196. chosen parameters are then shown on the next parameter selection menu as shown above for magnitude Parameters can be reentered Parameters not entered will have no influence in the selection If several parameters numbered selections below are entered conditions for all must be true for the event to be selected Within each numbered selection usually only one of the entered conditions must be fulfilled for the event to be selected If e g MI and Mb are selected events which have either magnitude will be selected When no more parameters are desired press enter 1 Fault Plane Solution Selects events with a fault plane solution F line in S file 2 Earthquake Felt Events felt indicated by a type 2 line 3 Magnitude Type s Normally all magnitudes for one event are searched to see if any magnitude fits the selection criteria With option 3 it is possible to use one or a combination of magnitude types e g L and B If magnitudes without type are to be selected use underscore _ for magnitude type If there is no magnitude in the first magnitude position chose N for one of the magnitude types to be able to select the other 2 magnitudes on the line Magnitude types are C Coda magnitude L Local magnitude B Mb S Ms and W Moment magnitude 4 Distance ID s Restricting the search to be for one or a combination of the distance id s L R and D 5 Event ID s Restricting the search to one or a combination of event id s e
197. commended SELECT PHASE Defines which phase to use for spectral analysis choices are 0 for P by AUTOSIG 1 for computed P arrival for given location 2 for computed S arrival 3 for P from s file 4 for S from s file or 5 for S or P from s file SEPCTRUM F LOW Lower limit of frequency band to be used SPECDURATION CHOICE The time window for computation of the spectrum can be given either as a time window starting from the phase onset 0 or can be defined by a group velocity window 1 SPECTRUM P LENGTH Duration in seconds of signal starting from P arrival SPECTRUM S LENGTH Duration in seconds of signal starting from S arrival SPECTRUM PRE LENGTH Duration in seconds of signal to be included prior to phase arrival GROUP VEL WINDOW P Range of group velocities defining time window to be used for P spectrum Time window is given by distance group velocity GROUP VEL WINDOW S Range of group velocities defining time window to be used for S spectrum 159 Time window is given by distance group velocity STALTA NREC REC There are two STA LTA algorithms recursive 0 and non recursive 1 STATION LINE One line with processing parameters for phase detection is given for each channel The parameters are also see example below STAT station name COMP component name STA duration of STA LTA duration of LTA RATIO trigger ratio MINCOD minimum coda required for trigger DTRLE de trigger level FI
198. copy of all channels of current event with the last selected filter only in multitrace mode Same as D Fixed scaling of trace amplitudes Select plotting channels in distance order Resp Plot 78 response file single trace mode only TAB NextW Next window if multiple windows Filter options The fixed filters 4 8 pole Butterworth are placed on keys z x v b n m with the following frequencies z O1 1 0 01 0 1 Hz Pressing key once gives a 4 pole filter one way x 1 1 0 10 1 0 Hz Pressing the key twice and the filter also v 1 5 1 0 5 0 Hz go the other way and it is now an 8 pole filter 2 4 2 0 4 0 Hz b 5 10 5 0 10 0 Hz From menu only 4 pole filters are used ni s kO 0 31 5 0 HZ me L57234 15 0 230 Hz Filt Variable filter question of filter limits is given in text window FixF Fix filter If pressed aftrer selecting as filter the filter remains fixed until pressing again Phase picking This is possible in both modes In Single mode the phases defined are shown on top with some of the options while they are not shown in Multi mode but have the same definitions Combining options Note that you can select several options together E g V and S will first filter the signal and then make the spectrum Saving observations When you go to the next trace or another event F the readings are saved in the S file They are al
199. cording to agency It could e g be needed to put priority on all the ISC solutions which then should be the first line in the file CAT_AGA will reorder the type 1 lines in a CAT file according to the order in which the agencies 3 character codes are given by the user If there are many agencies they can be given in an input file named cat_aga par format is one agency per line in the first 3 columns If the file is not present the program will ask the user to enter the agencies manually The output file cat_aga out will contain the sorted events GIINOR Geophysical Institute of Israel to SEISAN The input files are the bulletin type files HYPNOR converting HYPO71 files to Nordic files Input is just filename of HYPO71 file A similar program for HYPOINVERSE files is HINNOR HINNOR converts from Hypoinverse to NORDIC format This program works like HYPNOR HSUMNOR HYPO71 summary file format to NORDIC format Note that the program only converts to header lines ISCNOR converting ISC bulletin file to Nordic format This program works with the ISC fixed 96 column format as e g distributed on CDROM files of type FFB The program can select out subsets of ISC data using a latitude longitude window depth and prime magnitude Any of the magnitudes Ms and mb are used Before 1978 there was only mb on the CD s More detailed selection can be done on the output file later with SELECT Since the amount of data is very large it is also possibl
200. ction SVELO S wave velocity of the medium below the station used for 3 comp NFILT number of filters CRAT Ratio for calculation of coda duration range 1 4 LWI Window used in coda duration routines range 20 50 seconds THRES Quality threshold range 2 5 Used on the maximum to average amplitude ratio in order to sort out the most noisy traces Input parameters defined for each filter WINDOW length of the moving time window sec F1 lower cutoff frequency Hz of band pass filter F2 higher cutoff frequency Hz of band pass filter THRSH1 STA LTA threshold for polarized signals THRSH2 STA LTA threshold for unpolarized signals If coherence gt cohmin then detection is made on thresh_1 If coherence lt cohmin then detection is made on thresh_2 Output parameters D day of year H hour AP dp d dp dp dp dp d oO d oO d oO AIP d AIP d dp AIP dp dp OP dp OP OP OP OP d OP AIP d dp assumption of P wave so that these variables should be neglected for S waves M minute SE second DUR duration i e time in detection state sec FRQ centre frequency of filter giving the best detection Hz SNR signal to noise ratio SNR STA LTA STA short time average root mean square of amplitude NT total number of triggered time windows in the detection NH number of windows with best SNR on one of the horizontal comp NV number
201. d the user will be asked if it is to be saved or not after selecting option 0 The saved solution goes into the focmec out and from there into the S file type F line in the database if FOCMEC is operated from EEV NOTE The previous fault plane solution will be overwritten unless a character is written in column 79 of the fault plane solution line If e g the last 2 characters are OF this solution remains in the S file When working from EEV the event will always be located before the FOCMEC program starts up In the Nordic format the solution is stored simply as strike dip rake and number of bad polarities 3f10 1 15 Aki and Richards convention is used In addition the name FOCMEC will be written near the end of the line to indicate that the fault plane solution was made by FOCMEC The other program which can make a fault plane solution is INVRAD see EEV The line type is F The following files are created focmec dat Input parameters to FOCMEC_EXE focmec log Log of the FOCMEC_EXE run focmec st More details on solutions focmec out Gives input parameters and solutions focmec eps A Postscript plot file of LATEST plot focmec run Run parameters for FOCMEC_EXE you can re run FOCMEC by focmec_exe lt focmec run Running FOCMEC independently of EEV and composite fault plane solution This can be done in two ways 1 Locate event s with HYP then give command focmec The program then combines the files print out
202. d Mercalli Intensity or the natural logarithm of ground acceleration velocity displacement or spectral velocity In printing results the program prints both TI i and its antilogarithm Values for array TI must be specified in increasing order Card 4 Format 8F 10 2 RISKS 1 RISKS 2 RISKS 8 RISKS 1 RISKS 2 and so on are risks probabilities of exceedance for which the corresponding intensities are desired These intensities are calculated by interpolation on a logarithmic scale between intensities in the list of examined intensities Tl having larger and smaller risks Both the corresponding intensity and its antilogarithm are printed Values for array RISKS must be specified in order of decreasing risk If fewer than eight values are desired leave succeeding spaces on the card blank To avoid large errors and subsequent misinterpretation the program will not extrapolate to calculate intensity values corresponding to risk levels specified it is the user s obligation to choose values for array TI which will result in risks which bound those specified in array RISKS This is of course a matter of judgement and experience The user must be cautioned that in a grid site system appropriate values for array TI may vary considerably for the different sites examined The intensities interpolated for levels specified in RISKS will be most accurate for closely spaced values of TI Card 5 Format 8F10 2 C1 C2 C3 SIG RZERO RONE AAA B
203. d all calculation in SEISAN assume that response is calculated in counts m After the SEISAN response file is made the current parameters will be displayed and one or several can be changed without entering all again Like if the gain has changed at a certain date only change date and gain This feature new in SEISAN7 2 has been put in to be able to quickly make many similar response files like when all files have to be put in for a network Comments to data for response files Station and channel codes It is important that the station and channel codes are made exactly as they appear in the waveform files If not SEISAN is not able to identify the channel Date The date given here corresponds to the date from which the calibration information is valid The SEISAN system will always look for the most recent calibration file relative to the date of the earthquake Latitude longitude and elevation These data are for information only it is not used anywhere in SEISAN so it does not have to be entered however there is room for it in the SEISAN waveform file headers Comment No information used by the system Plot After the response file has been written out a plot is made with PRESP of the file There will also be a plotfile presp eps which can be sent to the printer The response file can store the response in different ways 1 Parameters used for calculating the response Generator constant filters etc In addition the r
204. d as wildcard to select all streams or channels BUT not to select all units since ARCFETCH is used in cooked mode which means that the time interval extracted matches the input start and end time Example of the arcsei def file 144 KEYWORD Comments ee ag ARCHIVE Path to archive G CTBTO ARCHIVE OUTPATH Path to put C test converted SEISAN files MERGE Y or N for x merging Seisan files NETWORK_CODE used for merging ARCSE CHANNEL Name of channel 8020 1 CHANNEL Name of channel 8021 1 CHANNEL Name of channel 8022 1 CHANNEL Name of channel 8023 1 CHANNEL Name of channel 8024 1 CHANNEL Name of channel 8025 1 CHANNEL Name of channel 8028 1 How to run the program ARCSEI is started from the Windows Command Tool cmd by typing arcsei lt RETURN gt ARCSEI DATA EXTRACTION FROM REFTEK ARCHIVE AND CONVERSION TO SEISAN FORMAT SEISAN FILES ARE MOVED TO DIRECTORY C test ENTER ARCHIVE OR lt RETURN gt TO USE DEAULT default G CTBTO ARCHIVE Return to accept default which is set in the arcsei def file or give the archive path AVAILABLE CHANNELS ARE 8020 1 8021 1 8022 1 8023 1 8024 1 8025 1 8028 1 ENTER CHANNEL SELECTION UNIT STREAM CHANNEL OR TYPE ALL TO USE ALL AVAILABLE CHANNELS Type channel and RETURN if defined in arcsei def channels are listed otherwise an example is shown The channel is given as unit stream channel Wildcards can be used for stream and channel bu
205. d later remember to rename them before running a program again There are several programs which have separate manuals in the INF directory 6 1 Hypocenter location programs HYPOCENTER HYPO71 and HYPOINVERSE 6 1 1 The hypocenter program HYP The hypocenter program is a modified version of HYPOCENTER Lienert et al 1986 Lienert 1991 Lienert and Havskov 1995 The main modifications are that it can accept more phases locate teleseismic events and use input in Nordic format directly from the database A detailed manual earlier version hypocent pdf and some of the later changes hypocent_latest pdf is given in INF directory The input parameter file with station coordinates model etc is STATIONO HYP see later Local crustal phases The program will accept P Pg Pn S Sg Sn Pb Sb Rg T and Lg phases and when locating teleseismic events most of the IASPEI phases see below If only P or S is given the fastest phase is used as in the original version of the program Azimuth The program also uses observed station azimuths as given in the Nordic Format Station azimuths can be obtained with either 3 component stations or array stations This means that the program can locate with one station if it has P S and azimuth Azimuth residuals contribute to the overall rms see TEST 52 and section on weight In order to locate with one station azimuth and P and S TEST 56 MUST be set to 1 Know problem When locating with one stati
206. d of line below will be used The entries can come in any order however the keyword MUST appear as shown below If an object color is not defined it will retain its default value If a black or white background and no colors are chosen all colors will be reset accordingly The color codes are 1 blue 2 green 3 red 4 yellow 5 white 6 black color_screen 0 0 no colors 1 colors color_hard_copy 0 V CSS eS RS See Se SSS SSS color_back 5 background color color_trace 6 seismic traces map contours white color_pic 3 phase picking yellow color_zoom 2 zoo lines in mulplt red color_def 6 default color white color_frame L frames like epimap map frames mulplt green color_title 6 titles on top of plots yellow color_spec L spectras red color_axis_not 3 axis notations yellow color_epi 3 epicenters red color_station 3 seismic stations blue color_map_contour L epimap contours yellow color_map_grid 6 Lat long x y grid green color_label_grid 6 Grid labels for map green color_symbol_key 6 Diagram key red color_prompt L Prompt text black color_section 3 section outline in epimap green color_bval_np 2 bvalue number of events green color_bval_ac L See accumulated blue color_bval_line L aa lsq line blue color_box 5 box for interactive input yellow color_box_letter 6 letters in black color_foc_dilat 3 focmec dilatation red color_foc_comp L focmec com
207. dard deviation respectively of the maximum magnitude for the source MMAX N Maximum observed magnitude in this source MO N Threshold magnitude for source N The catalogue of earthquakes is assumed to be complete for M gt MO Earthquakes with M lt MO are absolutely ignored Characteristic model EMT N Median value of the times between characteristic earthquakes with M gt MO This is the inverse of the exceedance rate for M gt MO TOO N Time elapsed since the last occurrence of a characteristic earthquake D N F N Parameters defining the expected magnitude as a function of time as in the slip predictable model It is assumed that E M t max MO N D N F N LN t Of course if F N is set to zero then D N becomes the expected time independent magnitude of the characteristic earthquake SMT N Standard deviation of the magnitude of the characteristic earthquake It is assumed independent of time MO N Minimum possible magnitude of a characteristic earthquake Earthquakes with M lt MO are absolutely ignored MU N Maximum magnitude of the characteristic earthquake to be used in the integration process 10 Name of the map file 1 line File name including path containing the base map to be used in post processing with CRISIS99 for windows This name does not have any influence in the hazard computations However CRISIS99 expects a line here 11 Name of the file of cities 1 line File name including path containin
208. de Limits Range of hypocenter latitude errors Works only if error line E type is present in S file Currently 119 error lines are generated by HYP and the ISC conversion program ISCNOR There should only be one error line in file associated with the prime solution in first header line However if more than one error line is present all are checked and if one fulfills the selection criteria the event can be selected 13 Hypocenter Errors Longitude Limits See 12 14 Hypocenter Errors Depth Limits See 12 15 Minimum Number of Polarities only P phases are used Counts all polarities useful to find potential events for fault plane solutions 16 Hypocenter Agencies Selects events only with given hypocenter agencies as indicated on header line 17 Magnitude Agencies Select only events with given magnitude agencies as indicated on header line 18 Station Codes components distance range and phase Selects only events with given stations component distance range and phase A formatted help line comes up for selecting items Any one or a combination can be selected The distance can be hypocentral or epicentral 19 Polygon Selects events within a given polygon of at least 3 latitude longitude pairs 20 Use all header lines All header lines are searched for relevant information 21 Look for waveform file names Search the database for particular waveform files input can use a fraction of file name or for any nam
209. dence between ID line and S file name A serious error has occurred try to find out what is correct the ID or the file name An UPDATE cures the problem however data might be lost Error in S file All parameters are checked and files with non standard parameters are indicated The error can be a number in a wrong position The errors should be corrected For all the above 3 cases an index file is generated with bad S files and EEV can the be used directly with the index file to access the bad S files THIS ONLY WORKS WITH ONE DATA BASE AT A TIME It is recommended to run check_base in case of system crash or as a security just before an UPDATE 4 2 5 High accuracy in SEISAN SEISAN can use higher accuracy than the default The goal is to have an accuracy of 1 ms in time 32 and 1 m in location In order to write out the high accuracy numbers a new parameter has been added to SEISAN DEF The parameter is HIGH_ACCURACY Setting it to 1 0 enables high accuracy operation This parameter affects the programs MULPLT FK HYP and UPDATE Station locations The station file looks like before except that in order to get higher accuracy of station locations the minutes of latitude and longitude are specified without the point E g the minutes 22 122 can now be written as 22122 in the same columns as before while if the point is given only 2 decimals can be used as 22 12 This changes do not affect any old station coordinates Programs reading
210. der format is exactly like the binary SEISAN files and the sample values are written in multicolumn format Works ONLY with SEISAN format SEICUT extract part of a waveform file A simple program to extract out a section of a waveform file any seisan primary format A similar job can be done with wavetool Syntax is seicut filename yyyymmddhhmmss s interval The first sample to use is the first sample found before the start time the output time interval in seconds will be the time from first to last sample so if e g one second of data is asked for at a sample rate of 100 Hz the time interval in header will be 0 99 sec and the number of samples output will be 100 If the interval is not available in any of the channels the program will stop The output file name will use a network code reflecting station code of first channel in input file and CUT is added to the end of the file name SEIDEL splitting a SEISAN binary file into 2 files The program splits up one waveform file into 2 files The questions are Filename or number standard question 2 No of channels to remove Channels to remove 13 6 The program will generate 2 new files one with the channels removed and one with the remaining channels The original file is still present Works ONLY with SEISAN format SEISEI splitting and merging SEISAN binary files The program can merge several SEISAN waveform files to one file or take one SEISAN file and s
211. different stations and no azimuths 3 Asingle phase at one station with an azimuth Note that if phases are weighted out due to large distance or a bad fit during the first iteration there might not be a location even if more than 3 stations are available Weighting 61 A number of different weights may be used to calculate the solution 1 User specified weights These are calculated using the HYPO71 style weight number 0 to 4 read with each phase where 0 corresponds to w1 1 0 1 to w1 0 75 2 to w1 0 5 3 to w1 0 25 and 4 to w1 0 Uncertain time is 9 meaning that absolute time is not used see also use of S P times on previous page 2 Distance weighting This is given by the formula w2 xfar delta xfar xnear where delta is the distance km of the event from the station and xnear and xfar are read from the station file STATIONO HYP 3 Bisquare weighting This scheme described by Anderson 1982 calculates residual weights see details in HYP manual Used for distant events 4 Azimuth weighting Azimuth residuals are divided by test 52 which is the error in azimuth that corresponds to a one second error in arrival time For example if test 52 5 default a phase residual of 5 degrees will become a residual of 1 5 test 52 in the parameter corrections and rms calculation All the above weights are multiplied together to calculate the weight used in the inversion If the user specified weight w1 is changed by 2 or 3
212. dist hypocentral distance in km The defaults are MI 1 0 log10 amp 1 11 log10 dist 0 00189 dist 2 09 which is close to the original Richter definition Hutton and Boore 1987 79 Minimum number of stations to attempt a solution D 1 0 80 Minimum number of phases azimuth is counted as a phase to attempt a solution D 3 0 81 Disable location of local events if 0 0 D 1 0 82 Disable location of regional events if 0 0 D 1 0 83 Disable location of distant events if 0 0 D 1 0 84 Disable ellipticity correction for distant events if 0 0 D 1 0 85 A priori error sec of local events This affects the error estimates particularly when few stations are present D 0 1 86 Number of degrees of freedom in estimating test 85 for loc ev D 8 0 87 Confidence level D 0 1 88 RMS residual sec at which residual weighting is applied for distant events D 10000 0 89 Use depth phases y 1 n 0 D 1 0 90 Use of core phases y 1 n 0 D 1 0 91 Same as TEST 85 for distant events D 1 0 NOTE In the Hypocenter manual TEST 85 and TEST 91 have been interchanged 92 Number of degrees of freedom for test 92 D 8 0 93 Output longitude to always be positive y 1 n 0 0 0 94 Value of residual below which zero weight phases w 4 is used again D 0 0 95 Disable use of core phases between 135 and 150 deg 1 disabled 0 enabled D 0 0 96 Variation of depth to find minimum rms 1 enabled 0 disabled D 0
213. done by multiplying with Vo In addition to or instead of using the equation above values can also be entered as discrete values or as poles and zeros The SEISAN response function is calculated for 60 frequencies between 0 01 and 100 Hz and the steps between the frequencies are approximately logarithmic The response function is normalised at 1 0 Hz see Table 1 and the gain at 1 0 Hz is given separately NOTE ALL UNITS ARE IN METERS SECONDS OR G 9 8ms 2 NOTE It seems that although the GSE format is clearly defined there has been different interpretations This has also led to changes in SEISAN since the GSE response was introduced with SEISAN For more details see Appendix 3 Which format to use SEISAN since version 7 1 supports the GSE2 calibration format in addition to the SEISAN response file format We recommend that you use the GSE2 format since it presents one of the most widely used calibration formats Storage of the response in terms of PAZ is recommended over FAP since the PAZ representation describes the continuous transfer function You may continue using existing SEISAN response files and add new files in GSE2 format or replace the old SEISAN response files with new GSE2 files How to run the program The program has quite a few options which easily may lead to confusion Before you start you should know which format you want to use GSE2 or SEISAN and whether you want to describe the response in terms of FAP
214. dwired into the program for the SUN version file name should be uppercase An example input file is included in the DAT directory with the name eqrisk inp which should be renamed to DATA before running Following is the description of the individual parameters and their format as described in the original manual McGuire 1976 Card 1 Format 20A4 Title Any 80 characters can be used to describe the problem Card 2 Format 3110 NSTEP JCALC JPRINT NSTEP is the number of integration steps used in integrating over distance for each site source combination JCALC is the flag indicating how integration on magnitude is to be performed JCALC 0 is used for analytical integration and the form of the attenuation function is described in the original manual JCALC 1 is used for numerical integration on magnitude The user must supply own attenuation function in subroutine RISK2 JPRNT is the flag indicating the desired output JPRNT 0 is used to print only total expected numbers and risks at a site which is normally used when a grid of sites being examined JPRNT 1 is used to print expected numbers from each site source combination normally used when examining a single site 199 Card 3 Format I5 12F5 3 NLEI TI 1 TI 2 TI NLEI NLEI is the number of intensities to be examined TI 1 TI 2 and so on are intensities for which expected numbers and risks are calculated at each site Note that the values for TI i may be Modifie
215. e From eev multi Go back one event Continous data base Go back one window Read coda Read end of coda automatically Delete phase Position cursor near phase and press d Delete waveform file cursor outside area of trace plot file must be in working directory else no files displayed Delete S file if operated from EEV multi mode Phase E Single Go to next channel Multi One event Go to next event multi continous data base Go to next window FK analysis of array data Make a ground motion seismogram s Make 3 component analysis single mode ONLY to determine azimuth of arrival Select a window around the P phase on the Z component Azimuth and apparent velocity will enter the S file with the next phase reading Phase I Calculate IASPEI synthetic arrival times which are then Displayed multitrace only v XNXN Mb Locat 77 Generate a synthetic SP seismogram for reading amplitudes for determining Mb Generate a synthetic LP seismogram for reading amplitudes for determining Ms Locate event only multi trace mode Filter 15 24 hz see below Merg Oth C Out Regis Quit Plot Spec Toggl Rotat WA Oth W lt W gt gt W lt Print Scale Dist Merge waveform file mulplt called from EEV only if files are In working directory Filter 10 15 hz see below Select other channels Makes
216. e No wildcards can be used in the string so e g ASK will select all due to the Use just ASK in this case to select all filenames with the string ASK 22 Gap range The range of gap as given on the E line normally 2 header line Only hypocenters calculated with SEISAN version 7 0 have gap 23 Phase Look for events with particular phases Up to 6 4 character phase names can be selected The event is selected if at least one of the phases is present for the event For a more selective selection based on phase see option 18 24 Volcanic subclasses Search for events of given subclasses given by up to 10 codes Any code can be given however normally they will be as defined in VOLCANO DEF The program searches for lines starting with VOLC MAIN Historical data When working with historical data it can be useful to work with catalogs of several centuries The century is available in the Nordic Format so catalogs can go back to year 0 Output Select out A CAT file or compact file depending on input of selected events Index out A list of event id s of selected events can be used with EEV or other programs accepting index files This could be used e g to work on only distant events in the database by first selecting all distant events and then working with these directly in the database using command EEV index out Index files can have any name must contain a so different subsets can be available with diffe
217. e fO the corner frequency and KK a factor of 2 0 0 6 to correct for the free surface effect and radiation pattern see also application note qspec pdf in INF The diminution function D f is written as D f P f exp pi f trtime qO0 f qalpha where trtime is the travel time from the origin time to the start of the spectral window and P f exp pi kappa f is meant to account for near surface losses Singh et al 1982 with the constant kappa having a value of the order 0 02 sec Anelastic attenuation Q is assumed to be frequency dependent following the relation Q q0 f qalpha The geometrical spreading has been defined to be dependent on the wave type with several possibilities all made equivalent to a distance called geo_distance GD such that geometrical spreading is expressed as 1 GD There are several possibilities for GD P waves GD is the hypocentral distance HD sqrt r r h h so body wave spreading is assumed S waves The geometrical spreading has been made dependent on distance and depth At short distances the geometrical spreading is assumed to be body wave spreading For distances beyond the Herrmann Kijko distance default of 100 km and a shallow focus the following relation is used G r h 1 r 1 GD for r lt 100 km G r h 1 sqrt 100 r 1 GD for r gt 100 km which is commonly used Herrmann 1985 Herrmann and Kijko 1983 This relation assumes surface wave dispersion for epicentral distanc
218. e it remains there until the next update is done see UPDATE command in 6 7 DUP Duplicates an event in the database The duplicated event has an ID which is one second different from the original event The command can be used to split an event in two and then manually deleting phase lines in each E Edit the event As default on SUN vi is used and on PC edit is used The editor can be changed see section 3 When control goes back to EEV the file is checked for possible typing errors or other format problems If a problem is encountered the line with the problem is displayed with an indication of where the mistake might be and the user is returned to the editor Alternatively the error can be ignored The file is also checked for missing iD and consistency between file name and ID Problem Some editors will 36 keep a backup copy of the original file so 2 files might be present with one e g with the additional extension BAK EEV from version 7 2 will only use the original file but there is no check on what backup files might accumulate Eyyyymm Giving this command will make the current EEV session end with year yyyy and month mm within the same data base When EEV gets to the end of the month pressing return will move EEV to the first event of the following month instead of to the first event of the same month EXP Input of explosion information This command creates 3 new lines see format description in Appendix 1 and changes
219. e SEISAN format is limited 2 GSE CAL2 format a Poles and zeros number is unlimited the response is directly calculated from the poles and zeros b Pairs of frequency amplitude phase number of pairs is unlimited the response is calculated by interpolation 3 SEED Poles and zeros only Transfer function type A Laplace Transform Rad sec number of poles and zeros are unlimited the response is directly calculated from the poles and zeros Only reads SEED response in ASCII format as written out by rdseed not dataless SEED volumes Standard filename such as RESP IU TRIS 10 BHZ are understood Files are read from CAL directory When rotating signals it is assumed that the response is the same on all 3 channels Response files can be plotted from MULPLT showing the actual response information that is used with a given trace Response files can also be plotted directly with program PRESP see below 55 All or a subset of the response files can be printed out in a table with program PR_RESP The program must be executed from the directory with the response files Make a listing file filenr lis of files to print out with DIRF and run the program It will produce an output file ready for printing A response file can be plotted with the program PRESP The program is started with command presp filename where filename is the response file name If no file name is given the program asks for a filename or number If a DIRF has
220. e additional information from geology geophysics seismotectonics paleoseismology etc to improve the source zonation 9 For each earthquake source zone select the subset of events that fall in the chosen area This can be done by using the EPIMAP program which enables to draw polygons interactively on the screen and put the subset of events within this polygon into a file Alternatively SELECT program can be used to extract the subsets of data corresponding to the defined source zones 10 If the hazard is to be computed using CRISIS99 or by EQRISK note the x y longitude latitude co ordinates for each corner of the polygon 11 The seismicity within each source zone is assumed to be uniform following a Poissonian occurrence In order to define this a set of critical parameters has to be assessed for each source These are Number of earthquakes above a threshold magnitude This is the a value for the lower bound magnitude Catalogue time span This is the time span of your catalogue where it is complete Beta bvalue In 10 and its standard deviation The b value is the slope of the best fitted line to the cumulative curve for the magnitude frequency of occurrence distribution Gutenberg Richter relation Maximum expected magnitude with its standard deviation This is usually inferred through other available information such as geology palaeoseismicity or subjective judgement of the scientist It is usually set to half a magnitude hig
221. e and or spectral parameters and agencies to compare If none is given no magnitude comparison will be made If several magnitudes spectral parameters fit the requirement the last one is used If e g the first header line has a BER MI and the last header line also has a BER MI the last one will be used Maximum likelihood linear fitting is used It is assumed that both variables have normal and correlated errors See subroutine maxlik for in LIB for more info The following parameter can be selected Any magnitude and agency Seismic moment log Stress drop log Corner frequency log Source radius log Spectral decay Omega zero level log If any of the spectral parameters are selected or moment magnitude is without agency there will be an additional question about which station and component A blank return means the average will be used With these parameter selections it is possible to compare spectral parameters from any two channels compare the average spectral parameter with the parameter from one channel etc Output A plot will be shown on the screen with the observations and the least squares fit and the values are also printed out on the screen A file mag_mag out contains the pairs of magnitudes used 3 Magnitude conversions If a relation between two magnitude scales is known e g by using option 2 above an output file can be made with the converted magnitudes The relation to use is specified in the mag par file Se
222. e and two respectively CODA AUTO Enable automatic coda determination YES or NO Default is NO AUTOCODA FILTER Filter band for automatic coda Default 5 to 10 Hz AUTOCODA STA Auto coda short term average Default 5 0 secs 106 AUTOCODA RATIO Autocoda ratio Default 1 5 6 2 13 Distance trace plot with GMT TRACE_PLOT Unix only TRACE_PLOT is a simple program to create a distance trace plot using GMT programs Generic Mapping Tools http gmt soest hawaii edu The axes of the plot are time and distance and the traces are centered on the respective epicentral distance The input to the program is a single event in Nordic format S file From the S file the program reads the origin time epicenter location and the names of the associated waveform files TRACE_PLOT reads the waveform data and writes the x y coordinates of the lines in the plot to a file that is then used as input to the GMT program psxy The TRACE_PLOT program removes the DC from the data and as an option can apply a band pass filter The output of the program is a Postscript file trace_plot ps and a batch file that can be modified and used to rerun the GMT programs trace_plot bat The parameters are set in the trace_plot par file which can be located either in the DAT or in the working directory An example is seen in Figure 25 The parameters in trace_plot par are FILTER The pass band filter limits can be specified through the FILTER parameter DISTANC
223. e from an external agency Alternative model By default an event is located using the STATIONO HYP input file However each event can use its own model with all the location parameters which is specified with one character in column 21 on the Nordic input file header line The model then has a corresponding name If e g the model is called W the corresponding input station file will be called STATIONW HYP It is therefore possible to have as many different station files as there are printable characters Note that if a different model x has been specified and is not present the program will stop with the message STATIONx HYP does not exist The file MODEL DEF in DAT can be used to assign the single character a name which can be listed from EEV The format in MODEL DEF is one line per model the model indicator is given in column 1 column 2 is blank and the model name is given in columns 3 to 80 Using HYP to determine crustal structure HYP has an option to locate a data set for a large number of different models and then determined which model gives the lowest average RMS for the data set This might be a useful option particularly when a sparse data set is available In order to use this option an additional input parameter file h_model par is given When this file is in the working directory HYP will switch to multiple model mode SO ONLY HAVE THIS FILE IN WORKING DIRECTORY IF MULTIPLE MODEL MODE IS INTENDED When using this option a
224. e modified Just replace the d seisan_top with the true name like e g cd c seismo wor Example file Set path c seismo com c seismo pro Set def_base test_ Set seisan_top c seismo Option 2 Go to control panel system advanced and select environmental variables Here all the above variables can be set 3 Optional If you want to recompile you need the Fortran compilers installed 4 Printer It is assumed that a Postscript printer is connected to the PC either directly or by a network When a program sends a plot to the printer it issues the command SEISANPR In the COM directory there is a file called SEISANPR BAT containing the print command Several suggestions are made in that file the default is to use COPY filename PRN If you do not have a PostScript printer it is possible to view and print PostScript files with GhostViev a public domain software available from many sites e g http Awww seas ucla edu eedcta ghostView http www cs wisc edu ghost gsview get47 htm http www geo uib no Seismologi SOFTWARE 5 Testdata The testdata set can be extracted from the file testdata_X Y tar Z with for example the WinZIP program Extract the data to the SEISAN top directory To use the test data base as the default add line set def_base test_ in autoexec bat file Installing Windows SEISAN interface The program is called SEISAN EXE and located in the PRO directory To install it on the desktop do the followi
225. e period and database The program will also ask for operator ID 4 chars which is stored in the updated log file and the S file see below By updating both the S files and the CAT files in the CAT directory are updated The reason for updating both at the same time is to ensure that there is a correspondence between the two The program will go through as many months as specified by the user When the program is running 123 one line will be printed out for each event The S files will be overwritten with the updated location residuals etc At the same time a monthly CAT file is created in the CAT directory containing all events also events not located If a monthly file is already present it is overwritten Update can also work on a local database The S files are updated as described above Since there is no CAT database the Update program makes a CAT file in the local directory called hyp cat with events in chronological order At this time an S file might contain several old ID lines which in an append process have been converted to comment lines These are deleted when doing an update The remaining D line is updated with the action UPD the operator ID and the time At the same time all the error lines are deleted and only the one belonging to the prime location is kept The update process can also change all S file names according to the origin time and the ID s are changed correspondingly This is done in order for the databa
226. e prompted if a new event is about to overwrite an existing event Both SPLIT and EEV have the possibility to create alternative ID s if the user wants both the new and old event while MULPLT and AUTOREG just offers the possibility to skip a double event If a new ID is created an attempt will be made to use a time one second later If that also corresponds to an existing event the next second is attempted etc This allows for 60 events to be registered in the database with the same minute and event type If an event has got the ID changed the header line in the file is NOT changed however the ID line is of course changed This 31 will be indicated on the ID line with a d at the end of the ID number Deleting events Event here means S file in the database Events are only deleted when using EEV either with the EEV delete command D or the EEV append command A In both cases the deleted event is stored in the DELET database before being deleted from whatever database Even if the system contains many databases there is only one DELET database This means that deleted events from different databases are mixed in DELET In order to restore an event enter DELET database with EEV and copy the deleted event back with the C command It is up to the user to manually clean up the DELET database There is one more final security If an event has been deleted from a database but an UPDATE has not yet been made the event might be in the CAT part
227. e that the amplitude has been associated with the phase E and not the ESg This means that if the S phase is deleted the amplitude will remain MENU 1 IP 2 EP 3 IPG 4 EPG 5 IPN 6 EPN 7 IS 8 ES 9 ISG 0 ESG ISN ESN 9502 06 1700 01S NSN_032 BLS5S Z 952 617 0 5 578 EP ESG CODA MIN I 2 3 4 Max amp 96378 5 Sel window for Wood And ESG E SEC 51 52 53 54 55 56 Max amp 1289 7 Example of using MULPLT Comments are given with on SUN in front This example shows how running MULPLT from EEV would look 93 top seismo REA B Read header from file ER__ 1991 01 01 0557 12L S199101 S file name top seismo WAV 9101 01 0557 12 WNN_13 Plot options Interactive picking Return first choice Multi trace plot on screen def 0 Multi trace plot on screen 1 Multi trace plot on screent laser 2 Multi trace plot on laser 3 Multi trace plot on laser 3 Continuous on screen 4 Continuous on screen laser 5 Continuous on laser 6 Stop 9 now comes a menu for selection and then the plot appear in Single mode since a return was made The next example shows how to plot many events in one go first make a list with DIRF dirf 9101 10 1 2 3 mulplt file name number 9101 10 0915 15S 9101 10 1510 55S 9101 10 2333 445S fil events from January 10 1991 KMY_03 NSS_12 NNN Til nr lis for all filenr lis Resolution in cm sec 0 plot all e
228. e the program always looks there first for the STATIONO HYP file see example at end of this section Another possibility is to use another model for just one event by setting a flag in the phase input file see below Below is an example of a STATIONO HYP file The format is close to the HYPO71 format with one extra line at the bottom The test parameters 2 13 are as in HYPO71 see also HYPOCENTER manual section 4 1 2 Comments are given after s RESE EST 01 0 3 RESE EST 03 0 6 RESE EST 06 0 1 RESE EST 07 3 0 RESE EST 08 2 6 RESE EST 09 0 001 RESE EST 11 50 0 RESE EST 13 5 0 RESE EST 50 1 0 one and only one blank line here UPP 5951 50N 1737 60E station lines COP 5541 00N 1226 00E KBS 7855 08N 1155 44E EBH 5614890N 330490W 375 high accuracy lat lon m ws OSG 6029 80N 252 55E 100 01A06049 43N 1049 95E BERGE6057 12N 1133 15E 100 5 char station name BEBGE6157 12N 1133 15E1100 5 char station name and at 1100 m one and only one blank line here OZ 0 0 model lines 6 6 T20 Se 23 0 3 8 2 2 200 0 300 0 8 05 31 0 N N indicates location of Moho 8 25 50 0 85 80 0 JS 6 0 0 T3008 173 522080 ED control parameters BER Reporting agency a3 Format of the station line is 2x a4 i2 f5 3 a1 i3 f5 3 a1 i4 f6 2 5f5 2 9f6 2 or 1x a5 if the station has 5 characters The co
229. e then converted back to Q and finally the log is taken Only the good individual values are used There is a possibility that the lower bound becomes negative In that case the log Q is set to zero Because the average is made in 1 Q the upper and lower bounds curves will not be symmetric around the average Q curve Power spectrum For each frequency the dB values are averaged and upper and lower curves should be symmetric Kappa Same as for Power spectrum Other spectra The linear spectra or relative spectra are averaged The sd used in the log spectra are calculated by subtracting log average spectrum from log average spectrum sd Running the program The program gets the first pair of stations or one station from spec par calculates the spectra using the list of events in spec inp and at the end of the station list calculates the average spectral ratios for all pairs max 100 All spectra are then shown on one plot together with averages and standard deviation Then the next pair of stations is processed in the same way and the program continues until the end of file spec par Each pair of stations with signals and spectra is plotted on one page If no relative spectra are made the plots look similar except that only one station is shown Hard copy plots are made for each page and sent to the printer if specified see below The hard copy postscript file is called spec eps and when the program finishes a file with the last p
230. e to write out only the hypocenters Note that ISC now writes in ISF format also which can be converted with ISFNOR Newer CD s have compressed data and cannot be used directly files must be copied to disk first decompressed and then handled as single files The program will first check if a file with agency codes called agency isc is present If so the station codes are read from this file same format as files on CDROM The program will also check the beginning of the data input file for a possible list of agencies and station coordinates If present the stations coordinates are read and converted to SEISAN format and additional codes read in The agency codes are needed in order to identify in plain text the various agencies used Principles in conversion Phases The phases out can be either the phase ID s sent to ISC or the ISC reinterpreted phases given with a number code in the input file If the user supplied phases are used parenthesizes are removed and if P PKP etc is given it is replaced by P Times If day is incremented relative to origin time day it is carried into the hours which can be more than 24 Agency It is assumed that it is the same agency for hypocenter and first magnitude Magnitude is checked for agency if blank it is assumed also to be the same as for hypocenter Only first 3 characters of code is used Stations Only first 4 characters of code are used Depth If no error on depth a depth fix flag is s
231. eaaa EtA te aa AA ES 180 PA To RE 181 6 23 Calculating spectra the SPEC program sssssssssenssensuennunununununununununenenunenenunnunnnununununununenunenunenenanennn ennn ena 183 6 24 Seismic risk related programS cesssecesssseeesseseenssseeeenssseneeeeeseuasseenaeneseesaeeeensseeeeesaeeeeaeeesnesneeneneseeenens 189 6 25 Magnitude relations MAG cssssssceseseeseeesseeseeseeneeeeseesaeenenesaeeeensseeneeaeseeeaesaeenensseesaesenaeneenesieenensseennens 201 6 26 Explosion filtering EXFILTER csccssseseseesesseceeeesesenseneeeeseessensneenesenseeeseeseesenseneeeeseesseueneneseneeneeneanenentens 205 6 27 Inversion of travel time data and joint hypocenter determination e csceceeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeseeseneeeees 208 G2 UVELE S eh EE Ee oe te eed ents 208 6 27 2NOR2ZDD EE 211 6 263 NORZ JAD RUSOL E 211 6 28 Analysis of volcanic earthquakes ssescsecceseeceeeserseeeeeeenesensenesneenesenseeeseeseesensseesneseesenseeesneeeeeneeneneenentens 211 6 29 FK Analysis use EES 214 RKIEIIEKAIEVEIEI GG HCH E 217 hl diu ue E 217 6 31 1 Create instrument response files RESP cccccccsccssssecssseecsececseecceeeesaeecsseeeceeecseesssaeesesaeessesssaeeeses 217 ENEE BR e 224 6 31 3 SEED response to GSE GEEDREGPZGSE ENEE 225 6 32 Macroseismic data in SEISAN sscssscessseeessesseeseeneessesenenaeseenesaeeeenesseneesaeeneessaeeeensseeeeeaeeneseeneeneseeeneas 225 6 33 Correlation of waveform signals
232. each grid point there is a cell with radius small_r The program first checks the number of events in each cell for the whole catalog It then checks each cell to find which has more than the minimum number of events to constitute a swarm under the condition that enough events are within the required time window For each time window with enough events a swarm is declared so a swarm lasting e g twice the time window will be declared as two swarms An additional condition is that the number of events is larger than the normalized background activity The normalized activity is calculated as the activity in the large cell normalized for area to the small cell and normalized in time to the window for the swarm STATSTAT number of events per seismic station in catalog The program reads Nordic file input data and writes out text files giving the number of events per station 129 LSQ A simple program to make and plot a least squares relation between two parameters Input is from a file with two columns x and y The program also makes an output used with GMT in order to make nice plots The PostScript output file is Isq eps and the GMT file is Isq_gmt out In order to produce the GMT plot only Unix use command gmtxy Isq_gmt out 6 11 Waveform file management tools This section describes the programs used for modifying and checking waveform files The most important features are to add or subtract channels and modify headers A special progra
233. eared and the usual location rolls over the screen When the location is finished the plot will reappear and the calculated travel times will be displayed as synthetic phases see previous section In this way it is possible to immediately visualize the differences between the read and calculated phases The output files are hyp out and print out as usual 6 2 8 Instrument correction and magnitudes MI mb and Ms The correction for instrument response is done by taking the spectrum of the selected window of the trace dividing with the response function and converting back to the time domain Any filtering specified is done in the frequency domain Filtering is needed in most cases Ground motion Option g Groun removes the effect of the instrument and displays a ground motion seismogram After selecting g and the zoom window there is a question of which type of seismogram to calculate Displacement d Velocity v or Acceleration a The corrected trace is shown below in nanometers nm nm sec or nm sec sec if response information is available Note that this might produce strange seismograms since e g a SP seismograph has very low gain at low frequencies so noise might be amplified very strongly It is therefore recommended to also do some filtering when using the g option Amplitude for determining MI The w WA option Wood Anderson is similar to the g option except that a fixed 8 pole bandpass filter is used 1 25 hz 20 hz Fi
234. ected ARCSEI runs steps 1 and 2 in a loop before the data is merged and moved In case several time windows are selected ARCSEI runs steps 1 to 4 in a loop and in addition a second loop over multiple station 1 and 2 If sequential time windows are specified ARCSEI computes multiple start times and works as if these time windows were user specified All def File yes resp yes ASCSEI ASCII to SEISAN all chan def yes resp yes Converts a single column file to a one channel SEISAN file Date time sample rate station and component must be entered manually BGISEI Beijing GEODEVICE FORMAT BGI to SEISAN Linux PCI chan def yes resp yes The program to convert waveform files from BGI to SEISAN format is called BGISEI The instrument 146 response in the original files is not used The program has only been tested with data recorded in Cuba The program is written by Bladimir Moreno CITSEI CityShark to SEISAN all chan def yes resp yes Converts from CityShark ASCII to SEISAN Components S Z S N S E are assumed for the 3 channels Assume 3 channels files only all channels same sample rate and number of samples CNVSSA and CNVSSR Kinemetrics accelerometers to Kinemetrics Dataseis PC The programs are supplied by Kinemetrics to convert from SSA and SSR formats to Kinemetrics Dataseis To further convert to SEISAN use program KINSEI Only PC executable programs are available The data is 16 bit CSS At the mo
235. ed by a standard STA LTA procedure The parameters are set in the MULPLT DEF file Press C to find coda length The coda length can only be determined if a P phase is present 6 2 7 Theoretical arrival times for global and local phases and location In order to assist in identifying seismic phases there is an option for displaying the theoretical arrival times of several global and regional phases while picking phases The steps to do so are the following 1 Before entering MULPLT from EEV the theoretical travel times have to be calculated for the current event This assumes that the origin time and hypocenter is given in the header line or a subsequent type one line If not enter manually from e g PDE or use the EEV command INPUTEPI or INPUTONE Then proceed to calculate the theoretical arrival times using EEV command IASP with the IASPEI91 traveltime tables for more details see section 6 20 3 The same command is also available inside MULPLT in multitrace mode All arrival times or a subset see 6 20 3 for all stations in current S file will now be calculated with program IASP and stored in file iasp out no importance for the use just for information See Figure 15 for an example in multitrace mode Note that very many theoretical phases can be generated if the S file has many stations MULPLT will stop if more 88 phases are used than the dimensions are set up for include file seidim inc and you must use fewer phases a warning is
236. editor The system has two basic modes of operation The first is to work interactively with the database That means jumping around from event to event plotting interactive phase picking locating deleting typing editing or appending events S files This mode is invoked with the command EEV which uses several programs controlled by a driver program and is intended for testing and editing of single events Once the input data seems OK the second mode of operation can be used On Windows95 98 2000 NT program SEISAN is equivalent to EEV and whenever EEV is mentioned this is meant to also include W95 98 NT SEISAN see section 4 5 2 The second mode is more like traditional data analysis where single programs are made to work on the whole or part of the database In this mode the updated S files and CAT files are created Examples are also plotting of epicenters waveform data or searching for data fulfilling certain criteria The system comes with a test data set from different networks mainly the Norwegian National Network for the time periods 199309 to 200002 The data has waveform data in different formats The data set includes events from both local and teleseismic distances The installation of test data is separate from installation of SEISAN If you want to try the system go directly to section 4 3 to get a feeling for how the system works SEISAN problems Some of the most common problems have been collected in the index under
237. ee section 3 7 The MacOSX is basically the same as the Sun distribution However there are some differences in the Makefiles since GNU compilers are used the compilation is similar to Linux Additional hints on MacOSX 10 By Dieter Stoll Lennartz electronic GmbH email dstoll lennartz electronic de At the time of this writing September 2003 10 2 6 was the most current version of OS X with the next major release codename Panther already out as a beta The following hints refer to 10 2 x versions chances are that by the time you read this 10 x x gt 2 is already out and some of the links hints and methods discussed below may be obsolete There are two prerequisites for using Seisan on OS X The first prerequisite concerns compiling Seisan from the distributed sources the second prerequisite concerns the actual use of Seisan On top of these technical prerequisites there is a human factor you need to be at least superficially familiar with command line operation Terminal app or xterm In order to compile and link Seisan off the source distribution you need to have the Apple Developer Tools installed These come on an extra CD together with the OS If you don t have access to that extra CD DevTools can be downloaded from Apple it s a fairly major download around 600 MB but you need to go through a 14 registration process before The steps are 1 Go to http developer apple com Click the Join Now link in the Partner
238. eessseneenessenaeeeeneensseesaeeeeneuaeseenaeaeseeeseesaeeeennseenenes 29 4 2 1 System withdigitaldatd EE 30 4 2 2 Systeni without digital dates na AR E leet eneisenelerieeet 30 4 2 3 Database ia E 30 4 2 4 Data base tools Content ANd check 31 4 2 9 High accuracy in SEISAN w s ecsicd scatter E ER T EEA T a at 31 4 3 Interactive work with earthquake locations EEV command s sscesceeeseeneeeeeeneeseeneeeneeneeneeneeeneeneeneees 32 AAHON EEN Orense Ee Ee Eeer 33 4 5 1 EEV driver program JSEISAN sccssssssseecensseeseeeesenaeseenneneseesasaeeneeaeseesaeeeeneuasseeneenesensavnesaeeeeneseenenns 42 4 5 2 EEV Windows driver program SEISAN ccssssccssssseessseeeneseseeseeneneeaeseenaeeeenenasseeneeeseenaseeeneenennseenenes 51 4 6 System resposes ereraa reeda ae enone ee aea ae ama aea aaa tactile sdccunsies ued ctvciesteegeetuetercaWeeusvunstestpetetene 53 4 7 Working With ICTk Te EE 55 4 72 Eegenen e E ee dE 55 AG lu un E 55 4 9 General Work with SEISAN aoa eeaeee Enee eeaeee snas eaaa eean aaaea aeaea e aaaeeeaa eaa aaa a aea aaien 56 4 10 Graphies In SEISAN r Eeer 56 5 INTRODUCTORY TRAINING COURSE SSES RREEEEEREEEEEEEREEEEEREEEEEEER NEE 57 6 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMS AND COMMANDS cccssseetseeeeeeeeees 58 6 1 Hypocenter location programs HYPOCENTER HYPO71 and HYPOINVERSE cssssseeeeees 58 6 1 1 The hypocenter program HP 58 6 1 2 AY POU WEE 68 6 1 3 The Hypoinverse program HYP
239. ei mM mM o mM bei m bai bei bei o oO CH CH CO fo CH CH o oO O O O CH CH CH CH CH O CH N N N N N N N N N N N Figure 38 Bar diagrams showing distribution of events of different subclasses over time RSAM 1 minute RSAM data can be created with WAVETOOL Future Extensions It is intended that additional parameters can be included in the above structure to included routine measurements of the volcanic earthquakes For example signal duration peak amplitude and mean frequency can be calculated for individual stations and included on additional type 3 lines with a volcanic identifier Parameters on each channel can then be averaged an inserted on the volcanic header line 214 The proposed format for these lines is as follows column format description 229 a4 VOLC Volcanic identifier TELO a4 station 2415 a4 component 19 20 a2 PA field identifier 22229 g8 3 peak amplitude 31732 a2 DU field identifier 34 41 g8 3 signal duration 43 44 a2 MF field identifier 46 53 g8 3 mean frequency SITIG a2 SB field identifier 58 65 g8 3 signal bandwidth 66 79 blank 80 al 3 line type identifier For example VOLC MAIN tremor 8 VOLC KTK1 S 3 PA 152E 06 DU 1 325 MF 2412 3 VOLC KTK1 S N PA 167E 06 DU 1 997 MF 2 067 3 VOLC KTK1 S E PA 141E 06 DU 1 543 MF 1 998 3 This method of inclusion of volcanic parameters should allow for future flexibility such as incorporation of an additional parameter fields in columns 66 to
240. eism Soc Am 78 308 325 Ruud B O and Husebye E S 1992 A new three component detector and automatic single station bulletin production Bull Seism Soc Am 82 221 237 Scherbaum F 1996 Of Poles and Zeros Fundamentals of Digital Seismology Kluwer Academic Publishers Singh S K Apsel R J Fried J and Brune J N 1982 Spectral attenuation of SH waves along the Imperial fault Bulletin of the Seismological Society of America 72 2003 2016 Snoke J A J W Munsey A G Teague and G A Bollinger 1984 A program for focal mechanism determination by combined use of polarity and SV P amplitude ratio data Earth quake notes 55 p15 Waldhauser F and W L Ellsworth 2000 A double difference earthquake location algorithm Method and application to the northern Hayward fault Bull Seism Soc Am 90 1353 1368 Waldhauser F hypoDD A computer program to compute double difference earthquake locations 2001 USGS Open File Rep 01 113 Veith K F and G E Clawson 1972 Magnitude from short period P wave data Bull Seism Soc Am 62 435 440 Appendix 1 The Nordic format Free columns are included for two purposes 1 To obtain a readable format 2 To have some space for possible future extensions Here are examples top 3 lines for positioning only 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789 1984 1022 2102 23 2 LE 69 330 27 440 11 0F NAO 34
241. elative start time of 60 seconds from beginning of earliest trace and 300 seconds duration 3 1 60 300 2 60 300 3 60 300 The program assumes that a large number is absolute time chan_out_file lt file name gt Name of text file containing a list of available channels from a list of waveform files If wav_out_file is not specified program terminates after creating the list Example 1 KBS BV Z 1996 6 3 20 2 18 991 6000 20 000 2666 400 299 950 2LOF S Z 1996 6 3 20 5 5 531 5800 50 000 2832 940 115 980 3 MOL S Z 1996 6 3 20 5 24 984 10000 50 000 2852 393 199 980 4 FOO S Z 1996 6 3 20 5 34 156 9650 50 000 2861 565 192 980 5 HYA S Z 1996 6 3 20 5 36 078 9900 50 000 2863 487 197 980 filter lt flow gt lt fhigh gt bandpass filter limits If only a filter is used a 4 pole Butterworth filter is used one way If both a filter and response removal is used an 8 pole Butterworth filter is used in the frequency domain npole lt n gt number of poles used for filter ground lt 1 2 3 gt compute displacement velocity or acceleration 1 2 3 ichan lt id gt select one channel only interactive Flag to specify non interactive use in which case the program does not ask any questions for example given by SEISAN autodrm interface default is interactive seisweb Flag to indicate that the program is started by SEISWEB maxpoints lt number gt Number specifies the total number of points desired for the total time window coverin
242. elected 0O Selected total 2 199508 CAT No of events 1 Selected 0O Selected total 2 199511 CAT No of events 1 Selected 0O Selected total 2 199606 CAT No of events 6 Selected 3 Selected total 5 199607 CAT No of events 5 Selected 1 Selected total 6 TOTAL NUMBER OF EVENTS IN TIME INTERVAL 16 UMBER OF DISTANT EVE Bc E See Dr E H UMBER OF REGIONAL EVENTS 0 9 UMBER OF LOCAL EVENTS U BER OF EVENTS SE EC ED KKKKKKKKKKKKK 6 UMBER OF WAVEFORM FILES SELECTED 9 UMBER OF INDEXES SELECTED 6 SELECTED EARTHQUAKES ARE IN FILE select out LOCAL INDEX FILE IN index out AMES FOR WAVEFORM FILES IN FILE waveform_names out SELECT COMMANDS IN FILE select inp Note above that the second time the menu is shown the choice of magnitude limits is shown For each CAT file in the catalog the number of events in file number of events selected from that file and the accumulated number are listed The last file might not show the correct number of events in file since SELECT might stop before reading the whole file if the end time is in the middle of the file Input parameters In the input database or file a time window must always be given If no more selection is done all 118 data in time window is selected Further selection can be done by choosing a number and giving parameters The
243. en on the pick display If a new phase key is selected you must define all the keys you want to use for phases including all the predefined phases The combined onset phase key can be up to 9 characters PHASE WEIGHT KEY The defaults are upper case 1 2 to 0 for weights 1 2 to 0 Again choosing just one other key and all must be redefined PHASE MOUSE KEY The default is blank Normally no redefinition is needed since the mouse character is defined in SEISAN The key can be defined as a character or the ASCII code written as a real number SPECTRAL P VELOCITY P velocity in km sec default 6 km sec SPECTRAL S VELOCITY S velocity in km sec default 3 5 km sec Both above parameters must be set separately the Vp Vs in STATIONO HYP is not used to calculate one from the other The values go into the S file the first time spectra are calculated if values are changed later in the MULPLT DEF file no change will be made in the S file old values remain SPECTRAL Q0 Q is defined as q0 f qalpha default O meaning no Q correction SPECTRAL QALPHA See above default 1 0 NOTE Q is only used when doing spectral analysis and has no effect on the displacement seismograms SPECTRAL DENSITY Density for spectral analysis g cm 3 default 3 5 g cm 3 SPECTRAL KAPPA Near surface attenuation default 0 0 meaning no attenuation SPECTRAL GEO_DEPTHS Depth range where geometrical spreading changes from surface wave to body wave spreading S
244. ent velocity is only saved in the S file when an associated phase is picked THAT PHASE MUST BE PICKED ON THE SINGLE UPPER TRACE SEEN ON THE SAME SCREEN If there is none use or E The velocity estimate is not very reliable and is dependent on the local velocities In order to calculate the apparent velocity the P velocity of the top layer must be given The default value is 5 0 km sec but another value can be set in the MULPLT DEF file To get a good estimate the correlation coefficient should be as high as possible and positive The quality of the obtained azimuth can be tested by locating the event with the calculated azimuth weighted out and observe the azimuth residual Figure 23 shows an example Azimuth and apparent velocity from array data FK analysis f FK Using this command the traces seen on the screen will be put into the FK program and an FK plot will be displayed The azimuth and apparent velocity with the highest correlation is selected by the program however any other value can be manually selected The values will ONLY enter the S file if associated with a phase in the same way as amplitudes are picked For more details see section 6 29 90 Rotated seismograms Option u Rotat will rotate the horizontal components for the next plot if the two horizontal components are available The rotation will display the radial component instead of the N component and the transverse component instead of the E component The back azimut
245. ents as given by the S file data base structure in the same way as waveform files are linked to the events Thus information about event source parameters and felt information is available together Program EPIMAP can plot the new files The requirement is that the filename ends with mac The intensities will be plotted as number on the map A new Unix program can also be used with the data Program MACROMAP can use the macroseismic observation file as input to create a map of the observations using GMT The program generates a GMT script file macromap gmt which then is executed from within the program to create a PostScript output file macromap ps This file is then displayed from within the program with Unix command gv GhostView The input can also be from a file made with macroquest web based interactive program for input from the public to be distributed with SEISAN CD In addition to making the plot a conversion from the web format to SEISAN format is made output file macromap out This option requires an input file with postal codes in order to get location of the observations MACROMAP can be executed directly or from eev When executed directly from the prompt line the options are macroinput file with macroseismic observations SEISAN format abs path or in ISO placename optional additional file with place names to be shown on map abs path or in DAT epimap format is used posttile optional file with postal code abs p
246. er SEISMO REA just like BER MUST have a 1 5 letter name Currently the alternative database is used in our Institute to store data from other agencies like NAO which in some cases are copied to our own database C command under EEV The name DELET is reserved for the DELET database which is always present Moment tensor inversion program INVRAD The program is written by John Ebel Ebel and Bonjer 1990 for moment tensor inversion for very local events The program uses instrument corrected amplitudes of the direct upgoing phases of P SV and SH phases and makes a linear inversion for the moment tensor The program then finds the largest double couple component of the traceless moment tensor For more details see file invrad txt in the INF directory The original program has been slightly modified in input and output to be integrated with EEV in SEISAN The steps to get the fault plane solution are 41 Select the event from EEV 1 Plot each trace and select preferably the first clear amplitude of the direct wave Mark the amplitude as usual and associate the amplitude with amplitude phases AMPG or AMSG direct phases This will create a separate line with amplitude readings only The polarity must also be indicated on a separate phase since the inversion program uses the polarity of the amplitude The amplitudes MUST be picked on instrument corrected traces if all instruments do not have the same response function At least 5 amplit
247. er friendly graphical interface of some of the functions of the SEISAN earthquake analysis system The program uses the functions implemented in SEISAN by executing external commands which mean that most of the data processing is performed with the SEISAN software JSEISAN is mainly a tool for formatting the input data and display the results The program was developed with Visual Cafe 4 Standard Edition The software operates in Unix and Windows environments Using JSEISAN The program is started by giving command jseisan and the window Figure 5 below will appear iol DATA BAGE TesT_ D Minimum No Stations fe Distance Ip All D M P 3 Year Month Day Lower Upper ore Param 90 0 StartDate 1990 j2 D Magnitude 0 0 ba er s ng west EndDate 2001 j2 ja Depth km 0 os E YEAR MDD HHM SEC ID LAT LONG DEP AGA N RMS MAGLI MAGZ MAG3 2 18 066 76 6 8 PDE625 6 3BPDE 6 25 Plot 1994 616 1841 3tD 15 294199 5 PDE401 5 5 6 0WGS 1 1994 10 4 1322 55 8tD 43 773 147 321 14 0 PDE672 7 3BPDE 8 15PDE 7 95BRK1 Edit 1995 622 0141 5 3tL 60 385 2 598 20 2 TES 13 1 0 2 7CTES 2 3LTES 2 2LNA01 1995 1120 0401 58 9tL 60 042 5 393 1 7 TES 12 0 7 2 3CTES 2 0LTES 2 1LNA01 Locate 1996 63 1955 40 1tD 47 715 153 256 33 0 BER 15 1 1 5 35BER 6 0BBER 5 6BPDE1 Ei Update L A v Map Click Action Zoom in DI Epimap Zoom by 2 D Config Reset HELP EXIT Lon Lat 0 0 Al Click the mouse over the area that you wan
248. erated by VELMENU final hypocenter locations in CNV format VELEST output earthquake data in Nordic format HYP output HYP output file input model VELEST input generated by VELMENU documentation of inversion VELEST output earthquake data in Nordic format VELMENU input HYP output file selection of stations generated by VELMENU station corrections VELEST output station locations VELEST input generated by VELMENU difference file between HYP and VELEST location routine VELMENU output final hypocentre locations same as fin_hyp cnv in Nordic format VELMENU output velest cmn VELEST control file VELEST input generated by VELMENU 6 27 3 NOR2DD contributed by Brian Baptie This program produces input for the Double Difference Program HYPODD Waldhauser and Ellsworth 2001 Waldhauser 2000 from Nordic and STATIONO HYP files The Nordic file has to be given as argument when running the program example nor2dd select out The files created are phase dat phase input data station dat station coordinates HYPODD is available from http geopubs wr usgs gov open file of01 113 6 27 3 NOR2JHD_PUJOL contributed by Brian Baptie This program produces input for Pujol s JHD program Pujol 2003 from Nordic and STATIONO HYP files The Nordic file has to be given as argument when running the program example nor2jhd_pujol select out The files created are syn times phase input data syn vel
249. erworth RESP can be used to 218 write finite impulse response FIR coefficients Scherbaum 1996 that are used as anti alias filters in most modern digitizers if GSE is used as output format SEISAN has no capability to read the FIR filters or to correct for them However the FIR filters are part of a full description of the instrument response and should be at least included for information if possible The seismometer is assumed to have the following velocity frequency response 2 OI T o i20a h Which corresponds to the transfer function 2 e o s 2sah T s where s iW is the angular frequency 21rf in HZ wo the resonance frequency of the seismometer i 4 1 andh the damping normally around 0 7 NOTE In the equation for the frequency response the sign 2 i h was before March 2000 so old parameter files may have to be regenerated The sign depends on the definition of the signs in the Fourier transform and therefore may be different in different text books It may even be wrong although it looks right if a wrong Ansatz is done Due to the wrong sign the FAP values in the SEISAN response files were wrong however the programs use the constants given in the files and the correct response is generated If you have the instrument constants in your old response files and not just FAP the old response files can be used The transformation from displacement to velocity or back is
250. es Explosion E Add New Remove Je Probable Explosion _Aad New _Femove Reset Je Volcanic closa Window All Station Comps be Present Figure 6 Dialog window for setting other parameters used during search A4 Interactive Mapping Tool Figure 5 shows a map with the locations of the earthquakes obtained during the searching process The map has an equidistant cylindrical projection which means that one unit of longitude has the same distance to one unit of latitude This map can be used as interactive mapping tool For this purpose 4 options are included in the combo box labeled as Map Click Action Figure 5 The options are Select Zoom in Zoom out and Polygon The function of each radio button is as follows Select When it is active the user can click over the circle identifying the location of the earthquake The associated earthquake in the list will be highlighted Zoom in When it is active the user can zoom in the map by a factor of 2 4 8 16 or 32 The zoom factor is selected from the combo box labeled as Zoom by The clicked point on the map will be the center of the new map Zoom out Similar to Zoom in but with reverse effect Polygon When it is active the user can define the points of a polygon by clicking on the map The polygon is closed when a click over the starting point is made Once the polygon is defined the user can edit its points by
251. es calculated can be very large making it hard to see which phase is which IASP therefore has a definition file IASP DEF where phases to be written out are given The file can be in the working directory or in DAT If no definition file is available all phases will be written to the iasp out file Below is an example of a IASP DEF file This file contain the definitions of phases to be used when calculating synthetic phases to be plotted with mulplt There is one phase pr line and each phase is preceded with the keyword IASP PHASE Only lines with this keyword will be read The defined phase then follows in column 13 to 20 If no phases are defined all ISPEI91 phases will be used Phase ID Phase IASP PHASE P IASP PHASE PP IASP PHASE PPP IASP PHASE PKP IASP PHASE pP IASP PHASE sP IASP PHASE PcP IASP PHASE S IASP PHASE SS IASP PHASE SSS IASP PHASE SKS IASP PHASE Scs IASP PHASE PS IASP PHASE SP IASP PHASE ScP 6 21 Inversion for Qig QLG The QLG program can be used to determine an average Qi or to perform a tomographic inversion The method is described in Ottemdller et al 2002 The program can also produce the input for distance trace plots Note that using the program is no trivial task The data set needs to be carefully selected and the instrument calibration has to be known The input to the program is a Nordic file which includes several events The parameter file needs to be carefully set up The program can be
252. es larger than 100 km In SEISAN 100 km is the default however it can also be set to any other value by the parameter HERKIJ_ DISTANCE see later The above relation breaks down if the depth is large or comparable to the epicentral distance and in 95 that case body wave spreading is again assumed In order to get a smooth transition from surface wave to body wave spreading it is assumed that the relation changes nearly linearly from surface wave spreading to body wave spreading between the depths GEO_DEPTH1 to GEO_DEPTH2 For depth less than GEO_DEPTH1 default 50 km Herrmann Kijko spreading is assumed for depths larger than GEO_DEPTH2 default 100 km body wave spreading is assumed with the transition in between In each case the geometrical spreading term is given as the equivalent GD which is also recorded in the database These 3 parameters can be used to change geometrical spreading If e g HERKIJ_DISTANCE is 10 000 km body wave spreading is always used For more info see qspec pdf in INF From the spectral parameters source radius and stress drop can be calculated as follows Source radius 0 35 VS f0 where f0 is the corner frequency and VS the S velocity at the source Stress drop 0 44 Moment source radius 3 The spectral analysis is used in two ways The first and most common is to make the attenuation and instrument corrected displacement spectrum and determine the flat spectral level OMO and corner frequency fO f
253. esponse amplitude and phase at 30 frequencies are listed In this case the response is calculated from the parameters 2 Incomplete set of parameters or no parameters and the response at 30 frequencies In this case the response is calculated by interpolation of the 30 values 3 Poles and zeros No discrete values are given and the response is calculated directly from the poles and zeros See also Appendix 2 for the SEISAN waveform file format and section 4 6 IMPORTANT PUT RESPONSE FILE IN CAL DIRECTORY OR ONE OF ITS STATION SUBDIRECTORIES Example of running the program oxygen larso 23 resp RESP PROGRAM TO CREATE RESPONSE F ILES IN SEISAN T OR GSE FORMAT HE RESPONSE CAN BE CREATED AS POLES AND ZEROS PAZ OR FREQUENCY AMPLITUDE AND PHASE FAP T HE SAME TRANSFER FUNCTION AND FILTERS ARE USED IN BOTH CASES V M S OR V G ER CHOSE OUTPUT FORMAT 0 NO OUTPUT FILE 1 SEISAN FAP 2 SEISAN PAZ 3 GSE2 FAP 4 GSE2 PAZ 4 TYPE OF SENSOR 1 NONE 2 SEISMOMETER 3 ACCELEROMETER 2 SEISMOMETER NATURAL PERIOD a SEISMOMETER DAMPING RATIO 7 SENSOR LOADED GENERATOR CONSTANT 300 RECORDING MEDIA GAIN COUNT V OR M V 2048
254. et First motion Only C or D are used ISC codes J and B are ignored 138 Hypocenter orders ISC put the best solution last here the order is reversed and the prime estimate is first Duration magnitude Change D to C for type Distance indicator If station furthest away is less than 1000 km indicator is L between 1000 and 3000 km indicator is R and if more than 3000 km indicator is D If no stations are present the type is set to D In order to relocate an event and compare to ISC location the ISC reidentified phases must be used option 2 see below This has the disadvantage that phases not used by ISC mainly S phases of local earthquakes are weighted out in the output file If option 3 is used the ISC identified phases are selected if there and if no ISC identification is given the local reported phase is used The output file for option 2 and 3 looks the same except that for option 2 the user defined phases are weighted out The residuals given in the output file are always relative to the ISC identified phases Running ISCNOR Below is an example of a run where a latitude longitude window has been used Phases selected can be User reported phases default return Ss i ISC identified phases only AZ ISC identified phases and user reported phases when not identified by ISC 3 Output All hypocenters and phases Return All hypocenters ee Prime hypocenter Ge Latitude range return for all 60 2 70 5 Longitude range
255. eter set the parameters ar Lhour Lower limit of time interval for explosion time Hhour Upper limit of time interval for explosion time Btime Lower limit of yearly interval Etime Upper limit of yearly interval Number of latitude longitude pairs in polygon 5 From the second line the lat long pairs are given Area Maxdepth Maxmag Lhour Hhour Btime Etime area 1 100 0 3 6 11 15 197001 200012 64 0 23 8 66 70 23 80 68 80 20 20 70 50 20 0 T1420 26 00 70 80 29 50 68 50 28 50 67 00 29 50 64 30 29 50 area 2 100 0 3 8 15 20 197001 200012 6 73 90 17 80 68 80 20 20 66 70 23 80 area 3 100 0 K 0 1 197001 200012 67 90 17 80 68 80 20 20 66 70 23 80 area 4 100 0 4 0 2 17 197001 200012 68 50 28 50 68 50 36 00 67 00 36 00 The EXFILTER program searches for probable explosions using a catalog file events that might be explosions with P as Event ID in the output file exfilter out Example of program run lt exfilter gt NUMBER OF AREAS 55 FILENAME June Cat zk kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Number of probable explosions found 90 Output written in file exfilter out KKKKKKKK KKK KKK KKKKKKKKKKKKK KKK KKK KKK Figure 37 show how the filter works for events in Scandinavia axdepth Events with depth above this value are not explosions axmag Events with magnitude above this value are not explosions 69 64 66 66 67 N 12 80 18 30 00 27
256. eturn The format of the input file is as follows frequency amplitude phase frequency amplitude phase etc e g 0 2 0 7 200 0 7 0 8 100 10 0 0 1 33 The file has no blank lines and can contain up to 60 data sets It is important to note that the amplitude values should be NORMALIZED at 1 0 hz Now there is no more input to the response parameters and the output is GAIN FACTOR AT 1 0 HZ 12345 6 221 This is the gain of the system at 1 0 hz and is also the value for normalizing the response curve that is all calculated values are divided by this number There is no unit for gain of an amplifier and for displacement response using a seismometer and drum recording If the recording is digital the unit would be counts meter and for a velocity response counts meter second etc If a file with poles and zeros is used without any other information the normalization constant must have the unit of count m similar for the tabulated input Further output is given in a file called resp out see Table 1 for an example The response curves amplitude and phase are now printed plotted on the screen First comes the amplitude response amplitude in db versus log frequency By pushing return the phase response is shown phase shift deg versus log frequency After the plots the SEISAN calibration file can optionally be made follow instructions see example below The response file MUST be calculated for the displacement response an
257. ew each window separately select the channels of interest and when all channels have been viewed only the selected channels will remain for display Channel order in multitrace mode Normally channels are plotted in alphabetical order They can also be plotted in the order they are stored in the waveform file s option set in MULPLT DEF By setting the channel order parameter in the MULPLT DEF file it is also possible to plot the channels in time order If MULPLT is started from EEV and distance ordering is set the channels will be plotted in the order in which the stations appear in the S file which normally is in distance order if the S file has been updated However if a particular order is required the stations can be ordered like that in the S file Since there is no consideration for channels for the same station the channels for one station will be plotted in the same order as given in the waveform file If a station is not found in the S file it will be plotted last If plotting is done with MULPLT directly with a waveform file the plotting order will be the start times as given in the waveform file header Channel ordering can be turned on or off with the key Dist If set in the MULPLT DEF file it is set when MULPLT starts up 85 Plotting from continuous data base If a continuous data base is set up see section 2 2 3 it is then possible to plot all traces from the continuous data base with MULPLT When MULPLT starts
258. f apparent velocity regression residual rms at which arrival times are weighted to zero during start location determination Reducing this value will cause arrivals to be rejected when they do not conform to the plane wave set of arrivals which is characteristic of distant events Unless you are getting a lot of messages xxx removed Apparent velocity deviation in the output it is recommend against changing this default value However you can disable this feature by setting test 61 0 0 D 2 0 Use of IASP91 phases 0 Only calculate basic phases 1 calculate all D 1 0 Types of phases used when calculating travel time D 0 0 Allow temporary increase in RMS by this factor D 2 0 Number of iterations for which increased rms is allowed D 3 0 Print out of travel time calculation errors 1 y 0 n D 0 0 Recognize blank phases as P y 1 n 0 D 0 0 Apparent P velocity km sec to calculate start depth from pP p D 5 0 Distance deg beyond which PKiKP or PKP is used as first arrival D 110 0 Maximum depth that the hypocenter is allowed to move to D 700 km Sort output in distance y 1 n 0 D 1 0 Auto phase identification for distant events y 1 n 0 D 0 0 Number of iterations with first P s before autophase id D 3 0 67 74 Print input phase data in print out y 1 n 0 0 0 75 78 MI magnitude coefficients MI TEST 75 log10 amp TEST 76 log10 dist TEST 77 dist TEST 78 where amp is amplitude in nm and
259. fferent from 0 full trace is used if EVENT SELCRIT is set to 0 START LATITUDE and START LONGITUDE these can be set to write values to corr out which is in Nordic format and can be used as input for location programs this can be used if all events analysed belong to one cluster and the same starting location is to be used for all of them set to 999 to disable FIX DEPTH allows to fix depth to given value in corr out which can be useful if data is input to location program set to 999 to disable WAVE CORR OUT CORR can write out cross correlation function and input traces to waveform output files of the selected duration to disable set this parameter to 0 1 for full data or 2 for reduced data where 1 for data gt MIN CORRELATION otherwise 0 WAVENAME OUT CORR writes out waveform filenames to corr out it is possible to either keep original waveform names 0 or put corr output file names 1 which after SPLIT of corr out allows inspection of the results using eev and mulplt SINGLE BIT the data can be reduced to 1 bit reduce to 0 and 1 if set to 1 full data if set to 0 CONTINUOUS MODE write out all detection times for correlation above threshold if set to 1 otherwise only phase for maximum correlation CONTINUOUS EXTRACT extract event waveform files for correlation above threshold 0 for no extract 1 to extract single channel used 2 extract all channels STATION one line for configuration of each channel STAT
260. file in the INF directory the filename is velest ps The derived model can be used as an improved model for earthquake location or as a starting model for 3 D inversion For a fixed velocity model and constant station corrections VELEST in simultaneous mode performs the Joint Hypocenter Determination JHD The original version of VELEST by Kissling is included in the Sun and Linux versions A version modified to compile VELEST under Windows has been provided by Freddy Aldersons e mail faldersons earthlink net This Windows package is included in the file velest_pc_3 3 zip which is located in the SUP directory The files have to be extracted to the PRO directory The implementation of VELEST to SEISAN is given by the program VELMENU VELMENU provides automatic format conversion to VELEST generation of parameter files using the SEISAN system execution of VELEST conversion back to SEISAN format After preparing a dataset of local earthquake data VELMENU can be used to work with the VELEST inversion routine The first time VELMENU is used all input files for the inversion with default parameters can be generated These parameter files then can be changed interactively and the inversion started with VELMENU Running VELMENU The program is started with velmenu After entering the filename of the earthquake data the menu of VELMENU appears Example of program run velmenu File name of earthquake data in Nordic Fo
261. for GMT Generic Mapping Tools http gmt soest hawaii edu The user can choose a scaling for the magnitudes and also select a magnitude type order The scaling option is useful if you wish to scale the symbol size of your epicenters with magnitude The magnitude type order defines which magnitude should be taken in case several magnitudes have been determined for one event If you don t give a magnitude order the program chooses the largest magnitude The files written by SEIGMT are gmtxy out event locations to be plotted with psxy gmtxyz out event locations and depths to be plotted with psxy gmtpath out travel path data to be plotted with psxy psmeca out fault plane solutions to be plotted with psmeca Aki and Richards convention SELMAP selecting a subsection of a MAP file The program can retrieve parts of a large MAP file written in SEISAN map format On the SEISAN web site or on the SEISAN CDROM very detailed global mapfiles are available in SEISAN format The file originally comes from the USGS SELMAP can select out part of a MAP file in a latitude longitude grid The MAP files consist of several small segments and a segment is selected if at least one point is inside the specified grid USGSNOR USGS catalog to NORDIC format The program converts USGS CDROM hypocenters to NORDIC format Most of the information is used If more than 3 magnitudes are available only the 3 first are used The number of station
262. for a large number earthquakes since it at the end of a run a summary of average station travel time residuals and event RMS is given A special option of HYP is to locate a data set with all permutation of a given range of models in order to find the model giving the lowest RMS Deep earthquakes under a local network produce clear phase conversion at crustal interfaces Chiu et al 1986 They can be modeled with one of the full wave modeling programs both with respect to amplitude and arrival time 29 SEISAN can when displaying surface waves make spectral files ready to be processed for surface wave dispersion with Herrmann s programs Herrmann 1996 Attenuation can be determined using the coda Q method for local earthquakes CODAQ The coda Q program will calculate q for a series of events and stations at given frequencies Average values are calculated and a q vs f curve is fitted to the calculated values The principle for calculation is the standard coda q method whereby a coda window is bandpass filtered an envelope fitted and the coda q at the corresponding frequency calculated Havskov et al 1989 The SPEC program will determine Q by calculating spectral ratios or the near surface attenuation using the spectral decay method An alternative is to use spectral modeling where Q stress drop and seismic moment are modeled simultaneously Catalog and database work Once a large database has been created several programs are used t
263. fore and after the main event and the distance limits in km The magnitude of the main event over which the search will be performed is also user defined The output is a repetition of the input catalogue with placed at the end of each dependant event which falls within the limits defined in the interactive input in time and distance The default file name is cluster out The user 201 should then work systematically through these events and decide whether they should be cleaned or not This process we feel should be done manually because deleting events from the catalogue especially the historical part may have serious implications later in the hazard computations Clusters of foreshocks aftershocks or other dependant events such as earthquake swarms can be delineated by this program 6 25 Magnitude relations MAG The MAG program calculates simple magnitude relations The program has three functions 1 Calculate parameters for a magnitude scale MI or Mc 2 Calculate relation between two different magnitudes and or spectral parameters and 3 Calculate a new magnitude as a function of an existing magnitude a natural step following function 2 All three functions can be done at the same time Function 3 can also be used for moving a particular magnitude type and or agency to the first magnitude position in line 1 to be plotted with EPIMAP ALL HEADER LINES ARE SEARCHED FOR MAGNITUDE INFORMATION Input The data input is a CA
264. g E and V for explosion and volcanic events The letters used for selection are not limited to the examples shown above they are however the ones used currently It is thus e g possibly to label events as X for unknown type column 23 in header line and then later on select out all those events by specifying X for event ID For the 3 questions about types up to 5 letters can be used The currently used codes are E Explosion P Probable explosion V Volcanic S Sonic boom Q Earthquakes which is equivalent to blank for type However if blank is selected all event types are selected while if Q is used as input only events with no ID or Q ID are selected So if all earthquakes and volcanic event are to be selected use QV Without the Q only volcanic events are selected 6 Magnitude Limits Range of magnitudes to select Note that if no magnitude type is given the extreme of all magnitude types reported is used 7 Latitude Limits Range of latitude NOTE If no latitude or longitude values are chosen SELECT will include an event even when it is not located if the remaining criteria are OK If it is required that only located events are searched for enter at least one value like an upper latitude limit of 95 8 Longitude Limits Range of longitude 9 Depth Limits Range of depths 10 RMS Limits Range of rms travel time residuals 11 Number of Stations Limits Range of number of stations 12 Hypocenter Errors Latitu
265. g Includes high pass low pass band pass and band stop Butterworth filters as well as Gaussian and Futterman filters e Computation of elastic response spectra Computes absolute acceleration relative velocity relative displacement and pseudo acceleration response spectra e Computation of inelastic response spectra Computes required strength response spectra for fixed ductility demand of bilinear systems e Computation of Fourier spectra Computes and optionally smoothes FFT of a time signal e Computation of response acceleration velocity displacement of elastic and inelastic bilinear single degree of freedom oscillators e Computation of the S wave response of a soil column of given properties assuming that the 152 time history is the incident wave field at the base of the column The main operations involving two recordings are Spectral ratio Computes the Fourier spectral ratio between two recordings Odogram Displays an X Y parametric representation time is the parameter of two recordings typically ground displacements in order to observe particle trajectories Addition Difference Computes the sum or difference of two recordings This is useful for instance to identify rocking or torsional motions in buildings Rotation Rotates two components of the ground motion to arbitrary angles Cross correlation Computes cross correlation between two signals Coherence Computes coherence between two signa
266. g all selected traces This option is meant to reduce the number of points to what is needed to visual correctly plot the traces When plotting the trace using a number of pixels which is smaller than 132 the number of points on the trace samples are plotted on top of each other for one time sample This results in the maximum and minimum being plotted at the same place on the x axis The idea now is to reduce the trace to these maxima and minima only Then using twice the number of samples than pixels will allow to visually correctly show the trace Note that this is not a resample routine Option mainly used with SEISWEB stat_out write out station location file simple xy output file station_list out rsam convert data to RSAM 1 minute absolute average which is commonly used in volcano seismology resp_out write out list of all response files for channels given in waveform files respfile_list out Another way of extracting waveform data is using MULPLT where many traces can be extracted as a binary SEISAN file using WAVETOOL in the background or a single trace as an ASCII file Accuracy of extracted data If the data is filtered or corrected for instrument response the number out can be less than one and an output file of zeros can be made If the output format is SEISAN the values will be scaled to avoid this and the appropriate scaling factor is included in the waveform file Subsequently reading of these files in SEISAN wi
267. g the co ordinates of cities to be used in post processing with CRISIS99 for windows This name does not have any influence in the hazard computations However CRISIS99 expects a line here 12 ATTENUATION TABLES NMOD attenuation tables must be given each one in a different file 196 The tables give to CRISIS99 the relations between magnitude focal distance and median intensities CRISIS99 expects the following parameters in the i th attenuation file l 1 NMOD 1 Parameters defining the magnitude limits 1 line MINF I MSUP I NMAG I MINF I Lower limit of magnitude given in the table MINF I Upper limit of magnitude given in the table NMAG l Number of magnitudes for which intensity is given CRISIS99 assumes than intensities are given for magnitudes M k where M K MINF I K 1 DMAG where DMAG MSUP I MINF I NMAG I 1 2 Parameters defining the distance limits 1 line RINF I Lower limit of distance given in the table RINF I Upper limit of distance given in the table NRAD I Number of distances for which intensity is given CRISIS 99 assumes than intensities are given for distances R K where log R K log RINF I K 1 DLRAD where DLRAD log RSUP I log RINF I NRAD 1 1 That is distances are supposed to be logarithmically spaced 3 For each of the NT different intensity measures the following block of lines T I J SLA I J AMAX I J SA I 1 1 1 SA I 1 1 2 SA 1 J K L SA
268. ge Horizontal component HYP output in S file HYP do not locate HYP multiple model mode Hyp cat Hyp out HYP_ISC HYPINV HYPNOR HYPO style weight HYPO71 HYPO71 files to Nordic files 57 141 212 36 57 130 230 36 65 69 138 Hypocenter program 59 Hypocenter add to S file 36 Hypocenters more than one 56 Hypoinverse 36 72 Hypoinverse format 140 Hypoinverse to Nordic 138 Hypsum out 68 I IASP 180 lasp out 180 IASP91 HED 9 179 IASPEI phases 59 67 IASPEI Seismic Format 140 IASPEI software library 148 IASPEI91 9 61 67 88 Iceland 150 ID lock 124 Identifying seismic phases 88 ID line 5 86 124 IL 36 IMS1 0 140 Index file 9 33 35 41 57 120 Index out 120 Indexeev out 35 166 Input file for CRIATT 197 Input file for EQRISK 198 Input files for the CRISIS99 193 INPUTEPI 36 88 INPUTONE 36 INPUTONE 88 Inserting events in the database 122 Instrument response 54 217 Interactive work 32 International Monitoring System 140 Inversion 208 inversion of surface wave group velocities217 Invertratio 210 INVRAD 37 41 42 IRIS 147 149 150 IRISEI 147 ISC 61 138 139 140 ISC location 36 73 ISC to Nordic 138 Iscloc def 73 ISCNOR 138 ISCSTA 139 ISF format 140 ISFNOR 140 ISMSEI 147 Israel 137 147 J Java 229 230 Java start command 12 JHD 208 210 Joint hypocenter determination 208 210 jseisan 12 JSEISAN 43 249 JSEISAN configuration parameters 51 JSEISAN configure 44 K K2SEl 147 KA
269. gure 9 Show hide channels to be plotter together on the screen 1 Press the lt Replot Reset gt button Figure 8 2 Click the left button of the mouse over the check box identifying each channel in order to select unselect the channel 3 Press the lt Replot Apply gt button Navigating through individual channels 1 Go to the single trace mode Figure 9 2 Press the lt Next Channel gt button to go forward or lt Previous Channel gt to go backward Navigating through pages of channels 12 channels as maximum on one page 1 Go to the multi trace mode Figure 8 2 Press the lt Next Page gt button to go forward or lt Previous Page gt to go backward Editing S files The editing window Figure 17 has 3 buttons for closing the window When you click the button lt Save amp Exit gt the S file is physically modified on the hard disk The lt close gt button keeps the changes in memory until another earthquake is selected on the list So you can still perform full processing without making any real change in the S file The steps to edit the S file are 1 Select a desired earthquake from the list clicking the left button of the mouse on it Figure 5 2 Click the lt Edit gt button 3 An editing window with the information is shown Figure 11 x 1996 6 3 1955 40 1tD 47 715 153 256 33 0 BER 15 1 1 5 35BER 6 0BBER 5 6BPDE1 2 33 209 5 401 8 0 0 0 5049E 05 O 6710E 01 0 1391E 03E 1996 0603 1955 31 8 D 46
270. gy For more information check http www eas slu edu People RBHerrmann ComputerPrograms html The programs have been implemented with SEISAN by Vunganai Midzi who has written a guide on how to use the programs This document is given as the Word file surface doc in the INF directory Also see section 6 2 11 for details on output files that can be generated with MULPLT The programs are included in the tar file surface tar in the PRO directory but are not installed as part of the standard installation If you wish to use the programs you need to extract the programs cd lt SEISAN_TOP gt PRO tar xvf surface tar You can recompile the programs with the commands make f Makefile sur clean make f Makefile sur 6 31 Instrument response In SEISAN the instrument response can be stored as pairs of frequency amplitude and phase or as poles and zeros The formats that can be used include GSE2 SEISAN and SEED The SEISAN and GSE response formats are described in Appendix 3 For a detailed description of the GSE format the reader is referred to GSETT 3 1997 The program RESP creates response files in SEISAN and GSE format SEED format response files can be extracted from a SEED volume 6 31 1 Create instrument response files RESP Introduction The purpose of this program is to 1 Make Seisan or GSE2 response files 2 Provide the engineer maintaining seismic instrumentation with a practical tool for calculating and c
271. h used is displayed above the trace All channels will be displayed rotated until u Rotat is pressed again This means that phases can be picked and spectra made with the rotated channel When picking phases on rotated signals these will appear in the S file with components R or T instead of N and E respectively This also means that only if the rotated signals are shown will the phases read on rotated channels appear on the plot The station back azimuth is obtained in the following way If a hypocenter is given in the header line the angles are calculated using the current STATIONx HYP file If no hypocenter is available the angle will be read from the S file under column observed azimuth 47 51 if not blank and the azimuth residual will be added This option permits the user to first determine the azimuth with the 3 component option and then rotate the signals with the determined azimuth Finally if no observed azimuth is available the event to station azimuth 180 deg will be used if available column 77 79 If no back azimuth can be found no rotation is done and an angle of 999 deg is displayed If in single trace mode and choosing the 3 component option AND the rotate option the user will be prompted for a rotation angle and the rotated channels will be shown in the usual 3 component plot however the azimuth determined is done with the unrotated channels PROBLEM In general the R channel will use the response of the N channel and the
272. he original the only differences being in the input and output facility Input data required are phase arrival times station co ordinates and a crustal velocity model SEISAN extracts the arrival information from a Nordic format phase readings file and the station and velocity information from the station input file STATIONO HYP found either in the SEISAN data directory DAT or the local directory The format of the STATIONO HYP file is described in this manual in the section on the HYPOCENTER algorithm 6 1 1 HYPO71 supports 13 test variables that influence how the program goes about locating the earthquakes The default values for these variables were developed for the large and closely spaced networks in central California These variables are defined at the start of the STATIONO HYP file by the values of TEST 01 to TEST 13 Brief definitions for each of these 69 variables can be found below and full definitions can be found in the HYPO71 manual SEISAN constructs a HYPO71 format input file called hypo71 input containing the station co ordinates thickness and velocity for each layer of the crustal model and phase arrival times then runs the HYPO71 algorithm The HYPO71 program generates a single output file called hypo71 output SEISAN reads the information contained in this output file to create two further output files hypo7 out a Nordic format phase readings file containing the calculated location and hypo71 brief a summary file c
273. he Wadati parameters will now be calculated and shown on the screen Optionally a plot can now be made The plot shows the Wadati diagram On the left is shown all stations with corresponding S P times Any station on the plot can be identified with the cursor Point the cursor near a symbol and click and the station data will be shown in the upper right hand corner This facility is used to identify bad picks The plot output file is called wad_plot eps Z Automatic phase picking A waveform file must be present See also the AUTO program section 6 15 Below is shown a session with EEV on PC 39 Example of using EEV for November 1993 eev 199311 1993 11 Reading events for base AGA 18 1 2 Nov 1993 17 06 48 L 60 443 4 512 2 0 1 5 N 1 8CBER 6 2 5 Nov 1993 22 37 21 D L 42 2 5 Nov 1993 22 37 23 D 1 4 5 Nov 93 22539 2 1 5 5 Nov 93 22 40 58 L 6 7 Nov 1993 23 40 43 L 67 837 20 059 15 0 0 7 2 5CBER Ja 7 7 Nov 1993 23 43 17 L 66 307 6 919 31 0 1 4 3 1CBER 8 17 17 19 Nov 1993 01 45 29 D 70 069 139 780 1 0 1 De ZE File name seismo REA AGA__ 1993 11 19 0145 29D S199302 1993 1119 0145 29 0 Do 70 069 139 780 l1 BER 7 1 1 19 999 9 821 9999 9 3206E 06 2536E 07 2639E 08E ACTION UPD 97 03 25 21 28 OP jh STATUS 1D 19931119014529 I 93111901 K41 6 93 L 253 Gm 1 9311 19 0153 06S NSN_09 6 STAT SP IPHASW D HRMM SECON CODA AMPLIT PERI AZIMU VELO SNR AR TRES W DI
274. he aim is to inspect an event and decide if the event is real and should be put into the database using option p All work must be done from the directory where the raw waveform files are located The process of putting an event into the database results in creating the S file option1 giving the event identifiers and copying the waveform files of registered events to the waveform directory By pushing p Regis the user will be prompted for distance indicator which has to be L R or D for local regional or distant event It is possible here to enter 2 characters like LE or LV for local explosion or local volcanic event The event type or event ID can be any character Three characters are predefined and should only be used if the following definition correspond P probable explosion E explosion or V Volcanic event The volcanic events have a sub classification which can be entered when registering an event as volcanic see section 6 28 The process of registering the event into the database implies that a new S file is created or registered and in the S file An operator ID will be asked and the operator ID will be put on the ID line The question about operator will only be asked for the first event since it is assumed that all subsequent events are put into the same database by the same operator The event ID can later be used with the SELECT program to select out particular event types When first putting an event into the database the u
275. he calibration file in the CAL directory and add it to the SEISAN file or give a message if it is not there The program will work with SEISLOG files recorded under operating system OS9 or QNX up to version 7 6 For QNX version 7 0 use program QNXSEI PCQSEI converting PCEQ format to SEISAN PC chan def yes resp no PCEQ format to SEISAN Earlier used with IASPEI software libraries PDASEI converting PDAS files to SEISAN all chan def yes resp yes The program converts a single channel PDAS file to a single channel file in SEISAN format Several of these files can then be merged with SEISEI PDASEI in previous SEISAN versions before version 6 0 only worked with PDAS in 16 bit format so if 32 bit or gain ranged format was input the output 148 would have been in error The current version of PDASEI should be able to convert all 3 types of input files A description of the PDAS format is found in the PDASEI program PSNSEI Public Seismic Networks to SEISAN all chan def yes resp yes The Public Seismic Network recording system makes one file pr channel Since component is not well defined several files from the same recording system might get the same SEISAN file name Do some testing when setting up the recording system The one component files can be assembled into multichannel files with SEISEI There might be a newer version of PSN format not supported QNXSEI SEISLOG QNX version to SEISAN all chan def no resp yes This p
276. he idea is that when new unprocessed data have entered the database by one of these programs it should be easy for the operator to find the event In EEV an N near the end of the prompt line indicates an event with this status T Type event TT Type only header of event UPDATE Updates overwrite S file with hypocenter magnitudes residuals etc Note that the CAT file IS NOT UPDATED This can only be done with stand alone command UPDATE see section 6 7 U Update EEV event list All S file names are read in again Is useful if data arrives during an EEV session like when using Copy command from another data base USERCOM Starts user defined program with command usercom sfile lt sfile name gt where usercom is the command name This command is useful for example if you want to start your program to create a report based on the S file from EEV Note the usercom is not a SEISAN program W Check if event has waveform files If so check in which directory they are if present on the system The search will start in current directory then WAV followed by all directories defined with keyword WAVEFORM_BASE in SEISAN DEF in DAT WAD The program reads the data for the event and then asks if all phases are going to be used or only phases of the same type like Pg and Sg Ideally only phases of the same type should be used however in practice it might be interesting so see all data it might give an idea about phase identification T
277. he modelling programs use the hyp out file instead of the S file for input This also means that the modeling program can be run separately from any hyp out file however it is then up to the user to keep it updated The modeling parameters Below is shown an example of part of an S file prepared for modeling The file is one of the events in the test data set and by using EEV to find the event modeling can start immediately All parameters have been set automatically 1996 6 7 1325 29 1 L 59 841 5 127 12 0F BER 12 1 1 2 2CBER 1 9LBER 2 0LNAO1 F996 6 7 L325 29 1 aX BER 2 0WBER 1 8 3 41 0 74 7 H F 1996 06 07 1324 51S TEST__009 6 535 SOUTHERN NORWAY 3 depth fixed to 12 km rms lowest with near station less than 110 km location3 fault plane solution ok within 10 deg 3 SYNT MODEL THICK VP VS DENS QP OS 3 SYNT MODEL 12 000 6 200 3 563 2 600 0 000 0 000 3 SYNT MODEL 11 000 6 600 3 793 2 800 0 000 0 000 3 SYNT MODEL 8 000 Keng 4 080 3 000 0 000 0 000 B 3 SYNT MODEL 19 000 8 050 4 626 3 200 0 000 0 000 N 3 SYNT MODEL 30 000 S 250 4 741 3 400 0 000 0 000 3 SYNT MODEL 50 000 8 500 4 885 3 600 0 000 0 000 3 SYNT ST D RK 8 3 41 0 74 7 3 SYNT DEPTH 12 0 3 SYNT NPOINTS 256 3 SYNT TIMES TOTAL 60 000 INITIAL 0 000 SY TRACE 60 000 3 SYNT BOUPAR 300 0 600 0 001 3 SYNT PHASES Pg Sg PmP SmS SmP 3 SYNT DT Tsou 0 050 100 3 SYNT REDVELO 8 0000 3 SYNT COMPON RADIAL 3 SYNT STAT AT no 3 SYNT NSTAT
278. hecking response functions of the most common elements of a seismic system The program can calculate response functions of velocity transducers accelerometers filters and amplifiers input poles and zeros or tabulated values and multiply the combinations together to get complete system response functions The program produces a table with the response function and a simple graphical expression of the response curve For the purpose of checking measured values a file with these values can be used as input and will be plotted together with the theoretical values The program can calculate acceleration velocity or displacement response Program PR RESP can make a table of many response files The instrument response The seismic recording system can consist of seismic sensor analog digital converter amplifier and filters For a detailed discussion the user is referred to Scherbaum 1996 The combined response can be given in the frequency domain as frequency response function or in the Laplace domain as transfer function The frequency response is given in pairs of frequency amplitude phase FAP while the transfer function is given as poles and zeros PAZ The combined frequency response is obtained through multiplication of the response from the individual components while the transfer function is obtained by combing the PAZ from the components Amplifiers and accelerometers are specified simply by a constant gain Filters are assumed to be Butt
279. hed in both files When converting to IMS format the user can specify the start numbering for the first event and phase in the file ignoring will assume 1 1 NORGSE NORDIC from and to GSE parametric format The program written by Mario Villagran converts parametric data between Nordic and GSE2 format It can be used interactively or by giving the options as arguments Type norgse bein to see the 140 options NORHIN From Nordic to Hypoinverse format The program is started by typing norhin input file The output file is norhin out NORHYP From Nordic to HYPO71 format SUN and PC The program is written by F Courboulex The program asks for the input file name and the output file name is norhyp out PDENOR converting PDE bulletin file to NORDIC format PDE distributes bulletins on e mail both a monthly bulletin and a weekly bulletin different formats The program converts one of these files to Nordic format and put the file into a standard SEISAN database called PDE for the monthly files and PDEWE for the weekly files This database must have been created before running the program Both CAT and S files are made and SELECT and EEV can be used afterwards RSANOR Program converts between format used by Red Sismologica de Andalucia and a few others in Spain SEIGMT Nordic to GMT input The program SEIGMT reads information from Nordic or compact files and writes the parametric data to files that can be used as input
280. her than the maximum observed when no information is available Maximum observed magnitude This is the largest magnitude observed within the catalogue time span Threshold magnitude The so called lower bound magnitude which is chosen based on the engineering considerations Usually magnitudes less than 4 0 are not considered engineering significant In order to obtain each of the above critical parameters a thorough evaluation of the earthquake catalogue is needed BVALUE program can be used to obtain some of these parameters However while running the program choosing the magnitude interval and the magnitude increment has to be done critically taking into account the catalogue completeness and the detection threshold These parameters will later be used in the input for the seismic hazard analysis program CRISIS99 Alternatively the same input parameters are also needed for the EQRISK program For each source zone plot the magnitude frequency of occurrence curves 12 Try to assess whether there are characteristic earthquakes in your region This can be done with a careful examination of your catalogue and the active faults in the area Studying the magnitude frequency of occurrence through the BVALUE program will help assessing this 13 Try to establish an acceptable attenuation relation for your area This can be done through empirical estimations or theoretically based on the random vibration theory RVT CRIATT program can be used to c
281. his type of source can be used to model for instance dipping plates or vertical strike slip faults 2 fault sources using polylines and 3 point sources included essentially for academic purposes Seismicity of the sources can be modeled either as Poisson or characteristic earthquake process In the first magnitude frequency relations are smoothly truncated Gutenberg Richter curves whereas for the second the program assumes a Gaussian distribution of the magnitudes Hazard computations can be performed simultaneously for several intensity measures for instance PGA PGV and several spectral ordinates Required attenuation laws are given in the form of tables containing the median values of the intensity measures as a function of magnitude the rows of the table and focal distance the columns of the table Several attenuation models can be used in the same run assigning an attenuation pattern to each source Using a recursive triangularization algorithm spatial integrations are performed optimizing the number of calculations so CRISIS99 will integrate with more points for the nearest sources and less or none for distant sources CRISIS99 considers two different kinds of earthquake occurrence processes Poisson process and characteristic earthquake process CRISIS99 is oriented to computing hazard in extended regions Hazard estimations are made for points in a grid that is not necessarily rectangular The program can run under SunSOLAR
282. hrough the exercises of the tutorial might be the best way to learn SEISAN The exercises are based on the testdata that are distributed with the full version of SEISAN The document is given as PDF file seitrain pdf in the INF directory The main goal of the introductory training course is to become familiar with the database program EEV the plotting program MULPLT and the location program HYP Of course additional reading of relevant sections in this manual is required The exercises can be completed within one or two days Overview of the Exercises 1 Interactive work with the database using EEV 2 Selecting data from the database and making an epicenter map 3 Putting new data into the database 4 Plotting digital data 5 Phase picking 6 Magnitude determination 7 Fault plane solution 8 Spectral analysis 9 Reading global phases using IASPEI91 tables 10 Waveform formats in SEISAN 11 Response in SEISAN 12 Additional exercises in earthquake location 58 6 DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAMS AND COMMANDS This section gives user manuals for programs and command procedures used with SEISAN Not all are as detailed as one could want however many questions from programs should be self explanatory Most programs will produce output files with the extension out and proceeding by the name of the program E g output from collect will be collect out Running a program twice will erase the earlier output files If these files are to be use
283. iable LOCAL CAL The variable must be set with the full path to the directory e g nome seismo WORYtest or 54 on PC seismo new cal On Sun it can be set in the SEISAN file and on PC in the autoexec bat The variable can also be set from the keyboard Sun setenv LOCAL CAL directory PC set LOCAL_CAL directory This is a useful option when testing response files The response information gives the gain of a channel in counts m and to get the correct ground displacement the count values must be divided by the response values In the current SEISAN system only the programs MULPLT WAVETOOL and SPEC use the response information when doing spectral analysis generating Wood Anderson or ground motion traces The programs will look first in the CAL or alternative directory for a valid response file and if not found there use the header information in the waveform file A message will be given if the file header information is used If waveform files are generated on the SEISAN system from raw field station files or other input files without response information the conversion programs e g QNXSEI from a SEISLOG QNX system will look in the CAL or alternative directory to find the response information to include with the Seisan waveform file The response will be only put into the SEISAN waveform file if the response is stored in SEISAN format The response files are generated with RESP see below and Appendix 3 The RESP progr
284. iation pattern 197 P phase picking 157 Rake 162 PR_RESP 55 217 Rdseed 133 Preprocessing of data 87 106 RDSEED 149 Presp 56 REA directory 5 Presp eps 221 REA LOG 31 Print S file 38 Read S file 229 Print out file 68 Recompile programs 18 Printer 12 Recover files from the DELET database 35 Printing 56 REFTEK 144 150 Printing on PC 15 REG_KEEP_AUTO 86 Probabilistic seismic hazard analysis 189 Regional attenuation 197 Probable explosion 119 Register event 130 Problem HYP location 69 Register event keep phases 20 Problem HYP Moho not found 66 Registration 74 Problem MULPLT extract 133 Registration and preprocessing 87 Problem UPD 125 Relative spectra 184 Problem WAVETOOL zero output 133 Rename event type 38 Problem backup files in EEV 36 Reorder Hypocenters 137 Problem Bouchon 173 REPORT 98 126 Problem EPIMAP 113 Report inp 127 Problem file name length 8 Report out 127 Problem filenr lis 125 Report_n out 127 Problem filter 76 Reporting agency 66 Problem Herrmann 172 RESAMP 134 Problem HYP 61 63 65 Resampling 134 Problem instrument correction 90 RESET TEST 65 66 Problem MULPLT area 111 Residual weight 68 Problem MULPLT spectra 99 Resolution 106 Problem no location 61 RESP 55 217 Problem PC 16 Response file 9 54 89 240 243 Problem picking amplitude 88 Response in header 240 243 Problem q correction 98 Response removal 48 184 Problem reading synthetic phase 89 Response from where 90 Problem RESP 218 Response GSE
285. ication of how long time it will take HERRMANN Takes longer than BOUCH WKB Very fast Step 4 Generate the seismograms BOUCH Use program BOUSEI The program is interactively asking the seismogram type displacement velocity or acceleration BOUSEI will generate a file bouse out in SEISAN format containing both original and synthetic traces The number of traces is determined by the specifications for each station see below Output file is bousei out HERRMANN Use program HERSEI similar to BOUSEI Output file is hersei out WKB The first command WKBJ also makes the seismograms Output file is wkbjsei out In all cases it is possible to shift the original trace relative to the synthetic trace and the program will ask for each channel how much it should be shifted A positive value shifts the real trace up in time to the left The default is to shift the trace the amount of the P travel time residual of the first P found in the S file for that station in order to line up the P phases NOTE These phases MUST be the same phase types in order to be lined up If the first modeled phase is Pn and the first observed phase given in the S file is Pg there will be a no alignment The amplitudes for Bouchon are in nm nm sec or nm sec sec hopefully assuming a seismic moment of 10 22 dyne cm The output file will normally contain both the original and synthetic traces However if no waveform file is available in local or WAV director
286. id of points If polygons are given NPOLGRID gt 0 the computation of hazard will be performed only for those points of the grid which are inside one of the polygons If NPOLGRID 0 computations will be made for all points in the rectangular grid NPOLGRID lt 10 If NPOLGRID gt 0 then the following lines must be given for each polygon 7 Definition of the k th boundary polygon NVERGRID K LONG K 1 LAT K 1 NVERGRID k lines LONG K 1 LAT K 1 NVERGIRD kK Number of vertex of polygon k NVERGRID K lt 30 LONG K 1 LAT K l l 1 NVERGRID K Co ordinates of the polygon s vertex The polygon must be described counter clockwise 8 Files of attenuation tables NMOD lines MODELO I A20 MODELO I Name of the file containing the i th attenuation table including path The format of attenuation tables is explained below 9 Data defining seismicity in each region NREG blocks TITULO N A80 IC N IE N IMO N NV N LONG 1 LAT 1 PROF I NV lines LONG NV LAT NV PROF NV Poisson model IC N 1 LAMBDAO N EB N CB N EMU N SMU N MMAX N MO N Characteristic model IC N 2 EMT N TOO N DON F N SMT N MO N MU N TITULO N Identification name for source N IC N Flag defining the type of occurrence model assumed for N th source IC N 1 for Poisson 195 model IC N 2 for characteristic earthquake model IE N Defines type of source IE N 0 for area source IE N 1 fo
287. ief description about the meaning of the selected parameter is given at the bottom of the window parameters for the waveforms plotting tool MULPLT DEF x tVelocity for 3 comp azimuth analysis gt Number of points plotted on the screen 1000 0 Number of points plotted on the laser printer 3000 0 Nsort distance for sorting the channels when they Spectral range used for spectral plots 0 05 thuto Locate after registration D ee Run program after registration D Lis Spectral output 0 tWood anderson high cut 20 0 tBandpass filter 0 10 0 Filter band for automatic coda 7 20 10 30 thuto coda short term average 5 0 Autocoda ratio 1 5 Enable automatic coda determination 0 Filter Type 0 User defined filter 0 01 0 12 User defined filter 0 1 e 2 0 sl Jv USED VALUE1 0 05 VALUE2 20 0 Add Mew Save amp Exit Ka Ta Cancel Figure 3 Edit Window of the configuration file MULPLT DEF Changing STATION HYP The editing window Figure 3 is composed of four blocks 1 A list with the general parameters RESET TEST of the HYPOCENTER program 2 The seismic stations list 3 The velocity model and 4 The control line In addition there is a edit box for the reporting agency and a combo box labelled as Model for selecting which STATION HYP file is being edited The question mark in the file name takes the value selected in the combo box By defaul
288. ile is needed for changing station component or both The parameter file name is wavfix def and an example is given in DAT For definition of the wavfix def see next section 6 12 on Conversion programs definition file WAVFIX can change header times and or file names for one or many files Before running the program a list of file names must be made with DIRF Below is an example where the header time is changed by 120 secs No wavfix def file is present current or DAT directory To correct the timing of individual channels you need to create the file wavfix tim in either the DAT or working directory WAVFIX checks if the file is present and applies the correction from the file as default The format of this file is as follows Column 1 5 station code Column 7 10 component code Column 12 25 start date and time for time correction can be empty Column 27 39 end date and time for time correction can be empty Column 41 60 time correction to be added Example wavfix time correction applied to individual components stat comp start tim nd tim correction in a5 a4 yyyymmddhhmmss yyyymmddhhmmss seconds 20 3 136 TEST SH Z 19500101120000 19600101120000 0 015 File names of waveform files can be given to WAVFIX directly from a filenr lis file or from a Nordic format file In case you choose the Nordic input the waveform file names will be changed in the Nordic file output file nordic fix This option is useful
289. image Default seismo DAT IMGWORLD gif for JSEISAN Map_server Type of map retrieved from Internet or locally 0 Static local image country boundaries 1 Static remote image country boundaries 2 3 4 5 Dynamic Remote image 2 country boundaries 3 Relief from GTOPO30 only land 4 Two minute shaded relief 5 Combine 3 and 4 Default 0 for JSEISAN Imgmap_path PATH for the static local maps images stored in the local hard disk used for zooming Default seismo DAT IMGMAP for JSEISAN Init_map_lower_latitude Lower latitude of the initial map Default 90 0 for JSEISAN Init_map_upper_latitude Upper latitude of the initial map Default 90 0 for JSEISAN Init_map_left_longitude Lower longitude of the initial map Default 180 0 for JSEISAN Init_map_right_longitude Upper longitude of the initial map Default 180 0 for JSEISAN Acrobat_reader Path for the Adobe Acrobat Reader needed for the help files Default prog acroread for JSEISAN in Unix INTERNET_BROWSER Location and place of browser HELP_DIR Directory of help files usually INF 21 3 10 Format description in parmater files Since most SEISAN programs are written in Fortran the format descriptions follow the Fortran convention The following are the main format descriptors In Integer format E g 15 means an integer with 5 digits normally right justified A completely blank field will be read as zero Examples 123456 Posi
290. in the waveform file which does not exist in componen for the first and last letter of the input component will be used If e g an input component is called SS Z then the code in the S file will be SZ This means that picks for stations with components which do not differ in first and last character cannot be separated in the S file Component names for rotated channels will be e g SR and ST for short period radial and transverse components respectively Reading polarity If the cursor is above or below the trace at a distance marked by horizontal tics on the sides of the plot the first motion is also picked and displayed Do not use a filter if possible Assigning weight A phase can be assigned a weight Move the cursor close to a pick and press one of the keys 1 9 in UPPER case thus using e g default can also be changed and a HYPO style weight is assigned and displayed Although weights 0 to 9 can be put in HYP only uses 0 4 and 9 see section 6 1 1 Phases with associated amplitude period azimuth or apparent velocity are displayed with a hat below on the phase indicator line The default keys for the weights might not be correct on all keyboards if not set keys in MULPLT DEF Automatic determination of coda length C The coda length can be quite variable among different operators and a function has been made to automatically determine the coda length The signal is bandpass filtered and the end of the coda is determin
291. ing from those components if the pics are to be plotted If the parameter is zero no rotation is done See also MULPLT for more details of rotation Q0 qalpha and kappa Q correction Parameters in Q relation Q QO qalpha used for spectral correction see also section on MULPLT for standard attenuation relations Only used if response is removed If first 2 parameters are 0 0 no Q correction New from SEISAN7 2 is that a kappa correction also can be used see MULPLT spectral section Calculation of Q If QO and qalpha is set to 1 0 the relative spectra will be used to calculate q as a function of f see standard relations in MULPLT section and the plots will show q as a function of f This can be used for both P waves and S waves The distance correction MUST be set S velocity must be given see below and it is recommended to assume body wave spreading amplitude proportional to 1 distance factor is 1 0 below If the response of the 2 stations is not identical correction for response must also be made There must be an origin time and phase readings must be available in order to calculate Q Q is calculated as In A2 f A1 f f pi t2 t1 alpha In R2 R1 where A1 and A2 are spectral levels at frequency f for the two stations t1 and t2 are travel times alpha is geometrical spreading exponent 1 0 is body wave spreading and R1 and R2 are hypocentral distances km Q values lower than 1 and higher than 5000 are not used
292. ing the azimuths also means that they are not used for a starting location A better solution will often be to set the azimuth error TEST 52 to a large value effectively disabling them D 1 0 enabled Lg phase velocity in km sec D 3 5 Relative weighting of error in azimuth used in azimuth inversion degrees An error of test 52 degrees will give the same contribution to the rms residual as a travel time error of 1 sec D 5 0 Critical distance phases moved to by start loc if Pn or Sn D 130 0 km A value of 1 0 enables the starting location algorithm STARTLOC Estimates are then obtained from apparent velocity distance azimuths etc If test 56 0 0 epicenter is taken 0 2 km from the first arrival station D 1 0 MUST BE SET TO 1 0 TO LOCATE WITH ONE STATION ONLY Distance geocentric km beyond which IASPEI91 tables are used to calculate travel times Can be overridden by the distance letter L in the Nordic format D 1500 km Maximum apparent velocity km sec for phase data to be used This option was added to selectively disable some of the PKP phases which have large errors due to their steep angle of incidence Their velocities were almost always gt 25 km s D 100 0 effectively disabled Critical distance for PKP core phases D 13000 km Seconds by which the arrival time difference between two adjacent stations can exceed the travel time between them Setting this to 0 disables the initial consistency check D 5 0 Multiple o
293. input options 0 All spectra are calculated but not sent to the plotter or screen except the last plot with the average spectra sent to both screen and printer Used for checking the files or making a final run If no relative spectrum is chosen no final plot is made For each station and event combination check 187 lines are written out on the screen 1 All plots are shown on the screen but not sent to the laser printer 2 All plots are shown on the screen and at the same time sent to the laser printer 3 No plots are shown on the screen all are sent to the laser printer For each station event combination check lines are written to the screen How to run the program with only waveform files available Since the program requires S files for input these must first be generated Step 1 Generate S files in your local directory with AUTOREG Step 2 Make the spec inp file with COLLECT With only waveform files and no readings in the spec inp file it is only possible to use option 4 absolute time for start criteria Since the events have not been located the origin time read from the S files will be identical to the waveform file start time so the parameter start can then be set to number of seconds after waveform file start time Figure 34 shows an example 188 Figure 34 An example of using the SPEC program On top the original traces are shown with windows chosen in the middle the spectra of each channel and at the
294. intions MM Modified Mercalli 236 RF Rossi Forel CS Mercalli Cancani Seberg SK Medevev Sponheur Karnik 33 Free 34 39 6 2 Macroseismic latitude Decimal 40 Free 41 47 7 2 Macroseismic longitude Decimal 48 Free 49 51 f3 1 Macroseismic magnitude 52 al Type of magnitude I Magnitude based on maximum Intensity A Magnitude based on felt area R Magnitude based on radius of felt area Magnitude calculated by use of special formulas developed by some person for a certain area Further info should be given on line 3 53 56 4 2 Logarithm base 10 of radius of felt area ip Et Logarithm base 10 of area km 2 number 1 where earthquake was felt exceeding a given intensity 62 63 i2 Intensity boardering the area number 1 64 68 5 2 Logarithm base 10 of area km 2 number 2 where earthquake was felt exceeding a given intensity 69 70 22 Intensity boardering the area number 2 CH Free 72 al Quality rank of the report A B C D 73 75 a3 Reporting agency 26 79 Free 80 al Type of this line 2 Type 3 Line Optional Columns Format Description Comments 1 Free 2 719 A Text Anything 80 Al Type of this line 3 Type 4 line Columns Format A5 A1 A1 A1 A2 I1 A1 I2 TZ F6 I4 g7 F4 FS F4 F4 I3 SS I2 SZ I3 A1 Description Comments Free Station Name Blank End of readings end of event Instrument Type S SP I IP L LP etc Compo
295. ion above but in addition the inversion is also done for the site terms The parameter c is fixed to 2 The output is written to the file mag_ml_inv out The magnitudes given in the output file are based on c 2 Note The simultaneous inversion has not been tested much The relation above can be derived from the standard geometrical spreading and attenuation relations amp dist a exp pi f dist v q where f is the frequency v is the velocity and q q0 f qalpha The relation can be rewritten log amp a log dist pi f dist v qO f qalpha 2 3 Since qalpha often is close to 1 0 the relation can be simplified to the frequency independent relation log amp a log dist pi dist v q0 2 3 If body wave spreading is assumed a 1 q0 100 and v 3 5 km sec the relation is log amp 1 0 log dist 0 004 dist which is comparable to the relation shown below for California Similarly to the coda relation a 2D relation is also calculated log amp b dist a log dist where b dist_coff is fixed to the value given in the mag par file same parameter as used for coda This gives a more stable solution however b dist_coff must be determined by trial and error or fixed using known values from e g q studies The amplitudes are assumed to be ground displacements in SEISAN they are ground displacements highpass filtered at 1 25 Hz to resemble Wood Anderson seismograms see MULPLT The distance
296. irectory in subdirectories This is done in the same way as in the REA directory e g waveform files for BER from July 1994 would be found in WAV BER__ 1994 07 Programs that use waveform files will automatically search in order the current directory TMP WAV and the monthly WAV directory When storing in the WAV database it is a requirement that the waveform names start with either yymm like 9902 or yyyy mm like 1999 02 Waveform files created on Windows and Linux version 7 or newer cannot be read on older SEISAN versions The SEISAN binary waveform format is explained in Appendix 2 The files are written and read with the same Fortran statements on all platforms however the internal structure and byte order are different As of SEISAN version 5 1 files written on either machine can be read on the other and there is no need for any conversion when the binary waveform files are moved between Sun Linux MaxOSX and Windows Compression of waveform data Waveform files can be stored in compressed format The compression must be done by the user Programs that access the compressed waveform files copy the file to the TMP directory and uncompress there The uncompressed file remains afterwards and will be found the next time one of the programs is looking for the same waveform file The content of the TMP directory has to be deleted manually On Unix you may automatically delete the content of the TMP directory by a cronjob see manual pages on c
297. ith final hypocenter locations in CNV format back to Nordic format and to write a file that shows differences velout dif in location and time between the two location routines HYP and VELEST based on the same input data Example of velout dif differences inversion output SEISAN input first line input second line output third line difference 1984 8 5 0235 22 7 L 59 449 4 968 0 0 BER 9 1 3 1 9CBER 3 7BBER 1 1984 8 5 235 22 1 L 59 458 5 140 0 1 BER 9 1 time 0 6 latitude 0 009 longitude 0 172 depth 0 1 1984 8 6 0406 26 6 L 59 538 5 678 1 9 BER 9 1 8 1 7CBER 3 6BBER 1 1984 8 6 4 6 26 6 L 59 505 5 655 6 2 BER 9 1 time 0 0 latitude 0 033 longitude 0 023 depth 4 3 Files will be overwritten when VELMENU is started again To work with different datasets or parameter files it is recommended to work on different directories or to change the filenames but note that the default filenames see below will be used in VELMENU Problems VELEST skips events without phase readings and therefore the number of events read by VELEST will be different from the number given in the velest cmn file If this is the case VELEST stops with the message STOP end VELEST was running with the SINGLE EVENT OPTION Events without phase readings will not be listed in the invers out file and should be deleted from the input file Joint Hypocenter Determination JHD VELEST for fixed velocities and station corrections can be used as a JHD ro
298. iven all files will be searched for the specified station and component The program will first look in the current directory and then in WAV and thereafter in the WAV database and other directories as given in the SEISAN DEF file in DAT The program can therefore work without moving the data from the database however you can also move both the S files and waveform files to your local directory Remember that the S files must be updated in order to have origin time since the program uses the origin time and P arrival times from the S files Running the program Type codaq the program asks about output 0 Only q is calculated 1 Q is calculated and a plot on the tek screen is shown A Oe Ra a eg oe ee e and at the same time hard copy plots are made 3 Q is calculated and hard copy plots are made but no screen plot Parameter file name codaq par is default return Just hit return if default file otherwise give name File with event stations codaq inp is default return Just hit return if default file otherwise give name The program will now start to run If no plot is chosen one line will appear on the screen for each station used and one for each frequency The program will start a new page for each new event If you are plotting on the screen you will therefore have to hit return to get the next plot The screen might not have been filled out if there are few data All questions will appear in the text window A
299. l phases are marked with onset y below the trace and the read phases are marked normally above the trace 1994 06 16 1841 57S TEST__019 Plot start time 1994 616 18 50 34 613 1994 616 1841 28 3tD 15 250 70 294199 5 PDE401 5 6BPDE 5 8BBRK 6 0WGS aS im 4 HRV BZ yP ypP ysP yPP B8 4095 5 ANMO BZ yP ON ysP 1 1880 6 TUC BZ yP ypP ysP 1651 3048 7 GLA BZ yP ypP yP 1820 32 8 SMIC BZ yP ypP yP 3 365 9 BAR BZ yP DO yP 2825 304 10 PFO BZ yP ypP ysP 150 2514 11 SVD BZ yP ypP yP 308 5339 12 VTV BZ yP ypP ysP 310 E 13 RPV BZ yP ype yP 134 3514 14 PAS BZ yP ypP yP K 3126 15 SA BZ yP ypP KEN 1971 2119 16 MLAC BZ yP ypP yP 10 1651 17 CMB BZ yP ypP 1068 692 18 FC BZ yP 1817 op 19 SPA BZ yP SEC 40 60 20 40 Ki 20 40 60 20 82 Figure 17 Example of MULPLT with theoretical arrival times showing global phases on a long period seismogram The filter used from 0 01 to 0 1 Hz Without filtering almost nothing would have been seen on this broadband station KNN 1 KONO LN 2 KONO LE 3 KONO Li yP EP 4 EPP yPP yPP 9501 01 0643 15S KNN_003 Plot start time 95 1 1 7 8 30 381 Filt 0 010 0 100 yPKiKP yPKiKP yPKiKP 20 ESS ySS yss ySS MENU 4110 mB MIN 83 Figure 18 MULPLT in continuous mode The plot shows 6 hours of long period data The scale is 3000 counts between the traces and the filter used is from 0 01 to 0 1 Hz
300. l use all data bases defined in SEISAN DEF A question will be given for absolute start time and window length See also 6 2 4 Conts Plot from a large SEED volume A SEED file too large to be read in can be plotted in parts A question will be given for file name absolute start time and window length See also 6 2 4 6 2 1 MULPLT main functions The program has 7 main functions irrespective of type of input as illustrated below with the questions given by the program Plot options Interactive picking Return Multi trace plot on screen def 0 Multi trace plot on screen 1 Multi trace plot on screent laser 2 Multi trace plot on laser 3 Continuous on screen 4 Continuous on screen laser 5 Continuous on laser 6 Stop 9 Return Picking phases spectral analysis and 3 component analysis 0 Initial plotting of new waveform data and registration in database using predefined defaults Phase picking 1 Initial plotting of new waveform data and registration in database or general plotting of multi trace data Phase picking In this mode the user is asked to select which channels to work with and a graphical window will be shown for selection If more than 250 channels are available selection will have to be made on several screens A maximum of 1000 channels can be used Optimally channels can be show in alphabetical order see MULPLT DEF 2 Same as 1 only hardcopies may be made at the same time 3 Making hardc
301. ld The database is EAF BEV 199405 EAF 1994 5 Reading events for base EAF 613 the month has 613 events 1 1 May 1994 1 18 8D 2 1 May 1994 TI S b 3 1 May 1994 12 00 33 D 36 607 68 449 15 0 2 4 go to day 20 d20 366 20 May 1994 5 2 8R rane copy an event to working dir Copy event Other database give 1 5 letter nam Working directory in file eev out return 366 20 May 1994 5 2 8R 367 20 May 1994 10 59 32 D jump to 530 530 530 26 May 1994 8 55 11 D look for time association S 549 27 May 1994 9 27 41 L Associated 548 27 May 1994 9 27 1L append to next event aa 40 Event 549 appended to event 548 Appended event still present Do you want to delete appended event y n return y delete appended event Backup copy saved as seismo REA DELET 1994 05 27 0927 41L S199405 del ev save Deleted file seismo REA EAF__ 1994 05 27 0927 41L S199405 app ev del 1994 05 Reading events for base EAF 612 event list updated 548 27 May 1994 9 27 1L jump to 222 222 222 12 May 1994 23 28 10 L change event type 2E Change event type to L R or D r New file seismo REA EAF__ 1994 05 12 2328 10R S199405 Deleted file seismo REA EAF__ 1994 05 12 2328 10L S199405 Reading events for base EAF 612 222 12 May 1994 23 28 10 R 223 13 May 1994 1 1 37L 224 13 May 1994 1 16 44 L PAE Stop Prog
302. ld be extracted from the RefTek archive and then calls the programs ARCFETCH RT_SEIS and SEISEI For temporary data storage ARCSEI creates the directory arcsei_temp under the current directory The arcsei_temp directory is automatically deleted upon program completion 1 Create empty arcsei_temp directory 2 Arcfetch The arcfetch program performs the data extraction from the RefTek archive A complete list of the command line input of arcfetch can be obtained by starting the program without additional options ARCSEI starts arcfetch in the following way arcfetch archive channel start time end time o OUTPATH c Where o OUTPATH Specifies the output path for arcfetch always arcsei_temp C Specifies cooked mode which means that the time interval extracted matches the input start and end time this is not the case when not running in cooked mode Example arcfetch G ARCHIVE 8020 1 2000 200 12 10 oarcsei_temp c 3 rt_seis RT_SEIS converts all files with the suffix rt in arcsei_temp to SEISAN format RT_SEIS reads the RTU INI file for station definition if the environmental variable RTU is set to point to the RTU INI file see RT_SEIS section below 4 SEISEI SEISEI if merge is selected merges all SEISAN files in the arcsei_temp directory 5 move Finally all files single or merged are moved to the OUTPATH directory or the current directory if OUTPATH is not defined In case multiple stations are sel
303. le find how many different stations there are and select those stations out of a station file which can either be in SEISAN HYPO71 format or ISC format automatically determined The output is in SEISAN format If no S file is given the input station file is assumed to be in ISC format and the whole file will be converted to SEISAN format KINNOR Kinemetrics to NORDIC Converts PCK file output of EDPPICK to file in SEISAN format Many events are converted from one file The program is based on program from Kinemetrics by Christopher S Lim For info on how conversion is made see program source code ISFNOR ISF1 0 to and from Nordic The ISF format is used by the ISC and is an extension to the IMS format The program is based on the routines provided by the ISC for reading and writing ISF and the SEISAN standard routines for reading and writing Nordic data The program converts in both directions All possible information is converted Information on the ISF format can be found on the ISC website http Awww isc ac uk It is recommended to use ISF format for data exchange with ISC NORIMS IMS1 0 to NORDIC format The IMS1 0 International Monitoring System is a new version of the GSE format and very similar The program can partly be used for the new ISF IASPEI Seismic Format which will include all of the IMS format an additional information needed by ISC and NEIC The program and the following description is by Mario Villagran The pr
304. lete many S files 125 Delete S file 86 Delete waveform file 86 91 Depth as function of rms 38 Depth profile 111 Depth fixing 62 Depth select for 119 Depth start value 62 Different databases 41 Digital data 30 Dimension 13 88 Diminution function 95 197 Dip 162 DIRF 125 Displacement 89 Distance id 119 Distance indicator 86 Distance order 85 Distance range select for 120 Distance weighting 62 DR3024 and DR3016 146 DRSEI 146 Drum recording 75 Duplicate event 35 Duplicate ID 30 123 Duration magnitude 66 E Earthquake catalogue 189 Earthquake statistics 127 129 EDBPICK picking program 139 Editor 12 EEV 26 32 EEV over several months 36 EEV print command 38 EEV jump to another month and database 37 EEV OUT 35 End time 16 Environmental variable 11 Epicenter area selection 113 EPIMAP 16 45 109 127 Epimap cor 113 Epimap inp 113 Epimap num 113 EQRISK 190 198 EQRSEI 112 190 200 Error estimate HYP 68 Error in S file 36 Errors in hypocenter 120 EUROPE MAP 16 Event felt select for 119 Event ID 86 Event type 5 86 Event duplicate ID 123 EXFILTER 205 Explosion 36 56 86 119 Explosion filtering 205 Extract data in JSEISAN 49 Extract data in MULPLT 92 Extract from waveform file 92 Extract waveform files 131 133 Extracting events from the database 122 F Fault plane solution 36 42 Fault plane solution composite 162 Fault plane solution plot 116 Fault plane solution plotting several 161 FDSN 149 Federa
305. ll events must use the same STATIONX HYP file otherwise the program fails The input MUST be from a single file NOT from the data base Below is an example of an input file layer start vp delta vp delta start h delta h delta 1 4 55 0 1 5 0 0 1 0 1 2 6 3 0 1 5 4 0 1 0 1 3 6 8 0 1 5 KEE 1 0 1 4 7 90 0 05 3 32 5 1 0 1 4 8 05 0 05 4 40 0 1 0 I The first line is info only Layer is also only for information For each layer there is a start P velocity start vp increment in velocity delta vp and number of increments delta The following inputs are then the same for layer depths There must be an entry for each layer even if no variation is used In the above example no variation in layer thickness is tested for An example input file is given in DAT The parameters for location not set in h_model par like Vp Vs Lg velocity etc remain unchanged When HYP starts up it will print out how many permutations are required If more than a few thousand reduce the number of models In any case it is an advantage to first try with just a few models to get a feeling for how sensitive the data is for model changes An output file h_models out is generated see example below For each model tested one output line is given with the RMS and the model In the example below only the last 5 models are shown Since many models can have very similar average RMS the best 10 models are printed at the end 63 0 946 4 95 0 00 6 70 4 00 7 20 24 50
306. ll produce the correct values For this reason it is advised to use SEISAN as output format when filtering or correcting for instrument response Note Parameter MERGE_WAVFORM in SEISAN DEF sets the network extension of extracted files GET_WAV get listing of available waveform files The program uses a CAT file as input and checks for availability of all waveform files listed A typical run is shown below get_wav INPUT FILE NAME select out Full path name SEISMO WAV 1996 06 03 2002 18S TEST__012 Full path name SEISMO WAV 1996 06 03 1917 52S TEST__002 Full path name SEISMO WAV 1996 06 06 0647 46S TEST__011 Full path name S SEISMO WAV 1996 06 07 1324 51S TEST__009 Full path name SEISMO WAV 1996 06 23 0126 27S TEST 013 Full path name SEISMO WAV 1996 06 23 0059 47S TEST__001 Full path name S SEISMO WAV 1996 06 25 0336 34S TEST__032 Full path name SEISMO WAV 1996 07 05 0219 49S TEST 010 Full path name SEISMO WAV 1996 07 13 0555 53S TEST__007 Full path name SEISMO WAV 1996 07 18 0946 21S TEST__010 Full path name SEISMO WAV 1996 07 18 2303 34S TEST 015 Full path name SEISMO WAV 1996 07 26 0740 58S TEST__010 Total number of events 11 Number of events without waveform files 1 Number of waveform files 13 Number of waveform files present 12 Output file with events is get_wav out Output file with waveform file names is copy_w
307. losed by a range of values or is allowed to take a set of values It is set with R for range or U for a set see example below lt value1 gt lt value2 gt Represent the lower and upper limit of the range of values which are allow to be 25 taken It is make sense when R is used in the lt range gt option When using U then lt value1 gt lt value2 gt lt valueN gt are the set of permitted values lt type gt A character for identifying the type of data F float integer S string of characters lt column gt The position column of the parameter in the configuration file lt width gt The number of characters occupied in the configuration file lt dec gt The number of digits after the point for float values When more than one value is taken for a particular parameter then the character is used for dividing the two formats Examples SPECTRAL F BAND 0 05 R 0 20 F 40 5 2 20 0 R 0 20 F 50 5 2 The keyword SPECTRL F BAND has two values The first one is set by default to 0 05 Hz and can take values between 0 and 20 Hz It is a float value found in the column 40 of the configuration file and occupies 5 characters with 2 decimal digits The second value is set by default to 20 Hz and has the same numerical format as the first one except that it is found in column 50 of the configuration file MAP_SERVER 0 U 0 1 2 3 4 5 1 40 1 The keyword MAP_SERVER is set
308. lot is available on the disk For each spectrum relative or single the average spectrum or Q is calculated both as an average of the log spectrum and as an average of the linear spectrum There is no frequency weighting and since all values shown on the plot are used the average value will be more representative of the high frequency part of the spectrum since there are more values This can be regulated by choosing another frequency range The average spectra shown on the last plot are log averages If option to calculate Q is used the plots show 1 Q as a function of frequency instead of relative spectra proportional to relative spectra For each event QO and qalpha are calculated When calculating kappa the average spectrum do not have much physical meaning since the averages are made from absolute spectra of events that might have very different moments So the kappa calculated from the average spectrum is not to be used Interactive output of level and frequency With a spectral ratio or Q plot on the screen position the cursor at the point of interest on the spectrum and click The level and frequency will now be displayed on the right side of the plot The output file spec out gives details of the run like averages and missing data The output file spec_ave out gives the x and y values of the average spectrum IF IT HAS BEEN PLOTTED ON THE SCREEN File spec_rel out gives the values of the relative spectra There are 4 interactive
309. ls Degtra A4 includes an on line help file with details about the meaning of required parameters techniques used and use of Degtra A4 itself It is available in two versions one for Windows 2000 or lower and another for Windows XP Installation is made with a typical Windows executable setup file The distribution is found in directory SUP Degtra A4 is currently in Spanish English version in preparation For questions please contact Mario Ordaz Institute of Engineering UNAM mors pumas iingen unam mx 6 14 Calculating b value BVALUE BVALUE is a program to make b value plots using a NORDIC input file also compact A postscript plot file is generated The questions are Input file name select out or collect out are defaults Give filename or return Which magnitude type C L B W or S return for no type C coda L Ml B mb and S surface wave magnitude W Moment mag blank no magnitude type Output Number of events selected from file 91 Duration of catalog in years 0 502 Output number of events selected and duration of catalog New input Magnitude step 1 0 0 5 0 25 0 2 or 0 1 Magnitude step for summing number of events MUST be one of the above Magnitude range ml m2 for b value and fixed b value Range for calculating b value and the fixed b value for which a value is calculated The a value is calculated as the average of N i bfix mag i where N i is the accumulated number of events at magnitude
310. lt return gt Enter in uppercase if you wish the symbols to be filled and this facility is available only filled out in Postscript Available colour index values are 1 Blue 2 Green 3 Red 4 Yellow 5 White 6 Black default Enter epicenter filename and colour index separated by a blank otherwise press lt return gt collect out 2 plot first file green Input file is Nordic full Nordic format of input file Enter epicenter filename and colour index separated by a blank otherwise press lt return gt select out 3 plot second file red Input file is Compact compact file format of input file Enter epicenter filename and colour index separated by a blank otherwise press lt return gt Enter the following in uppercase if you wish the symbols to be filled and this facility is available By default symbols will be plotted according to magnitude do you wish them to be plotted according to magnitude range Loading Epicenters now comes the plot see below for options Earthquake locations inside the window are in epimap out Coordinates of the surrounding area are in epimap cor Area selected epicenters are in epimap are Plot file is called epimap eps Interactive options 110 When the plot is shown there appears in the lower left hand corner a menu of several options Q Quit P Profile A Area Z Zoom Press one of
311. ltering is done in the frequency domain For noisy traces it might also be required to put a filter at the high end This can be specified in the MULPLT DEF file The default is a the 1 25 20Hz filter band The filters can be set to any other values and number of poles see MULPLT DEF Ideally the low cut filter should be set with 2 poles to simulate the seismometer correctly However that will often result in the seismogram blowing up at low frequencies It probably only makes a difference for very large events MI gt 5 NOTE In SEISAN version 7 1 1 and earlier the low cut filter was set by mistake to 0 8 Hz Repicking amplitudes with the correct filter might 89 change magnitudes of larger events slightly Displaying response information The response function for the current channel can be shown with option Resp see Figure 24 If no response function is given a message is shown If the response function is taken from the waveform file header instead of from the CAL directory a message is given Amplitude for determining Mb The attenuation function for determining Mb assumes that the amplitudes are measured on classical 1 Hz WWSSN instruments having a peak gain around 1Hz To pick ground amplitudes for determining Mb on instruments with a broader frequency band like most high frequency SP instruments some filtering must first be done The j Mb option by default filters the seismogram in the band 0 5 to 5 0 Hz 8 pole filter
312. lts that is exceedance rates for each site and type of intensity It also gives a brief summary of the computations for each site indicating which sources are of interest to the site and which sources were skipped 2 Graphics file The principal graphics file with gra extension contains a brief identification header and the exceedance rates for the type and levels of intensity requested This file can be used as input file to plot intensity versus exceedance rate curves CRISIS99 generates also a 197 binary file with the exceedance rates for each structural period so CRISIS99 will generate NT binary files These binary files will be used only in the Windows System version of CRISIS99 to make hazard maps The names of these files are base_name b1 base_name b2 base_name bNT 3 Map file This file with map extension contains intensity levels for fixed return periods TR1 TR5 for each type of intensity and site It also gives the co ordinates of each site This file can be used to generate contour or 3d maps of intensity levels associated to constant exceedance rates Example output files are included in the DAT directory crisis99 res crisis99 gra crisis99 map CRIATT In this program an earthquake source model and results from Random Vibration Theory RVT e g Boore 1983 1989 are used to estimate attenuation of ground motion parameters as a function of moment magnitude Mw and hypocentral distance R Ground motio
313. m converts SEISAN waveform files to Lennartz ASCII MARS88 format The program will write one file per channel Output files are either mars xxx if a single file is converted or marsxxx yyy if the filenr lis file is used as input SEIPITSA all chan def yes resp yes The program converts from SEISAN to PITSA ASCII format and back The ASCII format has one file per channel The user will be asked for a name of the output file system If a single file is converted the channel number will be added to the output file system name e g data 001 If the en ie file is used the filenumber will be added to the file system name e g pitsa001 004 first file and fourth channel The program is no longer used for conversion when PITSA is started from EEV but might be useful since it creates one column ASCII data and can easily be modified SEISAF SEISAN to SESAME ASCII all chan def no resp no The 3 first channels in SEISAN file are read There is no check if from same station It is assumed that the order in SEISAN file is Z N E that all 3 channels have the same start time number of samples and sample rate These values are taken from the first trace SILSEI all chan def no resp no Conversion from the Icelandic SIL system to SEISAN Only conversion from ASCII files SISSEI Sismalp to SEISAN all chan def yes resp yes The program converts from Sismalp to SEISAN Sismalp is a French field recording system The input consists of 2 file
314. m for Vax and PC350 computers to solve for earthquake locations USGS open file report 84 000 Kv rna T and D J Doornbos An integrated approach to slowness analysis with arrays and tree component stations in NORSAR Semiannual Technucal Summary 1 October 1985 31 March 1986 Scientific Report No 2 85 86 NORSAR Kjeller Norway 1986 Lee W H K R E Bennett and L Meagher 1972 A method for estimating magnitude of local earthquakes from signal duration U S G S Open file report 233 Lee W H K and Lahr J C 1975 HYPO71 revised a computer program for determining hypocenter magnitude and first motion pattern of local earthquakes Open file report U S Geological Survey 75 311 Lienert B R E E Berg and L N Frazer 1986 Hypocenter An earthquake location method using centered scaled and adaptively least squares BSSA Vol 76 771 783 Lienert B R E 1991 Report on modifications made to Hypocenter Institute of Solid Earth Physics University of Bergen Lienert B R E and J Havskov 1995 A computer program for locating earthquakes both locally and globally Seismological Research Letters 66 26 36 McGuire R K 1976 EQRISK Evaluation of earthquake risk to site United States Department of the Interior Geological Survey Open File Report 76 67 90p Nakamura Y 1989 A method for dynamic characteristics estimation of subsurface using microtremors on the ground surface Q Rep Railway Tech Res Ins
315. m in this group is GET_WAV which checks data bases for availability of waveform files New from version 7 1 is that SEISAN also can handle other waveform formats however not all programs can work with all formats This will be indicated with each program The following programs are available APPEND Append two or more waveform files following each other in time AUTOREG Automatically register events GET_WAV Check for available waveform files RDSEED_MANY Simple way to chop up a seed volume RESAMP Resample waveform files SEIASC Convert SEISAN waveform files between ASCII and binary form SEICUT Extract an interval of a waveform file SEIDEL Splitting up a SEISAN waveform file in 2 SEISEI Split and merge SEISAN waveform files GEI GEI Find waveform files with given stations WAVETOOL Extract waveform data WAVFIX Fix waveform file header time correction make standard file names change headers etc WAVFULLNAME Print full file name including path for waveform file APPEND Append two or more waveform files The program uses a filenr lis input file All files are read and then written out as one new file The maximum number of channels is max_chan_out which is set as a parameter currently 7 Only the first max_chan_out channels are used or less if fewer channels in file A blank line followed by a new group of files will make a new output file The output file cannot have more than standard SEISAN dimension number of samples more
316. mag i and bfix is the fixed bvalue Output is now n m1 m2 maxl a maxl b sd lsqa lsqb cor rms bfix afix sd 52 2 0 4 0 3 25 0 68 0 46 Ss CT 0 93 0 93 0 14 1 0 4 02 0 16 Normalized 3455 4 07 4 32 Normalized ml 2 19 Deal 2 32 Norm lin ml 154 9 16242 208 9 Normalized means normalized to one year m 0 Normalized ml m m1 and Norm lin ml is just antilog the previous So in the above example it is expected that 162 2 earthquakes occur larger than or equal to 2 in one year least squares relation mag nmag cmag 91 90 89 86 80 74 67 63 PRRPREROOO oos h OO Ons PBYUDDWEE H 52 44 33 27 20 TS TL WWWNHNNN ND BNHOOAWADHANO YTB OD J Oth n Number of values used ml and m2 Magnitude range used for b value calculation maxl a and b Maximum likelihood a and b sd Standard deviation lsq a and b Least squares a and b the one plotted cor and rms Correlation coefficient and rms of above bfix fixed b value given at input afix a value for above sd standard deviation for above mag magnitude nmag number of events within mag interval cmag cumulated number of events Questions Plot y n This will make a plot and a postscript plot file Note that only the last plot on screen is saved The plot must be sent manually to the printer Which b value 1 Least squares default 2 Fixed bvalue 3 Maximum likelihood Choice of b value to plot Run again with other parameters y n Another s
317. mensions Most dimensions are set in file seidim inc in the INC directory In order to change dimensions first change in the include file and then recompile the whole SEISAN distribution The most important dimensions are Number of points in one trace 1 200 000 Number of lines in NORDIC format file 4 000 Maximum number of traces in one plot 1 000 Maximum number of events in one month 90 000 Maximum number of calibration files 1 500 The maximum number of points used by the SEED reading routine are set in seed_internal in f Currently its is also set to 1 200 000 SEISAN has been tested with much larger dimensions like 10 000 000 for number of points in one trace however large dimensions might slow down the speed due to swapping particularly if memory is not large so a smaller dimension has been chosen 1 200 000 samples corresponds to almost 23 hours of 100 Hz data There is rarely a need for larger dimensions For continuous data SEISAN works with many files so smaller dimensions can be used Note In case programs don t work you might have to recompile see section 3 6 Graphics problem On Solaris if no colors make sure color setting is 8 bit Can be set with command m64config depth 8 See Solaris manual 3 2 MacOSX The MacOSX version does not come pre compiled and will have to be compiled by the user The installation is basically the same as for Solaris Linux see previous section but compilation needs to be done s
318. ment there is no direct conversion from CSS to SEISAN It is possible to convert CSS data to SAC or GSE using other tools like codeco Geotool and SAC and then convert to SEISAN format DRSEI Sprengnether data recorders to SEISAN all chan def yes resp yes Converts Sprengnether DR3024 and DR3016 to SEISAN format These two formats are slightly different but the program makes the adjustment Only essential information is read in and only 4 lowest digits of serial number are used If station codes are set up these are used else the serial numbers are used for station codes GIISEI Geophysical Institute of Israel to SEISAN all chan def yes resp yes Converts Geophysical Institute of Israel imported DAQ files to SEISAN format The initial station codes are as defined in file can be converted with the normal def file If 4 th character of station name indicates component N or E that is blanked out and transferred to 4 th character of component name BEFORE using the def file conversions GURSEI G ralp to SEISAN all chan def yes resp yes Converts G ralp GCF files to SEISAN format only works with one channel data Maximum number of samples as defined in seisan at least 1 200 000 channels codes can be defined using the gursei def definition file If no definition file the station name is the first 4 letters from internal station name and the componentis B Z GSERESP conversion between GSE and SEISAN response files all The progr
319. messages The other files are giving output of most graphs shown These ASCII output files can be used in other plotting programs however they have been specifically formatted for the SEISAN GMTXY plotting script The number of files depends on number of stations used Examples of files could be spec_all ASK SG Z out All spectra from ASK S Z spec_all BER G Z out All spectra from BER S Z spec_all_gmt out All spectra from ASK and BER spec_ave ASK G Z out Average spectrum from ASK S Z spec_ave BER_S_ Z out Average spectrum from BER Z Z In order to plot these files with GMTXY only Unix give e g command gmtxy spec_all ASK __S__Z out Limitations of amount of data The program is set up to handle 100 spectra of up to 30000 points each for one run The dimensions can be increased in spec for however the program must then be recompiled The spectral windows are 10 tapered The analyzed signals will be checked for clipping and rejected if clipped A message is then given in spec out The spec par file The file contains alternate lines of parameter names and parameter values and must contain the 184 number of lines shown in the example below selection criteria 1 P 2 S 3 S from P 4 abs start window length of windows overlap ED et number of times to smooth 5 gain factor of channel 1 noise spectrum 0 n 1 y make relative spectras 1 y O n ab plot pics 1 frequency band to use TO 20 response re
320. mits 14 Hypocenter Errors Depth Limits 15 Minimum Number of Polarities 16 Hypocenter Agencies 117 17 Magnitude Agencies 18 Station Codes components and distance range 19 Polygon 20 Use all header lines 21 Look for wave form file names 22 Gap range 23 Phases 24 Volcanic subclasses SELECT NUMBER TO CHANGE PARAMETER RETURN TO SEARCH 6 Minimum Magnitude return for default 5 Maximum Magnitude return for default 7 PARAMETERS 1 Fault Plane Solution 2 Earthquake Felt 3 Magnitude Type s 4 Distance ID s 5 Event ID s 6 Magnitude Limits 520 7 0 7 Latitude Limits 8 Longitude Limits 9 Depth Limits 10 RMS Limits 11 Number of Stations Limits 12 Hypocenter Errors Latitude Limits 13 Hypocenter Errors Longitude Limits 14 Hypocenter Errors Depth Limits 15 Minimum Number of Polarities 16 Hypocenter Agencies 17 Magnitude Agencies 18 Station Codes components and distance range 19 Polygon 20 Use all header lines 21 Look for wave form file names 22 Gap range 23 Phases 24 Volcanic subclasses Ok Input realized successfully SELECT NUMBER TO CHANGE PARAMETER RETURN TO SEARCH 199309 CAT No of events 1 Selected 1 Selected total 1 199406 CAT No of events 1 Selected 1 Selected total 2 199410 CAT No of events 1 S
321. moval 0 none 1 displ 2 vel 3 accel 4 noise pow 5 kappa rotate 0 no 1 yes q0 qalpha and kappa 1 0 0 0 distance correction minimum correlation and minimum sn for kappa 0 5 velocity and density 0 0 0 0 magnitude spectrum 0 stations and components format a5 1x a4 1x a5 1x a4 FOO S Z SUE S 2Z The parameters Selection criteria Determines how the start of the time window is selected 1 Start with the P arrival time 2 Start with the S arrival time 3 Start with the S arrival time calculated from the P arrival time assuming a P to S velocity ratio of 1 78 4 Start with start see next parameter seconds after the origin time as given in the CAT file header This option can be used if no readings are available in the CAT file When using a P or S time for start of window the program uses the first P or S phase found in the CAT file for a given station Component is of no importance here so there is only a need for e g one P time for the station being processed if 3 component data is used This is also the case when rotating the signal see below However on the trace plots only readings on those components shown will be seen on the plots Start If the selection criterion is 1 2 or 3 this is the number of P or S travel times from the origin used to find start time of window Use 1 0 if the window shall start exactly at the phase time picked If selection criteria is 4 start is the number of seconds
322. mple errors err_samp is hardwired in the program currently 70 The program will continue to put data together in one file until there are no more file names in the filenr lis file or a blank line is encountered After a blank line in the input file a new output file will be created This can be used to make daily files of e g 2 weeks on continuous data by manually placing a blank line in the filenr lis file for every 24 hours The program recalculates the sample rate based on time in first and last file The output file name will be given the standard waveform file name with type R for resampled like 1999 07 02 1112 22R BERGE_005 Works ONLY with SEISAN format SEIASC converting SEISAN waveform files to or from ASCII A simple program to make an ASCII equivalent of a binary SEISAN file or vice versa It is the same call to use the program both ways By using a filenr lis file as input many files are converted and the original filenames are kept with the addition of an A for ASCII or B for binary If the files are converted 134 back the A or B is removed The program is useful for manually editing a waveform file or checking the content in case of problems The program is also useful for moving binary files between different types of computer platforms moved as ASCII files not needed between platforms running SEISAN Between PC Sun Linux and MacOSX SEISAN programs will automatically adjust for differences in binary structure The hea
323. n meter second or g It is important to note that this is the loaded constant which means the effective output of the sensor taking into account amplifier input and damping resistances Now comes questions about amplifier filter and recording unit RECORDING MEDIA GAIN COUNT V OR M V If you have a recording media the gain can be given here otherwise just enter 1 0 If the output format is GSE the response is always calculated in displacement units while for SEISAN output and seismometer or accelerometer the following options appear TYPE OF RESPONSE 1 DISPLACEMENT 2 VELOCITY 3 ACCELERATION Normally for a seismometer one wants to calculate the displacement response and for an accelerometer the acceleration response However it might sometimes be interesting to look at e g the velocity response for a seismometer after all the seismometer is normally a velocity transducer IL Enter the appropriate number AMPLIFIER GAIN DB 220 This is the amplifier gain in dB Since this question is only asked once this gain must include gain of all units except the recorder asked below This could e g include gain of the VCO system NUMBER OF FILTERS 0 10 RETURN FOR NONE Up to 10 filters can be specified If you answer 0 no filters are used and no more questions on filters will appear Otherwise one line of input must be given for each filter as follows FREQUENCY AND NUMBER OF POLES FOR EACH FILTER POLES NEGATIVE FOR
324. n 23 since phase arrival times refer to the main header Seismic moments etc After locating an event HYP will check if there is spectral information Moment etc see MULPLT available in the S file and average values will be calculated and written into the output file Problems with If no location or an obviously wrong location is obtained check print out Common problems are Wrong location Program gets into a local minimum Use the individual event start location option S in header line If the problem happen often try either option for start location nearest station or start location routine If dept is the problem try a range of start depths set in STATIONO HYP No location The program iterates outside the maximum distance set for a local or regional event RESET TEST 57 or the initial start location is outside limits Use a fixed start location or check readings to get a better start location 6 1 2 HYPO71 Sun only By Brian Baptie BGS HYPO71 is a computer program for determining hypocenter magnitude and first motion pattern of local earthquakes written by Lee and Lahr 1972 using a stepwise statistical regression procedure outlined in Draper and Smith 1966 The user s manuals were originally released by the authors as a series of open file reports of the U S Geological Survey and contain a full description of input and output parameters and usage The SEISAN version of the program is essentially the same as t
325. n code This can be a problem when using instrument response that is different for the two location codes In this case the user has to ensure that only the instrument response file for the corresponding data to use is stored in the CAL directory When converting between SEISAN and other waveform formats component conversion is defined in the respective definition files see section on conversion programs 2 2 2 Continuous waveform data In SEISAN continuous data has no special format Continuous data is simply ordinary waveform files that follow each other in time In order to treat the data as continuous the data can be put into a SEISAN continuous data base Such a data base is made as follows For each waveform file from a station or network an S file is created The S files only contain reference to the waveform file Program AUTOREG can be used The waveform data is put into the corresponding waveform station directories The continuous databases are defined in SEISAN DEF in DAT If e g data is to be stored from 3 different stations create 3 databases under WAV and REA with the name of the stations program MAKEREA If the continuous data consist of 20 minute files this would mean about 2200 files pr month which is a reasonable number It is now possible for some programs MULPLT WAVETOOL to get access to any or all of the traces in the continuous data base and plot and extract data A simpler way to use smaller quantitie
326. n corr inp are as follows SFILE MASTER sfile name of master event remove or comment out this parameter to run program in group identification mode to determine cross correlation matrix between all events and identify group of similar events SFILE EVENT sfile name of events that will be either cross correlated among themselves or compared to the master event there can be several of these MIN CORR minimum correlation required either for grouping or phase identification INTERACTIVE set to 1 for interactive use where graphics are displayed on the screen which is useful for testing or set to 0 for non interactive run FILTER this parameter allows to enable 1 or disable 0 filtering as defined for each channel with parameter line STATION PRE SIGNAL duration of signal to include before phase arrival if used EVENT SELCRIT cross correlation with the master signal can be computed either for the complete trace of the subsequent event 0 or the same part of the signal either P or S as for the master event 1 including the pre signal part and of the same duration as defined in STATION line N DOUBLE SRATE if sampling rate is to be increased give factor n to double sampling rate n times 0 for none this makes it possible to get phase reading with resolution greater than sampling interval CC MATRIX WINDOW time interval in seconds to use in computation of cross correlation matrix instead of the duration given for each station if di
327. n input file It is assumed that all channels have the same sample rate and will be resampled to the same lower sample rate which is an integer fraction of the original sample rate If e g the original sample rate is 50 new rates of 25 10 5 2 etc can be obtained The anti alias filter is a single pass Butterworth with 6 poles The user specifies manually both the decimation rate 2 5 10 25 in the above example and the filter frequency The new file s can have a new component specification which is asked for interactively Finally the user is asked for a new network code The input files s come from a filenr lis file generated with DIRF If more than one file is given in the filenr lis these will be put together in one file and some samples are saved from one file to the next in order to assure that there are no overlap problems when using the filter IT IS ASSUMED THAT ALL FILES HAVE THE SAME LENGTH OF TIME The program will check if a following file has the correct header time based on the length of the previous file If the following file starts before the end of the previous file err_samp samples default 70 it is assumed that the timing is wrong and that the files should follow each other A warning is given and the program continues If the following file has a header time that is more that a given err_samp samples after where it should be it is assumed that the next file is missing and zeros are inserted in the channel data The number of sa
328. n is assumed to be band limited stationary and of finite duration For estimating the Fourier acceleration spectra a f it is assumed an omega square constant stress drop source model given by Brune 1970 The expression for a f is alf CG R S f Dif 18 where C We RFV 4npp 19 S f Mof 1 f F 20 and D f pre 21 Thus the spectrum al is the multiplication of a constant C independent of frequency geometrical spreading term G R source function S f and diminution function D f In C Rye is equal to average radiation pattern 0 55 F is free surface effect 2 0 V is partition of a vector into two horizontal components 0 707 p is density in gm cm and Dis shear wave velocity in km sec In S f Mois the seismic moment and fo is the corner frequency given by Brune 1970 fo 4 9 x 10 B Ac Mo 22 where is in km sec Ao is the stress drop in bars and Mo is in dyne cm The diminution factor D f accounts for loss of energy due to internal friction and scattering At distances less than a certain critical value of Re the strong motion records are dominated by S waves Thus for R lt Re G R 1 R is the geometrical spreading For R gt Re G R 1 R Ro The diminution function D f in equation 21 requires Q f and P f where the quality factor defined by the regional attenuation is expressed by Q f Qo f f is frequency and s lt 1 0 and whereas P ed 23
329. n site or a grid of sites for up to eight different return periods The site amplification is calculated with the SPEC program This is used for making spectra of many seismic signals in a semiautomatic manner The program is intended for two purposes 1 making relative spectra for a series of pairs of stations terminated by the average spectra 2 Making a series of spectra for a number of stations and events The spectra can be corrected for distance q and instrument response This section involves a large number of programs and a more detailed description is given in section 6 24 4 2 Getting data into the database The first requirement for interactive work with the event editor EEV is to get the data into the database There are two ways to get data into the database as described in section 4 2 1 and 4 2 2 It is of course possible to make the individual S files directly in the REA directories with the editor This would be rather slow and be against the philosophy of the system However it is mentioned in order to point out how simple the database structure is The SEISAN system can be used with or without digital data the only difference to the directory structure is that the WAV and CAL directories are present when using digital waveform data However the way of getting data into the database differs in the two cases and will be described separately 30 4 2 1 System with digital data This means that the original data is individu
330. n with this section is to make it easier by providing a few sample programs which then can be modified to do specific tasks The compilation of existing SEISAN programs has been described in section 3 7 and details of the commands are found in the Makefiles In this distribution 3 sample programs have been included which each illustrate the used of some SEISAN features All 3 programs are included in the Makefiles and can therefore be compiled directly modified and recompiled Reading and writing S files A basic operation is to be able to read and write S files since all parameters are contained in the S files Starting with version 7 2 a new library rea for and include block rea inc for definition of variables has been included to make it easier to read and write data into S files Earlier S files were only read and written as text strings and individual parameters were then read written to the text strings Now the new routines do it all These routines are now used in a few programs but will be included whenever a program is substantially modified The sample program is called sample_read_write_s for The program illustrates how to read all parameters in an S file make modifications and write out the file again The program can be useful if the user needs a program where special parameters are needed for a particular analysis or for output in another format Reading waveform files In SEISAN waveform files can be in SEISAN SAC Unix
331. nd minimum correlation coefficient of the fit For the apparent velocity calculation the data can also be selected in distance and azimuth ranges The output gives TO Wadati calculated origin time N Number of stations used for Vp Vs VPS Vp Vs ratio NP Number of stations for P velocity NS Number of stations for S velocity AVSP Average S P times with sd 182 AVDI Average distance with sd The average Vp Vs is calculated for the whole data set Individual Vp Vs values outside the range 1 53 to 1 93 are excluded An output file wadati out is generated Example of a run to calculate Vp Vs Input file name collect out Wadati 1 apparent velocity 2 or both 3 1 Wadati parameters Minimum number of stations 3 Maximum rms 1 Minimum correlation coefficient 0 9 1994 616 1841 28 3 No data for Wadati 1994 10 4 1322 55 8 No data for Wadati 1995 822 0141 5 3 TO 141 8 1 N 8 VPS 1 84 RMS 1 19 CORR 0 997 1995 1120 0401 58 9 TO 41 59 5 N 7 VPS 1 76 RMS 0 87 CORR 0 995 1996 6 3 1955 35 6 No data for Wadati 1996 6 3 1955 35 6 No data for Wadati 1996 6 3 1955 40 1 No data for Wadati 1996 6 6 0648 29 8 TO 648 doy ANS 22 VPS 1 51 RMS 11 00 CORR 0 380 1996 6 6 0648 30 6 TO 648 38 7 N 3 VPS 2 16 RMS 0 80 CORR 1 000 1996 6 6 0648 29 8 No data for Wadati 1996 6 7 1325 28 5 TO 1325 28 1N 9 VPS 1 72 RMS 1 06 CORR 0 973 T996 Gi A325 291 TOs Men Deane 9 VPS
332. nd residuals might not fit A solution could be to have a STATIONO HYP in the local directory with the simplified model Alignment of P and S If the distance calculated by HYP is not correct as indicated by P and S residuals the synthetic and observed signals will not be aligned The distance for that station can then be changed manually in the S file under DIST and or delays can be applied when generating the seismograms Testing different parameters There is no need to go back to EEV to test for the parameters that do not change the location Thus to test for different fault plane solutions time windows number of points edit the hyp out directly and rerun However if depth or model is changed relocation must be made To test for different depths locate with fixed depths see HYP NOTE THE SOURCE AND RECEIVER CANNOT BE AT THE SAME DEPTH BOUCH AND HERRMANN AND IN NO CASES CAN THE SOURCE BE AT DEPTH ZERO Running time This depends mostly on the number of points and to some degree on number of layers The number of stations has an insignificant effect on running time A 4 layer model and 256 points will take under a minute with Bouchon Program limitations HERRMANN and WKBJ is set up with max 20 layers and Bouchon with 10 layers Maximum of 32 stations Change programs and recompile if more layers are needed Bouchon is compiled for 512 frequencies 1024 points Computer notes The original Bouchon program BOUCH is almost uncha
333. ne format a5 c Just make a return and the stations hardwired in the program will be used These are Norwegian stations so the program will have to be recompiled with new stations if the defaults are to be changed 2 Standard questions about base or filename and time interval 3 Question about counting all phases This means counting the occurrence of a station for each phase for that particular station This can give the total number of phases read at a particular station in a given time interval which can be more than the number of events If not counting all phases the program gives the number of events recorded at the station The output from the program could be as follows Station Local Ev Local S Distant E Distant S KONO 0 21 8 KMY 24 10 6 0 ODD 0 EGD 28 0 3 1 ASK 29 0 3 0 HYA 16 1 0 SUE 16 4 2 0 FOO 18 J 3 0 RAO 86 9 0 OL 38 17 14 1 SS 9 6 7 0 OR 0 LOF 25 t3 12 0 TRO 12 2 13 1 BJO 0 KBS 3 2 8 6 JMI 16 0 KTK1 22 1 2 0 ARAO 66 6 0 NET NWAW NS 147 JMI 21 K 10 W_L 2 W_E 1 WS 2 Number of events selected with given stations 222 Number of events selected with more than 98 Number of events with no phases 0 Number of events with waveforms 168 Number of events with only waveforms 0 Number of events with 2 or more waveforms 9 Total number of waveform files 183 Total number of local events 200 Total number of regional events 0 Total number of distant events 34 Total num
334. ne as with the command seisconf Program options The program starts with a main window Fig 1 with three options 1 Edit the general SEISAN configuration parameters SEISAN DEF 2 Edit the parameters for the hypocenter determination STATION HYP and 3 Edit the parameters for the waveforms analysis tool MULPLT DEF An option can be selected by clicking the associated button Normally these files are expected to be in the DAT directory If the selected configuration file is found in the current directory the user is prompted for choosing which file either the local or the global 22 y SISAN CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS Figure 2 Main Window of the program Changing SEISAN DEF The editing process is based on a list made up with the configuration parameters The parameters which are present in the configuration file are marked with Figure 2 Parameters that are not found in the file are set to defaults values These default values are taken from the file SEISANDEF INP The user navigates through the list and can edit the associated values by using the edit boxes labelled as VALUE1 and VALUE2 The entered data is validated according to the type and allowed range of values The check box labelled as Use permits to select unselect the selected parameter to be saved in the configuration file The button lt Add New gt allows add a new parameter same type of the one selected in the list if possible A br
335. neaeesensennenes 9 2 5 Moving data between Sun and PC ssccssssscesseeseessseseensseeenssaeeeenesenenssaeenenssaeenesaeeeenesaesessaeenesseenaeseenenaeseeaas 9 3 INSTALLATION EE 10 3 1 Unix SOLARIS and LINUX EEGENEN 10 CR MACOSX E 13 3 3 Windows 95 98 and H LA 14 3 4 Database directories for your own system MAKEREEA cecceseseeceeceeeneeseeeeeeeeeneeneeseeeneeneeneeeaeeneeneeeeens 16 3 5 Default parameter files for the main PrOGrAMMS cescesseeceeesteseeneeeeeeneeneneeeeeneneneeneeneneeeeeaneneeeeeneeness 16 3 6 COMO SOUS PAE aks fad cae ecto tec Pench EE EEA E A E E eadedded cosuetterdstecedeteteseecdase 17 3 7 Compiling SEISAN programs ccsssseeeeeseessseeeeeeseeneesaeeneasseennenessenaesaeeeeaeseenaeaeeeeeassaeneenesseneseesaeeeeneseenenss 18 3 6 Program Verslo ees ee ee Ee 18 3 9 Setting general SEISAN defaults SEISAN DEP csssssecseesssenseeeeeesseeseenaeeeenenaeeneassseneenesseneeseeseneeeneness 18 3 10 Format description in parmater files ccescescceeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeenneneeeee ene enuensenee ene enueneeneeeaeenueneneeneeneeseeeaneniess 21 3 11 Using SEISCONF to modify parameter fil S seccecsssseeeseseeeeseseeeesseeseenaeeeeeeneeeenssaeseenaveneesseeneeeeenns 21 4 USING SEIS ME 26 AA SOME user UU sone Sata celia ia ee a cach sac a aa aa ae aa eaaa a aaa a aa e aa saa ee a aaa aeaaeae eee 26 4 2 Getting data into the database ssccssseccessseeeeesseeeeesseen
336. nent Se Np E Free or weight see note below Quality Indicator I By ete Phase ID PN PG LG P S etc Weighting Indicator 1 4 0 full weight as in HYPO Free or flag A to indicate automartic pick removed when picking First Motion CD Note Currently 15 to 18 can also be used for phase assuming column 11 14 is not blank See note below Hour Hour can be up to 48 to indicate next day Minutes Seconds Free Duration to noise Seconds Amplitude Zero Peak Nanometers Free Period Seconds Free Direction of Approach Degrees Free Phase Velocity Km second Angle of incidence was Signal to noise ratio before version 8 0 Azimuth residual Travel time residual Weight Epicentral distance km Free Azimuth at source Type of this line 4 can be blank which it is most often NB Epicentral distance Had format I5 before version 7 2 All old lines can be read with format F5 0 with same results but now distance can also be e g 1 23 km which cannot be read by earlier versions However an UPDATE would fix that Long phase names An 8 character phase can be used in column 11 18 There is then not room for polarity information The weight is then put into column 9 This format is recognized by HYP and MULPLT 237 Type 4 cards should be followed by a Blank Card Type 0 Type 5 line optional Error estimates of previous line currently not used by any SEISAN programs Columns Format Description Comments
337. ng Z will run program AUTOPIC When it is used from EEV there is always an output in the S file which will be grouped at the bottom of the file making it possible to compare manual and automatic readings THE S FILE MUST THEN BE EDITED MANUALLY IN ORDER TO REMOVE DOUBLE READINGS The program requires an input parameter file in the working directory or DAT with the name AUTOPIC INP The program will first look in the working directory The parameters in that file are explained in file AUTOPIC INF Both files are shown below The program uses a 4 pole filter running one way This might result in phases being picked a bit late However it seems more accurate than the earlier version where the filter run both ways and picks were often far too early The program is made mainly by Bent Ruud For more information about how it works see Ruud and Husebye 1988 and Ruud et al 1992 Description of parameters Input parameters common to all filters LWIND used to define step length DELTA WINDOW LWIND ISHIFT defines time shift between STA and LTA window ISHIFT DELTA Delay for LTA window 15 0 1 gt 1 5 sec after STA window ISIGMA defines fall off rate of LTA window larger values longer windows LTA i 1 2 isigma LTA i 1 2 isigma STA j COHMIN Polarization threshold Minimum coherence s thresh_1l and thresh_2 NDMIN Mimimum number of consecutive triggered windows in a dete
338. ng depth and epicenter are given by the values in the header line of the readings files Otherwise the starting epicenter is set to be the latitude and longitude of the station with the earliest P arrival Fixing the location Using the character F instead of S in columns 44 and 45 of the header line fixes the depth and or epicenter to the values given in the header line Errors The standard error output from the HYPO71 program is contained in an additional line in the Nordic format readings output hypo71 out defined by the characters 83 in columns 79 and 80 The HYPO771 error line format is defined as follows Columns Format Description 2 14 A13 HYPO71 errors 19 A1 Location quality Q 21 23 A1 A1 QS and QD rating 25 27 13 Number phases used 28 30 13 Distance to closest station 32 34 13 Azimuthal gap 36 Al 1 Always output 38 41 F4 2 RMS 43 46 F4 1 ERH km 48 51 F4 1 ERZ km 79 80 A2 83 RMS is defined as VZR N where R is the time residual at the i station ERH is the standard error in the epicenter in km given by SDX SDY where SDX and SDY are the standard errors in latitude and longitude ERZ is the standard error in the focal depth in km The location quality Q is a measure intended to indicate the general quality of the solution and is defined by a single character Q Focal Depth A excellent good B good fair C fair poor D poor poor Q is taken as the average of QS
339. ng lists which are set up to improve the exchange of information and questions on SEISAN We strongly recommend that all users subscribe to the SE SAN list The lists are seisan geo uib no seisan help geo uib no The purpose of the lists is seisan seisan help Who is on the SEISAN users SEISAN experts who are willing to help list others Information on upgrades bugs and other related topics will be sent to this list Purpose of the list As SEISAN user you can send your questions or problems to this list To subscribe to one of the lists send an email to majordomo geo uib no In the body of the email not as subject put subscribe Jet where list is seisan or seisan help You can obtain help from the majordomo list server by sending the message help 2 STRUCTURE OF SEISAN 2 1 Directories The whole SEISAN system is located in subdirectories residing under the main directory SEISMO For more details see section 3 on installation The system contains the following main subdirectories REA Earthquake readings and full epicenter solutions in a database WOR The users work directory initially empty TMP Temporal storage of files initially empty PRO Programs source code and executables LIB Libraries and subroutines INC Include files for programs and subroutines in PRO and LIB COM Command procedures DAT Default and parameter files e g station coordinates WAV Digital waveform data files
340. ng steps 1 Right mouse click with cursor on the desktop 2 Select New Shortcut 3 On the command line box type c seismo pro seisan exe press Next 4 Type a name for the shortcut e g SEISAN 5 Press finish button In this installation example SEISAN is installed under c seismo During installation a file seisan ini is created in the c directory if it does not exist and thereby the configuration variables are set from this file If you want to work with different configuration the file has to be changed In particular if you want to work with a data base on a different disk drive Example of seisan ini file Seisan SeisanDirectory c seismo WorkDirectory c seismo work ProgDirectory c SEISMO PRO DatabaseDirectory c seismo REA Database 16 LastDatabase CUB2 _ LastYear 1998 LastMonth 04 IndexFile None Running SEISAN on a PC with data on a Unix system or the other way around With SAMBA a disk can be mounted between different platforms for example a Unix file system under Windows The SEISAN_TOP must then be set to the name of the Unix disk a seen on the PC All files can be read directly from the Unix disk however the files IASP91_platform HED and IASP91_platform TBL must be present SEISAN works out which of these files to use With SAMBA PC users can then access a Unix SEISAN data base directly using the programs on the PC Potential problems Program takes a long time to load If the progr
341. nged The only modification is that it uses a subroutine to generate its original input file bouch inp from the hyp out file This file still remains after running BOUCH for debugging purposes The output from BOUCH is bouch out which in turn is input to BOUSEI Herrmann The Herrmann waveform modeling is based on a concept where the synthetic seismograms are 177 computed through a sequence of four distinct processes programs 1 The program hspec8 will calculate the medium response for 10 basic Green s functions where the response is given in frequency wavenumber domain F f k 2 The program rhwvinta will integrate and take the medium response from F f k gt F f r 3 The program rhfoc10 will convolve the response function with a source time function and with inverse Fourier transform take F f r gt F t r 4 The program mech will construct a 3 component synthetic seismogram given a focal mechanism Herrmann s programs originally had several optional source time functions however a triangular source has been hardwired for all 3 programs so it is easier to compare the results The original options can be reactivated by editing the program The programs HERRMANN and HERSEI run these 4 programs in an automated sequence All References a detailed manual source code and parameters as well as other related programs Computer Programs in Seismology Volumes VIII By Robert B Herrmann Saint Louis University S
342. nly take place when the spectrum is seen on the screen Press s or S and a question will appear to enter the constants f0 k QO and qa which are as defined above except qa is Qalpha Once these parameters have been entered terminate with return the theoretical spectrum displacement velocity or acceleration depending on what is used for the spectrum is calculated and superimposed on the observed spectrum The parameters used or calculated are displayed The level of the theoretical spectrum is adjusted so it approximately passes through the observed spectrum and the level difference is printed out on the screen see below S or s can now be pressed again and a new theoretical spectrum calculated and plotted To get out of the spectral fitting loop type r or q as usual Which constants and parameters are used The moment is taken from the S file if an average moment has been calculated see UPDATE command If no moment is available it can also be entered the first time the spectrum is shown If no moment is given a log moment of 1 0 is used The distance and depth is likewise taken from the S file If no distance is available a distance of 1 km is used If all 4 parameters f0 k Q qa are entered stress drop is calculated with the relation given above If the corner frequency is given as zero the user will be asked to enter the stress drop and the corner frequency is calculated from the stress drop If Q is zero no Q correction is made IMP
343. ns with consideration of location accuracy locations of explosions and locations of event clusters they might be clearly related to mine locations but others might indicate unknown explosion sites can be used The next step is to define the parameters for each area to get a normal time of day distribution They can be determined following the steps 1 get the time of day distribution of events program CATSTAT select a time window of probable explosions select events within time window of probable explosions 2 get the distribution of magnitudes of events within time window of probable explosions program BVALUE select the maximum magnitude 3 test parameters defined with program EXFILTER for the defined area and adjust the parameters if the time of day distribution is not normal For more details see Ottemdller 1995 206 The program uses a parameter file EXFILTER PAR which MUST be located in the DAT directory An example of the parameter file EXFILTER PAR Parameter file for program EXFILTER eeben This file must follow the following format rules Any number of comment lines 1 2 Any line with first character defines the parameters of that area 3 Any line with first character defines the parameters of exceptions within an already defined area I e you can define an area around a volcano and make an exception for that very small area 4 In the first line of each param
344. nt code This means that the relation between the component code in the Nordic file and the waveform data is non unique The GSE and SEED waveform formats have three characters for the channel code see GSETT 1997 and IRIS Consortium 1993 for the detailed definition of the component codes SEISAN when reading waveform data in either GSE or SEED format internally keeps the first two characters and moves the third to fourth so for example BHZ becomes BH Z GSE response filenames contain four characters while it has three characters inside the same conversion as for waveform data is applied SEED response filenames have only three characters so matching to find the correct response file is done between the first two characters and internal character four with character three in the filename When converting from SEISAN to GSE or SEED the third character of the channel code is omitted to shrink to three characters SAC has more than four characters for the component code and sacsei def has to be used to define the 8 conversion However normally SAC data will have three character component codes as well Conversion of component codes from SEISAN to SAC is also defined in sacsei def Data streams in SEED also have a location code which allows to distinguish for example between two BHZ components for example a 30 second 120 second sensor with the same sampling rate and high gain at the same site SEISAN does not use the locatio
345. ntent is station code 4 5 chars see above latitude in degrees latitude in min north or south N or S 65 longitude in degrees longitude in minutes east or west E or W altitude in m in some rare cases the station is deeper than 1000 m in which case the minus sign has to be put in column 1 P delay in secs S delay is the same multiplied by Vp Vs as given below Magnitude corrections for 5 magnitudes Mc MI Mb Ms and Mw Spherical harmonic station corrections The magnitude residuals are added to magnitudes calculated for each station but the result is only seen in the final average magnitude If the magnitude correction is set to 99 0 the magnitude is not used in the average Format of model line 3f7 3 a1 The information is P velocity km sec Depth to interface km S velocity not needed Interface indicator N Moho B Conrad NB Moho cannot be the last layer there MUST be one layer below interface marked with N The line with indicates optional Vs density Qp and Qs This is information only used with modeling see section 6 19 Format for additional info is 25x 4f10 1 Format of control line 3f5 0 f5 2 15 2f5 1 Information is start depth in km used if no range of start depths specified see below xnear distance at which distance weighting start xfar distance at which distance weighting is zero beyond xfar the phase is not used local events only Vp Vs ratio number of start depths sta
346. nter to the position of one extreme upper or lower of the signal 3 Click the left button a horizontal line will be drawn 4 Move the mouse pointer to the position of the opposite extreme of the signal one half period away 5 Click the left button 48 The lt Amp gt button will be kept active Furthermore you can continue reading amplitudes for the rest of the channels without going through the first step Zooming 1 Move the mouse pointer to the initial time of the zooming window the time is shown above the right upper corner when you move the mouse 2 Click the left button 3 Move the mouse pointer to the final time of the zooming window 4 Click the left button Extracting traces from a time window You can extract either raw or processed traces from the plotting window Figure 8 The steps are 1 Select unselect see Other options section the channels to be downloaded 2 Make any desire processing zoom filter etc if you want to save processed traces or a data selection of the original traces 3 Press the lt DownLoad gt button The data will now be stored in your working directory in SEISAN format in a file with name specified by the user Since an integer format is used processed data with amplitudes less than 1 will have amplitude values 0 Other options Switching between single and multi traces mode 1 Press the lt single trace mode gt lt multi traces mode gt button Figure 8 and Fi
347. o It is recommended to first remove the linear trend and then to compute the characteristic function which is given by y 2 k dy dt 2 which enhances changes in both amplitude and frequency content Then the STA LTA ratio is computed to detect changes in the signal The routine can also compute the squared STA LTA When a change is detected STA LTA ratio above trigger level it is tested whether the signal spectral amplitudes are significantly higher factor of 2 in amplitude than the pre signal noise spectral amplitudes This is done to avoid triggering on spikes Signal duration The signal duration is determined by comparing the signal amplitudes with the amplitudes of the pre signal noise The duration is determined by the point from which the ratio of these amplitudes is lower than a given value A filter is applied if specified in the parameter file Amplitude Routine finds maximum amplitude between two peaks Spectral parameters The routine computes the displacement amplitude spectrum for P or S waves see section 6 2 11 and using either a converging grid search or a genetic algorithm determines the seismic moment and the corner frequency by minimizing the difference between observed and synthetic source spectra The frequency band is determined by comparison with the pre signal spectrum The grid search is generally more cost effective and produces better results The method is described in Ottemdller and Havskov 2002 see als
348. o manipulate and analyze the data The catalog can be searched for a large number of parameters Selection criteria are Magnitude range magnitude types event types e g local distant volcanic explosion latitude longitude and depth range RMS of travel time residuals number of stations used in the location felt events number of polarities presence of certain stations etc Events can also be selected in an area with the program used for hypocentral plots A very useful source of data is the ISC Data from ISC CD ROM s can be read and converted to SEISAN format hypocenters and phase data and put into a database The data can then be used for e g seismic hazard fault plane solution or it can be relocated A general task with catalogs is to homogenize magnitudes Magnitude relations between e g Mb and Ms or Ms from one agency to Ms from another agency can be done with the program MAG The program will also convert one magnitude to another once the linear regression has been determined Event statistics can be made with STATIS and b values calculated with BVALUE The number of events as a function of time is plotted with CATSTAT Seismic hazard Probabilistic earthquake hazard computations is done using the EQRISK program McGuire 1976 or the CRISIS99 program Ordaz 1991 Ordaz 1999 EQRISK computes seismic hazard in terms of probabilities of exceedence vs earthquake intensity measures such as peak ground acceleration PGA for a give
349. o sub classes Comment line 80 characters 1 vt volcano tectonic Individual sub class line 2 hybrid hybrid 3 p long period 4 tremor volcanic tremor br BE rockfall 6 un unknown 7 QUIT The last line should contain this entry Registering volcanic sub classes Registration should be carried out as normal in MULPLT From multi trace mode enter p to create a new s file for the event in the database Answering LV to the prompt for event type marks the event as a local volcanic in the headers If the VOLCANO DEF file has been set up correctly in the DAT directory the information on the different sub classes will be printed to the terminal Choosing an appropriate number selects the volcanic sub class The sub class code is then entered in the s file Modification of the s file to incorporate volcanic sub classes The volcanic sub class information is stored in a type 3 line within the s file e g VOLC MAIN tremor 3 Columns 2 10 VOLC MAIN Header identifier Columns 12 17 a6 Sub class flag Column 80 137 line type identifier This allows the use of a maximum 6 character sub class identifier e g hybrid which can then be searched for and selected VOLCSTAT Creating histogram plots The program reads S files directly from the database and creates input files as well as a GMT script to produce histogram plots of the distribution of subclasses over time The user needs to enter database name start and end time
350. o the file qspec pdf in the INF directory The displacement spectrum is corrected for geometrical spreading and attenuation both along the travel path and near surface Therefore the hypocentral distance has to be known The time domain window for extracting the data from the trace can be given by either a group velocity Vg distance travel time window or a fixed window in seconds around the phase pick Distance type The routine determines whether the signal is from a local or teleseismic event or noise If signal spectral amplitudes are not significantly higher than pre signal noise amplitudes it is assumed that the signal is noise Otherwise the amplitudes at two selected frequencies given by DIST FREQ SELECT are compared the rules are f1 lt f2 Spec signal amp f1 Spec noise amp f1 gt Spec signal amp f2 Spec noise amp f2 teleseismic Spec signal amp f2 gt Spec noise amp f2 local There are a few command line options that can be used to run autosig in non interactive mode syntax is autosig infile lt filename gt spec on off phase on off clear on off 158 where spec on off determine spectral parameters if option given clear on off remove phases from input S file before start if option given phase on off detect phases if option given infile lt file gt give name of input file either S file or waveform file help get help Note When running the program the first time and the hypocenter loc
351. of the mag par parameter file This file is for parameters for MAG and called MAG PAR The name must be in lower case on Sun The following shows the parameters which can be set The file can contain any lines in any order only the lines with recognized keywords and a non blank field under Par 1 will be read The comments have no importance The text fields are left justified the real numbers can be anywhere within the 10 columns of the parameter MAGAGA is the magnitude type and agency to use for the converted magnitude MAGREL gives the magnitude and agency to use for conversion e g LBER and the parameters 2 and 3 gives the relationship magnitude out magnitude in par2 par3 The magnitude conversion uses one of the MAGREL relationships where the priority is in the same order as found in the list T SCREENOUT can be Y ES or N O indicates if a line is printed on the screen for each event When doing a magnitude regression on coda or amplitude BAD STATION indicates stations not to be used MAG_TYP_COF is the magnitude type and agency to correlate coda readings with and the second parameter is the distance correction term used when calculating a coda magnitude relation with a fixed distance term The same parameter is also used for amplitude regression The input file can b ither Nordic or compact Nordic however if coda or amplitudes are to be used it must be NORDIC
352. of the model t is the travel time and Z the hypocentral depth Only layered horizontal parallel earth model is used The earthquake source cannot be in the bottom layer or at the surface There are 2 programs BOUCH and BOUSEI BOUCH computes the frequency response given the model the source depth the focal mechanism the receiver locations and the orientations of the two horizontal components BOUSEI takes the output file from BOUCH multiplies it by the source spectrum and uses an FFT to get the synthetic ground motion displacement velocity or acceleration The user must provide the source function see below and the original waveform files must be available in WAV or working directory if a file containing both real and synthetic signal is to be generated Otherwise only synthetic data will be seen in the output file Herrmann The Herrmann programs HERRMANN and HERSEI work the same way as BOUCHON and BOUSEI respectively The major difference is that once HERRMANN has been executed HERSEI can be executed with different fault plane solutions to obtain the time series while for the Bouchon programs both programs must be run again The Herrmann programs are thus faster for testing many different fault plane solutions HERRMAN S PROGRAMS ARE NOT RUNNING ON PC DUE TO COMPILER ROUNDOFF 172 PROBLEMS THE PROGRAMS ONLY USE SEISAN FORMAT The description in the following is for the Bouchon programs but the steps are the same for HER
353. often makes it necessary to be able to use the difference in time between two arrivals such as P and S or P and L If no absolute times are available the calculated origin time will be close to that at the first arrival station and is of course meaningless However a perfectly good epicenter and depth can still be obtained from P S or P L differences alone To enable this feature set the weight for the P phase input record to 9 This P is then assigned a weight of 0 effectively disabling its use However a time residual and azimuth etc will still be calculated for it enabling an assessment to be made of its absolute time A search will then be made of the entire input phase set for an S or L phase at the same station If such a phase is found its variables are used to store the observed and calculated difference times and their derivatives and it s weight 0 4 is used for the difference phase DON T SET IT TO 9 If two or more such phases e g SN SG LG etc are found all their differences with the P time will be used instead of their absolute times Blanks will appear beneath hrmn in the residual summary for all such phases while the observed and calculated difference times with the first P will appear beneath t obs and t cal NB There must be at least one phase with absolute time to get a location Global event location When locating globally the program uses the IASPEI91 travel time software described by Buland and Cha
354. ogram is operated from within EEV this information is automatically put in and the focmec inp file created If the user wants to use FOCMEC as a freestanding program the angle of incidence information must be put in manually in a standard CAT file which is then renamed focmec inp This can be done automatically by FOCMEC if a hyp out and corresponding print out file is available FOCMEC can also be used to convert angles like dip strike and rake to T and P axis simply say focmec a where argument a stands for angles and you will be prompted for input When the program runs the following menu is put up Stop Plot saved solution Plot new solutions Plot selected solution Find new solutions 1 2 3 also plot station BWNHER OCH 1 This is the solution s already stored in the data base S file The rule is that there should only be one prime fault plane solution The prime solution has F in the last two columns of the line If any other character is put into column 79 the solution is not considered prime however it will be left in the file when new solutions are generated There might be a need to plot several solutions in order to compare solutions In that case the character in column 79 must be O 2 Plotting new solution after having used option 4 3 Plotting the selected solution after using option 4 Using e g 1 instead of 1 also plots the stations to help identify them on the plot see Figure 31 4 S
355. ogram works with the IMS1 0 SHORT format phase readings origin files and the program works both ways IMS1 0 SHORT gt Nordic Nordic gt IMS1 0 SHORT The IMS1 0 SHORT format is exactly the one used at the IDC International Data Center Vienna Austria In addition some features used by the ISC International Data Center and the Spanish NDC National Data Center had been added Magnitudes in IMS format use many characters the Nordic format allows only one the following rule is followed IMS Nordic For mb gt D For MS gt S For ML gt L For MD gt D For MI gt T For MN gt N For mblg gt G Forms gt S For MB gt DI The maximum likelihood magnitudes mb mb1mx ms1 ms1mx etc are pending IDC still does not have documentation and they may be changed Single measurements of magnitude station are parsed as comment lines type 3 starting with symbol When importing data from IMS format only the Event IDC number is parsed and included into a comment line type 3 of Nordic together with the ellipse dimensions orientation and the mb standard deviation All parameter values read that exceed field limits of Nordic Amplitude velocity snr etc have been set to the maximum or minimum possible example if snr gt 999 9 snr 999 For conversion from Nordic to IMS it is necessary to use both the hyp out and print out files The reason is that IMS includes many parameters that need to be searc
356. olor 123 Contour level to plot and color T25 Contour level to plot and color 127 Contour level to plot and color 129 Contour level to plot and color 13 Contour level to plot and color 133 Contour level to plot and color 135 5 00000 40 0000 17 620 6 00000 40 0000 18 490 7 00000 40 0000 19 080 8 00000 40 0000 19 390 9 00000 40 0000 19 390 10 00000 40 0000 19 080 11 0000 40 0000 18 490 12 0000 40 0000 17 630 13 0000 40 0000 16 510 14 0000 40 0000 15 180 5 00000 41 0000 19 680 6 00000 41 0000 20 620 7 00000 41 0000 21 260 8 00000 41 0000 21 600 112 EPIMAP output files epimap out Gives a numbered list of all events within main window This can be used in connection with the number option epimap cor and epimap are If option A selecting area has been used the coordinates of the corners will be given in epimap cor and the complete events S files within the selected area in epimap are epimap num A compact file of epimap out with the numbers plotted epimap eps Postscript plot file of epicenters and possible profiles If only one profile has been selected all is on one page If several profiles are selected there will be two profiles per page up to a maximum of 6 pages one with map and 5 with profiles epimap inp This file is storing all input parameters of the run and can be used to run epimap again without entering any parameters The file can be edited if a run has to be repeated with e
357. on and very short distance the location does not work if hypocentral depth is zero fix to some non zero depth Magnitudes Magnitudes are calculated using coda amplitude and spectral level Parameters are given in the station file using the RESET TEST variables For magnitude based on amplitude the amplitude must be given in nanometers in the input file SEISAN standard The formula used to calculate local magnitude is MI a log amp b log dist c dist d where a b c d are constants log is logarithm to the base 10 amp is maximum ground amplitude zero peak in nm and dist is hypocentral distance in km RESET TEST 75 78 The default constants are for California Hutton and Boore 1987 which gives the following relation MI log amp 1 11 log dist 0 00189 dist 2 09 Local magnitudes are only calculated for events with epicentral distance LESS THAN TEST 57 default 1500 km and if the period is less than 5 0 secs All amplitudes for the phases L S Sg SG 59 AMP and AML AMPL or blank are used This means that if an amplitude is picked on both Lg and Sg both will be used The period is not used The many possible phase names is a result of changes over time and thus to ensure that MI is calculated correctly with older data The current version of MULPLT produces the standard name AML The coda magnitude is calculated using Mc a log coda b dist c where coda is coda length in secs and a b and are con
358. on type is B normalization factor AO is changed to A0 2 pi for each pole BO58F04 gain The overall gain factor is given by the product of normalization factors and gain factors from all stages One zero is added to convert to displacement response It is assumed that input units are V m and output units are counts no checks are done on input and output units 6 31 3 SEED response to GSE SEEDRESP2GSE SEEDRESP2GSE converts SEED resp files as written out by rdseed to GSE format The program only supports poles and zeroes and transfer function type Laplace Transform The program asks for station and component names and a time This is because the resp file could have data from several channels and cover several time intervals with different instrument configuration 6 32 Macroseismic data in SEISAN Macrocosmic information in SEISAN are of 2 kinds The summary information with maximum intensity macroseismic epicenter etc has a special line in the S file see Appendix1 and the SELECT program can search for felt events In addition from SEISAN version 8 1 a format has been defined to store macroseismic observations used to create e g maps with isoseismals The observations files are stored in a local ISO format For a format description and suggestion for file names see Appendix 1 There are currently no SEISAN programs that generates these files so they have to be made manually from the observations The files in ISO are linked to the ev
359. ons The stations that will be used if not specified in the codaq inp file THE LINE MUST CONTAIN AT LEAST SOME BLANK CHARACTERS if not stations will not be read from codaq inp file and the program will crash Note also that the program assumes that you use SP Z channels if there is no components given in the line following After reading the parameter file the program will by default use the codaq inp file to get the event station information However any other name can be used if specified interactively see below The station codes can have up to 5 characters The codaq inp file will consist of a series of lines each giving an event identifier an INDEX file An easy way to generate the file is using the SELECT program The file can also be generated with EEV using the C opy option making a file called indexeev out An example is shown below 1 top seismo seismo REA BER__ 1992 06 16 0343 38L S199206 3 top seismo seismo REA BER__ 1992 06 16 1311 58L S199206 7 top seismo seismo REA BER__ 1992 06 30 1504 30L S199206 The above example only uses the default stations given in codaq par Below is an example where particular stations and components have been selected with particular events for this to work the station line in codaq par MUST be blank 1 top seismo seismo REA BER__ 1992 06 16 0343 38L S199206 HYA KMY BER ASK TRO 167 S 2S E B ES ZS 2 3 top seismo seismo REA BER__ 1992 06 16 1311 58L
360. ontaining origin time epicenter depth magnitude and station residuals There are a number of limitations to the current version e The program is designed to run from eev and can only be used for one event at a time there is no facility for multiple event or batch location relocation e HYPO 71 is not included with the UPDATE command so the database cannot be updated e Errors will result if the input phase readings contain arrivals from two different days i e either side of midnight e All stations must have the same sign of latitude or longitude so if stations extend across the Greenwich meridian and or the equator and an offset should be added to allow for this Running the program HYPO 71 is run from within eev by typing hypo71 at the command line On successful completion the information from the hypo71 brief file is displayed on the screen Below is an example of the screen output EXAMPLE RUN 29 13 May 2001 8 26 59 L 55 1020 3 6388 12 3 H 2 9L 16 29 13 May 2001 8 26 59 L 55 1020 3 6388 12 3 H 2 91 16 hypo71 HYPO71 completed successfully Date 13 05 01 Origin time 8 26 59 78 Epicentre 55 5 45 deg N 3 37 11 deg W 55 0908 3 6185 Grid Ref 296 716 East 578 581 North Depth 2 13 Quality B B B NO DM GAP M RMS ERH ERZ Statistics gt 22 10 127 10 29 0 8 41 8 Magnitude 2 8 ML from 6 readings Magnitude No valid coda readings STN DIST AZM AIN P RES P WT S RES S WT BWH 9 7 346 43 0 08
361. opies of many waveform files with one command No screen output 4 5 6 Plotting one channel continuously like on a seismogram with several traces from left to right on top of each other One channel can be selected For continuous data see 2 2 2 and 6 2 4 74 Commands f and q With a plot on the screen q will always quit mulplt F will in single trace mode bring up the next channel in multi trace mode bring up the next event Option 0 is particular useful for checking many new events since the program does not ask question about station choice uses definition in MULPLT DEF file in DAT or working directory and typing f when the plot is on the screen automatically goes to the next file in filenr lis If option 1 2 or 3 is used a display will show the available channels and the user can click to select If MULPLT is operated from EEV a in a channel box will indicate that readings are available When the channel selection is shown it is possible to quit the program with q or continue with f If option 4 5 or 6 is selected continuous data is plotted see below Running MULPLT using command MULPLT the program asks for a file name or file number of a waveform file To use the number it is assumed that a list of interesting files has first been created and numbered in a file filenr lis using command DIRF see section 6 8 By giving the number the file corresponding to the number is used By giving a the list with numbers is displ
362. or PAZ The recommended choice is to use GSE2 and PAZ 219 Type RESP to start the program You will then get a series of questions as indicated below in upper case letters All input is format free A sample run is shown below CHOSE OUTPUT FORMAT 0 NO OUTPUT FILE 1 SEISAN FAP 2 SEISAN PAZ 3 GSE2 FAP 4 GSE2 PAZ Answer with 0 4 options 1 4 will create respective response files in selected format option 0 will only calculate and show the response on the screen SEISAN PAZ can only be used if number of poles and number of zeros are less than 38 If more are input a table will be generated automatically in FAP format TYPE OF SENSOR 1 NONE 2 SEISMOMETER 3 ACCELEROMETER Answer with 1 2 or 3 Number 1 is used when only calculation of filters or amplifiers are desired 2 is a standard velocity transducer and 3 a standard accelerometer If a seismic sensor is used you will get additional questions on the constants of the sensor If a seismometer is chosen the following questions must be answered SEISMOMETER NATURAL PERIOD This is measured in seconds For most short period systems the value would be 1 0 second SEISMOMETER DAMPING RATIO The damping ratio should ideally be 0 7 This depends on the damping resistance For both the seismometer and accelerometer the following question is given SENSOR LOADED GENERATOR CONSTANT V M S OR V G This is the generator constant of the sensor in terms of volt per unit of of ground motio
363. or using the IASP91 global travel time model It can often be useful to generate travel times for given distances and two programs are supplied to do these calculations TTIM will calculate travel times for global phases at one given distance and depth and TTLAYER will calculate a travel time table layered flat model for a given depth and a distance range A special version of TTIM called IASP is used in connection with EEV and MULPLT 6 20 1 IASPEI travel time software program TTIM This program can be used for calculating global travel times see below for details on phases calculated The program assumes that you have the travel time tables in the working directory or in DAT see computer notes below on how to generate these file if not already there The same files are also used by HYPOCENTER After starting the program the first two questions do you want xxxxx relate to range summaries etc that are normally not required and can be answered with n no followed by ENTER The program then asks Enter phases one per line You can then enter a specific phase or a keyword defined as follows All gives all phases P gives P up P Pdiff PKP and Pkikp P gives P up P Pdiff PKP Pkikp PcP Pp Ppdiff PPKP PPKIKP Sp Spdiff SPKP and SPKIKP S gives S up S Sdiff SKS Ss Ssdiff SSKS Ps Psdiff and PSKS basic gives P and S as well as ScP SKP PKKP SKKP PP and P P Writing all individual phases separate by
364. ore and it will appear too late in the database However this is rarely a problem after the first location is done and it is recommended to use the default option of locking the ID NOTE When an update takes place the old location magnitudes except 3 if a different agency from the default agency residuals etc are removed If an event cannot be located the old location etc is lost This is intentional since the updated database should represent the data available If a location should be retained special flags must be set see section 6 1 Fixing location a in column 45 in header line In order to keep track of how and when the database has been updated every run of UPDATE creates a log file of the update process This file is located in a subdirectory of the database directory default BER _ If e g updating REA the logfiles will be in REA BER__ LOG unix Filenames are similar to S files Below is an example of a logfile with name 01 0000 00L S199606 1996 06 kk 99 09 08 14 30 03 1955 35D 25 0337 29L 6 1996 06 jh 98 09 08 14 29 03 1955 40D 25 0337 31L 5 The content is as follows date and time of file updated operator ID time of update event id of first and last event of the month number of events for month The example above shows that June 96 has been updated 2 times the last time on September 10 1999 For each update one line is added to the top of the file so the update history is saved Note If
365. orr 0 61 rms 0 27 Freq 2 00 4 00 8 00 16 00 Band 1 00 2 00 4 00 8 00 AV Q SD AV QO SD AV Q SD AV Q SD NT 8 N 1 N 3 N 3 N 1 q 288 D 320 118 520 27 1077 0 1 q 288 H 287 123 519 26 1077 0 f 1 q 206 91 333 147 537 237 867 382 q cq0 84 sd 37 q0 143 sd 49 v 0 65 sd 0 16 cor 0 94 1l q cq0 82 sd 38 q0 128 sd 57 v 0 69 sd 0 20 cor 0 93 Corr 0 540 00 0 590 03 0 590 03 0 550 00 Average lapse time with sd 83 704498 29 501974 Above the one line per q calculations is showing results from different stations Only the traces selected fulfilling selection criteria are shown The time indicated is the start time in the waveform file for that particular station In the SEISAN format that does not have to be the same for each station as shown above If some data is missing it is also show in the codaq out file Corr is the average correlation coefficient with standard deviation for the data selected for that frequency The average lapse time is the average of the tc values In the DAT directory there is an example codaq par and codaq inp set up to run on PC assuming that SEISAN has been installed under seismo If installed differently edit the codaq inp file to reflect the installation For Unix testing the codaq inp MUST be edited to reflect the installation path or the file is regenerated using EEV as described above General recommendations Coda window should be 15 25 seconds minimum correlation coefficient larger
366. oth in a conventional way using a single file with many events or in a database manner Additionally SEISAN contains some integrated research type programs like coda Q synthetic modeling and a complete system for seismic hazard calculation The data is organized in a database like structure using the file system The smallest basic unit is a file containing original phase readings arrival times amplitude period azimuth and apparent velocity for one event The name of that file is also the event ID which is the key to all information about the event in the database Although the database in reality only consists of a large number of sub directories and files all of which the user has access to the intention is that by using the surrounding software the user should rarely need to access the files directly but rather do all work from the user s own directory Test data and a tutorial see section 5 are supplied with the system The programs are mostly written in Fortran a few in C and almost all source codes is given so the user should be able to fix bugs and make modifications The programs have been compiled and linked with system compilers and linkers on SUN GNU compiler on Linux and MaxOSxX and Digital Visual Fortran 6 0 under Windows SEISAN runs under Sun Solaris Linux MacOSX Windows95 98 and Windows NT 2000 No format conversion is needed to move data files binary and ASCII between the systems if one of the standard formats
367. performed for the current event or to find another event If the command is to use a program control is handed over to that program which on completion hands control back to EEV In this way many different independent programs can be used from within EEV e g several different location programs can be installed EEV can be started in several ways EEV with one month in default database EEV yyyymm E g EEV 199201 would work on January 1992 on the standard BER database It is here also possible to give a more precise start time like EEV 1992011520 to start with the first event at or after January 15 at 20 hrs EEV with one month in alternative database EEV yyyymm BASE BASE is the database To work on the NAO base the command would be EEV 199201 NAO EEV with several months in default database EEV yyyymm YYYYMM yyyymm is start year and month and YYYYMM is end year and month EEV with several months in alternative database EEV yyyymm YYYYMM BASE yyyymm is start year and month and YYYYMM is end year and month EEV to work with events is local directory EEV Only the S files in local directory will be used EEV to work with an index file EEV index out EEV can work with an index file and the command would be EEV index out where index out is the index file name can have any name as long as it contains a except when used with HYP For information on index files see 6 4 Databases can have 1 5 letter names and the user specify 1
368. place Transform in Rad sec and B Analogue in 1 sec Storage of response in one of these is the most common The resp files can be created with rdseed from a full or dataless SEED volume rdseed R f seed_volume RDSEED creates files with the pattern RESP NC STAT LC CHC where NC network code STAT station code LC location code not used by SEISAN and CHC channel code The resp files need to be stored in the CAL directory and SEISAN will find the correct file The resp file can contain response information from several time intervals SEISAN uses the date and time of the waveform data to find the corresponding instrument response SEED response files are given in stages for example seismometer digitizer and FIR filters are stored as individual stages The overall response is made by combining all the stages SEISAN uses the following blockets from the SEED resp file for more details see IRIS Consortium 1993 B052F 22 start date B052F23 end date BO53F03 transfer function type A Laplace Transform Rad sec B Analog 1 sec B053F07 AO normalization factor AO is checked against poles and zeros at normalization frequency and changed if not correct The product of poles and zeros at the normalization frequency and AO gives 1 B053F08 Normalization frequency B053F 10 13 zeros if transfer function type is B normalization factor AO is changed to A0 2 pi for 225 each zero BO053F 15 18 poles if transfer functi
369. plit it into single channel files The program is intended for editing waveform files and merging files from different networks to one file In order to use SEISEI for merging files a DIRF must be made to make a filenr lis file containing the files to be merged The program will sequentially read filenr lis and merge files which have start times within the time interval specified 3 minutes default Once a gap of more than 3 minutes occur a new output file is made Merging to a new file can be forced by editing filenr lis so the groups of files to be merged are separated by a blank line however within the group the time difference can still only be the given time interval If two channels to be merged have the same station and channel codes and the same start time the second occurrence will be ignored If the station and channel codes are the same but start time different the user will be asked to confirm merging The program can also split up a multichannel file to files with only one channel This can be used to 135 remove unwanted channels by deleting selected channels and merging again When the file is split up the channel component is added to the file name A filenr lis file can also be used for splitting many files in one go If a file is only to be split into only 2 files it is more convenient to use the program SEIDEL see above SEISEI is also used in connection with MULPLT for merging files automatically based on waveform file n
370. pman 1983 and Kennett and Engdahl 1991 HYP evaluates all the IASPEI91 phases up to 60 at each delta and searches for the phase specified in the 4 character phase identifier If no phase is found the phase is given a weight of 1 which effectively removes it from the phase set If a phase is labeled as P S PKP or SKS and this phase is not in the IASPEI91 list the first arrival phase having P or S as its first letter is used or PKP SKS as its first 3 letters In addition include the PKiK phases in this search for PKP and SKiK phases in the search for SKP The IASPEI91 phase set currently includes P Pdiff PKP PKIKP pP pPdiff pPKP pPKIKP Sp sPdiff sPKP sPKIKP PP P P S Sdiff SKS sP pSdiff pSKS Ss sSdiff sSKS SS S S PS PKS SP SKP SKiKP PcP PcS ScP ScS PKKP PKKS SKKP and SKKS Long phase names Normally SEISAN and the Nordic format assume up to 4 character phase names However when working with global phases the phase name length can in a few cases be up to the ISC standard of 8 characters The program then uses column 9 for weight normally blank and column 11 18 for the phase In this case it is not possible to give a polarity Criteria for a Solution The cases where a solution will not be attempted are as follows 1 Multiple phases at two stations but no azimuths This is a non unique case even though four different arrivals are present 2 Less than three phases from three
371. port long file names 2 Changes to the environmental settings There are two options 1 Edit the autoexec bat file in the root directory or 2 set the variables directly Windows 2000 XP The Autoexec bat works on all systems Option 1 Edit autoexec bat in root directory Add C SEISMO COM and C SEISMO PRO to path path c seismo pro c seismo com or set path Add me set SEISAN TOP c seismo This example assumes that SEISAN is installed under c seismo not correct if SEISAN is installed differently Note from SEISAN 8 0 SEISAN_TOP must be set in order for java programs and commands like wo da etc to work OPTIONAL Add environmental variables SEISAN_ EDITOR SEISAN PSSCALE_ X SEISAN PSSCALE_Y and DEF_BASE see UNIX section for definition If not added to autoexec bat the defaults SEISMO edit A4 and AGA are used SEISAN_TOP would be set as set SEISAN_TOP SEISMO but could also be e g test best analysis or d seisan Note there is one blank character at the end and the first character MUST be or the second If no seismo directory it could e g be just E The default editor is notepad The Unix variable AGENCY is not used on the PC Install doskey for convenience when working in DOS windows Add line doskey insert to autoexec bat not needed on Windows2000 and XP already there 15 If installed on W95 or W98 the commands wo da etc will not work and the files wo bat etc in COM must b
372. pped although some primitive smoothing is done Choosing too few points can lead to funny looking seismograms with aliasing effects and using all points will slow down the plotting Resolutionx is for the screen and resolutionhc for the hardcopy NOTE If using MULPLT mode where both screen and hardcopy is used it is the hardcopy resolution which is used for both Default 1000 and 3000 respectively SPECTRAL F BAND Spectral range Hz used for spectral plots Default values are 0 05 to 20 0 Hz AUTO_PROCESS Immediately following registration MULPLT can run any program specified here Since the event name has been put into memory the program can operate on the newly registered S file Parameter one has the options 0 Do not auto process 2 Ask the user if autoprocess 3 Autoprocess without asking the user Parameter 2 gives the name of the process to run The name is limited to 10 characters Default no auto processing AUTO_LOCATE Immediately following registration MULPLT can locate the newly registered event and put the location into the database Parameter one has the options 0 Do not locate 1 Ask the user if locate 2 Locate without asking the user Parameter 2 0 Do not save in database 1 Ask if saving in database 2 Automatically save in database Default no auto locate SPECTRAL OUTPUT If parameter set to 1 two output files are created for each signal spectrum com_spec out is the complex spectrum and amp_spec out is the
373. pper part of the main window Figure 5 The last item in the combo box corresponds to a SEISAN CAT file labeled as USER FILE When this item is selected the user can load a file for example collect out to work with Searching There are two windows for setting the parameters used in the searching process 1 A main window which contains the most common parameters Figure 5 and 2 A second window Figure 6 which contain the rest This second window is opened by clicking the button lt More Param gt In order to perform the search you have to 1 Set up the parameters period of time magnitude range geographic area etc needed in the searching process 2 Click the button lt More Param gt for refining the searching process if needed A dialog box Figure 6 for setting the additional parameters is shown 3 Press the lt Search gt button ES Setting other parameters x Lower Polygon Points Felt Earthquakes Lat Lon jo o Waveforms files Error in Latitude o o 99999 HeaderLines fo 0 Les RMS misfit 999 0 Fault Plane Solution Add New 99999 m _Add New Min Polarities fo Remove 99999 _Remove Error in Longitude Error in Depth BEEBE Epicentral Gap D 360 0 Station Phase List Station stat Magnitude Types V Local Ml Component fz Je Body Vvave Mb Distance M CodatMec M Surface Wave Ms me Epicentral Hypocentral M Momenti hw Phase e Event typ
374. practical to get a DOS window on the screen The DOS Prompt button will open a DOS window in the current working directory from which SEISAN or other program can be executed On NT the equivalent is a console window Other programs UPDATE SELECT PROMAC and EPIMAP can also be started from SEISAN by clicking a button These programs have been selected since they are often used in routine operation 4 6 System response The instrument response can be defined for each channel of digital data in either SEISAN GSE or SEED response format There are three places in the system where it can be stored Often the instrument response is part of each channel header in the digital waveform file in SEISAN waveform format see the Appendix 2 for format description However the instrument response is often not available at the moment the data arrives or it is later discovered that the response given in the waveform file is wrong There is therefore by default a directory CAL that contains one response file for each channel and for each date from which it is valid Since the filenames contain the date from which a change in the response was made and the channel code and component code a directory listing of CAL will give the history in chronological order of the response of a given channel This is the most common way to use the response information in SEISAN Response information can also be kept in any other directory specified with the environmental var
375. pression green color foc p 2 focmec P axis red cotor foc t 3 focmec T axis blue color_foc_plane 4 focmec fault planes blue color_syn synthetic picks blue 18 3 7 Compiling SEISAN programs The SEISAN distribution for all platforms includes the executables Therefore in general it is not necessary to recompile However you may have the source distribution or you might want to modify some of the programs for your own needs or remove bugs and will have to compile programs The SEISAN programs on all platforms can be compiled using the make utility which is make on Unix Solaris Linux and MacOSX and nmake in DIGITAL Visual Fortran under Windows On all platforms there is a Makefile in both the PRO and LIB directories The files should not need any modification If you have the SAC libraries installed on your system you need to set the SACLIB environmental variable in SEISAN otherwise SEISAN is compiled with SAC dummy routines and you will not be able to read or write SAC files The default setup in makefile is sac_dummy o It is possible to move SEISAN between all Unix platforms without changing the Makefiles You can compile SEISAN from different operating systems under one file system by defining SEISARCH environmental variable which can be solaris linux or MacOSX Note Without setting SEISARCH the compilation will not work on Unix since make will not know what SEISARCH is The PC distribution is not the same
376. ptie who is using it for rapid processing of volcanic events where in most cases the operator only wants to look at the event once 6 2 6 Phase picking amplitude weight and polarity Picking phases The plot will display any pick present in the database current S file To pick new phases position cursor at phase and press the key as indicated on top of the screen if in Single mode E g pressing 1 will read IP Pressing the same key again with the cursor at a different place will delete the old one indicated with a D and display the new one Additional default phases which can be picked are i for e for E and A for AMP note upper or lower case Keys for phases have default definitions but can be redefined using the file MULPLT DEF see below The end of the coda is picked as a phase C and the program calculates coda length IF AND ONLY IF A P READING IS PRESENT Picking amplitudes Position the cursor at the bottom or top of a wave and press a then at the other extreme bottom or top and press a do not use upper case see below There is no requirement for going left to right or top to bottom it can be done in any order as long as the two extremes are marked At each press a cross is marking where the pick was made In case a filter like WA MS or Mb is applied the program will associate the amplitude with the respective amplitude reading AML AMS or Amb Amplitude and period are calculated and stored with the phase Other
377. ption may strongly modify the amplitudes and waveforms of the different phases compared with those at the free surface In addition to the synthetic seismograms the program calculates the arrival times of the phases you have specified and write them in the iasp out file These times are calculated by interpolation in epicentral distance of the values tabulated in wkbj tab For sources close to an interface in practice for Pg and Sg phases and the source under an interface there is a limited epicentral distance range in which an arrival time can be calculated For example the maximum epicentral distance for Pg is about 250km for a source 0 1 km under Moho in the default SEISAN model In order to increase the maximal epicentral distance you may move the source away from the interface or you may increase the number of ray parameters used in program wkbj_or for parameter nnpp called from wkbj for All three programs are hardwired to use triangular sources Running the programs 173 The programs require input about distances azimuths depth crustal model fault plane solution time window number of points and some modeling parameters Almost all of these parameters are available within SEISAN The programs have therefore been modified to use an S file Nordic format as input file with additional information about time window number of points to model and crustal model A special format has been used to keep the modeling information separa
378. r each station containing KE values where n is the number of events is then used to identify groups of similar events This is done in a rather simple approach Groups of events for a particular station are formed starting with one event and adding to the group events that have a cross correlation above the threshold and that have no higher correlation with any other event In case some event has the highest correlation with an event that is grouped already it is added to the same group although correlation with the first event in the group was not the highest The grouping is given in corr out Alternatively the cross correlation matrix can be used with cluster analysis algorithm outside SEISAN cluster software not part of SEISAN Visual inspection of the waveforms is highly recommended to confirm the correlation results Phase detection mode Phase arrivals of similar events can be determined accurately through cross correlation P and S arrivals can be determined independently The procedure starts by selecting and picking phases for a master event that is representative for the group of events Analysis of this event needs to be done accurately as it is the basis for the subsequent analysis Phases of the other events in the group can be determined through cross correlation of either the complete trace or a selected phase window with the master event To pre select a time window manual identification of the phase for subsequent events is requi
379. r files that are different are the binary earth model files IASP91_p latform HED and IASP91_platform TBL in the DAT directory where platform is either sun linux macosx or windows The platform is included in the filename so that possibly SEISAN can be used on different platforms with only one file system For example the data may be kept on a Sun file system but you also want to share the disks from a Windows system and process the data using the Windows version of Seisan Otherwise the files cannot be moved but are easily regenerated with the IASP91 programs see section 6 20 and 8 8 in the Hypocenter manual 10 3 INSTALLATION SEISAN has been tested and compiled for Windows 98 NT 2000 XP Solaris 2 Redhat Linux and MacOSX Upgrade from version 7 0 or higher Before you start take a backup copy of your DAT directory Note that when you upgrade many parameter files will be overwritten so make sure old parameter files are copied before putting in a new version of SEISAN The most important are in DAT STATIONO HYP SEISAN DEF MULPLT DEF Also the Unix setup file SEISAN is overwritten You may also want to keep copies of PRO LIB and INC to keep a copy of the old source code especially if you have done any modifications to the code You can keep almost all of your parameter files only SEISAN DEF has been changed Check this file and change to your system Some individual program parameter files like for SPEC have changed How to get
380. r is low pass or high pass Limits of 0 10 Hz means a 10 Hz low pass filter Displaying uncertain time In each trace header in the SEISAN waveform file there is a flag to indicate if the time might be uncertain see Appendix 2 If that flag has been set the message UNCERTAIN TIME will be displayed on top of the trace Currently this flag is only put into the waveform files if the data comes from a SEISLOG system that has detected a timing error 80 Figure 15 An example of using MULPLT in multitrace plot mode Notice that start and stop times are different for different channels The horizontal line at the start of the plot is the DC level The small number above each trace to the right is the max absolute count with the DC level subtracted and the small number to the left above the trace is the DC level If plotting from EEV the phase picks available are shown 1996 06 06 0647 46S TEST oi Plot start time 1996 6 6 6 47 46 640 1996 6 6 0648 30 6tL 62 634 5 068 15 0 TES 13 1 3 3 0CTES 2 9LTES 3 0LNAO 198 11674 FOO Z d 2 MOL SZ ail 3 MOL AZ o 4 HYA SZ ih Hh M rten 89 214 5 BER SZ 6 EGD SZ TASK SZ i 249 20 8 ODDI Z ch TT Manila 9 BLSS SZ 10 KMY SZ A WONN 139 8393 11 SUE SZ a hi Ant PAT EI ue ise MIN 48 49 50 51 2 53 81 Figure 16 Examples of MULPLT with theoretical arrival times of some global phases Short period seismograms are shown The theoretica
381. r just a given number This is handled with routine filename in LIB Below are some examples of using DIRF with SEISAN data files Dirf 9101 10 1 9101 10 0915 15S KMY_01 2 9101 10 1510 55S N2F_08 3 9101 10 2333 44S N3F_06 dirf 9101 10 0915 15S KMY_01 9101 10 2333 44S N3F_06 Unix only 1 9101 10 0915 15S KMY_01 2 9101 10 2333 44S N3F_06 The wildcard above indicates that all files from the 10 th is wanted Many programs use the same subroutine to get the file name from filenr lis This means that most programs using filenr lis assume that if a name given is less than or equal to 4 characters it is a number so file names less than 5 characters cannot be used when the program asks for Filename or number DELF DELF is a simple program that allows the user to delete a file that is listed in a filenr lis file or another index file First run DIRF to list the files that you want to delete Then start DELF and choose the number of the file to delete 4 shows the contents of filenr lis In addition DELF also has an option to delete all the files in the filenr lis or index file This is a useful option if selected files in a data has to be deleted If e g all S files from a particular agency has to be removed run SELECT first and then DELF 6 9 Making a bulletin BUL The bulletin program BUL is intended for writing seismic bulletins in a nice format The output is written to a PostScript file
382. r line source and IE N 2 for point source IMO N Number of the attenuation model that will be used with this source Must be between 1 and NMOD NV N Number of vertex defining source N LONG LAT I PROF I l 1 NV N Co ordinates of vertex of source N LONG I and LAT I are geographical coordinates of point i whereas PROF I is the depth of the point in km which must be positive Sources can be of three types areas polygons polylines or points Polylines and points can be given in any order In general in the case of an area source CRISIS99 will divide the polygon into triangles It first checks if triangulation can be made in the XY plane Numbering of the vertex of the polygon must be done counter clockwise in this plane when looked from above the surface of the Earth If there are vertical planes CRISIS99 will try to triangulate the area in the XZ plane so numbering of vertex must be done counter clockwise in this plane Finally CRISIS99 will try to triangulate in the YZ plane There are some bizarre source geometries that cannot be well resolved by CRISIS 99 for instance an L shaped vertical plane In these cases an error will be reported Poisson model LAMBDAO N Exceedance rate of magnitude MO N The units are earthquakes year EB N CB N Expectation and coefficient of variation respectively of the b value for the source given in terms of the natural logarithm EMU N SMU N Expected value and stan
383. ral analysis The program can also read in theoretical arrival times for global phases for help in identifying phases If a quick location is needed based on a waveform file only mulplt can both pick the phases and locate the event MULPLT operates either as a database independent program started with command MULPLT or in connection with the database started from EEV with command P or PO If the program works independently of EEV it will create an output file mulplt out in Nordic format with the readings and results of spectral analysis This file can directly be used with e g HYP Starting MULPLT from prompt line Giving command mulplt the question is Filename number filenr lis all cont for cont base conts for large SEED Filename number filenr lis all The program asks for a file name or file number of a waveform file To use the number it is assumed that a list of files has first been created and numbered in a file filenr lis using command DIRF see section 6 8 By giving the number the file corresponding to the selected number is used By giving a the list with numbers is displayed and a new number can be given If many files are to be plotted with one command hard copy only give filenr lis for file name and all events in FILENR LIS will be plotted There will only be one question about filter and then all events are plotted with all channels and the chosen filter Cont Plot from a continuous data base The program wil
384. ram terminated kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk When the interactive location is finished the database should be updated see section 6 1 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Using EEV on a subset of events or using alternative databases Since the EEV procedure or the HYP program will work on an index file the user can create a subset of his own interesting events to work with by creating his own index file with just these events The index file can be created by searching through the database using SELECT or it can be created manually with the C command in EEV Local database If data is extracted by using the COLLECT or SELECT and then split up again using SPLIT it is possible to keep all files in a working directory by not specifying database when splitting up Another simple way is to use the Copy function in EEV and copy directly from a named data base to the local data base Programs will then look for S files in the current directory instead of in the database In addition to working with index files there is also the possibility of storing data in different databases By default the data is always stored in BER However the user can also create another database structure file structure with another name and programs and procedures will work on that database too There are some restrictions The new database which is a subdirectory und
385. real spectrum Default 0 0 In addition the single trace zoom window is saved in signal out FILTER Change definition of filters 1 to 7 The settings affect both the shortcut keys and the menu boxes FILTER TYPE Choice between two different filter routines that basically do the same Use 0 0 for routine bndpas default and 1 0 for recfil Bndpas is a recursive Butterworth bandpass filter routine Recfil is an IIR filter routine various filter types supported but in SEISAN only Butterworth is used which works as low high or band pass however gives problems for bandpass at low frequencies Low and high pass when using recfil are given by setting either the upper or lower frequency limit to 0 0 respectively WOOD ANDERSON HIGH CUT A high cut filter can be set when using Wood Anderson simulation Default 20 0 Hz ML LOW CUT AND POLES and ML HIGH CUT AND POLES Filter band for Wood Anderson filter MI high cut is the same as WOOD ANDERSON HIGH CUT with respect to frequency Default values are 1 25 Hz to 20 Hz and 8 poles MS LOW CUT AND POLES and MS HIGH CUT AND POLES Filter band for Ms filter Default values are 0 042 Hz to 0 063 Hz and 8 poles MB LOW CUT AND POLES and MB HIGH CUT AND POLES Filter band for Mb filter Default values are 0 5 to 8 0 Hz BANDPASS FILTER When using all defaults from EEV option PO a bandpass filter can be set Default is no filter The parameters are lowcut and highcut for parameter on
386. reate the attenuation table Alternatively if you have an already established attenuation relation this can be directly used in the EQRISK program In this case you can skip the steps 13 16 and continue from step 17 and onwards 192 14 Establish a reliable Q factor by using the CODAQ program This will be used in the attenuation program CRIATT to create the attenuation tables necessary for the hazard analysis 15 Create the necessary input file for the CRIATT by modifying the sample input file criatt inp or use program CRIPAR 16 Run CRIATT to create the attenuation table necessary for the CRISIS99 17 Create the input file for the CRISIS99 program by modifying the example input file crisis99 inp Make sure that the critical parameters are reliable and the geometry of the source zones are correct see the program description 18 Run the CRISIS99 program with the input file you have created and the output attenuation table from CRIATT The program will generate the output files with the probability of exceedance rate vs earthquake intensity e g PGA for the required return periods Alternatively if you have prepared the input for the EQRISK program hazard can be computed by running the EQRISK program for a given set of return periods up to eight for selected sites or for a grid of sites 19 Repeat stages 6 to 17 to refine your model and the corresponding results 20 Convert the output hazard map file from CRISIS99
387. red prior to running CORR This may be necessary for example if the waveform file contains several events The phase arrival time is given by the maximum of the cross correlation function that needs to exceed a minimum threshold The arrival time is written out as absolute time Filtering is applied to the signals if selected for both master and subsequent events this may be necessary especially when dealing with events of different size The filtering introduces a phase shift which is applied to both signals However the absolute phase arrival for the subsequent event is consistent with the master event picked time Continuous mode The main objective of running CORR in this mode is to identify a master waveform signal in a 227 continuous data stream given by waveform data files The times when correlation is higher than the selected threshold level are written out and can be visualized by splitting the corr out file and using EEV and MULPLT In addition it is possible to cut out individual event files see CONTINUOUS EXTRACT parameter Input to the program is given through the file corr inp A sample file is given in the DAT directory the data used in the example are part of the test data set TEST database 2003 06 see training document The program is run by command corr in the same directory as corr inp and the s files The waveform files can be in any SEISAN standard place All standard waveform formats can be used The parameters i
388. rent 120 index files Waveform_names out A list of corresponding waveform files It is mainly intended for copying to or from tape specific waveform files It has the format of the filenr lis files and can be used directly with e g MULPLT See also program get_wav for selecting waveform files from the database Select inp A file with all the parameters used for the run The file can be renamed edited and used as input for select This is particularly an advantage if a complex set of selection parameters are used and the selection is wanted again with just a small change An example file is shown below Base or file name TEST_ Start time 19930300000000 End time 19961231235959 inimum number of stations S 0 aximum number of stations 999 inimum latitude 90 000 aximum latitude S 90 000 inimum longitude 360 000 aximum longitude S 360 000 inimum magnitude 5 000 aximum magnitude S 7 000 agnitude agencies Hypocenter agencies inimum rms 0 000 aximum rms S 999 000 inimum depth 99 000 aximum depth 99999 000 inimum error in latitude 0 000 aximum error in latitude 99999 000 inimum error in longitude 0 000 aximum error in longitude 99999 000 inimum error in depth 99 000 aximum error in depth S 99999 000 agnitude types L C B S W Distance ID types L R D Event types e g E V P inimum number of polarities 0 Felt earthquakes F Fault plane solution F Check all header lines F Wa
389. rged to one waveform file and the old individual file names removed from the S file and replaced by the new file name of the merged file The original waveform files remain Files to be merged will be shown on a menu Mostly used with SEISNET The user MUST have files in working directory If files are in the data base they will not be shown on the merge menu Output of binary waveform file O Out It is often useful to be able to select part of a waveform file and save it The Out option makes an output file of the traces AS DISPLAYED ON THE SCREEN with exactly the same channels and time window in a file with a standard SEISAN waveform name The output format is always SEISAN even if some input files have a different format The network code in the file name will ALWAYS be the station code if all channels are from the same station Otherwise the network code has the default name MERGE Alternatively the parameter MERGE WAVEFORM can be set in SEISAN DEF The data is output exactly as displayed on the last screen so if filtering or instrument response has been made the output file will also be filtered or instrument corrected If any filtering or instrument response correction has been done a note will be inserted in the SEISAN waveform header so the user can see that this is no longer the original data The note could be e g Displacement 1 250 20 0 Hz indicating that output has been filtered and converted to displacement nm Note that number
390. ribed in http www geo uib no Seismologi SOFTWARE SEISAN_8 1 SEED Technical_18_seed doc The WAV directory contains files with digital waveform data The directory normally has no subdirectories or any other organization However in case of large databases WAV can be subdivided see below In addition any directory can contain waveform data it has to be specified in SEISAN DEF section 3 8 The amount of data that can be stored is only limited by the disk size The analysis system will always look in WAV for particular files if they are not in the user s own directory Waveform files will automatically be transferred to WAV on initial registration into the database see MULPLT Registration is the process of automatically creating an S file in the database with the name of the waveform file and header information Phase pickings are done later See section 6 2 There is normally no requirement for particular filenames for the waveform files in WAV or elsewhere however many programs will make file names like yyyy mm dd hhmm ssT NETWO_nnn e g 1995 01 23 1230 20T BERGE_013 With the abbreviations yyyy year mm month dd day hh hour mm minute ss second T file type indicator normally S NETWO maximum 5 letter network code and nnn number of channels File type indicators are S Standard R Resampled A Appended WAV database In case a large number of waveform data is stored it might be an advantage to also split up the WAV d
391. ries of pairs of stations terminated by the average spectra 2 Making a series of spectra for a number of stations and events The spectra can be corrected for distance Q and instrument response In addition the spectral levels can be expressed in moment or moment magnitude calculated in the same way and with the same units as in MULPLT All relevant parameters are taken from the CAT files the CAL files and the input parameter file for SPEC Window selection for the spectra can be specified to be related to the P S arrival times or the earthquake origin time and it is thus possible to automatically make e g S wave spectra of a large set of stations and events Optionally noise spectra can be calculated together with the signal spectra The noise window is selected at the start of the waveform file Before the program is started up the input files must be prepared The program need two input files The parameter file default spec par gives the parameters to use and the list of stations to process The event file default spec inp is a CAT file with events to use or a filenr lis type file with waveform file names can only be used if no readings are needed like for Nakamura studies An example of a spec par and spec inp file is found in DAT These files can be used immediately with the test data set The program produces several output files The main output is in spec out with the parameters used the station event combinations used and error
392. rite is preceded and terminated with 4 additional bytes giving the number of bytes in the write On the PC Seisan version 6 0 and earlier using Microsoft Fortran the first 2 bytes in the file are the ASCII character KP Every write is preceded and terminated with one byte giving the number of bytes in the write If the write contains more than 128 bytes it is blocked in records of 128 bytes each with the start and end byte which in this case is the number 128 Each record is thus 130 bytes long All of these additional bytes are transparent to the user if the file is read as an unformatted file However since the structure is different on Sun Linux MacOSX and PC a file written as unformatted on Sun Linux or MacOSX cannot be read as unformatted on PC or vice versa The files are very easy to write and read on the same computer but difficult to read if written on a different computer To further complicate matters the byte order is different on Sun and PC This means that version 7 0 can read all earlier waveform files on all platforms from all platforms However files written on version 7 0 PC cannot be read by any earlier versions of Seisan without modifying the earlier seisan version 242 In SEISAN all files are written as unformatted files In order to read the files independently of where they were written the reading routine buf_read in seisinc in LIB reads the file from Fortran as a direct access file with a record length of 2048
393. rmat select out VELEST MENU Create VELEST command file velest cmn Edit change VELEST command file velest cmn Create station select fil selstat lis Edit change station select fil selstat lis Create model fil Edit change model file RUN VELEST Edit inversion output file Convert VELEST output to Nordic format and make diff file End OO Dom Ai Choice 209 The complete inversion process of earthquake data in SEISAN format including all conversions and preparation of parameter files can be done with VELMENU The steps are as follows 1 Create VELEST command file velest cmn The user is asked for inversion or JHD and the appropriate parameters are set The file velest cmn is the central VELEST parameter file To create it the file of earthquake data is read to determine the parameters that depend on the data These are the number of events and the center of Cartesian coordinate system which is simply determined as the average of latitude and longitude of epicenter locations The remaining parameters are set to default values 3 Create station select file selstat lis For the inversion VELEST will use phases from stations with an epicentral distance below a maximum distance only In addition in VELMENU a selection of stations has to be used only phases from stations given in the file selstat lis will be used for inversion When genera
394. rogram works as OS9SEI except that it does not read the ASCII files The program must be used with Seislog 8 0 The program is currently the only program that put in the time synchronization flag in SEISAN waveform files except for data logging programs under Seislog Windows See format description in Appendix 2 The program recalculates the sample rate based on the time in the first blocks in the file and the last blocks in the file each block is one second long For very long files this might be of importance since the digitizer might not have exactly the nominal sample rate RSASEI Andalucian Seismic Network to SEISAN all chan def yes resp yes Conversion of network and broad band files to SEISAN format Covers several versions of the DTS format also used by other institutions in Spain Not tested on Linux RT_SEIS Reftek Passcal to SEISAN PC chan def no resp no The RT_SEIS program converts Reftek Passcal format to SEISAN This program is provided by Refraction Technology Inc The program does not use the filenr lis as input file To see the options of RT_SEIS start the program without any arguments In order to make use of the RTU INI definition file the environmental variable RTU needs to be set to for example c seismo dat see RefTek documentation for more details This file can be used to set station names for respective unit IDs Example of RTU INI 8020 Station SB00 Network CTBTO CH1Band H1iType 1Axis a Ba
395. rom which the seismic moment source radius and stress drop can be calculated The second option is to display the instrument corrected spectrum displacement velocity or acceleration and model the spectrum for corner frequency and attenuation parameters In this case no correction for attenuation should be made Spectral analysis to determine moment source radius and stress drop Select the spectral option s Spec Before the spectrum comes up you will get a question of the type of spectrum wanted The possibilities are displacement d velocity v acceleration a or raw spectrum r For determination of Moment etc the displacement spectrum MUST be selected Unless raw spectrum is selected the spectrum will be instrument corrected If no response file is available in CAL a message will be displayed on the screen and the raw spectrum calculated At this stage it is also possible to change the velocity from the MULPLT DEF value or the moment given in the S file see spectral fitting below The spectrum shown will normally show both the spectrum from the selected time window as well as a noise spectrum from an identical length time window at the start of the trace IF NO NOISE SPECTRUM is desired select spectrum with capital S instead of s The spectral analysis produces two output files com_spec out The complex spectrum with some additional information needed for surface wave analysis must be displacement spectrum amp_spec out The
396. rontab On Unix the compression formats supported include gzip compress bzip2 and zip So far no automatic decompression is supported on Windows will be put in With the introduction of SEED format there is less need for external compression since the SEED data usually is compressed and therefore decompressed on the fly when read Component codes The SEISAN waveform format has 4 characters for the component code The first character indicates the type of sensor for example B for broadband S for short period or L for long period For acceleration data the first character has to be A because SEISAN assumes that the corresponding response has been given as acceleration response The fourth character has to give the channel orientation Z is used for vertical E for east west and N for north south Other orientation of the horizontal components is possible in GSE SEED and SEISAN are not understood by SEISAN If data are rotated T is used for transverse and R for radial The second and third characters can be chosen by the user The component code is part of the response filename and is used to find the response corresponding to a given station and component Program WAVFIX can be used to change station and or component codes The Nordic format only has space for two characters for the component code The definition in SEISAN is that these are the first and fourth character of the waveform compone
397. rsor at least 3 points defining a polygon within which epicenters are selected A new plot is made enclosing only the polygon and showing the epicenters within the polygon The corresponding epicenters S files are in file epimap are Known bug Sometimes epicenters are still left outside SELECT can be used instead Z Zoom Similar to Area however a rectangle is selected by defining just the 2 diagonal corners Plotting place names If option P is used when the program asks for place names or station codes the user will be prompted for one or several files with place names The place name file format is name latitude_degrees longitude degrees eg Edinburgh 55 94422 3 20096 O Edinburgh 55 94422 3 20096 Sty The only requirement is that at least 2 blanks separate the place name and the geographical co ordinates Note that the place name can contain one or more blanks however each blank must occur singly 111 Epimap contour file EPIMAP has a simple contouring routine accepting a regular spaced grid Below is an example output from EQRSEI The top part of the file is just comments the data starts at Fields to use The data must come in longitude latitude pairs value of contour in order as shown below The contour value is plotted exactly as shown below E g the value 117 is plotted as 114 where _ is blank By specifying ____117 0_ the value would be plotted as 117 0 and moved one space to the left on the plo
398. rt depth of range of start depths increment in start depths NB If these parameters are used the fixed initial start depth is not used The input at the bottom is reporting agency used for both hypocenter and magnitudes Since the program locates distant events max distance reset test 41 must be set to a large value To avoid that local events move out in the blue the parameters xnear and xfar must be set not larger than 2000 to 3000 km Xnear and xfar are only used for local events flag L and regional events if the local crustal model is used RESET TEST parameters HYP will assign reasonable default values for RESET TEST parameter Below is shown a summary For full details see HYP manual The number to the left is the control parameter and D indicates the default value 2 Step length damping control D 500 0 7 9 Duration magnitude coefficients used for calculating the coda magnitude as MAG TEST 7 TEST 8 LOG T TEST 9 DELTA where T is the coda length in seconds DELTA is the hypocentral distance in km D 7 0 087 8 2 0 9 0 0035 Lee 1972 If test 8 is negative its positive value will be used and log T will be squared Note however that the individual stations magnitude values printed out during the run of HYP still will be using the unsquared log T 11 Maximum no of iterations in the least squares rms minimization D 99 0 13 Increment in km for auxiliary rms D 20 0 km 30 Initial damping factor D
399. rt one file with up to 3 channels KACSEI Kinemetrics ASCII acceleration to SEISAN all chan def yes resp yes 147 Kinemetrics ASCII film record acceleration files type v1 to SEISAN It is assumed that channel 1 is N 2 is Z and 3 is E there are always 3 channels in file input values are in 1 10 g the output is in 1 1 000 000 g station code is taken from file name as given in first line of input file the 3 channels can have different number of samples however it is assumed that they all start at the same time KINSEI Kinemetrics DATASEIS to SEISAN PC chan def yes resp yes The program takes the station code from the input files The component codes are also taken from the input file as far as Z N and is E is concerned but the first letter is always set to S like S Z The program is also used if CNVSSR or CNVSSA have been used first K2SEl Kinemetrics K2 to SEISAN PC Linux chan def yes resp yes Program for K2 binary files The program works by first converting the binary files to ASCII by internally running the Kinemetrics program kw2asc PC only If no definition file is present channel 1 3 will be A Z A N and A E If more channels they will be called A 04 A 05 etc LEESEI Willy Lee binary files to SEISAN PC chan def no resp no The number of channels is fixed to 16 and the time information is not read it must be entered when converting the file LENSEI Lennartz ASCII to SEISAN all chan def
400. ry If started from EEV files in different formats can be used at the same time Time gaps in waveform files Only SEED format has running time headers and therefore the only format where a possible time gap can exist SEISAN will replace missing data intervals with zeros 6 2 2 Use of MULPLT from EEV In order to process events more easily using SEISNET EEV and MULPLT have been tightly integrated When MULPLLT is called from EEV command f will plot the next event in the database to go back to the same event in EEV use quit The event can be plotted with default parameters from EEV using PO If PO has been selected the f command in MULPLT multi trace mode will show the plot of the next event with default options This is a fast way of plotting waveform files going through S files in a database If several waveform files are available the user will graphically be shown the files and can select one 75 or several Files can optionally be displayed in alphabetical order see MULPLT DEF If more than 75 files several selection screens will be shown A maximum of 1000 files can be used If the PO option has been used all default channels will be used 6 2 3 Continuous plotting This option is used to plot one channel in a multi line display and can therefore simulate a helicorder plot This is a very different option from the plotting from a continuous data base see 6 2 4 Interactive processing is not possible in this mode Using thi
401. s copy the event to another database given by a 1 5 letter name upper case or to a file EEV OUT in your working directory Several files can be extracted within one EEV session to the same EEV OUT file A new EEV session deletes the previous eev out file The C option can be used to recover files from the DELET database of deleted events In addition to making the EEV OUT file an index file is also made called indexeev out THIS FILE IS NOT DELETED WHEN EEV STARTS UP since the intention is to be able to use EEV to make an index file of interesting events from several months You can then start eev with the selected events with command EEV eevindex out Note The other data base can also be a local data base in which case EEV should not operate on the same local data base COMMENT Comment are written into S file terminated by a blank line DXXXXX The D command is used to jump to another event at a given date and time normally only day is used The hour can optionally be specified E g d2205 will find the event nearest in time after day 22 at 05 hours If both day and hour is used 4 digits MUST be given e g 0708 Highest accuracy is the nearest minute D Delete event You are asked for confirmation After the event has been deleted all S file names are read in again and all event numbers after the deleted event are therefore changed The deleted event is automatically saved in the DELET database If the event is present in the CAT fil
402. s have been scaled so only if the SEISAN file is read with standard SEISAN routines will the numbers be correct If the output file is converted to ASCII by SEIASC the number shown must be multiplied with a given scaling factor see SEISAN binary format description Appendix 2 There is no response information in the header other than the short text Since the station code is still the same it is technically possible to correct for the response again using the response information in the CAL directory however be aware that this will give wrong results Output of ASCII waveform file This option only works if parameter SPECTRAL_OUTPUT has been set in MULPLT DEF The output file signal out contains the last data displayed in the single trace zoom window in ASCII and real numbers This option is a another way see option O Out above of getting an output file that has been filtered or instrument response corrected The main difference is that this file is only for one trace written in ASCII Fixed scaling Normally all traces are plotted with autoscaling However it is sometimes useful to be able to scale the traces with a fixed scale in order to e g compare traces or override the autoscale in case a spike distorts the autoscaling Option Scale will prompt the user for a maximum count to use for the scaling of all traces 92 Figure 20 Using MULPLT for picking phases The top shows the original trace and the bottom the zoomed part Not
403. s 139 PCQSEI 148 PCSUDS 150 PDAS files to SEISAN 148 PDASEI 148 PDE 140 PDE bulletin file 137 PDE e mail 141 PDENOR 140 Peak ground acceleration 190 Peak ground velocity 190 Period 88 Perl 230 Peterson noise model 99 183 Pg phase 59 PGA 190 Phase AMP 87 Phase mouse key 105 Phase name 89 236 Phase name key 105 Phase name length 236 Phase picking 27 48 73 87 Phase picking mode 85 251 Phase reading indicator 74 Problem rotation 100 Phase weight key 105 Problem Rotation and removing response 91 Phase compare theoretical 36 Problem select 122 Phase select in data base 120 Problem single station location 59 Picking phases use of filters 80 Problem UPD 125 PITSA 149 150 Problem UPDATE 124 Pitsa program 37 Problem VELEST 210 Place names 111 Profile hypocenters 111 Plot contours 109 Profile num 113 Plotting continuous data 86 PSNSEI 148 Plotting epicenters 116 Public Seismic Network 148 Plotting place names 111 Q Plotting response files 56 Plotting traces 37 Q determine by spectral fitting 98 Pn phase 59 QLg 180 Polarity 80 88 136 160 QNX 148 Polarity correct 136 QNXSEI 148 Polarity select for 119 Quality factor 165 197 201 Poles and zeros 148 220 240 Quality factor correct for 183 Polygon 205 Quality factor determine by spectra 183 Polygon select 120 Quality factor determine with coda 165 Polygon select in 45 111 Quanterra 147 Postscript 12 75 R Power spectral density 185 Power spectrum 96 99 Rad
404. s is included when available The depth is indicated as fixed in all cases where the operator has been used A N G Macroseismic information is included with max intensity The residual standard deviation is put into rms column Event types are set to R Magnitude types are converted as follows UK is made blank b is replaced by B s is replaced by S D is replaced by C w is replaced by W WAVEFORM CONVERSION PROGRAMS 141 This group of programs are mostly converting waveform files from some format to SEISAN although a few also convert from SEISAN to some other mostly standard formats Most programs convert from binary to binary formats Many instruments come with conversion programs to some standard format like PCSUDS or MINISEED and these have often been used to convert to SEISAN instead of writing programs reading the original files directly Many such conversion programs work on PC so the corresponding SEISAN programs only work on PC However since the PC files can be read directly on Sun this should not present a problem Many programs have VERY LITTLE documentation look in source codes for more information The number of programs are forever increasing with new recorders coming onto the market and new formats coming in use and others going out of use and it is becoming increasingly difficult to keep track of it all For this release of SEISAN it has not been possible to test all programs on all platforms An attempt has been made to
405. s no print out for each event Example of codaq out start in s times absolute start time sec window length sec 1 spreading parameter constant v in q q0 f v minimum signal to noise ratio noise window in front of signal and len 1 minimum correlation coefficient S maximum counts to use 5000 ASK SUE KMY EGD HYA Se BS A S AS 445 A CO DD k k UCONN COD OO OOOO CH GOGO OCG Oro Oo SEISMO WAV 1996 06 07 1324 51S TEST__009 SEISMO WAV 1996 06 07 1324 51S TES 009 SEISMO WAV 1996 06 07 1324 51S TEST__009 1996 6 7132458 KMY te 41 3 f 16 0 s n 37 4 Q 1077 corr 0 55 rms 0 30 SEISMO WAV 1996 06 07 1324 51S TES 009 SEISMO WAV 1996 06 07 1324 51S TES 009 OO SEISMO WAV 1996 06 25 0336 34S TEST__032 1996 625 33715 ASK te 87 2 4 0 s nl21 9 Q 340 corr 0 60 rms 0 19 1996 625 33715 ASK te 87 2 f 8 0 s n 72 5 Q 551 corr 0 56 rms 0 28 SEISMO WAV 1996 06 25 0336 34S TES 032 1996 625 337 5 SUE te 57 3 4 0 s n 96 9 o 193 corr 0 61 eme 0 34 SEISMO WAV 1996 06 25 0336 34S TES 032 1996 625 33730 KMY te 143 5 f 8 0 s n 13 6 Q 506 corr 0 61 rms 0 27 SEISMO WAV 1996 06 25 0336 34S TEST__032 SEITSMO WAV 1996 06 25 0336 34S TEST__032 169 1996 625 33653 HYA tc 84 4 f s n 51 5 Q 288 corr 0 54 rms 0 12 23 0 1996 625 33653 HYA te 84 4 E 4 0 s n239 5 Q 427 corr 0 56 rms 0 17 1996 625 33653 HYA tc 84 4 8 0 s nl12 1 o 504 c
406. s of continuous data is to make a list of these files with DIRF and an application program can then use that list to work with the data Currently two programs have special options for this kind of continuous data The MULPLT program will plot data from several files as if it was one file in one continues trace the RESAMP program will resample the data from several files and put it into one output file 2 3 File types used with SEISAN A description of the different file types is given below with typical names Most names must be exactly as specified others can be given names However it is VERY important that no name including full path is more than 80 characters long Until now this has not been a problem however it has to be considered when SEISAN is installed The basic unit is a file in the Nordic format see Appendix 1 For practical purposes 3 descriptive names are used for Nordic files S file Single event file with phase readings with or without source parameters such as location and magnitude In the database these files are named with the extension Syyymm This is the standard type of file in e g the BER__ 1998 08 An example is 11 1234 11L S199808 CAT file A catalog file containing many S files with location or just a catalog of hypocenters a compact file see below This is the standard type of file in e g the REA BER CAT directory An example is 199801 CAT This file format is also output from several programs like SELECT
407. s option the program asks for the following input Low and high cut for filter Give values or return for no filter Sometimes low cut filters are unstable a different routine used for continuous plotting so if e g a LP record is to be simulated use filter limit 0 to 0 1 Hz The zero means it is a low pass filter not bandpass A filter 10 to 0 would mean a high pass filter High and low pass filters are only available with continuous plotting unless the FILTER TYPE MULPLT DEF is set to 1 0 RECFIL Seconds pr line Number of seconds on each line End time This question only appear if plotting from EEV The list of files is then the list of events belonging to the data base used Give end time as e g 2000050203 Max count The absolute maximum count to be used for full scale Since many lines and possibly many pagers are plotted it is not possible to use autoscaling and like on a seismogram a fixed value must be set Lines pr page Number of lines per page Station code Station code max 5 characters Componet code The component code max 4 characters MULPLT will plot from the first file given from the filenr lis file and then continue to plot as long as more file names are given in filenr lis Alternatively if plotting from EEV it will start with the current event and continue until the end time So if a month of data files are given a month of seismograms will be displayed There is no requirement that the input files follow ea
408. s pr event a header file and a data file It is assumed that the Sismalp ndx files have the same file name as the header file except for the file extension It is also assumed that the file names are 12 characters long SUDSEI PCSUDS to SEISAN PC chan def yes resp yes The program converts from PCSUDS to SEISAN This is done by first running the program SUD2ASC included and then converting to SEISAN The SUD2ASC program and test data was supplied by REFTEK through the distribution of PC SUDS Utilities by Robert Banfill 1996 TERSEI Terra ASCII to SEISAN all chan def yes resp yes Program converts from Terra Technology ASCII files to SEISAN Only tested with 1 3 channel files WGSSEI to SEISAN all chan def yes resp yes Program converts from WGSN files to SEISAN The format is used on IRIS stations as processing format Little tested 6 13 Signal processing programs The two processing systems PITSA and SAC are interfaced to SEISAN and can be started directly from EEV This is done since both systems support functions that SEISAN does not have They only operate on Unix The Degtra program only operates in Windows It is not interfaced directly to SEISAN but operates on SEISAN format 6 13 1 PITSA PITSA Programmable Interactive Toolbox for Seismological Analysis is a program written by Frank Scherbaum and James Johnson The program is included in the SEISAN package updated versions are 150 available at http lbutler geo
409. s to SCALES 7 STEREOGRAPHIC conformal azimuthal 8 EQUIDISTANT CYLINDRICAL 109 9 OBLIQUE ERCATOR cylindrical conformal 10 MOLLWEIDE ELLIPTICAL pseudocylindrical equal area 11 SANSON S SINUSOIDAL pseudocylindrical equal Area Pleas nter projection number a 3 Enter latitud range of the map 60 70 N positive Enter longitude range of the map 0 30 E positive Center of geographical map space is 65 0 15 0 degrees can be used e g to make an accurate MERCATOR at high latitude Press lt return gt to accept these as the reference latitude longitude for the projection or lt N gt o to enter your own co ordinates Enter latitude of any grid line and also the grid spacing 60 2 possible to have grid spacing at any value Enter longitude of any grid line and also the grid spacing 0 4 DO YOU WANT THE EVENTS NUMERATED Y N RETURN a sequential number will be plotted besides each hypocenter the corresponding hypocenters are found in output file epimap out Plot title max 60 chars or press lt return gt for none Plot error ellipses y n return from HYP output File name for contour levels or press lt return gt for none format below Plot place names P or file format below Plot all a or some s stations with a label if s question given about which station give in UPPER CASE all stations without a label X or none
410. se HYPO71 Locate with Hypo71 TASP Generate arrival times using IASPEI91 tables IL ISC location program unix only INPUTEPI Input hypocenter and origin time in S file from st input INPUTONE Input an additional type one line hypocenter line INPUTX Input of xnear and xfar INVRAD Make moment ternsor inversion with Invrad Jyyyymm BAS Jump to year yy and month mm in base BAS L LL LXX MAC MACROMAP MAP MODELS Locate event will also calculate magnitude if not locatable but distance is present Hypocenter Locate current and next event together Locate current and event xx together Input macroseismic information ake a GMT based map of felt information Unix only ake a map of current location ist MODEL DEF file in DAT MOM WKBJ PO PITSA PRINT MAC HI ake moment ternsor inversion with Invrad Add a new event to data base ake synthetic seismograms with WKBJ program Operating system command e g ols is ls ocd test is cd test do not currently work on command with prompt input like epimap and collect Plot event also make hard copies and pic phases Plot event with defaults Start Pitsa program not on PC Print S file on printer acroseismic Windows program Register event Quit EEV Renam vent type must be L R or D Register event Calculates and plots RMS as a function of depth Run SAC Search for next two events which are within xxxxxx
411. se to be in chronological order according to origin time and not the more random times used when the events were first registered into the database Even if the event is marked not to be located with a in header line column 45 the ID will still be updated same for program UPD Like with the SPLIT program if two events of the same type L R or D have the same origin time to the second one second is added to the file name part indicating seconds see also section 6 6 The event will also be in chronological order in the CAT database VERY IMPORTANT The first time an update is done the S files get a new name according to the origin time now calculated and the internal ID is changed accordingly The ID is then locked indicated by an L in column 76 of the ID line For all future updates by default the ID will remain the same the S file name will also be the same irrespective if the origin time changes This is VERY important in case data is taken out of the database for some special analysis and then put back in to overwrite the original data If the ID is the same the correct event will be replaced Optionally Update can make a new ID each time the program runs not recommended It might be necessary sometimes to allow this in case the events are no longer in chronological order according to origin time e g a teleseismic event is put in with the ID corresponding to the recording time when located the origin time is many minutes bef
412. sed for all three programs In all programs the source is triangular however BOUCH can optionally use several sources see below REDVELO Reduction velocity to calculate the initial times at subsequent distances put 0 for no reduction velocity PHASES The names in format A4 right justified of the phases to be synthesized with WKBJ The phases may be given in any order with a maximum of 6 phases per line and there may be several SYNT PHASES lines Possible phases Pg direct P from source to receiver Sg direct S PmP includes automatically Pn at distances larger than critical pPmP includes automatically pPn at distances larger than critical sPmP includes automatically sPn at distances larger than critical SmS pSmS sSmS includes automatically Sn D n sSn at distances larger than critical SmP PmS P1P P2P S1S etc the same as PmP SmS etc but on interface number 1 2 etc The free surface gets interface number 0 in the convention taken here Their associated head waves are labeled Pn Pn2 Sn1 etc COMPON RADIAL for radial transverse components NORTH for North South East West components STAT AT Is not free or NOT FREE anywhere within column 16 to 25 Optional line If this option is chosen the WKBJ synthetic seismograms are calculated omitting the reflection coefficient at the free surface at the receiver location BOUPAR Modeling parameters L Nt and e L is length of periodicity
413. sed in a number of tasks that are needed to perform seismic hazard analysis The basic requirements for performing a probabilistic seismic hazard analysis may be summarized as follows Homogenize the earthquake catalogue and assess the completeness Define the seismic source zones Prepare input parameters from the earthquake catalogue for each source zone Prepare attenuation relations for the region Compute hazard in terms of peak ground acceleration PGA Assess site effects Prepare response spectra Following is a list of programs that constitutes the part of the SEISAN analysis package which deals with seismic hazard and related problems Most of these programs are described in more detail in different sections of the SEISAN manual SELECT Select a subset of earthquake data according to given criteria STATIS Statistical information about the database is computed and can be used in the analysis CATSTAT Program to compute and plot the yearly monthly and daily number of events from a given catalogue CAT_AGA Program to reorder the hypocenter lines in a CAT file according to hypocenter agency in order to put the prime estimate in the beginning 190 CLUSTER Program that searches for the dependant events in time and distance in a given earthquake catalogue EXFILTER Identifies the probable explosions based on the user defined parameters involving time of day distribution and the mining locations It can be used for catalog
414. ser guide 26 Signal duration 157 Signal damped 230 Signal out 92 SILSEI 150 Simulate drum recording 75 Single channel files 135 Single files 5 Single station location 59 Single trace mode 85 Sismalp 150 SISSEI 150 Site effects 189 Sn phase 59 Soil amplification 183 Sonic boom 119 Source displacement spectrum 95 Source function 197 Source parameters 95 Source radius 96 Source time function 176 S P and L S differences 61 Spain 141 148 SPEC 182 Spec par 183 Spectral analysis 182 Spectral fitting 98 Spectral parameters 105 127 157 183 203 Spectral parameters update 124 Spectral ratio 183 Spherical harmonic station corrections 66 SPLIT 30 122 Split an event 35 Sprengnether 146 SSA Kinemtrics 146 SSR Kinemetrics 146 STA LTA 157 Stand alone programs 57 Start and end date 57 Start depth 62 Start time 16 Starting location 62 67 Station and channel codes 221 Station azimuth 91 Station coordinates 16 139 Station listing in print out 68 Station selection 139 Station only 4 characters 138 STATIONO HYP 16 65 STATIS 127 Statistics 127 129 STATSTAT 129 Stress drop 96 97 197 Strike 162 Subset of database 57 SUD2ASC 150 SUDS 150 SUDS format 242 SUDSEI 150 Sun and PC differences 7 241 Surface wave analysis 96 217 Surface wave dispersion 95 SUSE Linux 18 Swarm identify 129 Swarm seismic 129 Swarm out 129 SYNT 173 Synthetic seismograms 171 System response 54 T T and P axis 161 Terra Technology 150 TER
415. ser is also prompted for database Option 1 Data is available as waveform files only and a list of files must be made first with DIRF Main option 0 1 or 2 can be used for plotting The p option creates the S file and copies the waveform file to the WAV directory The waveform file remains in the working directory Unwanted waveform files can also be deleted so that when all events have been put in only waveform files of real events remain in working directory These can then be plotted with one run of MULPLT see section 6 2 1 Option 2 Data is available already in a database however since the data has not been inspected the waveform files are still in a work directory In EEV the first unprocessed event in the month is found with command ss and MULPLT is started with command po to invoke all defaults If the event is to remain in the database it must be registered with option p The process and the questions are the same as in option 1 except that the S file is not created since it is already there The S file is cleaned for all processing information from SEISNET if present This normally also includes automatic phase picks However they can be kept if parameter REG_KEEP_AUTO is set in the SEISAN DEF file The status of the files also changes to being newly registered as under option 1 see definition 86 of processing codes in Appendix 1 and waveform file s copied to WAV Before registering it might
416. session of EEV E g the command ols on Sun and odir on PC would make a directory listing PUT Register event This option is mainly meant to be used with the SEISNET data collection system The command cleans up the S file for all SEISNET operations It removes commented out ID lines and copies the waveform files given for the event from the current directory to WAV The command is equivalent to the register command in MULPLT If events are auto registered with AUTOREG the command can be used to clean up and inspect incoming data without using MULPLT directly PMAC Windows only program PROMAC for processing macroseismic information to calculate intensities from felt information and model the macroseismic intensities The program can also plot associated pictures in directory PIC All information is stored in the S file The program was written by Bladimir Moreno and has a separate manual see INF directory Program must be installed separately zip file in SUP P Plot event with MULPLT PO Use MULPLT with defaults This means that no questions will be asked and the plot appears in multi trace mode with default channels and default filters as given in the MULPLT DEF file in DAT Useful option for routine inspection of raw data PITSA Run the Pitsa program see section 6 13 Not on PC PRINT The current S file is printed on the default printer to set up printer command see SEISAN DEF section3 8 Q Quit EEV REG Same as PUT
417. should be a few times the hypocentral distance Nt is maximum number of terms in wave number summation and e is the value used in truncating the summation Increasing e and decreasing Nt will speed up convergence but the results might be unreliable NEW STAT Comment line STATION Station to be modeled with component s to be displayed The S means that short period instruments are used If no component is given all 3 components are assumed The other option is to 176 indicate a component e g Z and only that component will be displayed see also description of BOUSE DISTANC is epicentral distance used this distance is taken from the current location AZIMUTH is azimuth from the source to the station taken from current location BAZIMUTH is the back azimuth at the station calculated by EEV used to rotate if so specified Each new station is represented by the above 3 lines The source time function The time duration of the triangular source time function for Bouchon is given as Tsou above and is also used in WKBJ and Herrmann Hints on modeling Event 199606071325 in the test data set is set up with modeling parameters and can be tested immediately The model The standard model given in STATIONO HYP might be too detailed for most cases and should be simplified to include 3 4 layers by just editing the S file this also speeds up modeling However if you located the event with one model and model with another the distances a
418. so saved when you pick the next trace in Multi mode This is also true for spectral parameters and azimuth determination 79 Filters in MULPLT MULPLT uses a 4 pole Butterworth filter that can be used forward and backwards Normally when a filter character or filter menu press is selected the filter is only run one way and the number of poles is then 4 This will make a small phase delay where the first onset might appear a bit later so if possible read on unfiltered traces If an 8 pole filter is desired press the filter key twice and the filter will also run backwards This gives theoretically a zero phase shift filter however in practice some of the onset energy is seen well before the first arrival so it seems to distort the arrival times much more than using the 4 pole filter When the program asks for a non fixed filter like when using the Filt command the filter is always 4 poles When doing spectral analysis and specifying a filter before the spectral analysis the filtering is done in frequency domain and the filter is 8 pole Butterworth When reading polarities DO NOT USE FILTER if possible If a filter is chosen from the menu it is always 4 pole The filter pass band limits can be changed in MULPLT DEF The user can also chose between two filter routines bndpas default and recfil The filter used in continuous mode can be either bandpass low pass or high pass Specifying a filter limit of zero means that the filte
419. source 2 and so on Internally the point X1 Y1 is connected to X2 Y2 as well as both to the previous and the subsequent points designated as X1 Y1 as long as these are both in the same gross source Point X2 Y2 is connected similarly An example is elucidating The following points define two gross sources having two subsources 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 8 0 8 0 5 0 10 0 6 0 15 0 10 0 200 110 20 0 15 0 150 16 0 15 0 15 0 0 0 16 0 0 0 Card 9 Format 215 4F 10 2 NX NY XZERO YZERO XDELTA YDELTA There can be any number of these cards one for each site or grid of sites to be examined NX and NY are the number of grid points in the X East West and Y North South directions that is they are the number of columns and rows in a grid of sites to be examined For specification of a single site NX and NY must have values of unit Zero or negative values for NX and NY are meaningless and will cause program to terminate XZERO and YZERO are the co ordinates of the site to be examined or are the lower left corner of the grid if NX and or NY are greater than one XDELTA and YDELTA are the grid spacing in the X and Y directions When the grid option is not used these variables may be left blank or set equal to zero Final card Insert one blank card at the end of the input deck Output file from EQRISK There is only one standard output file generated by EQRISK which has a default file name of eqrisk out This file contains the results of
420. spectively catday out Output catalogue of the daily number of events This file contains four columns of data corresponding to the year month day and the number of events respectively cathour out Hourly distribution of events within a day interval In addition a series of files with gmt in name give similar output for use with gmtxy only Unix The output files can then be used for plotting the histograms for the desired time interval at yearly monthly or daily intervals If desired the corresponding histograms can be plotted interactively on the screen or can be printed Several other routine programs such as grapher xyplot gnuplot or GMT etc can also be used for this purpose The general purpose of this program is to evaluate the catalogue completeness When run for different magnitude intervals one can detect the magnitude thresholds above which the catalogue can be considered complete SWARM finding earthquake swarms The program is used to identify seismic swarms in a catalog Input to the program is a CAT file with many events and some manually entered parameters Output is identified swarms The output file swarm out contains all swarms organized as events In the header line is given the center for area identified and the magnitude is the number of events in the area divided by 10 The rest of the line is information from first event in swarm Principle of selection The area is divided into a lat lon grid Around
421. spectral ordinate the file will contain a set of values e g PGA for different distances This file is then used as one of the inputs to the CRISIS99 program The file name is user defined An example output file is included in the DAT directory with the file name criatt tab CRIPAR The program was used earlier to generate input for both crisis and criatt but now it is only used with criatt due a format change for crisis99 EQRISK This popular program for computing seismic hazard is written by McGuire 1976 and the complete manual is published as an open file report The following is a short summary of the program operation and a full description of the input parameters as well as format of the input file These descriptions are as they are given in the original manual McGuire 1976 The program EQRISK evaluates risk hazard for each site source combination and intensity level and calculates the total annual expected number of occurrences of intensity greater than those levels of interest at a site by summing the expected numbers from all sources Seismic source areas are specified as a set of arbitrarily shaped quadrilaterals For ease of use gross sources may be divided into sub sources which are a string of quadrilaterals each two adjacent subsources having two common corners A Cartesian co ordinate system is used and the location of the origin is arbitrary Input file for EQRISK The default input file is named DATA and is har
422. standardize the programs A general problem is that many seismic recorders and formats do not provide proper identification of the channels In the worst cases there are no station codes only channel numbers and in very many cases there is no room for proper component information This is being taken care of by having a definition file and only one format for the definition file is used see below This is also used with program WAVFIX Most programs work in the standard way with a filenr lis file as input made with DIRF The response information is seldom in the original files and in most conversion programs the response information is taken from the CAL directory If no response information is available a message will be given For each program a comment will be given as to the status of testing and on which platforms they operate If the channel definition file option is implemented the array dimensions will be SEISAN standard The program SEIPITSA might be an easy way to convert between 1 column ASCII data and SEISAN see below Conversion programs definition file The conversion programs use a common format for the definition file for naming station and channels The definition file is named programname def as e g sudsei def The definition file can be in the working directory or the DAT directory The conversion program will first look in the working directory for the file and then in DAT The conversion of codes can take place in 2 wa
423. stants RESET TEST 7 9 If a is given as a negative number the following formula will be used Mc abs a log coda log coda b dist c Coda magnitude is only calculated if the epicentral distance is less than TEST 57 Ms is calculated using the standard Ms log amp T 1 66log dist 3 3 where T is period Amplitude is in micrometer and distance in degrees however in the Nordic format nm and km are used and the program converts Ms is only calculated if the period is larger than 10 0 seconds in which case the program automatically assumes that Ms is the wanted magnitude The phase used can be AMS AMP or blank The current version of MULPLT produces the standard name AMS Mb is calculated using Mb log amp T Q dist depth where Q is a hardwired function of distance and depth Veith and Clawson 1972 Mb is only calculated if the epicentral distance is less than 100 degrees and the period is in the range 0 2 5 secs and either the phase is P AMP AMb or the phase is blank and the epicentral distance is larger than TEST 57 The current version of MULPLT produces the standard name AMb Mw is calculated as Mw 2 3 log10 moment 6 06 where moment is in Nm see also section 6 2 11 When an event is relocated the moment is also recalculated according to revised hypocentral distance NOTE If an amplitude has a given period between 5 and 10 secs it is not used for magnitude calculation see above If an event is not located
424. subdirectory structure see 2 2 2 which is useful when storing continuous data in particular The DELET database contains all events deleted from any of the databases here BERGE BER and NAO Filenames are identical between all platforms 2 2 1 Phase data and hypocenters The REA directory contains phase readings and derived source information like hypocenters fault plane solutions etc The REA directory has one or several subdirectories corresponding to separate databases see Figure 1 for an example with two databases The database names can have between 3 and 5 characters If less than 5 characters are used the character _ is added in the file system to make it 5 The user does not have to put the when running a program they will be added by the software If a directory is made manually the _ must be put in It is assumed that a database is always present in the system The name of the default database is given by an environmental variable see section 3 1 however if not set it will default to AGA for agency Here BER will be used as an example throughout the manual A database has a duplicate storage of the events For quick reference and interactive work the events are stored in single files S files in yearly directories and monthly subdirectories When new data is entered into the database it comes in as individual event files However once the interactive work has finished the single event files are overwritten
425. t 30 1989 Roberts R G Christoffersson A and Cassidy F 1989 Real time events detection phase identification and source location estimation using single station component seismic data and a small PC Geophysical Journal 97 471 480 Ordaz M 1991 CRISIS Brief description of program CRISIS Institute of Solid Earth Physics University of Bergen Norway Internal Report 16p Ottemdller L 1995 Explosion filtering for Scandinavia Norwegian National Seismic Network technical report 2 IFJF University of Bergen 209 pp Ottemdller L and J Havskov 1999 SeisNet A General Purpose Virtual Seismic Network SRL 70 5 522 528 Ottem ller L N M Shapiro S K Singh and J F Pacheco 2002 Lateral variation of Lg wave propagation in southern Mexico J Geophys Res 107 Ottemdller L and J Havskov 2003 Moment Magnitude Determination for Local and Regional Earthquakes Based on Source Spectra Bull Seism Soc Am 93 203 214 Peterson J 1993 Observation and modeling of seismic background noise U S Geol Survey Open File report 93 322 95p Pujol J Software for joint hypocentral determination 2003 In International Handbook of Earthquake and Engineering Seismology Part B Vol 81 W H K Lee P Jennings H Kanamori C Kisslinger Eds Ruud B O E S Husebye S F Ingate and A Christoffersen 1988 Event location at any distance using seismic data from a single three component station Bull S
426. t Currently only programs EQRSEI version 7 0 and CRISEI from SEISAN version 6 0 make contour files In the DAT directory there is an example of an EQRSEI OUT file NB In the input file shown below the FIRST COLUMN MUST BE blank Test Case 1 NSTEP 10 JCALC 0 JPRNT 1 IATTE 0 LIST OF EXAMINED INTENSITIES 3 91 4 61 5 01 5 30 5492 5 70 RISKS DESIRED 1000 0200 0100 0050 0000 0000 0000 0000 ATTENUATION DATA Ci C2 G3 SIGMA RZERO RONE AAA BBB 6 16 64 1 30 lt 50 25 00 5 0010000 00 00 NO OF GROSS SOURCES 3 NO OF SUBSOURCES IN GROSS SOURCES 3 2 1 This file is input for epimap contour plotting The input of parameters must appear as listed below with the actual data starting after the line Fields to use There can be any number of header lines The contour values plotted are plotted with the number of decimals given below The last part of the file is the actual longitudes latitudes and levels Color use is optional and the field can be left blank the codes are as follows 1 blue 2 green 3 red 4 yellow 5 white 6 black in and max level 115 1800 129 6700 Fields to use Ee Ee ee d geiert I Latitude range and number of values 40 00 49 00 10 Longitude range and number of values 5 00 14 00 10 Contour level to plot and color 117 2 0 Contour level to plot and color 119 3 0 Contour level to plot and color 121 Contour level to plot and c
427. t Output sate Lonk of of of of of of of of of of x output events events events events events events events events events x field S Dep E X with spectra with fault plane solution stimates with with with with with with t lon and dep are errors F is both fix flags and A is 8 r mc ml mb ms mw FOr report file is report out nordic file is report_n out of choices used in report inp Depth Dep X 10 X NOMOADONDNWEN and Time with F Aga Nsta Rms Gap McA MlA MA MsA MwA Fp Spec F Aga Nsta Rms Gap McA MlA MA MsA MwA Fp Spec x 126 The report inp is a file with the choices used Report can use that file or a file with the same format and a different name as second argument report collect out report inp in order to use a fixed set of choises Content of report out Year Date Latitud Longitud Depth NST GAP 1996 1996 1996 1996 1996 1996 1996 1996 1996 1996 1996 1996 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 7 3 6 6 6 7 10 25 5 13 18 18 26 776 ER 634 652 EEN EEN 656 282 416 156 438 2195 153 LA On LA ol MOANWABWHIOB OBS 52 SC 0 lt 9 odd ach 3 8 8 0 ST lt 2 22 40 68 40 27 30 63 25 70 70 37 93 k3vO Otto OO OOOOt3 12 348 270 270 hb EeNNN HENW M1 STRIK 9 28 9 9 28 9 8 2 0 5 8 8 DIP 61 61 41 RAKE 41 41
428. t STATIONO HYP is selected The combo box is made up from the set of station files STATION HYP found in the DAT directory or in the current local directory There is two buttons lt add gt and lt remove gt in the station list block and velocity model block Their function is for adding or removing items from the list If you want to add a new item and there is one already selected highlighted you must click the button lt add gt and then change the value with the new one Do not try to enter the data before clicking the button lt add gt because that will modify the current value of the selected item The editing process is similar as it was explained in the previous section except that the data for validation and on line help is taken from the file STATIONDEF INP FEA CONFIGURATION OF STATIONO HYP x GENERAL PARAMETERS STATION LIST O02 Step length damping control a 07 Coda maqnitude c oefficient 08 Coda magnitude coefficient 2 09 Coda magnitude coefficient 0 11 Max iterat in RMS minimiza 9 Name MLA 8488 1 0350 12 Latitude 37 6310 ISA 35 6630 1 13 Increment km for aux RMS 5 RPV 33 7438 1 Longitude 118 8340 30 Initial damping factor 0 005 5 VTV 34 5670 l El gem CT 2 egen HTB DNR 4 VALUE Tan V Used Add Remove P Delay P VELOCITY MODEL Reporting Agency TES veloc Depth Interf 6 200 0 00 a 6 600
429. t 1 hz is correct and 78 must be set to T Line 2 1 80 COMMENT LINE DESCRIBING THE SYSTEM RESPONSE A80 OPTION 1 If character 78 is blank option 1 Line 3 1 80 10G8 3 1 SEISMOMETER PERIOD 2 FRACTION OF CRITICAL DAMPING 3 SEISMOMETER GENERATOR CONSTANT V m s or ACCELEROMETER SENSITIVITY V G 4 AMPLIFIER GAIN 5 RECORDING MEDIA GAIN I E 2048 COUNTS VOLT 6 GAIN AT 1 0 HZ UNITS COUNTS METER 7 CUTOFF FREQUENCY FOR FILTERI1 HZ 8 OF POLES FOR FILTER1 NEGATIVE FOR HIGHPASS 9 CUTOFF FREQUENCY FOR FILTER2 HZ 10 OF POLES FOR FILTER2 NEGATIVE FOR HIGHPASS Line 4 1 80 10G8 3 FREQUENCIES AND S OF POLES FOR FIVE MORE FILTERS Lines 5 13 RESPONSE CURVE in 3 blocks of 3 lines 1 _ 80 1068 3 FREQ Ja 80 10G8 3 AMPL REL 1 0 HZ 1 _ 80 1068 3 PHASE The are only for info in option 1 OPTION 2 f character 78 is T use tablated values format as in option 1 OPTION 3 f character 78 is P option 2 Line 3 de 2295 1X 215 G11 4 1 NUMBER OF POLES 2 NUMBER OF ZEROS 244 3 NORMALIZATION CONSTANT COUNTS M 23 80 5611 4 2 Poles in pairs of real and imaginary parts Lines 4 13 1 80 G11 4 Remaining poles and zeros 7 values are written and then 3 spaces are left blank Example of SEISAN FAP response file KBS B Z100 1 1 1 0 0 0 000 360 700 260E 04 0 419E 06 684E 10 0 0 000 O 0 000 D 0 00 O 0 00 D 0 00 O 0 00 O 0 00 500E 02 700E 02 980E 02 140E 01 190E 01 270
430. t from the file included At the end of the run two files are output associ_rest out associ_merg out with events which were not merged and merged respectively These can then be put into another data base with split if desired This function can also be used to separate the input file in two files 6 19 Making synthetic seismograms BOUCH and BOUSEI HERRMANN and HERRSEI and WKB are all programs which is used for generating synthetic seismograms The full wave modeling programs are written by Bouchon and Herrmann and for WKBJ Chapman and Valerie Maupin Valerie Maupin has integrated WKBJ for SEISAN and written the routines that makes it possible to use specific phases She has also made many improvements in the original installation of BOUCH and HERRMANN and written a large part of this chapter Bouchon The Bouchon program is somewhat modified for SEISAN The theory which is quite straight forward is given in a series of papers e g Bouchon 1981 It is based on a discrete wave number representation of the wave fields Basically the source is repeated periodically in space so that integration over the k domain is replaced by a series This implies that the periodicity of the source L in km should be large enough so that the information from fictitious sources does not arrive during the time interval of interest Roughly r lt L 2 sqrt L r 2 Z 2 gt Vp t where r is the epicentral distance and Vp is the highest P wave velocity
431. t not for the unit NEXT CHANNEL OR RETURN TO CONTINUE Additional channels can be entered to continue press lt RETURN gt ENTER START TIME YEAR DAY OF YEAR HOUR MINUTE SECOND EXAMPLES 2000 200 12 20003200s123715 2000 t200 812233715 Type start time as year day of year hour minute second Minute and second can be omitted NEXT START TIME OR RETURN TO CONTINUE Additional start times can be entered to continue press lt RETURN gt ENTER END TIME USING ONE OF 3 OPTIONS ABSOLUTE TIME AS YYYY DDD HH MM SS LIKE START TIME SECONDS FOR TIME INTERVAL e g 300 SECONDS FOR MULTIPLE INTERVALS CONTINUOUS EXTRACT e g 300 Specify the end time either in the same style as for the start time only if one start time or in some cases more useful the desired time window in seconds by entering seconds If sequential time windows are to be extracted use seconds The user is then asked how many time windows should be extracted It is thus possible e g to extract 10 consecutive windows of 600 seconds Only if sequential extract windows specified 145 ENTER NUMBER OF CONTINUOUS WINDOWS After the program has finished the data in SEISAN format can be found in either the current directory default or in the OUTPATH directory if the variable is specified in arcsei def The temporarily created files are deleted automatically How it works ARCSEI reads the user input that specifies what shou
432. t the end a summary is given which is the same as logged in the output file codaq out 168 The abbreviations are H Focal depth M Magnitude TP P travel time TC Start time of coda window relative to origin time F Frequency Q Corresponding coda q if 0 value is gt 10000 or negative S N Signal to noise ratio AV Q Average q SD Standard deviation for average NT Total number of q values at all frequencies N Number of q values at given frequency q Average of q values 1 q q is calculated as 1 q averages probably the best to use f 1 q Q values calculated using the relation derived from the 1 q averages q q0 f v obtained with the average 1 q values COU Constant q0 obtained using the fixed user selected v v Constant v determined corr Correlation coefficient in determining q vs f If a station is not present or no P is read a message will be given The program will search for the first P arrival time in the S file If several are present for the same station it will use the first Output A file called codaq out is generated It contains a copy of the parameter file one line for each event station combination accepted by the program correlation and s n ratio and the average q values The q values are averaged directly indicated by q and 1 q are averaged indicated by 1 q At the end are the fits to the q qO f v relation Output file codaq1 out contains the same output as codaq out except there i
433. t to zoom in Figure 5 Main window of JSEISAN The user interaction with JSEISAN can be classified as 1 Searching for earthquakes and 2 working with a particular earthquake It is assume that a standard SEISAN data base is available with S files and CAT files in the CAT directories see SEISAN manual The interface has a main window where the user can search earthquakes lt Search gt button set up by a range of values Figure 6 As a result of the searching process an earthquake list is shown on the screen and a set of functions is offered In addition the epicenters of the earthquake list are plotted on the map Because there is a direct link between the map and the list the selected earthquake is highlight on both the map and the list when the user is navigating either through the list or through the map see Interactive mapping tool 43 Configuring JSEISAN JSEISAN has several configuration variables to be set up by the user In order to configure the variables you have to click the button lt Config gt Figure 5 The configuration parameters are stored in the file SEISAN DEF The editing process of this file is performed through the JAVA program SEISCONF class see SEISCONF A complete description of the configuration parameters is given in at the end of this section Selecting the database to work with The desired SEISAN database is selected from the combo box labeled as DATA BASE located in the left u
434. t will also be a compact file Note If SELECT is used on the CAT database normal operation you need to UPDATE your S file database in order to transfer changes from the S files to the CAT database Select can work with input in 3 different ways 1 The user is asked for selections 2 The selection parameters are in a file 3 Parameters are given on the prompt line The program is started by typing SELECT parameters from screen SELECT input file parameters from input file or SELECT options A typical user interactive run is shown below Comments following POSSIBLE INPUT IS STANDARD CAT DATABASE RETURN ALTERNATIVE DATABASE GIVE 1 5 LETTER CODE FILENAME FOR ONE FILE MUST BE 6 OR MORE CHARACTERS Type of base CAT Return or Sfiles s Updating database TEST_ standard base The database TEST_ has 10 files The first file starts 199309 The last file starts 199909 Start time at least year yyyymmddhhmmss 199309 time range End time return for end of month 1996 0 7 PARAMETERS 1 Fault Plane Solution 2 Earthquake Felt 3 Magnitude Type s 4 Distance ID s 5 Event ID s 6 Magnitude Limits 7 Latitude Limits 8 Longitude Limits 9 Depth Limits 10 RMS Limits 11 Number of Stations Limits 12 Hypocenter Errors Latitude Limits 13 Hypocenter Errors Longitude Li
435. tarting a search for new solutions Option 4 gives the following information and questions Number of polarity values Number of polarities found for event with P phases Any P phase can be used like Pn and Pg When few polarities are available it is an advantage to use both Pg and Pn since these phases have different angles of incidence Polarities associated with other phases are not used There is no check if a P phase has been duplicated Number of amplitude ratios Total number of amplitude ratios derived from amplitude readings in S file The program now asks Maximum number of polarity errors Depending on number of data values 0 5 is a good answer To let the program find the minimum number of polarity errors type 1 which is particular useful if there is a significant minimum number of polarity errors Maximum number of amplitude ratio errors Equivalent for ratios to Max number of polarity errors however error is defined by amplitude ratio error Maximum amplitude ratio error Give maximum allowed difference between observed and computed amplitude ratio default is 0 2 162 Degree increment in search Initially use e g 20 deg to make a fast search later use e g 5 deg to make a final solution The program will now start the searching and write out on the screen and in a file the solutions which fit the requirement of number of misfits The maximum number of solutions is limited to 100 as a default or to the
436. te from other information in the file see below for an example The steps to model a particular event are as follows Problem Bouchon Use fewer layers ideally just a halfspace under the deepest ray The programs seems to become unstable if too many layer are used there Step 1 Edit the event in EEV and mark the stations wanted for modeling with a minuscule s in column 1 ONLY mark the station once Exit from editor and within EEV give the command synt This will generate all the necessary default input parameters for modeling which are stored as comment lines starting with SYNT in the S file see below At the same time the s s used as markers are removed Any old modeling information present will remain and override the defaults However in case the F flag is set for the DEPTH parameter distances and azimuths will be reset according to the current location Step 2 Edit event again and check if default parameters are ok see explanation below Step 3 Run one of the programs BOUCH HERRMANN or WKBJ These are known commands in EEV BOUCH The program will now run for a certain amount of time depending on number of points required At the standard output the input parameters used will be printed out and for each frequency the number of terms in wave number integration is printed out If the limit of the number of terms is reached something is wrong try other parameters The speed of this output NPOINT 2 1 lines gives a good ind
437. ted magnitude 191 Maximum likelihood b value 153 Maximum no of iterations 66 Maximum number of traces 13 Maximum observed magnitude 191 Mb 60 90 119 Mc 60 201 Merge catalogs 56 Merge events near in time 171 Merge waveform files 91 135 MERGE_WAVEFORM 92 Merging files from different networks 135 MI 59 67 201 MODEL DEF 63 Modelling parameters Q 66 Modes of operation 26 Moho 66 67 Moment 97 183 197 Moment tensor inversion 41 Monthly epicenter files 123 Monthly number of events 129 Mount Unix disk on PC 16 Mouse test 230 Moving files between Sun and PC 9 Ms 60 119 MULPLT 16 30 37 73 Mulplt format 75 Mulplt option cont 86 MULPLT DEF 17 85 104 MULPLT OUT 99 Multiple event S file 122 Multiplexed files 30 Multitrace mode 75 Mw 98 N Nakamura 183 Name of the local Index file 57 Nanometer 59 89 Nanometrics 148 NANSEI 12 148 NDC 140 Nearest station 62 NEIC 148 NEISEI 148 Network code put in waveform file 142 New events into SEISAN 86 NEWEVE 30 Noise spectrum 96 99 183 184 Noise study 99 185 Nordic format 5 8 234 Nordic to HYPO71 140 NORGSE 140 Norhin 72 NORHIN 140 NORHYP 127 140 NORIMS 140 Normalization constant 221 O Omega square 197 Operator ID 123 Order of magnitudes 127 ORFEUS 143 OS9SEI 148 Other databases 5 Output file from CRIATT 198 Output file from EQRISK 200 Output files from CRISIS99 196 Output corrected trace 92 P P phase 59 Parameter files 16 17 PCEQ format 148 PCK file
438. tended for fast routine work However by starting MULPLT in multitrace mode option 2 and then go to single trace mode command T Toggl hard copy files are made Multitrace mode In this mode hard copies can be made If option 2 is used both screen plot and hard copy files are made If replot is made only the last plot is available in the hard copy file If option 3 is used which is only hardcopy there will be additional questions about window length start time scaling and filters If the scaling is set so that the plot occupies more than one page several pages will be printed If in this mode filenr lis is given as file name the program assumes that all the files should be plotted and the only questions will be about the scaling and filters All channels in each file will be plotted This option is useful for plotting a large number of events with a single command Multiple screens in multitrace mode If many channels are available like more than 30 it might be difficult to distinguish all and the channels can be displayed in multiple screens The number of channels per screen is set in MULPLT DEF The number of windows or screens for a particular data set is given in top left hand corner as e g Win 2 of 7 meaning current window is number 2 of 7 windows To move to the next window use TAB or NextW in menu In each window normal operation can be done Channels selected will be kept Using a large data set the user can then vi
439. tep length or range can be selected The final output is Output file in bvalue out Last plot in file bvalue eps 153 The output file bvalue out contains the same information in the same format as shown in the example above The file can be used with other plotting programs to make nicer looking b value plots An example is shown in Figure 30 154 Figure 30 An example of a b value plot The bars are number of events and crosses the accumulated number of events Least squares a value 4 86 b value 1 0 1000 100 10 155 6 15 Automatic phase picking AUTO AUTOPIC AUTOSIG AUTO and AUTOPIC This program will make picks automatically of events registered into the database The program will go through a series of events in the usual way using start time and end time If an event file S file has any readings the program will not reread in order to not destroy old picks The automatic readings in the file are marked with an A after the weight column to indicate automatic pick Each pick is evaluated by using the signal to noise ratio and an indication of the quality is given with the weight The program will run on all waveform files given in an S file Each time the program runs there is a file called autopic out containing information about the run If there are any 3 component stations an azimuth will also be calculated and the S phase will be more reliable The pick program can also be used from EEV by typi
440. ter file where the file name for the attenuation table is also given The input file can be prepared based on the format descriptions given below or modifying the example input file An example input file is included in the DAT directory with the file name crisis99 inp There are some limitations in the input parameters Following is a summary of the maximum values set in the program Attenuation Models 5 Intensity levels 20 Structural periods 15 Number of regions 200 Magnitudes in attenuation model 10 Distances in attenuation model 21 Number of sub sources per region 4000 the term intensity here should not be mixed with macroseismic intensity In this context intensity is meant as any chosen ground motion measure such as PGA PGV or any other spectral ordinate In the following the input file is described in more detail by Mario Ordaz GENERAL DATA FILE Format is free unless indicated otherwise 1 General title of the run 1 line TITGEN A80 2 Global parameters of the run 1 line NREG NMOD NT NA NREG Total number of regions sources in which the seismogenic area is divided NMOD Number of different attenuation models NT Number of spectral ordinates or in general measures of intensity for which seismic hazard is to be computed NA Number of levels of intensity for which seismic hazard will be computed 3 Parameters for each spectral ordinate NT lines Free format TOL AO I AU I T
441. tern United States KH Jacob and C J Turkstra Eds Annals of the New York Academy of Sciences 558 81 94 Bouchon M 1981 A simple method for calculating Green s functions for elastic layered media Bull Seism Soc Am 71 959 972 Brune J N 1970 Tectonic stress and spectra of seismic shear waves Journal of Geophysical Research 75 4997 5009 Capon J High resolution frequency wavenumber spectrum analysis Proc IEEE 57 1408 1418 1960 Chiu J B L Isacs and R K Cardwell 1986 Studies of crustal converted waves using short period seismograms recorded in the Vanatu Island arc Bull Seism Soc Am 76 177 190 Chapman C H 1978 Anew method for computing synthetic seismograms Geophys J R astr Soc 54 481 518 Chapman C H and Orcutt J A 1985 The computation of body wave synthetic seismograms in laterally homogeneous media Reviews of Geophysics 23 105 163 Chapman C H Chu Jen Yi and Lyness D G 1988 The WKBJ seismogram algorithm in D J Doornbos ed Seismological algorithms Academic Press London pp47 74 Dey Sarkar S K and Chapman C H 1978 A simple method for computation of body wave seismograms Bull Seismo Soc Am 68 1577 1593 Draper N R and Smith H 1966 Applied regression analysis John Wiley and Sons New York Ebel J E and K P Bonjer 1990 Moment tensor inveriosn of small earthquakes in southwestern germany for fault plane solution Geophys J Int 101 133 1
442. th and database during an EEV session by giving a new year yyyy and month mm and optionally a new database BAS If no database is given the same database is assumed L Locate event with HYPOCENTER same as HYP The location does not update the S file Lxx Locate current event with event number xx This is used to check if two events belong together LL Locate current and following event together MAC Enter macroseismic information you will be prompted for all information For details of the type of information see definition of Nordic format Appendix 1 See also command PMAC MACROMAP Felt information is read from a file with macroseismic information and plotted with GMT The file name of the file with macroseimic observations is given in the S file MAP Start EPIMAP program to produce a map of current location If a location is given in the S file this location is plotted otherwise the event is located if possible and the resulting location used for plotting The parameters for generating the map are set in the SEISAN DEF file see 3 8 MODELS Lists MODEL DEF file in DAT that assigns names to single characters in STATIONx HYP file NEW Creates a new event in the database The user is asked to give date and time and the event is created in the current monthly database O Give a command to the operating system This is a very useful command since it is possible to do almost anything without leaving EEV including starting a new
443. than 1 200 000 see file INC seidim inc for exact number per channel It is assumed that all channels have the same sample rate AUTOREG automatic registering of events When a large number of waveform files are available and it is known that they are real events it might be an advantage to automatically register them into a database Remember the database can be made with MAKEREA It is possible to register events both to the standard BER any other database or the local directory To run the program make a filenr lis of the waveform files and run AUTOREG It is possible to put blank lines into the filenr lis to separate into events in case there is more than one waveform file from the same event All waveform files before a blank line are put together into one S file You get the questions Event type for all events Local L default 130 Regional R Distant D 1 5 letter base name return for standard base for local base BER Operator max 4 chars jh 92011022 STE Now comes a listing of waveform file names and S file names The program will check if the event is already registered and the same options are available as in program SPLIT section 6 6 Since AUTOREG automatically creates S files for all events in filenr lis they will all be given an event type WAVETOOL extract and convert waveform data The program was called extract in SEISAN 7 2 and earlier The program extracts all or selected time
444. the header Problem 4 1 Short user guide The SEISAN manual has been divided into sections describing the individual programs However many tasks require the use of many programs and it is not always easy to find what can be done and which programs to use The following section intends to give an overview of some general problems that SEISAN can work with and a list of programs to use The following tasks have been identified Routine processing Phase picking hypocenter location and magnitudes Determination of source parameters Fault plane solution stress drop etc Crustal structure Velocities layer thickness and attenuation Seismic catalogs ISC data database management completeness statistics etc Seismic hazard Attenuation catalogs and soil response Routine processing The main work of a seismic observatory is to quickly process and organize incoming data from different sources SEISAN has a simple time ordered database see later section and a set of programs for these tasks The most important programs are EEV The EEV program is the interactive program for working with single events in the database The program is used to navigate in the database to find a given event as well as for housekeeping 27 splitting merging and deleting events Once an event has been selected a large number of options are available like phase picking earthquake location fault plane solution macroseismic information etc All
445. the DAT directory parameter files for operating the SEISAN system and INF contains documentation and manuals All files are listed and explained in the file seisan all in the INF directory The program CHECK can check if a distribution is complete Run CHECK and use option basic The content of the distribution is compared to the seisan all file in the INF directory The seisan all file also list programs no longer compiled but with source code included in case there should be a future need for these programs 231 8 Acknowledgments A large number of people have contributed to the SEISAN system From the British Geological Survey Jim Bolton has spent several months cleaning up the software putting in error checking and put in the new version of EPIMAP Jane Exton has also been involved in several of the SEISAN database problems A main contributor has been Barry Lienert who has spent several months at our institute to modify and adopt the HYP program he has also written the complete HYP manual Bent Ruud has contributed with the core of the AUTOPIC software and has helped out in practical aspects of installing it Kuvvet Atakan has written the seismic hazard part Ronald Arvidson has tested large parts of the system and done work on several programs and contributed with the modified version of FOCMEC The help of Arne Sjursen has been essential for implementing X Vunganai Midzi did the complete testing of version 6 0 Mario
446. the S file header lines according to agency GIINOR Converts from Geophysical Institute of Israel parameter format to Nordic HYPNOR Converts from Hypo71 readings files to Nordic format files HINNOR Similar to HYPNOR for Hypoinverse files HSUMNOR converts from Hypo71 summary file format to SEISAN format ISCNOR Converts from ISC 96 column format to Nordic format ISCSTA Converts ISC station list to SEISAN station list selecting specific stations ISFNOR Converts between ISF1 0 and Nordic KINNOR Converts from Kinemetrics to NORDIC NORGSE Converts between Nordic format and GSE parametric format NORHIN Converts from Nordic format to Hypoinverse format NORIMS Converts from Nordic to and from IMS1 0 NORHYP Converts from Nordic to HYPO71 format PDENOR Converts a PDE bulletin file to NORDIC format 137 RSANOR Converts Andalucian Seismic Network data to NORDIC format SEIGMT Converts from NORDIC file to input for GMT SELMAP Selects out a part of a MAP file USGSNOR USGS NEIC CDROM catalog conversion to NORDIC format CAT_AGA reordering of CAT file header lines When plotting hypocenters or doing seismic hazard work it is the first header line in an S file or CAT file that is used since it is assumed that it is the prime estimate When making compact files it is also the first header line which is used However there can be a need for resorting the many type 1 header lines for one or several events so that they are ordered ac
447. the above example there was already an event in the database with the same file name and therefore the same id It is up to the user to decide if this is the same event in which case it should be ignored or if it is a new event which happens to have the same id start time or origin time to the same second and same event type In case of a new event a new id with one second different will be tried Sometimes it can be desirable to overwrite the whole database event by event If e g a station code is wrong in all events this can be corrected by making a collect to extract all events edit the collect out file using a global substitute and finally use split to put the events back in In that case the option of overwriting all should be chosen Compact files can also be split up Since this is unusual to do the user will be prompted 2 times to confirm the split up Since there is no ID line in a compact file the database name will be generated from the header time This option to be able to split up compact files has been made to facilitate work with seismic catalogs where it is often desirable to be able to access individual events even when no readings are available 6 7 Updating final locations in database UPDATE and UPD UPDATE Both the monthly epicenter files in SEISMO REA BER_ CAT and the updated S files are generated with program UPDATE which is a special version of HYP Type UPDATE to start the program and there will be questions about tim
448. the command UPDATE is used from EEV only one S file is updated name stays the same and a general update should be made UPDATE recalculate moments if distances or depths change however it does not change the Vp or Vs velocities used if a change is made in MULPLT DEF 124 Problem If UPDATE crash there will not be a correspondence between S files and the CAT data base Redo UPDATE UPD The command UPD is very similar to the UPDATE command however there is no modification of the S file except the ID line The program is used to simply move single S files into the monthly CAT files without relocating It is mainly used to manipulate database events already processed E g if ISC data a available and it is desirable to have it in individual files to be able to use EEV the same data can then be copied into the CAT part of the database using UPD without modifying the original solutions The data must be in the CAT part of the database in order for SELECT to work fast KNOWN BUG On Sun OS it seems that UPD can only operate on up to a 4 year time period 6 8 Using filenr lis DIRF and DELF DIRF The DIRF command is a useful program for making a file with a numbered list of files from a DIR Is on SUN command The command makes a file with file name filenr lis e g when working with many waveform files with long names a DIRF is first made and subsequent programs then get file names from filenr lis either by using the whole list o
449. the hazard computations for each site for the specified exceedance probabilities This output file can easily be converted to individual intensity e g PGA contour files one for each level of exceedance probability using the program EQRSEI The resulting contour maps from these output files may then be plotted by EPIMAP The detailed format of this output file is described in the original manual McGuire 1976 and is not repeated here A test set of input and output files are given in DAT EQRSEI The program EQRSEI converts the output file eqrisk out from the EQRISK program into individual intensity contour files for the previously defined return periods There may be up to eight such files eqrsei1 out eqrsei2 out eqrsei8 out These files can then be used as input to the EPIMAP program to plot the contours of PGA values on the epicenter maps Each file contains also some header information where the individual contours and the contour intervals are given In addition the color codes are also given The individual contours and the contour intervals can be modified by editing the header lines of these files CLUSTER This is a program that searches for the dependant events in a given catalogue compact file with respect to time and distance It is written by Juan Pablo Ligorria and Conrad Lindholm The input is a standard Nordic file with header lines only compact file The user has to give the number of days to be searched be
450. the letters to continue P Profile One or several depth section windows can now be selected with the cursor First move the cursor to where the section shall start from where distances are calculated press any character to select point move cursor to end of profile press any character to select A line between the two points is now plotted Move the cursor to a point on the side of the line and press any character A rectangle defined by the three points is now drawn which defines the area used for the section If more than one section is wanted up to 9 press the number of sections instead The selected number of profile boxes will now be plotted all the same size Pressing any character will draw the depth sections auto scaled while PRESSING THE CHARACTER F THE X AND Y SCALES ARE EQUAL and determined by the horizontal extension When the first section appears you can either press q to quit or any other character to plot next profile or if the last profile replot epicenter map and select new sections IF YOU WANT ALL SECTIONS TO REMAIN IN PLOT FILE QUIT AFTER PLOTTING THE LAST PROFILE The plot file always stores what has been plotted so far and is overwritten when a replot is made It is also possible to plot a previously defined profile by entering O The parameters are then taken from file profile out This file stores the last parameters selected by EPIMAP but can also be edited by the user A Area Select by clicking with the cu
451. the main header line event type to explosion E The user is asked for location time charge and comments The explosion agency is used to classify types of sites and can be used by SELECT for searching F Make a fault plane solution The program uses polarities See section 6 16 for more details FC This command accumulates data in a file focmec inp to be used for a composite fault plane solution For each event to be used type command FC See 6 16 for more details GMTMAP Start gmtmap exp program not included in SEISAN to plot GMT map GMTMAP automatically creates a map using GMT UNIX only GRID Hypocenter is started up and will ask for the grid Latitude and longitude range and grid spacing A maximum of 71 points can be used in each direction The point with the lowest RMS is found and the corresponding location and residual is printed on the screen It is now optionally possible to plot the contours on the screen The map coordinates used are as defined in SEISAN DEF Note that the grid search is using exactly the same parameters as Hypocenter This includes all weights and phase types The depth is fixed to the depth given in the S file header line For more details and an example see application note epi pdf in INF H Locate with Hypoinverse no database update is made no Nordic output format file HERRMAN Herrmann s modeling programs only on Sun might work on Linux not tested HERSEI Make a SEISAN waveform file
452. tine output from the starting location algorithm Then follows the output from the iterations which should be self explanatory The location is then given on one line containing origin time latitude longitude deg min depth number of phases rms damping and errors error estimates 68 resolution matrix Last are the station lines with the following abbreviations stn Station dist Distance in km azm Azimuth at the source ain Angle of incidence at the sourc phs Phase w Input weight hrmn Hour minute t sec Arrival time sec t obs Observed travel time t cal Calculated travel tim res Residual wt Weight used normalized to 1 0 m The number of degrees of freedom in the spatial solution maximum 3 no The number of non zero weight valid phases including azimuths used in the solution A station weight wt 1 means that the phase travel time could not be calculated Any change in the input phase ID is signified by an asterisk before the phase ID If amplitudes are available MI Mb Mw or Ms will be calculated and all stations calculating MI Mb Mw or MS will additionally be displayed at the end of the interactive printout Change of day If the origin time of the located event occur on the day before the time in the header line the time in the header line is changed to the previous day and all phase arrivals are changed accordingly This means that some hour values will be more tha
453. tines for reading and writing although not really used SACLIB Specify path and filename to SAC libraries only needed when you compile programs Unix and you have the libraries installed on your system Printer for Postscript plots The hard copy files from programs are sent to the printer from within the programs using the standard or command In the SEISAN file define lpr using the standard environmental variable PRINTER Remember that the printer must accept Postscript PostScript files can also be viewed and printed on most printers outside SEISAN using GhostView however in that cases files cannot be printed from within a program Scaling for Postscript plots By default plots will be in A4 size This can be changed by setting the environmental variables SEISAN_PSSCALE_X and SEISAN_PSSCALE_Y The default for A4 size is 1 0 for both variables For Letter size the Y scaling can be set to 0 9 Seisan Extension User specific code can be implemented by making use of the environmental variable 13 SEISAN_EXTENSION The idea is that programs read this variable if set to the user specific string the user s source code will be used instead of the default An example could be the computation of error ellipses Currently used codes are BGS 4 Testdata The testdata set can be extracted from the file testdata_X Y tar Z Use programs uncompress and tar to extract the data in the SEISAN top directory keep subdirectory structure Di
454. ting the file the maximum distance between station and hypocenter parameter dmax is read from velest cmn and the input data are scanned to get a list of stations which are within the limit to any epicenter Editing the file stations can be added or removed If all stations should be used for inversion the parameter dmax in the file velest cmn has to be increased Example of selstat lis STATION SELECT FILE FOR PROGRAM VELEST STATIONS WILL BE USED IN THE VELEST INVERSION PROGRAM COMMENT LINES START WITH KONO BER RAO NOTE The order of the stations is as given by the input data file VELEST uses the last station as reference station so you may want to change the order 5 Create model file The input model file model mp is created using the model as given in the STATIONO HYP file The STATIONO HYP file if available will be read from the local directory otherwise from the DAT directory This might be a reasonable starting model but of course the model file has to be changed A RUN VELEST Once the parameter files are created the inversion program can be started The inversion study requires interactive changing of parameters which is supported by VELMENU All input parameter files can be changed from VELMENU NOTE please accept the warning To calculate a Minimum 1 D model a single or even a few VE
455. tion 1100 read as 1100 11 read as 11 read as 0 Fn k Real number format E o f7 3 is a real number occupying 7 places like 111 111 and the decimal point is 3 places from the right Any real number can occupy the 7 places like 1234567 Position et deel Tray All of these will be read as 1 1 If there is no decimal place given it is automatically put k places from the right Like the number 1234 read with f4 2 will be read as 12 34 nX Spaces Like 5x means 5 spaces An Character format Like A5 means reading 5 characters Combining format specifications example 1234567890123456789 position 2f5 1 1x a4 2x i2 11 1 12 1 text 12 Do not use tabulator instead of blanks 3 11 Using SEISCONF to modify parameter files By Bladimir Moreno Introduction The SEISCONF program is a JAVA application for editing some of the configuration files defined in the SEISAN earthquake analysis software The editing is based on a simple Graphical User Interfaces composed of dialog boxes where the input data is validated and an on line help about the parameter being configured is given The user friendly interface allows to minimize the possible error in the configuration file format as well as to avoid unrealistic values for a particular parameter SEISCONF was developed with Visual Cafe 4 standard edition The software operates on Unix and Windows When all settings are done as described under Installation you can start the program from the prompt li
456. tion of Digital Seismographic Networks 149 Felt information 225 File conversion and modification programs137 File number 74 75 File types 8 FILENR LIS 9 56 125 Filter and spectral analysis 80 Filter in WAVETOOL 132 Filter high pass 76 Filter instability 76 Filter low pass 76 Filters in MULPLT 80 Fixed scaling 92 Fixing depth 62 66 67 Fixing location 62 66 Fixing origin time 62 66 FK analysis 90 214 Focmec eps 162 Focmec inp 161 Focmec Jet 162 Focmec out 162 Format 7 Format mulplt 75 Format Nordic 234 Format volcanic information 212 Format waveform 239 Fourier acceleration spectra 197 Free surface effect 197 G Gain factor 240 Gap range select for 120 GBV recorder 147 GCF format 147 Generic Mapping Tools 141 Geometrical spreading 95 197 202 GeoSig GeoSys Geotech Instruments GET_WAV Get_wav out GhostView GIINOR GIISEI Global event location Global phases GMT GMTMAP GMTXY Go to event by number or date Graphics Graphics problem on PC Graphics problem on UNIX Ground displacement Ground motion seismogram GSE GSE format GSE response file format GSERESP GSN GSRSEI G ralp GURSEI H H_model par H_model_out Hard copy files Hardcopies Hardcopy in single trace mode Hardwired constants Header times Help in SEISAN Herkij_distance Herrmann Herrmann s package HERSEI High accuracy High frequency decay factor High pass filter HINNOR Hints on modelling Homepa
457. tly sent to a Postscript printer It seems that programs like Microsoft Word dont like the SEISAN Postscript and you will need to convert your files to another Postscript this can be done for example with the program ghostscript using pswrite as output device Note On Solaris 7 both the lpr and the Ip command for sending files to the printer don t create a copy of the file before sending it bug in Solaris This means that a plot file can be overwritten before being sent to the printer Therefore when SEISAN on Unix is sending plots the system waits for 5 seconds after a file is sent to the plotter before continuing This is most important when plotting continuous data or a large number of files with MULPLT 56 4 9 General Work with SEISAN Once data is in the database and the routine analysis has been finished by running UPDATE final epicenters recorded in CAT and the S files it is possible to go on with general work with the data This means searching the database making a bulletin or plotting the epicenters It is also possible to use some of the more specialized tools of SEISAN which include working on subsets of data or creating other databases see 4 4 For general use the basic philosophy is that the user should not enter the REA directories All commands and programs should be used from the user s own directory or the WOR directory To access part of the main database the programs always ask for start and end date as follows
458. to put all the data into a complete database where each event is one file even when only hypocenters are available This is done by first splitting up the catalogs with SPLIT and then using EEV to merge the events Since there is no requirement for monthly directories to have data this methodology can also work for historical catalogs The data can then subsequently be put into the CAT database without relocation using the UPD command 4 7 1 Explosions in SEISAN Many catalogs are contaminated by explosions and in SEISAN explosions can be dealt with in several ways In the data base confirmed explosion are marked with E and probable explosions with P These indicators are mostly put in when the operator first registers the event However there is also a possibility to automatically identify events which are probable explosions This is done with program EXFILTER section 6 26 In the data base S files there is a special format for recording explosion information command EXP in EEV The explosion site there can be assigned a three letter code which can be used by SELECT to find explosions from specific sites In this format it is also possible to store the explosion charge and explosion location and origin time separately from the calculated location and origin time 4 8 Printing All SEISAN programs that produce graphical output also generate Postscript files with the file suffix eps note this was plt before version 8 1 These can be direc
459. to run it Before starting the program a DIRF must first be made of waveform input files 230 The output is identical to a SEISAN ASCII file as made by SEIASC Graphics in SEISAN SEISAN uses a set of graphics routines which are identical in call on all 3 platforms These routines then call low level routines which are platform dependent X on Unix and Windows calls on PC The programmer only has to use the high level routines The routines also generate a PostScript output if a given parameter is set The program is called sample_grapichs for The program illustrates how to initiate graphics make a few simple calls get up and use the mouse and make a hard copy file Most of the general graphics general routines are located in file seiplot for and common variables in seiplot inc The program can be useful for testing functionality of the mouse Program LSQ is a simple example of how to make xy graphics It also shows how to make the output files for gmtxy In order to find more info apart from manual in INF on gmtxy see file gmt for in LIB and gmt_xy_par in INF Program to make test signals TSIG It is often useful to be able to work with controlled waveform data so a program making test signals is included The program makes several traces all with same length and sample rate and trace 1 is the sum of all traces For each trace selected the parameters selected are Frequency amplitude remember this is integer numbers in file so use
460. udes must be selected S phases picked on vertical or radial components will be considered SV while S amplitudes picked on transverse components will be considered SH Phases picked on NS or EW component cannot be used If these new phases are not to be used for location they can be weighted out 2 Update event with command update to make distance and azimuths available 3 Use command INVRAD to do the inversion This command does several things hidden for the user Creates the model input file for INVRAD called invrad mod This file is created from the STATIONO HYP file either from the current directory or DAT Creates the data input file for INVRAD called invrad inp This file is made from the current database file S file by extracting all amplitudes associated with Pg and Sg amplitudes and converts to P SV or SH amplitudes in microns The depth of the event is taken from the S file header and the estimated error is fixed to 0 1 micron Runs the INVRAD program which produces the invrad out file Reads the invrad out file to get the fault plane solutions which overwrite the current fault plane solution in the S file If you do not want to get the current solution overwritten put a character in column 79 on the solution see also focmec program The fault plane solution can then be plotted with FOCMEC 42 4 5 1 EEV driver program JSEISAN Software and manual by Bladimir Moreno JSEISAN is a JAVA application for providing a us
461. ue clean up and discrimination between the earthquakes and man made explosions MAG Magnitude regression and conversion program Prepares also a plot showing the scatter data and the best fitted line Magnitude conversions are then performed after a user defined priority list EPIMAP Plots coastlines national boundaries and earthquake epicenters It can also contour the produced output map file from hazard programs such as EQRISK and overlay on the epicenter map It is also possible to select a subset of earthquakes from a chosen polygon on the epicenter map BVALUE Prepares magnitude frequency of occurrence diagrams and computes a and b values with maximum likelihood and least square approximation In addition the threshold magnitude and the maximum observed magnitude can be obtained CODAQ Computes the Q value from a given set of seismograms This can be used later in the CRIATT program to create the attenuation table CRIATT Computes attenuation tables for a given set of parameters using the random vibration theory CRISIS99 Computes seismic hazard in terms of the probability of exceedance vs earthquake intensity measures such as peak ground acceleration PGA or any other spectral ordinate It can also compute hazard for a given grid of map co ordinates corresponding to user defined different return periods SUN and PC The Windows program must be installed separately look for ZIP file in SUP EQRISK Program to compute seismic hazard in
462. uns on a 64 database the EEV options D and B are also available but not shown If the option of no interactive input is chosen the program will locate from beginning to end without any more user interaction This is a useful option for testing a subset of the database with different models etc without changing the database Note that the input file or database is never overwritten by HYP ALL TYPE ONE LINES WITH SAME AGENCY AS GIVEN IN STATIONX HYP FILE WILL BE DELETED SO THERE WILL NEVER BE MORE THAN ONE TYPE 1 LINE INOUTPUT WITH CURRENT AGENCY except possibly a second magnitude line with a different type magnitude as given on main header line Problems Sometimes HYP will not locate an event look in the print out file to see what happened In some cases the initial location was put beyond the limits set by the parameters If e g an event is defined as a local event and no readings are to be used further away than 2000 km distance weighting see following table or TEST 41 then no location will be attempted Try to change the event type to D and see if the event locates In a few other cases it might be an advantage to use a starting location Station and model files Station input is given in near standard HYPO71 format in the file STATIONO HYP in directory DAT If however the user wants to try a different model without changing the standard model in DAT this is possible by having a STATIONO HYP file in the working directory sinc
463. utine For JHD VELMENU is used in the same way as described above for inversion The only difference is that when generating the velest cmn you have to choose JHD The appropriate file for JHD is then generated Some parameters in the velest cmn file are different compared to the inversion These are dmax nsinv and invertratio see VELEST USER S GUIDE for details The output of final hypocenter locations as described above can be converted to Nordic format but note that the JHD will be based on first arriving phases only Example of JHD File name of earthquake data in Nordic Format select out 1 Create VELEST command file velest cmn Choice 1 Inversion or JHD I J Origin of cartesian coordinates 59 394 5 707 number of events 61 Potential problem We have seen cases where in JHD mode the depth parameter in the inversion is sensitive to invertratio which when set to 1 in JHD means that VELEST inverts for station correction in every iteration VELEST in this case worked better with an invertratio of larger than 1 See VELEST manual for details List of files generated by VELMENU VELEST data cnv earthquake data in CNV format VELEST input generated by VELMENU data nor fin_hyp cnv hyp out hypsum out input mod invers out nor1 date print out selstat lis sta_cor out station sta velout dif velout nor 211 earthquake data in Nordic format HYP input gen
464. uto P 2 synth P synth S P from file only S from file only LA On ao 160 5 S or P from file for 3 5 if no phase and AUTO PHASE is 1 use auto phase pick DIST FREQ SELECT 1 10 parameters used in the genetic algorithm searching for spectral parameters GA POPULATION SIZE 50 GA GENERATIONS 250 grid dimension in case of grid search GRID NLOOP D NGRID FREQUENCY 100 NGRID SPECTRAL AMP 100 low filter limit to use for auto spectrum SEPCTRUM F LOW 05 parameters controlling output CREATE WAVEOU Ta SPEC OVERWRITE D PHASE OVERWRITE 0 station parameters STAT COMP sta lta ratio mincod dtrle fill filh STATION MOL S 2 3 0 20 0 10 0 2 5 TS 23 600 LOLO STATION MOL B Z 3 0 20 0 10 0 2 5 L S SH 10 20 STATION HYA S Z 3 0 20 0 10 0 259 Led 550100 STATION LSA L Z 3 0 20 0 10 0 10 0 9999 0 00 1 10 1 STATION CHTO L Z 3 0 20 0 10 0 10 0 9999 0 00 1 10 1 STATION XAN L Z 3 0 20 0 10 0 10 0 9999 0 00 1 10 1 6 16 Fault plane solution FOCMEC The program can be used to determine double couple earthquake focal mechanisms using polarities and or amplitude ratios The program also provides an interactive graphical display The existing solution can be plotted without any station data or location being available however if existing polarities should be plotted
465. value 1 Hz Enter higher frequency lt ENTER gt for default value 5 Hz Enter max slowness lt ENTER gt for default value 0 4 s km Enter No of grid points lt ENTER gt for default value 51 Do you want to plot level numbers N Y lt ENTER gt Y It will take some time APPARENT VELOCITY 10 26 AZIMUTH 140 ORM POWER MAX 0 99 POWER MAX I dB 72 44 AX X SLOWNESS 0 06 MAX Y SLOWNESS 00 7 OW FREQUENCY 0 94 HIGH FREQUENCY 5 00 QUALITY best 4 worst 1 Plot file is fk eps Example of output file fk out DATE TIME AND WINDOW LENGTH 99 256 9 13 12 0 33 843 7 62 APPARENT VELOCITY 10 26 AZIMUTH 140 NORM POWER MAX 0 99 POWER MAX IN dB 72 44 MAX X SLOWNESS 0 06 MAX Y SLOWNESS 0 07 LOW FREQUENCY 0 94 HIGH FREQUENCY 5 00 QUALITY besat 4 worst 1 VALUES TO SAVE APPARE VELOCITY 10 26 AZIMUTH 140 Station Long Lat Elev Xcoord Ycoord Zcoord RAO S 3 L1 54150 6073933 300 0 0 300 RAL S 3 11 54233 60 73650 291 45 129 291 NRA2 S Z 11 54333 60 73433 311 99 111 311 RD4 S Z 11 56333 60 72717 379 1186 907 379 RDS S 3 11 54750 60 72217 348 326 1463 348 NRD6 S Z 11 52883 60 72334 352 688 1334 352 NRD7 S Z 11 51617 60 73017 337 1377 574 337 RD8 S Z 11 51667 60 73900 301 1349 407 301 XSLOW YSLOW POWER 0 40 0 40 0 05 0 38 0 40 0 05 0 37 0 40 0 05 0 35 0 40 0
466. veform files to check Minimum gap 0 000 Maximum gap S 360 000 Phases oe SSS PP Volcanic subclasses Stat comp dist range phase 1x a5 a2 2i7 1x a4 one pr line end blank line STAT CO Mindis Maxdis Phas All stat hdist gt TT BER SZ T 999 P Polygon points lat lon one pair pr line end with blank line Note The TT at STAT line indicates that all stations must be present True and hypocentral distance is used True Select with input from the prompt line This option is particular useful when using select with automated operations and has been made specifically to deal with extracting data out of the data bases using WEB based software This option do not have all of the above options The following are implemented base 5 letter data base seisweb if set WEB output parameters time time interval 2 variables web_out complete path to where data is placed only active if seisweb set 3 files are made web_out id id s like index out without web_out all like select out web_out head header lines area lat lon grid minlat maxlat minlon maxlon 121 depth depth range mindepth maxdepth mag magnitude range minmag maxmag nstat range of number of stations min max gap range of gap min max rms range of rms min max magtypes up to 5 mag types one string e g L disttype distance type e g D eventtype event type e g E Problems An event might be found and listed in index
467. vents in filenr lis 0 plot all on one page default scale will be different for each plot Read header from fil Page 1 Channel Plotfile sent 9101 10 0915 15S KMY_03 Read header from fil Page 1 hannel hannel hannel hannel hannel hannel hannel hannel hannel hannel hannel hannel ODAIDUOBWNE 10 ta 12 COCCOLE CIEE ELE 9101 10 1510 555 NSS_12 next event in list Read header from fil Page 1 Channel etc Plotfile sent 9101 10 2333 44S NNN_11 Read header from fil Page 1 Channel hannel hannel hannel hannel hannel hannel hannel hannel OAANAUHABWNE C C C C C G C 9101 10 1510 55S NSS_12 next event in list 94 Channel 10 Channel 11 Channel 12 Read header from file 9101 10 2333 44S NNN_11 Page 1 Channel T E ebe 6 2 11 Spectral analysis s Spec The spectral analysis option is selected in single trace mode The spectral analysis is based on the Brune 1970 model and various assumptions about the geometrical spreading and anelastic attenuation The theoretical displacement spectrum d f Brune 1970 is d f G r h D f Moment KK 1 f 2 f0 2 4 pi DE V 3 where G r h is geometrical spreading r is epicentral distance h is hypocentral depth D f the diminution function due to anelastic attenuation f is the frequency DE the density V the velocity at the sourc
468. veral different input magnitude types and agencies can be used and the relation agency used is given in a priority list in the mag par file see example below It is here shown that if a BER Mc is available this will be the first choice If no BER Mc then BER Mb will be the next choice etc The new magnitude will have type X and agency NEW Output The output file is mag_new out and has the same format as the input file On the header line the old magnitudes are removed and in the first magnitude position will be the converted magnitude NEW while in the second magnitude position the magnitude selected for conversion will be given The third magnitude position is blanked out Summary of output files mag_amp out Details each event for amplitude regression mag_coda out Magnitude vs coda see text mag_mag out Pairs of magnitudes used for regression mag_new out Events with converted magnitudes only mag_newa out All events both converted and non converted due to no correct input magnitude available 204 mag_spec out Summary of normal header line all associated magnitudes and spectral parameters mag_ml_inv out From MI inversion In DAT there is an example mag par file Figure 36 Example of using the MAG program Relation between NORSAR and Bergen local magnitudes Magnitude relation y 0 867 x 0 047 4 0 3 5 3 0 O gt zr 2 5 2 0 1 5 2 0 2 5 3 0 3 5 4 0 4 5 LBER 205 An example
469. very large executables but it may be worth trying on SUSE If graphics programs do no link check that you have X11 libraries in LD_LIBRARY_PATH You can check what is there by command echo LD_LIBRARY_PATH 3 8 Program Version The version number of this SEISAN distribution is 8 0 New from version 7 0 is that all individual programs have a version number and a date of the last changes This will help the users and developers to find out which version is in use and from which date This is particular useful when bugs are reported In case major bugs have been fixed the new versions same version number different date of the individual program will be available on the anonymous ftp site and a message will be sent to the seisan mailing list In all programs you can obtain the version number by starting a program with version as argument For example collect version will show you the version and date of your COLLECT program 3 9 Setting general SEISAN defaults SEISAN DEF There are several parameters which are common for several programs which are set in the file SEISAN DEF This file can be in your local directory or the DAT directory The system will first look in the local directory but normally the file is in the DAT directory The file does not have to be there since there are defaults for all parameters but the parameters might need to be set 19 The format of the file is as shown below This file is for defaults for SE
470. vidual file If the historical catalog starts in 1820 the file name would be 182001 CAT The files in CAT do not need to be continuous in time but they must not have overlaps in time and each file must have data in chronological order The format of the CAT files is the same as for the S files Additionally CAT files can also be compact files meaning just the header lines of the S files see also section 2 3 2 2 2 Waveform data and formats SEISAN works with various waveform formats including SEISAN GSE SEED MINISEED and SAC binary and SAC ASCII The SEISAN format is described in Appendix 2 while for a format description of GSE and SAC the user is referred to GSETT 3 1997 and Goldstein 1999 respectively The SEED format is described in IRIS Consortium 1993 The GSE reading routines are based on the codeco routines written by Urs Kradolfer Klaus Stammler and Karl Koch The different formats can be used in parallel by several programs With MULPLT for example it is possible to plot data in the four formats at the same time Other formats can be added by adding reading routines and adding the respective calls to LIB wave for Note that SAC binary files can only be used on Solaris and Linux while SAC ASCII can be used on all platforms To use other formats a conversion program must be used first see section 6 12 In general it is recommended to keep the waveform data in one format only mainly for simplicity and maintenance reasons There
471. waves only Default 50 and 100 km This is only used if distance is larger than HERKIJ_ DISTANCE THIS PARAMETER IS NOT SET IN MULPLT DEF BUT IN SEISAN DEF MENTIONED HERE SINCE IT IS IMPORTANT FOR SPECTRA HERKIJ_DISTANCE Epicentral distance at which geometrical spreading changes from body wave spreading to surface wave spreading S waves only Default 100 km THIS PARAMETER IS NOT SET IN MULPLT DEF BUT IN SEISAN DEF MENTIONED HERE SINCE IMPORTANT FOR SPECTRA 3COMPVELOCITY Velocity used km sec in 3 component azimuth analysis Default is 5 km sec CHANNEL SORTING If set to 1 0 channels and filenames are sorted alphabetically if 0 0 no sorting Default blank is sorting NCHAN PER SCREEN The number of channels to be displayed per screen Default blank is 99 channels NSORT_DISTANCE If not there or zero channels are plotted in the order as they appear in the waveform file If set to a positive number that number is the minimum number of phases to be present in the S file in order for the S file ordering to be used for plotting order if plotted from EEV If not plotted from EEV any positive number will indicate sorting in waveform file header time order 105 Default 0 X_SCREEN SIZE Size of initial X window in of total screen Default 90 RESOLUTIONX and RESOLUTIONHC is the number of points plotted on the screen or laser printer respectively If e g 1000 points are plotted this means that the remaining points are ski
472. window length sec 20 spreading parameter 120 constant v in q qO f v 1 0 minimum signal to noise ratio 2 Noise window in front of signal and length of RMS noise window 15 5 minimum correlation coefficient 0 50 maximum counts to use 64000 number of frequencies 3 frequencies and bands 8 3 12 4 16 6 default stations 1l line and components 2 line 30a5 HYA ASK SUE S ZS Z2S NM Start in s times Normally the coda window starts at twice the S travel time from the origin this factor can be varied and might be chosen differently in special cases Note that the S time is calculated from the P time so a P time must be present This also means that if a Pn is used the coda window will start at 2 times the Sn travel time which might be substantially different from 2 times the Sg travel time Absolute start time If 0 0 above parameter is used However if different from zero an absolute start time relative to the origin time is used for the start of the coda window This might be useful since different start times meaning different lapse times might produce different q values To use this parameter one must be certain to choose it long enough which can be checked with the plots If the absolute start time is smaller than Start in s times multiplied by the s travel time the station will be skipped and a message given Window length This is the coda window length in secs Use at least 20 secs to get stable
473. wise if none of these filters are applied a menu pops up and the user needs to select a phase name to which the amplitude and period readings are associated It is often a good idea to store amplitudes with the nondescript phase E or AMP since it then will remain even if the phase is deleted or changed If an attempt is made to pick amplitude on a trace which is not in nm the reading must be confirmed since SEISAN assumes all amplitudes to be in nm see section on instrument correction If no phase is picked no amplitude is stored The amplitudes are always assumed to come in pairs so if e g 3 amplitude values have been picked and the user tries to pick a phase or quit the program it will appear frozen since the program 87 is still waiting for the next amplitude measurement It is always the last pair of amplitude measurements which are used Amplitudes can be picked on both corrected and uncorrected traces If A is pressed instead of a the amplitude is read and marked automatically Woks in most cases but sometimes two subsequent peaks are not correctly chosen and the amplitude reading has to be done manually Component names when picking phases In the S file the component only has 2 letters while in the waveform file it has 4 letters There must therefore be a unique translation between the two This definition is given in the subroutine componen for in LIB Most common combinations are now defined however if a new one is defined
474. with the final location and additionally stored in monthly files which are only changed when updating UPDATE command see section 6 7 The monthly files called CAT files for catalog are stored separately in the CAT directory and primarily used for quick searching and backup for the single files In addition to the event data there is also a LOG directory in each database to keep a log of the data processing see 6 7 S file database structure The structure for the single file storage is as follows Windows example REA BER Main readings directory all data REA BER 1999 Data for 1999 REA BER_ 1999 01 Data for January 1999 each event in one file On Unix the last line would have been REA BER__ 1999 01 Each event contains original phase readings in the Nordic format Appendix 1 which includes file names of all corresponding waveform files One event is one file Each event has an ID line The ID line contains a unique ID which will follow the event through all COLLECT and SPLIT operations see section 6 5 and 6 6 The ID line also contains status information about the event like last action when it was updated etc The ID number can be fixed which is useful if data is taken out from the database processed on another computer and later put back into the database since otherwise the ID of an event might be changed and the existing file would not be overwritten An example of an S file name is 27 1112 11L 199401
475. with the physical phases and modify their amplitudes The head waves on an interface appear automatically as a by product of the reflected phases as soon as the epicentral distance is larger than critical That means for example that the Pn phase appears automatically on the synthetic seismogram as a by product of the PmP phase In order to synthesize or calculate the arrival time of a Pn or Sn phase you must then specify PmP or SmS see below For a receiver at the free surface the synthetic seismograms must include the free surface reflection coefficient to yield correct amplitude and waveform for the different phases For S phases at epicentral distances larger than critical this includes automatically the SP phase a P phase which propagates horizontally along the free surface and which originates from the critical conversion of S to P at the free surface The critical distance is of the order of the source depth for the Sg phase and its SP phase usually appears as a large arrival between the P and S wave The SP phases are physical but the amplitude of their high frequency part is overestimated with WKBJ If one wishes to suppress them from the synthetic seismograms one may optionally do so With this option the surface reflection coefficient is omitted and the synthetic seismograms contain only the upgoing wavefield that is the wavefield one would get in a borehole after filtering out the downgoing wavefield Let us note that this o
476. word value keyword value etc 6 6 Inserting events into the database SPLIT The program splits up a multiple event S file in Nordic format usually made by COLLECT or NEWEVE or compact file to single files in the database or in the users own directory Type SPLIT to start program and questions are 122 INPUT FILE NAME Give file name COLLECT OUT File name INPUT BASE NAME Indicate which type BER FOR STANDARD DATABASE database THREE LETTER CODE FOR OTHER BASE RETURN FOR SPLIT UP IN LOCAL DIRECTORY BER Choice was standard base OPERATOR ID MAX 4 CHARS Operator id logged in file jh 1988 2 lt 5 L251 385 0 E RECORDS 4 Listing of events split up File already exists options are try to make a file with same I id Ignor leave old event Return Ignore all I Overwrite duplicate O Overwrite all duplicates A Create a new event different ID N Create new events for ALL duplicates O 1988 r ech s2 D RECORDS 4 1988 2 5 19 4 10 0 D RECORDS 3 1992A EIS 2d 1326 Er D RECORDS 55 NUMBER OF LOCAL EVENTS 1 Statistics of events NUMBER OF REGIONAL EVENTS 0 split up NUMBER OF DISTANT EVENTS 2 NUMBER OF EXPLOSIONS 0 NUMBER OF PROB EXPLOSIONS 0 OTAL NUMBER OF EVENTS 3 OTAL NUMBER OF RECORDS 14 FORTRAN STOP In
477. ws SEISAN display Database selection When SEISAN starts up it will start with the database used when it last was closed Other databases can be selected with the Database Selection menu which also displays the current database The choices are 1 One of the 1 5 letters databases already in existence New databases are created as usual with MAKEREA on the prompt line 2 A local database in the current working directory The current working directory is displayed on the bottom of the SEISAN screen To change the working directory use file selection at the top left hand corner 3 An index file The file name is selected on the menu Selected Index File Year and month selection If a 1 3 letter database has been selected the years and months available are seen under year and month buttons and can be selected there Selecting an event Once the database has been selected SEISAN will work much like EEV The event window will show 12 events with the same information as seen in EEV The total number of events for the month is shown above the event selection box The first event in the list will be the current event Any other event on the list can become the active event by clicking on it and it will be highlighted Events outside the window can 53 be displayed using the scroll bar In addition all EEV commands can be used including event selection commands This works exactly as in EEV Write e g 22 anywhere on the screen press
478. y the output file will contain an empty channel where the original data should have been The specifications in the hyp out file determine which traces from the modeled stations are included in the output file If the specification after STATION is only component e g S then all 3 channels are shown If a particular channel is given e g S N then only that channel is shown Only one or 3 channels can be displayed All output traces are given in Z Nand E or Z R and T depending on the parameter file see below The channel names are SH SB and SW for Herrmann Bouchon and WKB respectively Step 5 174 Plot the traces with mulplt This can be done within EEV using the command pw ph or pb for WKBJ Herrmann or Bouchon respectively Since there is no instrument correction it is a good idea to plot both the modeled and observed signals narrow band pass filtered E g for regional events 0 1 1 Hz and for small local events 2 5 Hz depending on sample rate shows an example of the modeling Note The whole modeling process can be done entirely within EEV and it is intended to be done so Since the modeling requires updated distances depths etc when changing model etc it cannot take its input from the location in the S file which only changes when doing an update see UPDATE program So when running from within EEV a location will always be done first to get an updated S file in this case the hyp out file and this is the reason that t
479. ys see below for details 1 An input station and component code is converted to an output station code and component 2 an input channel number is assigned a station and component code The advantage of 1 is that the conversion is independent of the channel number or order however the user must then know the default station and component names generated by the conversion program Default assignment of station code and component This is very much dependent on the conversion program used since some data files have complete information and others very little see description of individual programs in manual or at start of source codes In all cases the conversion program will make both station and component codes based on what is available of information in the input files IT IS THESE CODES THAT are used for input code as described below In order to find out what they are it is easiest to run the conversion program once without a def file and see what codes the program assign Alternatively some of the programs have documentation in the manual Some of the station codes might be instrument serial numbers which are not always known Therefore running a test might be the best way to find out In addition to converting channel codes the def file can also give SEISAN waveform file header information and network code as it appears in the file name If no network code is given the network code will be the station code of the first channel

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

価 CA00ー by CASー。 - カシオ携帯電話オフィシャルWEBサイト  Sika® CarboDur  McCulloch ASB3206 Blower User Manual  Piranha3 P3-S0-16K40-00-R P3-S0-16K20-00-R P3-80-16K40-00-R  Dakota Digital LAT-NR150 User's Manual  un portrait de Laure Pécher  INSTALLATION & USER GUIDE - Dansk  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file